Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutC2022-081 - 4/19/2022 - Approved DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 0 °b�nnwo�Ay"v 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement,for the Project awarded on April 19,2022, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Barcom Construction, Inc. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase II Project Number 20094A ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Ardurra Group, Inc. 801 Navigation Blvd. Suite 300 Corpus Christi,TX,78408 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel Assistant Director of Construction Services 4917 Holly Rd. Bldg.5 Corpus Christi,TX,78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 300 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 330 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223- 1 20094A ONSWTP Rehab Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 2,093,770.00 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-2 20094A ONSWTP Rehab Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 005223-3 20094A ONSWTP Rehab Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 005223-4 20094A ONSWTP Rehab Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. C. List others as necessary. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-5 20094A ONSWTP Rehab Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES d�W.-ed by: CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DocuSigned by: sl� P,111:""k 6/13/2022 '= 6/9/2022 37A77R?41]51947 _ ��EC.�'��131:.� Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E. City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2022-056 AUTHORIZED 4-19-2022 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL DS DocuSigned by: �p ken May«r 6/9/2022 r-ee��a Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR Barcom r1 6/1/2022 ,tW Inc. (Seal Below) By: rula'lf� CtbhAln B7729DB6BA2A4EA... Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Treasurer person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 1146 Heinsohn Rd. Financial Officer Address Corpus Christi TX 78406 City State Zip 361-851-1000 361-851-1717 Phone Fax patrickh@barcomcc.com Entail END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 20094A ONSWTP Rehab Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Report Created On:2/23/22 8:06:40 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A-General $116,420.00 Part B- Demolition $65,325.00 Part C-Structural $141,456.00 Part D-Architectural $1,074,743.00 Part E- Mechanical $143,900.00 Part F- Electrical $244,578.00 Part G- Plumbing $154,192.00 Part H - Fire Alarm $23,045.00 Part I - Fire Sprinkler $26,111.00 Parti-Allowances $104,000.00 Total $2,093,770.00 Part A-General No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Mobilization LS 1 $90,925.00 $90,925.00 A2 Bonds and Insurance LS 1 $25,495.00 $25,495.00 Subtotal:$116,420.00 Part B-Demolition No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 Demolition LS 1 $65,325.00 $65,325.00 Subtotal: $65,325.00 Part C-Structural No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 Structural Concrete LS 1 $17,500.00 $17,500.00 C2 Structural Stairs LS 1 $28,450.00 $28,450.00 C3 Structural Steel Framing at Openings LS 1 $95,506.00 $95,506.00 Subtotal:$141,456.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Report Created On:2/23/22 8:06:40 PM Part D-Architectural No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 Architectural Wall Framing&Drywall LS 1 $352,875.00 $352,875.00 D2 Architectural Finishes LS 1 $221,291.00 $221,291.00 D3 Architectural Insulation LS 1 $55,769.00 $55,769.00 D4 Architectural Doors LS 1 $53,944.00 $53,944.00 D5 Architectural Windows(Interior LS 1 $38,561.00 $38,561.00 Aluminum Frames) D6 Architectural Windows(Exterior- LS 1 $199,400.00 $199,400.00 Impact) D7 Architectural Millwork LS 1 $18,943.00 $18,943.00 D8 Architectural Exterior Metal Wall Panels LS 1 $133,960.00 $133,960.00 Subtotal: $1,074,743.00 Part E-Mechanical No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 Mechanical Rough-in LS 1 $71,450.00 $71,450.00 E2 Mechanical Equipment LS 1 $21,735.00 $21,735.00 E3 Mechanical Trim LS 1 $50,715.00 $50,715.00 Subtotal:$143,900.00 Part F-Electrical No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 Electrical Rough-in LS 1 $130,078.00 $130,078.00 F2 Electrical Gear LS 1 $62,500.00 $62,500.00 F3 Electrical Trim LS 1 $52,000.00 $52,000.00 Subtotal:$244,578.00 Part G-Plumbing No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 Plumbing Rough-in LS 1 $76,096.00 $76,096.00 G2 Plumbing Top-out LS 1 $68,487.00 $68,487.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Report Created On:2/23/22 8:06:40 PM G3 Plumbing Fixtures LS 1 $9,609.00 $9,609.00 Subtotal:$154,192.00 Part H-Fire Alarm No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 Fire Alarm LS 1 $23,045.00 $23,045.00 Subtotal: $23,045.00 Part I-Fire Sprinkler No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 Fire Sprinkler LS 1 $26,111.00 $26,111.00 Subtotal: $26,111.00 Part J-Allowances No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 Unforeseen Conditions AL 1 $100,000.00 $100,000.00 J2 Concrete Testing AL 1 $4,000.00 $4,000.00 Subtotal:$104,000.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 l ® DATE'MMIDDIYYYY) A��o CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 04/27/2022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Ashley Smalley NAME: K&S Insurance Agency PHONE (872)771-4071 plc,No: (972)771-4695 AIC No Ext 2255 Ridge Road,Ste.333 E-MAIL asmalley@kandsins.com ADDRESS: P.O.BOX 277 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# Rockwall TX 75087 INSURERA: Continental Insurance Company 35289 INSURED INSURER B: Texas Mutual Insurance Co. 22945 Barcom Construction,Inc INSURER C: Hanover Insurance Company 22292 1146 Heinsohn Rd INSURER D: American Zurich Insurance Company INSURER E: Corpus Christi TX 78406 INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 21/22 Master REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMEDABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR AUUL15Ut5K POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER MMIDD/YYYY MM/DDIYYYY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED 100,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES Ea occurrence $ MED EXP(Any one person) $ 15,000 A 7015627541 09/12/2021 09/12/2022 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 POLICY ® PRO ❑LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000 JECT OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,000 Ea accident ANYAUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ A OWNED SCHEDULED 7015627555 09/12/2021 09/12/2022 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident UMBRELLA LIAB x OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,000 A EXCESS LIAR CLAIMS-MADE 7015627572 09/12/2021 09/12/2022 AGGREGATE $ 10,000,000 DED IX RETENTION$ 10,000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY STATUTE ER v/N 1,000,000 B ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE NIA 0002020407 09/12/2021 09/1212022 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 If yes,describe under 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ Aggregate 10,000,000 Builder's Risk C/D IHD H820420 00/EC78621928 11/15/2021 11/15/2022 Aggregate 7,500,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) (Job#:20094A Job Type:ONSWrP Filter Building Rehab-Phase 2] SEE ATTACHED OVERFLOW PAGE CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF,NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of Corpus Christi Contracts&Procurement Department ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 1201 Leopard Street AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78469-9277 �� @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC#: ACORO® ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page of AGENCY NAMED INSURED K&S Insurance Agency Barcom Construction,Inc POLICY NUMBER CARRIER 7-1C CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: Certificate of Liability Insurance:Notes The General Liability and Auto Liability policies include a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. The endorsement's wording includes both the insured's Ongoing and Completed Operations. The General Liability and Auto Liability policies contain an endorsement with"Primary and Noncontributory"wording. The General Liabiity,Auto Liability and Workers Compensation policies include blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsements that provide this feature,only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires it. The General Liability,Auto Liability and Excess/Umbrella policies contain a 30 Day Notice of Cancellation endorsement. The Excess/Umbrella policy follows form. ACORD 101 (2008/01) © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Policy Holder Notice - Countrywide It is understood and agreed that: If the Named Insured has agreed under written contract to provide notice of cancellation to a party to whom the Agent of Record has issued a Certificate of Insurance, and if the Insurer cancels a policy term described on that Certificate of Insurance for any reason other than nonpayment of premium,then notice of cancellation will be provided to such Certificate holders at least 30 days in advance of the date cancellation is effective. If notice is mailed, then proof of mailing to the last known mailing address of the Certificate holder on file with the Agent of Record will be sufficient to prove notice. Any failure by the Insurer to notify such persons or organizations will not extend or invalidate such cancellation, or impose any liability or obligation upon the Insurer or the Agent of Record. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. 0 0 a r N O 4) O n v 0 0 0 N O O N CNA75014XX (1-15) Policy No: 7015627541 Page 1 of 1 Endorsement No: 1 The Continental Insurance Co. Effective Date: 09/12/2021 Insured Name: BARCOM CONSTRUCTION, INC Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA Paramount Excess and Umbrella Liability Policyholder Notice 1 ' POLICY HOLDERNOTICE ' COUNTRYWIDE It is understood and agreed that: If the Named Insured has agreed under written contract to provide notice of cancellation to a party to whom the Agent of Record has issued a Certificate of Insurance, and if the Insurer cancels a policy term described on that Certificate of Insurance for any reason other than nonpayment of premium, then notice of cancellation will be provided to such Certificate holders at least 30 days in advance of the date cancellation is effective. If notice is mailed, then proof of mailing to the last known mailing address of the Certificate holder on file with the Agent of Record will be sufficient to prove notice. Any failure by the Insurer to notify such persons or organizations will not extend or invalidate such cancellation, or impose any liability or obligation upon the Insurer or the Agent of Record. Form No: CNA75014XX(0 1-2015) Policy No:CUE 7015627572 Policyholder Notice Page: 1 of 1 Policy Effective Date:09/12/2021 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Policy Page: 3 of 55 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA Business Auto Policy Policy Endorsement ' NOTICE OF • TO CERTIFICATEHOLDERS It is understood and agreed that: If you have agreed under written contract to provide notice of cancellation to a party to whom the Agent of Record has issued a Certificate of Insurance, and if we cancel a policy term described on that Certificate of Insurance for any reason other than nonpayment of premium, then notice of cancellation will be provided to such Certificateholders at least 30 days in advance of the date cancellation is effective. If notice is mailed, then proof of mailing to the last known mailing address of the Certificateholder on file with the Agent of Record will be sufficient to prove notice. Any failure by us to notify such persons or organizations will not extend or invalidate such cancellation, or impose any liability or obligation upon us or the Agent of Record. All other terms and conditions of the policy remain unchanged This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the Policy Effective date of said policy at the hour stated in said policy, unless another effective date (the Endorsement Effective Date) is shown below, and expires concurrently with said policy. Form No: CNA68021 XX (02-2013) Policy No:BUA 7015627555 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Policy Effective Date: 09/12/2021 Endorsement No: 12; Page: 1 of 1 Policy Page: 62 of 104 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement It is understood and agreed that this endorsement amends the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART as follows. If any other endorsement attached to this policy amends any provision also amended by this endorsement, then that other endorsement controls with respect to such provision, and the changes made by this endorsement with respect to such provision do not apply. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Additional Insureds 2. Additional Insured-Primary And Non-Contributory To Additional insured's Insurance 3. Bodily Injury—Expanded Definition 4. Broad Knowledge of Occurrence/Notice of Occurrence 5. Broad Named Insured 6. Broadened Liability Coverage For Damage To Your Product And Your Work 7. Contractual Liability-Railroads 8. Electronic Data Liability 9. Estates, Legal Representatives and Spouses 10. Expected Or Intended Injury—Exception for Reasonable Force 11. General Aggregate Limits of Insurance—Per Project 12. In Rem Actions 13. Incidental Health Care Malpractice Coverage 14. Joint Ventures/Partnership/Limited Liability Companies 15. Legal Liability — Damage To Premises / Alienated Premises / Property In The Named Insured's Care, Custody or Control 16. Liquor Liability 17. Medical Payments N O M 18. Non-owned Aircraft Coverage 0 19. Non-owned Watercraft 0 20. Personal And Advertising Injury—Discrimination or Humiliation 0 " 21. Personal And Advertising Injury-Contractual Liability 22. Property Damage -Elevators 23. Supplementary Payments 24. Unintentional Failure To Disclose Hazards 25. Waiver of Subrogation—Blanket 26. Wrap-Up Extension: OCIP CCIP,or Consolidated (Wrap-Up) Insurance Programs CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 1 o f 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 OVA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement 1. ADDITIONAL INSUREDS a. WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization described in paragraphs A. through H. below whom a Named Insured is required to add as an additional insured on this Coverage Part under a written contract or written agreement, provided such contract or agreement: (1) is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this Coverage Part; and (2) was executed prior to: (a) the bodily injury or property damage; or (b) the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury, for which such additional insured seeks coverage. b. However, subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such additional insured with: (1) a higher limit of insurance than required by such contract or agreement;or (2) coverage broader than required by such contract or agreement, and in no event broader than that described by the applicable paragraph A.through H. below. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply only to the extent permissible by law. A. Controlling Interest Any person or organization with a controlling interest in a Named Insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of: 1. such person or organization's financial control of a Named Insured;or 2. premises such person or organization owns, maintains or controls while a Named Insured leases or occupies such premises; provided that the coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. B. Co-owner of Insured Premises A co-owner of a premises co-owned by a Named Insured and covered under this insurance but only with respect to such co-owner's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury as co-owner of such premises. C. Lessor of Equipment Any person or organization from whom a Named Insured leases equipment, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused, in whole or in part, by the Named Insured's maintenance, operation or use of such equipment, provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury, property damage or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury takes place prior to the termination of such lease. D. Lessor of Land Any person or organization from whom a Named Insured leases land but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such land, provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury, property damage or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 2 of 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. E. Lessor of Premises An owner or lessor of premises leased to the Named Insured, or such owner or lessor's real estate manager, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of such part of the premises leased to the Named Insured, and provided that the occurrence giving rise to such bodily injury or property damage,or the offense giving rise to such personal and advertising injury, takes place prior to the termination of such lease. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. F. Mortgagee,Assignee or Receiver A mortgagee, assignee or receiver of premises but only with respect to such mortgagee, assignee or receiver's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of the Named Insured's ownership, maintenance, or use of a premises by a Named Insured. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to structural alterations, new construction or demolition operations performed by, on behalf of, or for such additional insured. G. State or Governmental Agency or Subdivision or Political Subdivisions—Permits A state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision that has issued a permit or authorization but only with respect to such state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of: 1. the following hazards in connection with premises a Named Insured owns, rents, or controls and to which this insurance applies: a. the existence, maintenance, repair, construction, erection, or removal of advertising signs, awnings, canopies, cellar entrances, coal holes, driveways, manholes, marquees, hoistaway openings, sidewalk vaults, street banners, or decorations and similar exposures; or b. the construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or M W c. the ownership, maintenance or use of any elevators covered by this insurance; or 0 2. the permitted or authorized operations performed by a Named Insured or on a Named Insured's behalf. 0 The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to: N a. Bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of operations performed for the state or governmental agency or subdivision or political subdivision;or b. Bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. With respect to this provision's requirement that additional insured status must be requested under a written contract or agreement, the Insurer will treat as a written contract any governmental permit that requires the Named Insured to add the governmental entity as an additional insured. H. Trade Show Event Lessor 1. With respect to a Named Insured's participation in a trade show event as an exhibitor, presenter or displayer, any person or organization whom the Named Insured is required to include as an additional insured, but only with respect to such person or organization's liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused by: CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 3 o f 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement a. the Named Insured's acts or omissions; or b. the acts or omissions of those acting on the Named Insured's behalf, in the performance of the Named Insured's ongoing operations at the trade show event premises during the trade show event. 2. The coverage granted by this paragraph does not apply to bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard. 2. ADDITIONAL INSURED-PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY TO ADDITIONAL INSURED'S INSURANCE The Other Insurance Condition in the COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS Section is amended to add the following paragraph: If the Named Insured has agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that this insurance is primary and non- contributory relative to an additional insured's own insurance, then this insurance is primary, and the Insurer will not seek contribution from that other insurance. For the purpose of this Provision 2., the additional insured's own insurance means insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. Otherwise, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere in this Condition, the insurance provided to such person or organization is excess of any other insurance available to such person or organization. 3. BODILY INJURY—EXPANDED DEFINITION Under DEFINITIONS,the definition of bodily injury is deleted and replaced by the following: Bodily injury means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death, humiliation, shock, mental anguish or mental injury sustained by that person at any time which results as a consequence of the physical injury, sickness or disease. 4. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE/NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE Under CONDITIONS,the condition entitled Duties in The Event of Occurrence, Offense,Claim or Suit is amended to add the following provisions: A. BROAD KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE The Named Insured must give the Insurer or the Insurer's authorized representative notice of an occurrence, offense or claim only when the occurrence, offense or claim is known to a natural person Named Insured, to a partner, executive officer, manager or member of a Named Insured, or an employee designated by any of the above to give such notice. B. NOTICE OF OCCURRENCE The Named Insured's rights under this Coverage Part will not be prejudiced if the Named Insured fails to give the Insurer notice of an occurrence, offense or claim and that failure is solely due to the Named Insured's reasonable belief that the bodily injury or property damage is not covered under this Coverage Part. However, the Named Insured shall give written notice of such occurrence, offense or claim to the Insurer as soon as the Named Insured is aware that this insurance may apply to such occurrence, offense or claim. 5. BROAD NAMED INSURED WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to delete its Paragraph 3. in its entirety and replace it with the following: 3. Pursuant to the limitations described in Paragraph 4. below, any organization in which a Named Insured has management control: a. on the effective date of this Coverage Part; or CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 4 of 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement b. by reason of a Named Insured creating or acquiring the organization during the policy period, qualifies as a Named Insured, provided that there is no other similar liability insurance, whether primary, contributory, excess, contingent or otherwise,which provides coverage to such organization, or which would have provided coverage but for the exhaustion of its limit, and without regard to whether its coverage is broader or narrower than that provided by this insurance. But this BROAD NAMED INSURED provision does not apply to: (a) any partnership, limited liability company or joint venture; or (b) any organization for which coverage is excluded by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. For the purpose of this provision, management control means: A. owning interests representing more than 50% of the voting, appointment or designation power for the selection of a majority of the Board of Directors of a corporation; or B. having the right, pursuant to a written trust agreement, to protect, control the use of, encumber or transfer or sell property held by a trust. 4. With respect to organizations which qualify as Named Insureds by virtue of Paragraph 3. above, this insurance does not apply to: a. bodily injury or property damage that first occurred prior to the date of management control, or that first occurs after management control ceases; nor b. personal or advertising injury caused by an offense that first occurred prior to the date of management control or that first occurs after management control ceases. 5. The insurance provided by this Coverage Part applies to Named Insureds when trading under their own names or under such other trading names or doing-business-as names (dba)as any Named Insured should choose to employ. 6. BROADENED LIABILITY COVERAGE FOR DAMAGE TO YOUR PRODUCT AND YOUR WORK A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusions k.and I.and replace them with the following: N O This insurance does not apply to: a k. Damage to Your Product 0 0 Property damage to your product arising out of it, or any part of it except when caused by or resulting from: N (1) fire; (2) smoke; . (3) collapse; or (4) explosion. I. Damage to Your Work Property damage to your work arising out of it, or any part of it and included in the products-completed operations hazard. This exclusion does not apply: (1) If the damaged work, or the work out of which the damage arises, was performed on the Named Insured's behalf by a subcontractor; or CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 5 of 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement (2) If the cause of loss to the damaged work arises as a result of: (a) fire; (b) smoke; (c) collapse; or (d) explosion. B. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $100,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for the sum of damages arising out of any one occurrence because of property damage to your product and your work that is caused by fire, smoke, collapse or explosion and is included within the product-completed operations hazard. This sublimit does not apply to property damage to your work if the damaged work, or the work out of which the damage arises,was performed on the Named Insured's behalf by a subcontractor. C. This Broadened Liability Coverage For Damage To Your Product And Your Work Provision does not apply if an endorsement of the same name is attached to this policy. 7. CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY—RAILROADS With respect to operations performed within 50 feet of railroad property, the definition of insured contract is replaced by the following: Insured Contract means: a. A contract for a lease of premises. However, that portion of the contract for a lease of premises that indemnifies any person or organization for damage by fire to premises while rented to a Named Insured or temporarily occupied by a Named Insured with permission of the owner is not an insured contract; b. A sidetrack agreement; c. Any easement or license agreement; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; e. An elevator maintenance agreement; If. That part of any other contract or agreement pertaining to the Named Insured's business (including an indemnification of a municipality in connection with work performed for a municipality) under which the Named Insured assumes the tort liability of another party to pay for bodily injury or property damage to a third person or organization. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any contract or agreement. Paragraph f.does not include that part of any contract or agreement: (1) That indemnifies an architect, engineer or surveyor for injury or damage arising out of: (a) Preparing, approving or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; or (b) Giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage; (2) Under which the Insured, if an architect, engineer or surveyor, assumes liability for an injury or damage arising out of the insured's rendering or failure to render professional services, including those listed in (1) above and supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 8. ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 6 o f 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusion p. Electronic Data and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: p. Access Or Disclosure Of Confidential Or Personal Information And Data-related Liability Damages arising out of: (1) any access to or disclosure of any person's or organization's confidential or personal information, including patents, trade secrets, processing methods, customer lists, financial information, credit card information, health information or any other type of nonpublic information; or (2) the loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to manipulate electronic data that does not result from physical injury to tangible property. However, unless Paragraph (1) above applies, this exclusion does not apply to damages because of bodily injury. This exclusion applies even if damages are claimed for notification costs, credit monitoring expenses, forensic expenses, public relation expenses or any other loss, cost or expense incurred by the Named Insured or others arising out of that which is described in Paragraph (1)or(2)above. B. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $100,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for all damages arising out of any one occurrence because of property damage that results from physical injury to tangible property and arises out of electronic data. C. The following definition is added to DEFINITIONS: Electronic data means information, facts or programs stored as or on, created or used on, or transmitted to or from computer software (including systems and applications software), hard or floppy disks, CD-ROMS, tapes, drives, cells, data processing devices or any other media which are used with electronically controlled equipment. D. For the purpose of the coverage provided by this ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY Provision, the definition of property damage in DEFINITIONS is replaced by the following: a Property damage means: a. Physical injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use 0 shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; 0 0 b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically injured.All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the occurrence that caused it; or c. Loss of, loss of use of, damage to, corruption of, inability to access, or inability to properly manipulate electronic data, resulting from physical injury to tangible property. All such loss of electronic data shall be deemed to occur at the time of the occurrence that caused it. For the purposes of this insurance, electronic data is not tangible property. E. If Electronic Data Liability is provided at a higher limit by another endorsement attached to this policy, then the $100,000 limit provided by this ELECTRONIC DATA LIABILITY Provision is part of, and not in addition to, that higher limit. 9. ESTATES, LEGAL REPRESENTATIVES,AND SPOUSES The estates, heirs, legal representatives and spouses of any natural person Insured shall also be insured under this policy; provided, however, coverage is afforded to such estates, heirs, legal representatives, and spouses only for CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 7 of 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement claims arising solely out of their capacity or status as such and, in the case of a spouse, where such claim seeks damages from marital community property, jointly held property or property transferred from such natural person Insured to such spouse. No coverage is provided for any act, error or omission of an estate, heir, legal representative, or spouse outside the scope of such person's capacity or status as such, provided however that the spouse of a natural person Named Insured and the spouses of members or partners of joint venture or partnership Named Insureds are Insureds with respect to such spouses' acts, errors or omissions in the conduct of the Named Insured's business. 10. EXPECTED OR INTENDED INJURY—EXCEPTION FOR REASONABLE FORCE Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Expected or Intended Injury and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: Expected or Intended Injury Bodily injury or property damage expected or intended from the standpoint of the Insured. This exclusion does not apply to bodily injury or property damage resulting from the use of reasonable force to protect persons or property. 11. GENERAL AGGREGATE LIMITS OF INSURANCE-PER PROJECT A. For each construction project away from premises the Named Insured owns or rents, a separate Construction Project General Aggregate Limit, equal to the amount of the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, is the most the Insurer will pay for the sum of: 1. All damages under Coverage A, except damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard; and 2. All medical expenses under Coverage C, that arise from occurrences or accidents which can be attributed solely to ongoing operations at that construction project. Such payments shall not reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, nor the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit of any other construction project. B. All: 1. Damages under Coverage B, regardless of the number of locations or construction projects involved; 2. Damages under Coverage A, caused by occurrences which cannot be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a single construction project, except damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard; and 3. Medical expenses under Coverage C caused by accidents which cannot be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a single construction project, will reduce the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations. No Al Coverage for Completed ops-Seperate Endorsement C. The limits shown in the Declarations for Each Occurrence, for Damage To Premises Rented To You and for Medical Expense continue to apply, but will be subject to either the Construction Project General Aggregate Limit or the General Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, depending on whether the occurrence can be attributed solely to ongoing operations at a particular construction project. D. When coverage for liability arising out of the products-completed operations hazard is provided, any payments for damages because of bodily injury or property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard will reduce the Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit shown in the Declarations, regardless of the number of projects involved. CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 8 of 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement E. If a single construction project away from premises owned by or rented to the Insured has been abandoned and then restarted, or if the authorized contracting parties deviate from plans, blueprints, designs, specifications or timetables, the project will still be deemed to be the same construction project. F. The provisions of LIMITS OF INSURANCE not otherwise modified by this endorsement shall continue to apply as stipulated. 12. IN REM ACTIONS A quasi in rem action against any vessel owned or operated by or for the Named Insured, or chartered by or for the Named Insured, will be treated in the same manner as though the action were in personam against the Named Insured. 13. INCIDENTAL HEALTH CARE MALPRACTICE COVERAGE Solely with respect to bodily injury that arises out of a health care incident: A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Insuring Agreement is amended to replace Paragraphs 1.b.(1)and 1.b.(2)with the following: b. This insurance applies to bodily injury provided that the professional health care services are incidental to the Named Insured's primary business purpose, and only if: (1) such bodily injury is caused by an occurrence that takes place in the coverage territory. (2) the bodily injury first occurs during the policy period. All bodily injury arising from an occurrence will be deemed to have occurred at the time of the first act, error, or omission that is part of the occurrence; and B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to: i. add the following to the Employers Liability exclusion: This exclusion applies only if the bodily injury arising from a health care incident is covered by other liability insurance available to the Insured (or which would have been available but for exhaustion of its limits). ii. delete the exclusion entitled Contractual Liability and replace it with the following: 0 This insurance does not apply to: m 0 0 Contractual Liability 0 0 the Insured's actual or alleged liability under any oral or written contract or agreement, including but not limited to express warranties or guarantees. iii. add the following additional exclusions: This insurance does not apply to: Discrimination any actual or alleged discrimination, humiliation or harassment, including but not limited to claims based on an individual's race, creed, color, age, gender, national origin, religion, disability, marital status or sexual orientation. Dishonesty or Crime Any actual or alleged dishonest, criminal or malicious act, error or omission. Medicare/Medicaid Fraud CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 9 o f 1 7 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement any actual or alleged violation of law with respect to Medicare, Medicaid, Tricare or any similar federal, state or local governmental program. Services Excluded by Endorsement Any health care incident for which coverage is excluded by endorsement. C. DEFINITIONS is amended to: I. add the following definitions: Health care incident means an act, error or omission by the Named Insured's employees or volunteer workers in the rendering of: a. professional health care services on behalf of the Named Insured or b. Good Samaritan services rendered in an emergency and for which no payment is demanded or received. Professional health care services means any health care services or the related furnishing of food, beverages, medical supplies or appliances by the following providers in their capacity as such but solely to the extent they are duly licensed as required: a. Physician; b. Nurse; c. Nurse practitioner; d. Emergency medical technician; e. Paramedic; f. Dentist; g. Physical therapist; h. Psychologist; i. Speech therapist; j. Other allied health professional; or Professional health care services does not include any services rendered in connection with human clinical trials or product testing. ii. delete the definition of occurrence and replace it with the following: Occurrence means a health care incident. All acts, errors or omissions that are logically connected by any common fact, circumstance, situation, transaction, event, advice or decision will be considered to constitute a single occurrence; iii. amend the definition of Insured to: a. add the following: the Named Insured's employees are Insureds with respect to: (1) bodily injury to a co-employee while in the course of the co-employee's employment by the Named Insured or while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; and CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 10 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement (2) bodily injury to a volunteer worker while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; when such bodily injury arises out of a health care incident. the Named Insured's volunteer workers are Insureds with respect to: (1) bodily injury to a co-volunteer worker while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; and (2) bodily injury to an employee while in the course of the employee's employment by the Named Insured or while performing duties related to the conduct of the Named Insured's business; when such bodily injury arises out of a health care incident. b. delete Subparagraphs(a), (b), (c)and (d)of Paragraph 2.a.(1)of WHO IS AN INSURED. D. The Other Insurance condition is amended to delete Paragraph b.(1) in its entirety and replace it with the following: Other Insurance b. Excess Insurance (1) To the extent this insurance applies, it is excess over any other insurance, self insurance or risk transfer instrument, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis, except for insurance purchased specifically by the Named Insured to be excess of this coverage. 14. JOINT VENTURES/PARTNERSHIP/LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANIES WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to delete its last paragraph and replace it with the following: No person or organization is an Insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership,joint venture or limited liability company that is not shown as a Named Insured in the Declarations, except that if the Named Insured was a joint venturer, partner, or member of a limited liability company and such joint venture, partnership or limited liability company terminated prior to or during the policy period, such Named Insured is an Insured with respect to its interest in such joint venture, partnership or limited liability company but only to the extent that: a. any offense giving rise to personal and advertising injury occurred prior to such termination date, and the personal and advertising injury arising out of such offense first occurred after such termination date; M b. the bodily injury or property damage first occurred after such termination date; and c. there is no other valid and collectible insurance purchased specifically to insure the partnership, joint venture or limited liability company; and If the joint venture, partnership or limited liability company is or was insured under a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program,then such insurance will always be considered valid and collectible for the purpose of paragraph c. above. But this provision will not serve to exclude bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury that would otherwise be covered under the Contractors General Liability Extension Endorsement provision entitled WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS. Please see that provision for the definition of consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program. 15. LEGAL LIABILITY — DAMAGE TO PREMISES / ALIENATED PREMISES / PROPERTY IN THE NAMED INSURED'S CARE, CUSTODY OR CONTROL A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete exclusion j. Damage to Property in its entirety and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 11 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement j. Damage to Property Property damage to: (1) Property the Named Insured owns, rents, or occupies, including any costs or expenses incurred by you, or any other person, organization or entity, for repair, replacement, enhancement, restoration or maintenance of such property for any reason, including prevention of injury to a person or damage to another's property; (2) Premises the Named Insured sells, gives away or abandons, if the property damage arises out of any part of those premises; (3) Property loaned to the Named Insured; (4) Personal property in the care, custody or control of the Insured; (5) That particular part of real property on which the Named Insured or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly on the Named Insured's behalf are performing operations, if the property damage arises out of those operations; or (6) That particular part of any property that must be restored, repaired or replaced because your work was incorrectly performed on it. Paragraphs (1), (3) and (4) of this exclusion do not apply to property damage (other than damage by fire)to premises rented to the Named Insured or temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner, nor to the contents of premises rented to the Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days.A separate limit of insurance applies to Damage To Premises Rented To You as described in LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Paragraph (2)of this exclusion does not apply if the premises are your work. Paragraphs (3), (4), (5) and (6) of this exclusion do not apply to liability assumed under a sidetrack agreement. Paragraph (6) of this exclusion does not apply to property damage included in the products-completed operations hazard. Paragraphs(3) and (4)of this exclusion do not apply to property damage to: i. tools,or equipment the Named Insured borrows from others, nor ii. other personal property of others in the Named Insured's care,custody or control while being used in the Named Insured's operations away from any Named Insured's premises. However,the coverage granted by this exception to Paragraphs(3)and(4)does not apply to: a. property at a job site awaiting or during such property's installation,fabrication, or erection; b. property that is mobile equipment leased by an Insured; c. property that is an auto, aircraft or watercraft; d. property in transit; or e. any portion of property damage for which the Insured has available other valid and collectible insurance, or would have such insurance but for exhaustion of its limits, or but for application of one of its exclusions. A separate limit of insurance and deductible apply to such property of others. See LIMITS OF INSURANCE as amended below. CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 12 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete its last paragraph and replace it with the following: Exclusions c. through n. do not apply to damage by fire to premises while rented to a Named Insured or temporarily occupied by a Named Insured with permission of the owner, nor to damage to the contents of premises rented to a Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. A separate limit of insurance applies to this coverage as described in LIMITS OF INSURANCE. C. The following paragraph is added to LIMITS OF INSURANCE: Subject to 5. above, $25,000 is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for damages arising out of any one occurrence because of the sum of all property damage to borrowed tools or equipment, and to other personal property of others in the Named Insured's care, custody or control, while being used in the Named Insured's operations away from any Named Insured's premises. The Insurer's obligation to pay such property damage does not apply until the amount of such property damage exceeds $1,000. The Insurer has the right but not the duty to pay any portion of this $1,000 in order to effect settlement. If the Insurer exercises that right, the Named Insured will promptly reimburse the Insurer for any such amount. D. Paragraph 6., Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit, of LIMITS OF INSURANCE is deleted and replaced by the following: 6. Subject to Paragraph 5. above, (the Each Occurrence Limit), the Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage A for damages because of property damage to any one premises while rented to the Named Insured or temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner, including contents of such premises rented to the Named Insured for a period of 7 or fewer consecutive days. The Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit is the greater of: a. $500,000; or b. The Damage To Premises Rented To You Limit shown in the Declarations. E. Paragraph 4.b.(1)(a)(ii)of the Other Insurance Condition is deleted and replaced by the following: (ii) That is property insurance for premises rented to the Named Insured, for premises temporarily occupied by the Named Insured with the permission of the owner; or for personal property of others in the Named Insured's care, custody or control; 16. LIQUOR LIABILITY 0 Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled 0 Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Liquor Liability. 0 0 This LIQUOR LIABILITY provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an N additional insured on this Coverage Part. 17. MEDICAL PAYMENTS A. LIMITS OF INSURANCE is amended to delete Paragraph 7. (the Medical Expense Limit) and replace it with the following: 7. Subject to Paragraph 5. above (the Each Occurrence Limit), the Medical Expense Limit is the most the Insurer will pay under Coverage C — Medical Payments for all medical expenses because of bodily injury sustained by any one person. The Medical Expense Limit is the greater of: (1) $15,000 unless a different amount is shown here: $N,NNN,NNN,NNN; or (2) the amount shown in the Declarations for Medical Expense Limit. CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 13 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Under COVERAGES, the Insuring Agreement of Coverage C — Medical Payments is amended to replace Paragraph 1.a.(3)(b)with the following: (b) The expenses are incurred and reported to the Insurer within three years of the date of the accident; and 18. NON-OWNED AIRCRAFT Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended as follows: The exclusion entitled Aircraft,Auto or Watercraft is amended to add the following: This exclusion does not apply to an aircraft not owned by any Named Insured, provided that: 1. the pilot in command holds a currently effective certificate issued by the duly constituted authority of the United States of America or Canada, designating that person as a commercial or airline transport pilot; 2. the aircraft is rented with a trained, paid crew to the Named Insured; and 3. the aircraft is not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. 19. NON-OWNED WATERCRAFT Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete subparagraph (2) of the exclusion entitled Aircraft, Auto or Watercraft, and replace it with the following. This exclusion does not apply to: (2) a watercraft that is not owned by any Named Insured, provided the watercraft is: (a) less than 75 feet long; and (b) not being used to carry persons or property for a charge. 20. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY—DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION A. Under DEFINITIONS,the definition of personal and advertising injury is amended to add the following tort: Discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person. B. Under COVERAGES, Coverage B — Personal and Advertising Injury Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to: 1. delete the Exclusion entitled Knowing Violation Of Rights Of Another and replace it with the following: This insurance does not apply to: Knowing Violation of Rights of Another Personal and advertising injury caused by or at the direction of the Insured with the knowledge that the act would violate the rights of another and would inflict personal and advertising injury. This exclusion shall not apply to discrimination or humiliation that results in injury to the feelings or reputation of a natural person, but only if such discrimination or humiliation is not done intentionally by or at the direction of: (a) the Named Insured; or (b) any executive officer, director, stockholder, partner, member or manager (if the Named Insured is a limited liability company)of the Named Insured. 2. add the following exclusions: CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 14 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement This insurance does not apply to: Employment Related Discrimination Discrimination or humiliation directly or indirectly related to the employment, prospective employment, past employment or termination of employment of any person by any Insured. Premises Related Discrimination discrimination or humiliation arising out of the sale, rental, lease or sub-lease or prospective sale, rental, lease or sub-lease of any room, dwelling or premises by or at the direction of any Insured. Notwithstanding the above, there is no coverage for fines or penalties levied or imposed by a governmental entity because of discrimination. The coverage provided by this PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY —DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION Provision does not apply to any person or organization whose status as an Insured derives solely from Provision 1.ADDITIONAL INSURED of this endorsement; or attachment of an additional insured endorsement to this Coverage Part. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY—DISCRIMINATION OR HUMILIATION Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 21. PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY-CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage B —Personal and Advertising Injury Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended to delete the exclusion entitled Contractual Liability. B. Solely for the purpose of the coverage provided by this PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY provision, the following changes are made to the section entitled SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B: 1. Paragraph 2.d. is replaced by the following: d. The allegations in the suit and the information the Insurer knows about the offense alleged in such suit are such that no conflict appears to exist between the interests of the Insured and the interests of the 0 indemnitee; r 2. The first unnumbered paragraph beneath Paragraph 2.f.(2)(b) is deleted and replaced by the following: 0 So long as the above conditions are met, attorneys fees incurred by the Insurer in the defense of that indemnitee, necessary litigation expenses incurred by the Insurer,and necessary litigation expenses incurred by the indemnitee at the Insurer's request will be paid as defense costs. Such payments will not be deemed to be damages for personal and advertising injury and will not reduce the limits of insurance. C. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Provision does not apply if Coverage B —Personal and Advertising Injury Liability is excluded by another endorsement attached to this Coverage Part. This PERSONAL AND ADVERTISING INJURY - CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. 22. PROPERTY DAMAGE—ELEVATORS A. Under COVERAGES, Coverage A — Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, the paragraph entitled Exclusions is amended such that the Damage to Your Product Exclusion and subparagraphs (3), (4) and (6) of the Damage to Property Exclusion do not apply to property damage that results from the use of elevators. CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 15 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement B. Solely for the purpose of the coverage provided by this PROPERTY DAMAGE — ELEVATORS Provision, the Other Insurance conditions is amended to add the following paragraph: This insurance is excess over any of the other insurance, whether primary, excess, contingent or on any other basis that is Property insurance covering property of others damaged from the use of elevators. 23. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS The section entitled SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS—COVERAGES A AND B is amended as follows: A. Paragraph 1.b. is amended to delete the $250 limit shown for the cost of bail bonds and replace it with a $5,000. limit; and B. Paragraph 1.d. is amended to delete the limit of $250 shown for daily loss of earnings and replace it with a $1,000. limit. 24. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS If the Named Insured unintentionally fails to disclose all existing hazards at the inception date of the Named Insured's Coverage Part, the Insurer will not deny coverage under this Coverage Part because of such failure. 25. WAIVER OF SUBROGATION -BLANKET Under CONDITIONS, the condition entitled Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us is amended to add the following: The Insurer waives any right of recovery the Insurer may have against any person or organization because of payments the Insurer makes for injury or damage arising out of: 1. the Named Insured's ongoing operations; or 2. your work included in the products-completed operations hazard. However, this waiver applies only when the Named Insured has agreed in writing to waive such rights of recovery in a written contract or written agreement, and only if such contract or agreement: 1. is in effect or becomes effective during the term of this Coverage Part;and 2. was executed prior to the bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury giving rise to the claim. 26. WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED(WRAP-UP)INSURANCE PROGRAMS Note: The following provision does not apply to any public construction project in the state of Oklahoma, nor to any construction project in the state of Alaska, that is not permitted to be insured under a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program by applicable state statute or regulation. If the endorsement EXCLUSION — CONSTRUCTION WRAP-UP is attached to this policy, or another exclusionary endorsement pertaining to Owner Controlled Insurance Programs (O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled Insurance Programs (C.C.I.P.) is attached, then the following changes apply: A. The following wording is added to the above-referenced endorsement: With respect to a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program project in which the Named Insured is or was involved, this exclusion does not apply to those sums the Named Insured become legally obligated to pay as damages because of: 1. Bodily injury, property damage, or personal or advertising injury that occurs during the Named Insured's ongoing operations at the project, or during such operations of anyone acting on the Named Insured's behalf; nor CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 16 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Contractors' General Liability Extension Endorsement 2. Bodily injury or property damage included within the products-completed operations hazard that arises out of those portions of the project that are not residential structures. B. Condition 4.Other Insurance is amended to add the following subparagraph 4.b.(1)(c): This insurance is excess over: (c) Any of the other insurance whether primary, excess, contingent or any other basis that is insurance available to the Named Insured as a result of the Named Insured being a participant in a consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program, but only as respects the Named Insured's involvement in that consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program. C. DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definitions: Consolidated (wrap-up) insurance program means a construction, erection or demolition project for which the prime contractor/project manager or owner of the construction project has secured general liability insurance covering some or all of the contractors or subcontractors involved in the project, such as an Owner Controlled Insurance Program (O.C.I.P.) or Contractor Controlled Insurance Program (C.C.I.P.). Residential structure means any structure where 30% or more of the square foot area is used or is intended to be used for human residency, including but not limited to: 1. single or multifamily housing, apartments, condominiums, townhouses, co-operatives or planned unit developments; and 2. the common areas and structures appurtenant to the structures in paragraph 1. (including pools, hot tubs, detached garages, guest houses or any similar structures). However,when there is no individual ownership of units, residential structure does not include military housing, college/university housing or dormitories, long term care facilities, hotels or motels. Residential structure also does not include hospitals or prisons. This WRAP-UP EXTENSION: OCIP, CCIP, OR CONSOLIDATED (WRAP-UP) INSURANCE PROGRAMS Provision does not apply to any person or organization who otherwise qualifies as an additional insured on this Coverage Part. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. N O O n This endorsement,which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. 0 0 N CNA74705XX (1-15) Policy No: Page 17 of 17 Endorsement No: Effective Date: Insured Name: Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1 CNFA Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products-Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART It is understood and agreed as follows: I. The WHO IS AN INSURED section is amended to add as an Insured any person or organization whom the Named Insured is required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, including any such person or organization, if any, specifically set forth on the Schedule attachment to this endorsement. However, such person or organization is an Insured only with respect to such person or organization's liability for: A. unless paragraph B. below applies, 1. bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising injury caused in whole or in part by the acts or omissions by or on behalf of the Named Insured and in the performance of such Named Insured's ongoing operations as specified in such written contract; or 2. bodily injury or property damage caused in whole or in part by your work and included in the products-completed operations hazard, and only if a. the written contract requires the Named Insured to provide the additional insured such coverage; and b. this coverage part provides such coverage. B. bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising injury arising out of your work described in such written contract, but only if: 1. this coverage part provides coverage for bodily injury or property damage included within the products completed operations hazard; and 2. the written contract specifically requires the Named Insured to provide additional insured coverage under the 11-85 or 10-01 edition of CG2010 or the 10-01 edition of CG2037. II. Subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such additional insured with: A. coverage broader than required by the written contract; or B. a higher limit of insurance than required by the written contract. III. The insurance granted by this endorsement to the additional insured does not apply to bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising injury arising out of: A. the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering, or surveying services, including: 1. the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications;and 2. supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities; or B. any premises or work for which the additional insured is specifically listed as an additional insured on another endorsement attached to this coverage part. IV. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the section entitled COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, the Condition entitled Other Insurance, this insurance is excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured whether on a primary, excess, contingent or any other basis. However, if this insurance CNA75079XX(1-15) Page 1 of 2 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products-Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement is required by written contract to be primary and non-contributory, this insurance will be primary and non- contributory relative solely to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. V. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows: The Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended with the addition of the following: Any additional insured pursuant to this endorsement will as soon as practicable: 1. give the Insurer written notice of any claim, or any occurrence or offense which may result in a claim; 2. except as provided in Paragraph IV. of this endorsement, agree to make available any other insurance the additional insured has for any loss covered under this coverage part; 3. send the Insurer copies of all legal papers received, and otherwise cooperate with the Insurer in the investigation, defense, or settlement of the claim; and 4. tender the defense and indemnity of any claim to any other insurer or self insurer whose policy or program applies to a loss that the Insurer covers under this coverage part. However, if the written contract requires this insurance to be primary and non-contributory, this paragraph (4) does not apply to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. The Insurer has no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until the Insurer receives written notice of a claim from the additional insured. VI. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definition: Written contract means a written contract or written agreement that requires the Named Insured to make a person or organization an additional insured on this coverage part, provided the contract or agreement: A. is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and B. was executed prior to: 1. the bodily injury or property damage; or 2. the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury for which the additional insured seeks coverage. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply solely to the extent permissible by law. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged, This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA75079XX (1-15) Page 2 of 2 Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office,Inc.,with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 POLICY NUMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 02 05 12 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. TEXAS CHANGES - AMENDMENT OF CANCELLATION PROVISIONS OR COVERAGE CHANGE This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCT WITHDRAWAL COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by this Coverage Part, we agree to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material change to: SCHEDULE 1. Name: PER SCHEDULE ON FILE 2. Address: PER SCHEDULE ON FILE 3. 1 Number of days advance notice:030 Information required to complete this Schedule if not shown above will be shown in the Declarations. m 0 0 0 N O O CG 02 0512 04 Copyright, ISO Properties, Inc., 2003 Page 1 of 1 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A�� CNA (Edd.. 004/XX 4112) THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. CONTRACTORS EXTENDED COVERAGE ENDORSEMENT - BUSINESS AUTO PLUS - This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM I. LIABILITY COVERAGE 4. An"employee"of yours is an "insured"while A. Who Is An Insured operating an "auto" hired or rented under a contract or agreement in that "employee's" The following is added to Section II, Paragraph name, with your permission, while A.1., Who Is An Insured: performing duties related to the conduct of 1. a. Any incorporated entity of which the your business. Named Insured owns a majority of the "Policy,"as used in this provision A. Who Is An voting stock on the date of inception of Insured, includes those policies that were in this Coverage Form; provided that, force on the inception date of this Coverage b. The insurance afforded by this provision Form but: A.1, does not apply to any such entity 1. Which are no longer in force; or that is an "insured" under any other 2. Whose limits have been exhausted. liability "policy" providing "auto" coverage. B. Bail Bonds and Loss of Earnings 2. Any organization you newly acquire or form, Section 11, Paragraphs A.2. (2) and A.2. (4) other than a limited liability company, are revised as follows: partnership or joint venture, and over which 1. In a.(2), the limit for the cost of bail bonds is you maintain majority ownership interest. changed from $2,000 to$5,000; and The insurance afforded by this provision 2. In a.(4), the limit for the loss of earnings is A.2.' changed from $250 to$500 a day. a. Is effective on the acquisition or C. Fellow Employee formation date, and is afforded only until the end of the policy period of this Section II, Paragraph B.5 does not apply. Coverage Form, or the next anniversary of its inception date, whichever is Such coverage as is afforded by this provision earlier. C. is excess over any other collectible insurance. b. Does not apply to: Il. PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE (1) "Bodily injury" or"property damage" A. Glass Breakage — Hitting A Bird Or Animal — caused by an accident' that occurred before you acquired or Falling Objects Or Missiles formed the organization; or The following is added to Section III, (2) Any such organization that is an Paragraph A.3.: "insured" under any other liability With respect to any covered "auto," any "policy" providing"auto" coverage. deductible shown in the Declarations will not 3. Any person or organization that you are apply to glass breakage if such glass is required by a written contract to name as an repaired, in a manner acceptable to us, rather additional insured is an "insured" but only than replaced. with respect to their legal liability for acts or B. Transportation Expenses omissions of a person, who qualifies as an "insured" under Section II — Who Is An Section III, Paragraph A.4.a. is revised, with Insured and for whom Liability Coverage is respect to transportation expense incurred by afforded under this policy. If required by you, to provide: written contract, this insurance will be a. $60 per day, in lieu of$20; subject to primary and non-contributory to insurance on which the additional insured is a Named b. $1,800 maximum, in lieu of$600. Insured. CNA63359XX Copyright,CNA Corporation,2000. Page 1 of 3 (Ed. 04/12) Includes copyrighted material of the insurance Services Office used with Its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ��A CNA63359XX (Ed. 04/12) C. Loss of Use Expenses Section III, Paragraphs BA.c and B.4.d, are Section III, Paragraph A.4.1b, is revised, with deleted and replaced by the following: respect to loss of use expenses incurred by you, c. Physical Damage Coverage on a covered to provide: "auto" also applies to "loss" to any a. $1,000 maximum, in lieu of$600. permanently installed electronic equipment including its antennas and other D. Hired "Autos" accessories. The following is added to Section III. d. A$100 per occurrence deductible applies to Paragraph A.: the coverage provided by this provision. 5. Hired "Autos" G. Diminution In Value If Physical Damage coverage is provided under The following is added to Section III, this policy, and such coverage does not extend Paragraph B.6.: to Hired Autos, then Physical Damage coverage Subject to the following, the "diminution in is extended to: value" exclusion does not apply to: a. Any covered "auto" you lease, hire, rent a. Any covered "auto" of the private or borrow without a driver; and passenger type you lease, hire, rent or b. Any covered "auto" hired or rented by borrow, without a driver for a period of your "employee" without a driver, under 30 days or less,while performing duties a contract in that individual related to the conduct of your business; "employee's" name, with your and permission, while performing duties b. Any covered "auto" of the private related to the conduct of your business. passenger type hired or rented by your c. The most we will pay for any one "employee"without a driver for a period "accident" or "loss" is the actual cash of 30 days or less, under a contract in value, cost of repair, cost of that individual "employee's" name, with replacement or $75,000, whichever is your permission, while performing less, minus a $500 deductible for each duties related to the conduct of your covered auto. No deductible applies to business. "loss"caused by fire or lightning. c. Such coverage as is provided by this d. The physical damage coverage as is provision is limited to a "diminution in provided by this provision is equal to the value" loss arising directly out of physical damage coverage(s) provided accidental damage and not as a result on your owned "autos." of the failure to make repairs; faulty or eincomplete maintenance or repairs; or . Such physical damage coverage for the installation of substandard parts. hired "autos"will: d. The most we will pay for "loss" to a (1) Include loss of use, provided it is consequence of an accident covered "auto" In any one accident is the conse q "accident" the lesser of: for which the Named Insured is legally liable, and as a result of (1) $5,000;or which a monetary loss is sustained (2) 20% of the "auto's" actual cash by the leasing or rental concern. value (ACV). (2) Such coverage as is provided by Ill. Drive Other Car Coverage—Executive Officers this provision will be subject to a limit of$750 per"accident." The following is added to Sections II and III: E. Airbag Coverage 1. Any "auto" you don't own, hire or borrow is a The following is added to Section Ill, covered"auto"for Liability Coverage while being Paragraph B.3.: used by, and for Physical Damage Coverage while in the care, custody or control of, any of The accidental discharge of an airbag shall not your"executive officers,"except: be considered mechanical breakdown. a. An "auto" owned by that "executive officer" F. Electronic Equipment. or a member of that person's household; or CNA63359XX copyright,CNA Corporation,2000. Page 2 of 3 (Ed. 04112) Includes copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office used with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CNA6335 XX (Ed. 04//12) b. An "auto" used by that "executive officer" The following is added to Section IV, while working in a business of selling, Paragraph A.5. Transfer Of Rights Of servicing, repairing or parking "autos." Recovery Against Others To Us: Such Liability and/or Physical Damage We waive any right of recovery we may have. Coverage as is afforded by this provision. because of payments we make for injury or (1) Equal to the greatest of those damage, against any person or organization for coverages afforded any covered "auto'% whom or which you are required by written and contractor agreement to obtain this waiver from us. (2) Excess over any other collectible This injury or damage must arise out of your insurance. activities under a contract with that person or 2. For purposes of this provision, "executive organization. office(" means a person holding any of the You must agree to that requirement prior to an officer positions created by your charter, "accident" or"loss." constitution, by-laws or any other similar governing document, and, while a resident of C. Concealment, Misrepresentation or Fraud the same household, includes that person's The following is added to Section IV, spouse. Paragraph 6.2.: Such "executive officers" are "insureds" while Your failure to disclose all hazards existing on the using a covered "auto" described in this date of inception of this Coverage Form shall not provision. prejudice you with respect to the coverage afforded IV. BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS provided such failure or omission is not intentional. A. Duties In The Event Of Accident, Claim, Suit D. Other Insurance Or Loss The following is added to Section IV, The following is added to Section IV, Paragraph B.5.: Paragraph A.2.a.: Regardless of the provisions of Paragraphs 5.a. (4) Your "employees" may know of an and 5.d. above, the coverage provided by this "accident" or "loss," This will not mean policy shall be on a primary non-contributory that you have such knowledge, unless basis. This provision is applicable only when such "accident" or "loss" is known to required by a written contract. That written you or if you are not an individual, to contract must have been entered into prior to any of your executive officers or "Accident" or"Loss." partners or your insurance manager. E. Policy Period,Coverage Territory The following is added to Section IV, Section IV,Paragraph B.7.(5).(a). is revised to Paragraph A.2.b.: provide: (6) Your "employees" may know of a. 45 days of coverage in lieu of 30 days. documents received concerning a claim or "suit," This will not mean that you V. DEFINITIONS have such knowledge, unless receipt of such documents is known to you or if Section V. Paragraph C. is deleted and replaced you are not an individual, to any of your by the following: executive officers or partners or your "Bodily injury" means bodily injury, sickness or insurance manager. disease sustained by a person, including mental B. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against anguish, mental injury or death resulting from any of Others To Us these. CNA63359XX Copyright,CNA Corporation,2000. Page 3 of 3 (Ed. 04/12) Includes copyrighted matedat of the Insurance Services Office used with its permission. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 TeXaSMutuar WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND WC 42 03 04 B EMPLOYERS LIABILITY POLICY Insured copy TEXAS WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT This endorsement applies only to the insurance provided by the policy because Texas is shown in item 3.A. of the Information Page. We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule, but this waiver applies only with respect to bodily injury arising out of the operations described in the schedule where you are required by a written contract to obtain this waiver from us. This endorsement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. The premium for this endorsement is shown in the Schedule. Schedule 1. () Specific Waiver Name of person or organization (X)Blanket Waiver Any person or organization for whom the Named Insured has agreed by written contract to furnish this waiver. 2. Operations: ALL TEXAS OPERATIONS 3. Premium: The premium charge for this endorsement shall be 2.00 percent of the premium developed on payroll in connection with work performed for the above person(s) or organization(s) arising out of the operations described. 4. Advance Premium: Included, see Information Page This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached effective on the inception date of the policy unless a different date is indicated below. (The following"attaching clause"need be completed only when this endorsement is issued subsequent to preparation of the policy.) This endorsement,effective on 9/12/21 at 12:01 a.m.standard time,forms a part of: Policy no. 0002020407 of Texas Mutual Insurance Company effective on 9/12/21 Issued to: BARCOM CONSTRUCTION INC &Le �t� This is not a bill Authorized representative NCCI Carrier Code: 29939 9/10/21 PO Box 12058,Austin,TX 78711-2058 1 of 1 texasmutual.com 1 (800)859-5995 1 Fax(800)359-0650 WC 42 03 04 B DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation — Phase 2 20094A Ar �a 1852 801 Navigation Suite 300 Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 Phone: (361) 883-1984 www.Ardurra.com Engineering License#F-10053 ARDURRA Ardurra Group, Inc. Surveying Firm 1.094688 COLLABORATE. INNOVATE. CREATE. Architectural Firm BR4160 IIII .` III SIIM SIII ... HISS III IIIA II III ' C 0II SIII JJCP'l.III II Record Drawing Number: PBG-880 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Division/ Title Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 60 00 Grouting 05 12 00 Structural Steel 05 20 43 Miscellaneous Metals 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 11 40 Wood Blocking 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 13 Board Insulation 07 21 16 Blanket Insulation 07 21 29 Sprayed Insulation 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 90 00 Joint Protection 08 12 13 Hollow Metal Frames 08 12 16 Aluminum Frames 08 13 13 Hollow Metal Doors 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 42 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances 08 43 13 Aluminum Storefronts 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 80 00 Glazing (Added by Addendum #2) 08 91 ed l 19 rix „, o uvers 09 30 00 Tiling 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 13.13 Resilient Base 09 65 19.23 Vinyl Tile Flooring Table of Contents 000100-2 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Division/ Title St' n 09 66 16 Terrazzo Tile (Added by Addendum #2) 09 91 00 Painting (Modified by Addendum #2) 10 14 67 Tactile Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 26 13 Corner Guards 10 26 23.11 Decorative Protection Panels 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 21 00 00 Fire Suppression 22 05 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements 22 05 05 Startup and Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 22 05 10 Minor Plumbing Demolition 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports Plumbing Piping 22 05 53 ID for Plumbing Piping& Equipment 22 05 93 Tests-Plumbing Piping Systems 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping 22 20 00 Plumbing Specialties 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 23 05 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 05 05 Startup and Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 05 10 Minor HVAC Demolition 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping 23 05 48 HVAC Vibration Control 23 05 53 ID for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 13 Ductwork Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Pipe Insulation 23 09 13 Thermostats 23 23 00 Refrigeration Piping 23 31 00 Ductwork Table of Contents 000100-3 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Division/ Title Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 40 00 HVAC Air Filters 23 63 13 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 23 70 00 Air Handling Units 23 73 13 Grilles, Registers, Diffusers 26 00 10 Special Provisions for Electrical Work 26 01 00 Access Doors 26 01 10 Raceways 26 01 11 Conduit and Fittings 26 01 13 Cable Trays 26 01 20 Wire and Cable 600 V and Under 26 01 31 Junction and Pull Boxes 26 01 31 Outlet Boxes 26 01 40 Wiring Devices 26 01 50 Motors Controllers for Electric Powered Equipment 26 01 70 Disconnect Switches 26 01 90 Supporting Devices 26 04 50 Grounding 26 04 60 Indoor Dry Type Transformers 26 04 71 Panel Boards 26 05 01 Lighting Fixtures 26 05 03 Empty Raceways 26 07 20 Fire Alarm System 26 07 41 Data Cabling System 26 09 10 Temperature Controls 26 09 96 Electrical Systems Startup 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 20 00 Earthwork 31 22 00 Site Grading 31 23 00 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and Sewers 31 24 10 Backfilling& Compacting (Building Area) Table of Contents 000100-4 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Division/ Title Section Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 Asbestos Materials and Lead-containing Paint Report 2 Mechanical Compliance Certificate 3 Interior Liphtin Com liance C, rtj is to Q b „ (Added Y � , Civ ) 4 2 Cast Questions and Answers d Addendum # END OF SECTION Table of Contents 000100-5 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS LIST OF DRAWINGS(42 sheets): GENERAL: 1 TITLE SHEET 2 PROJECT DATA 3 SITE PLAN ARCHITECTURAL: 4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PLAN 5 EXISTING PHOTOS 6 SECOND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN 7 SECOND LEVEL DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN 8 ENLARGED PLANS AND ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 9 SECOND LEVEL FLOOR FINISH PLAN 10 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS 11 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12 BUILDING SECTIONS 13 WALL SECTIONS 14 WALL SECTIONS 15 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 16 DETAILS 17 DOOR&WINDOW SCHEDULES STRUCTURAL: 18 GENERAL NOTES&DESIGN CRITERIA 19 SECOND FLOOR PLAN 20 EAST&WEST ELEVATIONS 21 TYPICAL ELEVATIONS (1 OF 2) 22 TYPICAL ELEVATIONS (2 OF 2) 23 FOUNDATION PLANS, SECTIONS &DETAILS 24 STAIR PLAN &SECTION 25 STEEL SECTIONS &DETAILS 26 METAL STUD DETAILS MECHANICAL: 27 HVAC PLAN 28 HVAC PLAN °' 2 Vm S 29 HVAC SCHEDULES S S(J VIII .. I 30 HVAC DETAILS 31 HVAC DETAILS " II 1 15, 2022 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 List of Drawings Phase 2 Section 00 01 07 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ELECTRICAL: 32 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLANS 33 POWER PLANS 34 LIGHTING PLANS 35 FIRE PROTECTION PLANS 36 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES PLUMBING: 37 SANITARY, DRAIN, WASTE AND, VENT PLAN 38 DOMESTIC WATER PLAN 39 FIRE SUPPRESSION 40 PLUMBING SCHEDULES 41 PLUMBING DETAILS 42 PLUMBING DETAILS END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 List of Drawings Phase 2 Section 00 01 07 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 00 01 07 SEALS PAGE E H D Craig E. Forsythe, R.A. Architect IT Ardurra, Inc. " 801pX99? avagation Blvd. Suite: 300 �, � Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 a Architectural Firm License: BR4160 = Date: 12-6-2021 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- � FT M, DOUGLAS H LA IEI'��E Douglas H. Lawrence, P.E. � -. .01 , Structural Engineer - 1095211 Ardurra, Inc. 801 Navagation Blvd. Suite: 300 A Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 Engineering Firm License: F-10053 Date: 12-6-2021 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- James C. Ward, P.E. MEP Engineer ES C. WARD G.P.M. Engineering, Inc. '9861, 4444 Corona Dr. � ,• Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 ] Engineering Firm License: F-2829 Date: 12-6-2021 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- END OF SECTION 0 I S IIIS S III.. IIIA II 0111 II S III ..JC VI II IIIIC:ZkIlh 1 11512022 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 1 Seals Page Phase 2 Section 00 01 07 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 0 �- ,WWW °b�nViroi Ay�'v 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 Project Number 20094A ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Ardurra Group, Inc. 801 Navigation Blvd.Suite 300 Corpus Christi,TX, 78408 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel Assistant Director of Construction Services 4917 Holly Rd. Bldg. 5 Corpus Christi,TX, 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 300 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 330 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-1 [Insert Project Name and Number] Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-2 [Insert Project Name and Number] Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 005223-3 [Insert Project Name and Number] Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 005223-4 [Insert Project Name and Number] Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. C. List others as necessary. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds P.E. City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Agreement 005223-5 [Insert Project Name and Number] Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 [Insert Project Name and Number] Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology.....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article 2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site.............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 007200- 1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 007200-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 007200-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 007200-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 007200-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation.......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards ................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work.......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations.....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 007200-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 007200-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees.................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi(City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200- 10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act,42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 007200- 11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or C. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition -The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 007200- 12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; C. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed -A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner -The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 007200- 13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents -A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor -An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion -The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 007200- 14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day" mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 007200- 15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 007200- 16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict,error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 007200- 19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 007200-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 007200-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 007200-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site,and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 007200-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 007200-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 007200-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 007200-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 007200-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 007200-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 007200-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 007200-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 007200-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 007200-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds"for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 007200-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 007200-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. I By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 007200-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 007200-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 007200-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 007200-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 007200-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 007200-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections, tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 007200-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 007200-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 007200-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 007200-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occu r. General Conditions 007200-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays, disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 007200-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 007200-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 007200-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 007200-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 007200-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 007200-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 007200-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Anytime extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim(unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 007200-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 007200-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b) — Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or C. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 007200-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits,which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave, vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 007200-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance oft he Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 007200-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 007200-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 007200-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 007200-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 007200-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 007200-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 007200-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 007200-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 007200-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 007200-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 007200-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 007200-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 007200-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 007200-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 007200-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 007200-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to fol low the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 007200-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 007200-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 007200-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 007200-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 007200-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees' vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 007200-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles,guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 007200-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines,grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 007200-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 007200-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 007200-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 007200-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 007200-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 007200-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 007200-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor"form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 007200-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 007200-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implementthe Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 007200-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 007200-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 007200-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 007200-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 007200-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 007200-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200- 100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 007200- 101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy, the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 007200- 102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 007200- 103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 007200- 104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 007200- 105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 007200- 106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 007200- 107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers,and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 007200- 108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges, materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 007200- 109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 007200- 110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal"products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 007200- 111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 007200- 112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 007200- 113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 007200- 114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 007200- 115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 007200- 116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 007200- 117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement, model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges, materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 007200- 118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 007200- 119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal"products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 007200- 120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel - Not Required." No further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 007200- 121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 007200- 122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.05 Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 007200- 123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200- 124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 007200- 125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 007200- 126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 007200- 127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract, then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 007200- 128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 007200- 129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 007200- 130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demo bilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 007200- 131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 007200- 132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Ardurra Group, Inc. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 Supplementary Conditions 007300-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. A total of 26 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 26 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: None 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: None SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: Asbestos and Lead Containing Materials Report ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 6. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Supplementary Conditions 007300-2 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑ Required ® Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges ® Required ❑ Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required ® Not Required SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 30 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." Supplementary Conditions 007300-3 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES "General Decision Number:TX20210288 01/01/2021 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20200288 State:Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Under Executive Order(EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of$10.95 for calendar year 2021 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least$10.95 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2021. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate, if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Supplementary Conditions 007300-4 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/01/2021 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2017 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER...................... $ 28.00 22.35 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ * ELECO278-002 03/20/2020 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN...................... $ 26.25 8.24 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ * ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1)Tower Crane............. $ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above..... $ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under.............. $ 32.35 13.10 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- * IRON0084-011 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL........... $ 25.26 7.13 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER....................... $ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................ $ 15.21 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER... $ 15.33 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 007300-5 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe& Mechanical System Insulation)............... $ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING.......... $ 12.27 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL........... $ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General...... $ 9.68 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Brick... $ 11.36 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cement/Concrete.................. $ 10.58 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer.............. $ 12.49 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff........... $ 11.28 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe....... $ 14.25 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................ $ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer............. $ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill................. $ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift.............. $ 14.83 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade.......... $ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................ $ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic.............. $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete)......... $ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................ $ 12.70 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray)........................... $ 14.45 0.00 PIPEFITTER....................... $ 25.80 8.55 Supplementary Conditions 007300-6 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation-Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PLUMBER.......................... $ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER........................... $ 13.75 0.00 SHEET METALWORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)............... $ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METALWORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation........... $ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER.................... $ 11.22 0.00 TILE SETTER...................... $ 14.74 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........ $ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck..... $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................ $ 12.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck....... $ 12.00 4.11 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO,the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee)who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at ww.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Supplementary Conditions 007300-7 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination.The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification,which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement(CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based.The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100%of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state.The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year,to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. Supplementary Conditions 007300-8 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory,then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party(those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.)All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. Supplementary Conditions 007300-9 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Project Architect: Ardurra Group, Inc. 361-883-1984 Craig Forsythe, RA, AIA 361-883-1984 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste& Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centuryl-ink 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 Supplementary Conditions 007300-10 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description 013301 Items Listed in Section 0133 01 SUBMITTAL REGISTER SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: $200/ hour. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description 013301 Items Listed in Section 0133 01 SUBMITTAL REGISTER END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 007300-11 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 2/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: This project involves the renovation of the existing Filter Building No.1, approximately 5,400 sq ft, which was built in the early 1980s.The existing building consists of a ground story pipe gallery and a second story operations floor,that originally monitored the filter basins to the west.The renovation of the operations floor converts the narrow, approximately 380+/-foot long open plan into new administration offices along with support spaces, such as a conference room, men's and women's restrooms, a shower, and a S.C.A.D.A. lab.The scope of work includes demolition of large runs of existing aluminum/glass storefront,terrazzo curbs, electrical systems, and spray-applied acoustical ceiling finish. Renovation work entails new metal stud/ drywall partitions, impact rated exterior window and door assemblies, new drywall furr-downs, suspended acoustical ceilings, spray-applied insulation in walls and below existing concrete floor and roof slabs, HVAC systems, updated electrical systems, along with new fire alarm and fire sprinkler system. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. Summary of Work 011100-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 011100-2 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: (Not Used) 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. The Items described as "Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance J1—Unforseen Conditions 1. $100,000 of the bid price to be used for the purchase of Unforseen Conditions required for the project. Alternates and Allowances 012310-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Allowance J2—Concrete Testing: 1. $4000 of the bid price to be used for the materials testing as required for the project. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES (NOT USED) 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 012310-2 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR PART A—GENERAL ITEMS A. Bid Item A1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; C. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 012901-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A2—Bonds and Insurance: 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Measurement for payment will be made on a Lump Sum basis. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR PARTS B THRU I— BASE BID A. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections (including section 1.01 above), Construction Drawings, Schedule of Values, and/or BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 012901-2 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 0133 01 Submittal Register 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 1.04 Record Data 03 20 00 lConcrete Reinforcing 1.3 Shop Drawing 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.4 Record Data 036000 Grouting 1.02 Record Data 05 12 00 Structural Steel 1.3 Shop Drawing 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 1.5 Shop Drawing 061643 Gypsum Sheathing 1.2 Record Data 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 1.5 Shop Drawin 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1.2 Record Data 072113 Board Insulation 1.3 Record Data 07 21 16 Blanket Insulation 1.3 Record Data 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 1.3 Record Data Sample 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 078400 Firestopping 1.6 Record Data 079000 Joint Protection 1.3 Record Data 07 95 13 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 1.3 Record Data 08 12 16 Aluminum Frames 1.4 Shop Drawing 081416 Flush Wood Doors 1.4 Shop Drawing 08 42 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances 1.04 Shop Drawing 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 087100 Door Hardware 1.4 Shop Drawing 0&M Manual 093000 Tiling 1.5 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 1.5 Record Data Sample 09 65 13.13 Resilient Base 1.03 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 09 65 19.23 Vinyl Tile Flooring 1.03 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 1.3 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 099100 Painting 1.4 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 101467 iTactile Signage 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 1.4 Shop Drawing Sample 102613 Corner Guards 1.3 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 102813 Toilet Accessories 1.3 Shoo Drawing 0&M Manual 104400 Fire Protection Specialties 1.4 1 Shop Drawing 0&M Manual 312000 Earthwork 1.3 Record Data Submittal Register 013301-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation-Phase 2(Project No.20094A) 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: 1. Per Means and Methods B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: 1. Not Applicable. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. Special Procedures 013500-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. Not Applicable. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Max.Time Hours Operation Liquidated Critical Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. These items are critical to the [for operation of the existing distribution system] [other description of critical nature of operations]. 2. Loss of[operation of the existing distribution system] [other description of critical nature of operations] can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. F. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: 1. Critical Operation 1 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 1.] 2. Critical Operation 2 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 2.] 3. Critical Operation 3 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 3.] Special Procedures 013500-2 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE Not Applicable. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 013500-3 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. NOT REQUIRED Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT APPLICABLE) A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-1 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES (NOT APPLICABLE) A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT—(NOT REQUIRED) A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-2 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS—(NOT APPLICABLE) A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-3 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES—(NOT APPLICABLE) A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Keep site clean and free of construction debris and empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-4 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. (NOT APPLICABLE) Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. (NOT APPLICABLE) Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. (NOT APPLICABLE)Provide labor,materials,equipment,and incidentals necessaryto prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS—NOT APPLICABLE A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 015700-1 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL—NOT APPLICABLE A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 015700-2 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL—NOT APPLICABLE A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 015700-3 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL—NOT APPLICABLE A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS—NOT APPLICABLE A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING—NOT APPLICABLE A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 015700-4 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the [Corpus Christi Bay] [Oso Creek] [Laguna Madre] [CC Ship Channel]. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be [US Ecology (USET) in Robstown, Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas]. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory Temporary Controls 015700-5 CNSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 015700-6 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation—Phase 2 (Project No. 20094A) Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Engineer's/Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Cutting & Patching Phase 2 Section 01 73 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Cutting & Patching Phase 2 Section 01 73 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend from one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Cutting & Patching Phase 2 Section 01 73 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective Site Demolition: 1. Demolition of designated site improvements including paving, curbing, and utility structures. 2. Demolition of below-grade foundations and site improvements in their entirety to avoid conflict with new construction or site work. 3. Removal of hollow items or items which could collapse. 4. Salvage of designated items. 5. Protection of site work and adjacent structures. 6. Disconnection, capping, and removal relocation of utilities. 7. Pollution control during building demolition, including noise control. 8. Removal and legal disposal of materials. 9. Designated site improvements and adjacent construction. 10. Interruption, capping or removal of utilities as applicable. B. Hazardous Materials: 1. Refer to attached asbestos and lead containing materials report, dated: August 4, 2021. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Schedule: Submit for approval selective demolition schedule, including schedule and methods for capping utilities to be abandoned and maintaining existing utility service. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Regulations: Comply with governing codes and regulations. Use experienced workers. 1.4 SEQUENCING A. Immediate areas of work will not be occupied during selective demolition. The public, including children, may occupy adjacent areas. B. No responsibility for structures to be demolished will be assumed by the Owner. C. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not applicable to this Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolition Operations: Do not damage building elements and improvements indicated to remain. Items of salvage value, not included on schedule of salvage items to be returned ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Selective Demolition Phase 2 Section 02 41 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 to Owner, shall be removed from structure. Storage or sale of items at project site is prohibited. B. Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities in or under elements to be demolished. C. Shoring and Bracing: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring and bracing. D. Occupied Spaces: Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, drives or other occupied or used spaces or facilities without the written permission of the Owner and the authorities having jurisdiction. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities without the written permission of the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. If necessary, provide temporary utilities. E. Operations: Cease operations if public safety or remaining structures are endangered. Perform temporary corrective measures until operations can be continued properly. F. Security: Provide adequate protection against accidental trespassing. Secure project after work hours. G. Restoration: Restore finishes of patched areas. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Items for Protection during Demolition and Construction: 1. Designated site improvements, power pole, paving/curbing to remain. 2. Adjacent construction. B. Items to be Salvaged for Reinstallation: 1. None. C. Items to be Salvaged for Delivery to Owner: 1. None. D. Utilities Requiring Interruption, Capping, or Removal: 1. Water service. 2. Sanitary Sewer. 3. Natural Gas. 4. Telephone/ Data. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Selective Demolition Phase 2 Section 02 41 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 20 00-Concrete Reinforcing. 2. Section 03 30 00-Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 347- Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Forest and Paper Association: 1. AF&PA- National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. C. The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 - Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. D. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB- Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI Manual of Concrete Practice to conform to design and applicable code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Contract Drawings. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Forms shall be designed with consideration of rate, method of placing concrete, and construction loads to be encountered, including vertical, horizontal, and impact loads. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Information on the Contractor's proposed forming system: Submit in such detail as the Engineer may require to assure that the intent of the specifications can be complied with by use of the proposed system. B. Approval by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide forms adequate and satisfactory for the purpose required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF&PA. C. Install work in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design formwork under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Texas. B. Qualifications of Formwork Manufacturers: Use only forming systems manufactured by manufacturers having minimum 5 years' experience, except as otherwise specified, or accepted in writing by the Engineer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work requiring attachment of components to formwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Lumber Forms: 1. Application: Use for edge forms and unexposed finish concrete. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Boards: 6 inches or 8 inches in width, shiplapped or tongue and groove, "Standard" Grade Southern Yellow Pine, conforming to WCLIB Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. Surface boards on four sides. B. Plywood Forms: 1. Application: Use for exposed finish concrete. 2. Forms: Conform to PS 1; 5-ply plywood sheets made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive and having finish surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement; full size 4 x 8 feet panels; each panel labeled with grade trademark of APA/EWA. 3. Plywood for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Minimum of 3/4 inch thick; APA/EWA"B-B Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade. 4. Plywood where "Smooth Finish" is required, as indicated on Contract Drawings: APA/EWA "HD Overlay Plyform Structural I Exterior" grade, minimum of 3/4 inch thick. 2.02 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Preformed Steel Forms: Rigidly constructed matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. B. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. C. Steel Forms: Sheet steel, suitably reinforced, and designed for particular use indicated on Contract Drawings. D. Form Liners: Smooth, durable, grainless and non-staining hardboard, unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings. E. Framing, Studding and Bracing: Southern Yellow Pine No. 2 with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: 1. General: a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by a recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. b. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock and spread forms. C. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during placement of concrete. B. Cone-Snap or Flat Bar Form Ties: 1. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and 1-1/2 inches deep. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the concrete. C. Taper Ties: 1. Neoprene Plugs for Taper Tie Holes: Size so that after they are driven, plugs are located in center third of wall thickness. 2. Dry-Pack Mortar for Filling Taper Tie Holes: a. Consist of mix of 1 part of Portland cement to 1 part of plaster sand. b. Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be such that mortar can be driven into holes and be properly compacted. C. Admixtures or Additives: Are not to be used in dry-pack mortar. D. Spreaders: Standard, non-corrosive metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete face. Wire ties, wood spreaders or through bolts are not permitted. E. Form Anchors and Hangers: 1. Do not use anchors and hangers exposed concrete leaving exposed metal at concrete surface. 2. Symmetrically arrange hangers supporting forms from structural steel members to minimize twisting or rotation of member. 3. Penetration of structural steel members is not permitted. F. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. G. Corners: Chamfer, rigid plastic or wood strip type; 3/4-inch bevel unless indicated otherwise on Contract Drawings; maximum possible lengths. Provide 1/4-inch bevel at expansion and construction joints, unless otherwise noted on drawings. H. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according to label directions. I. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Size, strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Contract Drawings. B. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Engineer. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical and electrical inserts or other embedded items. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Earth Forms: 1. Trench earth forms neatly, accurately, and at least 2 inches wider than footing widths indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Trim sides and bottom of earth forms. 3. Construct wood edge strips at top of each side of trench to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. 4. Form sides of footings where earth sloughs. 5. Tamp earth forms firm and clean forms of debris and loose material before depositing concrete. B. Formwork- General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. 2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete. C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish. 3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Forms for Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Use plywood or steel forms. After erection of forms, tape form joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. E. Framing, Studding and Bracing: 1. Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum for boards and 12 inches on center maximum for plywood. 2. Size framing, bracing, centering, and supporting members with sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. 3. Construct beam soffits of material minimum of 2 inches thick. 4. Distribute bracing loads over base area on which bracing is erected. 5. When placed on ground, protect against undermining, settlement or accidental impact. F. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318. G. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. H. Obtain Engineer's approval before framing openings in structural members not indicated on Contract Drawings. I. Install chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists, columns and slabs exposed to view. J. Do not reuse wood formwork more than 3 times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Reuse and Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges. Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Do not coat forms for concrete indicated to receive "scored finish". Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel. 3.04 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. D. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Contract Drawings. 5. Cone-Snap Rod and Bar Ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill tie holes as follows: a. Remove form ties from surfaces. b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair. C. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar. 6. Taper Ties: a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows: 1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes. 2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy. 3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during driving: a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical recess. b. Dry-Pack of Taper Tie Holes: After installing plugs in tie holes: 1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry-pack mortar: 2) Dry-Pack Mortar: Place in holes in layers with thickness not exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer. 3) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days after the inside of the hole has been dry packed. 4) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side of water containing structures and the outside of below grade walls: a) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend minimum of 2 inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes. C) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or other voids. H. Arrangement: Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete. I. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight, true and sharp. J. Embedded Items: 1. Make provisions for pipes, sleeves, anchors, inserts, reglets, anchor slots, nailers, water stops, and other features. 2. Do not embed wood or uncoated aluminum in concrete. 3. Obtain installation and setting information for embedded items furnished under other Specification sections. 4. Securely anchor embedded items in correct location and alignment prior to placing concrete. 5. Verify conduits and pipes, including those made of coated aluminum, meet requirements of ACI 318 for size and location limitations. K. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Contract Drawings. Establish exact locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings. L. Screeds: 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 8 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Contract Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water. M. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. 2. Staking through membrane is not permitted. N. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris. Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air just before concrete is placed. 3.05 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.06 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Engineer. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Vertical Forms: 1. Remain in place minimum of 36 hours after concrete is placed. 2. If, after 36 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist surface or other damage, forms may be removed. E. Other Forms Supporting Concrete and Shoring: Remain in place as follows: 1. Sides of Footings: 24 hours minimum. 2. Vertical Sides of Beams, Girders, and Similar Members: 36 hours minimum. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 9 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified strength f'c or until shoring is installed. 4. Shoring for Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Shore until concrete strength reaches specified strength. 5. Wall Bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength. F. Green Concrete: 1. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. 2. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of specified strength f'c. G. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces, and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified in Section 03 30 00. 3.07 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Tolerances: 1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances listed below at time of acceptance of project. 3. Construct formwork to produce completed concrete surfaces within construction tolerances specified in ACI 117, paragraphs 2.1 through 2.2 and paragraphs 4.0 through 4.6, except as modified herein: a. Slabs: 1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2) Slabs Indicated to be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade. b. On Circular Tank Walls: The Contractor may deviate from finish line indicated on the Contract Drawings by use of forms with chord lengths not to exceed 2 feet. C. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances required for proper installation and operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains. d. Maximum Tolerances: As follows: Item Tolerance Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8 inches Projected Ends of Anchor Bolts Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0 inches Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 Minus 1/16 inches 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 10 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Notify Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but minimum 48 hours prior to placing concrete. C. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 11 of 11 Concrete Forming and Accessories Phase 2 Section 03 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Welded wire fabric. 3. Reinforcement accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00- Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 30 00-Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04 22 00 -Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 350- Environmental Structures: Code Requirements. 4. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. 5. ACI SP-66-ACI Detailing Manual. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A82/A82M -Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM Al84/A184M - Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Al85/A185M-07 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. 4. ASTM A496/A496M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A497/A497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 10. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 11. ASTM A884/A884M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement. 12. ASTM A934/A934M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 13. ASTM A996/A996M —Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing Phase 2 Section 03 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar size, spacing, location, and quantity of reinforcing steel or welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice, ACI 301 and/or ACI 318. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum [16] gage annealed type, unfinished. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic-coated steel hot-dip galvanized metal spacers with plastic tips, Stainless steel or plastic spacers type; size and shape to meet Project conditions. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice and ACI 318. B. Form standard hooks for 180 degree bends, 90 degree bend, stirrup and tie hooks, and seismic hooks as indicated on Drawings. C. Reinforcing shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the drawings. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. D. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. E. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318. F. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices. G. Form spiral column reinforcement from minimum 3/8 inch diameter continuous deformed bar or wire. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing Phase 2 Section 03 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 H. Form ties and stirrups from the following: 1. For bars No. 10 and Smaller: No. 3 deformed bars. 2. For bars No. 11 and Larger: No. 4 deformed bars. I. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Submit location of splices to Engineer for review and approval. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly. 2. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, dimensions shown for reinforcing bars are out to out of steel. 3. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections. Where spacing is less than one foot in each direction, tie every other intersection. 4. Reinforcing steel shall be supported and tied in such a manner as to provide a sufficiently rigid cage of steel. 5. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, over-turning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. 6. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure that the reinforcement remains in the proper position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. Check drawing requirements (plans, sections and details)for additional reinforcing steel at all openings. D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 of one bar diameter, but not less than 1 inch. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars. E. For cast-in-place concrete, maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 as follows: Reinforcement Location Minimum Concrete Cover Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to 3 inches earth Concrete exposed No. 6 bars and larger 2 inches to earth or weather No. 5 bars and smaller 1-1/2 inches ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing Phase 2 Section 03 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Concrete not No. 14 bars and larger 1-1/2 inches exposed to weather No. 11 bars and smaller 3/4 inches or in contact with ground; slabs, walls &joists Beams and Columns 1-1/2 inches Shell and Folded No. 6 bars and larger 3/4 inch Plate Members No. 5 bars and smaller 1/2 inch 3.2 STORING A. Steel reinforcing shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members: Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch B. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The contractor shall implement a quality control plan to ensure that the reinforcing size, type, finish, spacing, cover, splicing, material and placement are in accordance with the "Issued for Construction" drawings. B. If the project requires reinforcing inspections, no concrete shall be deposited until the engineer has inspected the reinforcing steel and has given permission to proceed with concrete placement. Notify the engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to the planned concrete pour. C. The contractor shall provide free access to Work and cooperate with the engineer or engineer's appointed inspector. 1. Periodic Weld Inspection: Other welded connections. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 4 Concrete Reinforcing Phase 2 Section 03 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following: 1. Building frame members. 2. Supported slabs and slabs on grade. 3. Control and expansion joints. 4. Sidewalks and curb ramps. 5. Curbs and curb and gutter. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 10 00-Concrete Forming and Accessories. 2. Section 03 20 00-Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 07 90 00-Joint Protection. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI CT- Concrete Terminology. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 305- Hot Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 5. ACI 309R- Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 6. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 7. ACI 347- Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM C31 -Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 3. ASTM C33-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C39-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. ASTM C42-Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 6. ASTM C78—Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). 7. ASTM C94-Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8. ASTM C109—Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens). 9. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 10. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 11. ASTM C172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 12. ASTM C173- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 13. ASTM C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 14. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 15. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 16. ASTM C330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. 17. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 18. ASTM C496—Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 19. ASTM C595 - Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 20. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 21. ASTM C685 - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 22. ASTM C845 - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. 23. ASTM C920—Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 24. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 25. ASTM C1017 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 26. ASTM C1064 - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 27. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 28. ASTM C1116 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. 29. ASTM C1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 30. ASTM C1218 - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 31. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. 32. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 33. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 34. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 35. ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 36. ASTM E96- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 37. ASTM E119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 38. ASTM E154—Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 39. ASTM E1643 -Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 40. ASTM E1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI Design Handbook. D. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168-Adhesive and Sealant Applications. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Barrier Permeance: Maximum 0.01 Perms (grains/ft2* hr* in.Hg)when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, desiccant method or water method. 1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms (grains/ft2 * hr* in.Hg) after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E154 Sections 8, 11, 12, and 13. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00- Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured products, admixtures and vapor barrier. C. Design Data: 1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength/class indicated on Drawings a minimum of fifteen days prior to concrete placement. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: a. Hot and cold weather concrete work. b. Air entrained concrete work. 2. Identify mix ingredients, including type, brand, source and proportions of cement, fly ash, and admixtures, as well as aggregate gradation and chemical composition. Also include applicable reference specifications and copies of test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and will be suitable for job conditions. 3. Admixtures shall not contain chloride ions. D. Certificate of Compliance: Submit to the Engineer for approval for each strength/class of concrete indicated on Drawings: 1. Aggregates 2. Admixtures 3. Cement 4. Fly Ash 5. Epoxy Grout E. Obtain approval by Engineer before concrete placement. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and 318. B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.7 DELIVERY A. Do not deliver concrete until forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips are in place and ready for concrete placement and Engineer's inspection has been completed satisfactorily. B. Packing and Shipping: 1. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7 days. B. Maintain high early strength concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 3 days. C. Concrete temperature at time of delivery shall not exceed 85 degrees F. Any temperature above this will not be accepted. Measures shall be taken to ensure proper temperature at time of placement. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of joint devices, sleeves, penetrations, openings, conduits, piping, etc. with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE A. Consistency of concrete mixtures shall be such that: 1. The mortar will cling to the coarse aggregate. 2. The aggregates will not segregate in the concrete when it is transported to the place of deposit. 3. The concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, will flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edge of the pile will stand and not flow. 4. The concrete and mortar will show no free water when removed from the mixer. 5. The concrete will slide and not flow into place when transported in metal chutes at an angle of thirty (30)degrees with the horizontal. 6. The surface of the finished concrete will be free of a surface film of"laitance". 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I — Normal, Type II — Moderate Portland type. B. Site Mixed Cement 1. Cement used to make concrete shall be as indicated above. 2. Cement shall be of a standard brand manufactured by a reputable firm. 3. Only one brand of cement will be permitted unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 4. Each bag of cement shall be plainly marked with the name of the manufacturer and shall weigh no less than 94 pounds net. 5. Cement must be in good condition at the time it is delivered and it shall be properly protected against dampness after delivery. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6. No cement will be accepted which has become caked. C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33. 1. The source of supply of fine and coarse aggregates shall be approved by the Engineer before any material is delivered. If required, samples of the fine or coarse aggregates shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 2. Each sample shall be accompanied by complete information as to the source, name of producer, capacity and type of plant. D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: In accordance with ACI 318. E. Water: ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions, oils, acids, alkali, salts, organic material or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, Polyvinyl Acetate, Latex emulsion, or two-component modified epoxy resin. 1. Manufacturers: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. Meadows, W.R., Inc. c. QUIKRETE. d. Sika Corporation. e. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions for review and approval. Refer to section 01 60 00 B. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745 Class A; 15 mil thick extruded polyolefin membrane; type recommended for below grade application. Furnish joint tape recommended by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: a. Stego Wrap by Stego Industries, LLC. b. Substitutions: Not Permitted. C. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 1. Manufacturers: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. b. QUIKRETE. c. Sika Corporation. d. Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions for review and approval. Refer to section 01 60 00 D. Curing Compound: 1. A curing compound, which may be sprayed on the surface of the concrete to prevent evaporation of moisture, may be used with the Engineer's prior approval. This curing compound must be compatible with the sealer. 2.4 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Expansion Joint Devices: 1. Paving joints a. Manufacturers: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1) Greenstreak#610 or#628 by Greenstreak, Inc. 2) Substitutions: Permitted. Contractor to submit substitutions for review and approval. Refer to section 01 60 00 B. Expansion Joint Filler Material: 1. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D994; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt; thickness as specified on Drawings; tongue and groove profile. C. Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric, self-leveling polyurethane sealant or as indicated on Drawings. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX A. Select proportions for concrete in accordance with ACI 318 trial mixtures or field experience. B. Provide structural concrete to the following criteria, unless indicated otherwise on Structural Series Drawings: Minimum Max. Slump (in) Cement Maximum Types of Structures Compressive Aggregate Type Water-Cement Strength Size (in) Ratio (f 10 28-day(psi) 3000 1 1/2 6 +/- 1 Type 1 0.5 drilled piers, Normal underream piers 4000 1 4 +/- 1 Type 1 0.45 spread footings and Normal pedestals, mat foundations, columns 4000 3/4 4 +/- 1 Type 1 0.45 slab on grade Normal foundations, suspended slabs, beams, roof slabs, walls, retaining walls 4500 1 4 +/- 1 Type 1 0.42 bulkhead caps, Normal concrete at marine with structures Microsilica C. Provide concrete to the following criteria, unless indicated otherwise on Civil Series Drawings: Class of Minimum Minimum Minimum Maximum Types of Structures Concrete Cement Compressive Flexural Water-Cement Content Strength (f'c) (Beam) Ratio (sacks/CY) 28-day(psi) Strength (fr) (gal./sack) 7-day(psi) (wt. ratio) A 5.0 3000 N/A 6.5 0.58 driveways, sidewalks, curb & ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 gutter, header curbs, curb ramps, curb inlets, valley gutters, storm water manholes, collars for manholes and valves, manhole footings, sign post and fence post footings, channel lining, riprap, safety end treatment, thrust blocks and bollards B 4.5 2500 N/A 8.0 0.71 concrete cradle for Class A pipe bedding, concrete pipe collar for RCP C 6.0 3600 N/A 6.0 0.53 cast-in-place reinforced concrete box(RCB)culverts (except top slab for direct traffic culverts), headwalls, wingwalls, aprons for box culverts, grate inlets, post inlets,junction boxes, low flow channel sections, cast-in-place bridge abutments and interior bents, concrete parapets S 6.5 4000 570 5.0 0.45 cast-in-place top slab for direct traffic culverts, cast-in- lace bridge slabs P 5.5 4400 570 5.0 0.45 concrete pavement D. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water/cement ratio is not exceeded. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the concrete being within the permissible ranges of slump. E. Average Compressive Strength Reduction: Not permitted. F. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. When a truck mixer is used for delivery of concrete, no water from the truck water system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of the mixing water, except when on arrival at the job site the slump of the concrete is less than that specified. 2. Certification: The manufacturer of the concrete shall furnish to the Contractor with each batch of concrete before unloading at the site, a delivery ticket on which is printed, stamped, or written the following information: a. Name of ready mix batch plant. b. Serial number of ticket. c. Date and truck number. d. Name of Contractor. e. Designation of job. f. Class or designation of concrete. g. Amount of concrete (cubic yards). h. Time loaded. i. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials. j. Type, name and amount of admixture. G. Site Mixed Concrete: Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 318. H. Mortar Mixes for Concrete Finishes: 1. Mortar Mix for F4 Finish: Consist of 1 part cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand passing Number 100 screen, mixed with enough water and emulsified bonding agent to have consistency of thick cream. 2. Mortar Mix for F5 Finish: Consist of 1 part cement to 1-1/2 parts of sand which passes Number 16 screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere or move from position with placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and epoxy as indicated on Drawings. C. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates. D. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed. E. Before beginning work, the contractor shall inform the Engineer fully on the methods of construction, which he proposes to follow, including the amount and character of the equipment which he plans to use on the work. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 8 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Contractor is responsible for the safety and correctness of his method of construction, and for the adequacy of his equipment to carry out and complete the work in accordance with the contract documents. Concurrence on the part of the Engineer in any proposed method of construction, approval of equipment or the approval of concrete form plans shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of his responsibility to provide for the safety of workers and the public. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 318. B. Notify testing laboratory and Engineer minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of operations. Engineer shall be permitted to inspect the forms, reinforcing steel placement and the preparations for placing the concrete with ample time for Contractor to correct any and all noted deficiencies before concrete arrives on site. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, and other cast-in items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. When it is necessary to continue mixing, placing and finishing concrete after daylight hours, the work area shall be brilliantly lighted so that all operations are plainly visible. F. In general, concrete placing shall be so regulated that all finishing will be completed during daylight hours. G. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints and seal watertight in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. H. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing steel. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas and seal watertight in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. I. Apply sealants in joints in accordance with Section 07 90 00. J. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final position. Prevent segregation of mix. K. Concrete placed with a tremie pipe shall not be allowed to free fall more than 6 feet, with the exception of concrete piers. L. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints. M. Consolidate concrete immediately after placing by use of internal concrete vibrators supplemented by hand spading, rodding and tamping. 1. Air entrained concrete shall not be vibrated for more than 12 seconds. 2. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete inside forms. 3. The vibrating equipment shall at all times be adequate in number of units and power to properly consolidate all concrete. 4. Duration of vibration shall be limited to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing objectionable segregation. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 9 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5. Vibrators shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. 6. Where conditions make consolidation difficult or where reinforcement is congested, batches of mortar containing the same proportions of cement, sand, and water used in the concrete shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch. N. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. O. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. P. Do not interrupt successive placement between planned/approved joint locations; do not permit cold joints to occur. 1. A cold joint, as defined by ACI CT, is a joint or discontinuity resulting from a delay in placement of sufficient duration to preclude intermingling and bonding of the material. Q. Contractor shall submit construction joint placement plans for Engineer approval prior to placing concrete. R. Saw cut joints within 8 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness or 3/4 inch minimum, whichever is greater, or as specified on Drawings. S. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3.4 TRANSPORTING REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete mixed in stationary mixers or paving mixers and transported by non-agitating equipment shall be placed in the forms within 45 minutes from the time ingredients are charged into the mixing drum. B. Concrete that is truck mixed or transported in truck mixers or truck agitators shall be delivered to the site of the work and discharge completed in the forms within the time specified in ASTM C94. C. Transit-mixed concrete that is completely mixed at the site of concrete placement or batched cement and aggregates transported to mixers shall be placed in forms within 90 minutes after cement has been added. D. Concrete shall be placed in forms within 15 minutes after discharge from the mixer at the job site. 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING— DESCRIPTION A. Cement for Finishes: 1. Addition of white cement may be required to produce finish which matches color of concrete to be finished. B. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Use following finishes for vertical concrete surfaces as indicated in section "Concrete Finishing —Application": 1. F1 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work and fill depressions 1 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 2. F2 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work, remove fins, fill depressions 1/2 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 10 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. F3 Finish: Repair defective work, remove fins, offsets, and curing membrane, and grind projections smooth. Fill depressions 1/4 inch or larger in depth or width and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane. 4. F4 Finish: a. Same as specified for F3 finish, and in addition fill depressions and holes 1/16 inch or larger in width with mortar. b. "Brush-Off' sandblast surfaces prior to filling holes to expose all holes near surface of the concrete. c. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and depressions while surfaces are still damp. d. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over entire area with clean burlap, sponge rubber floats, or trowels. e. Do not let any material remain on surfaces, except that within pits and depressions. f. Wipe surfaces clean and moist cure. 5. F5 Finish: Receive same finish specified for F3 Finish, and in addition, receive special stoned finish in accordance with the following requirements: a. Remove forms and perform required repairs, patching, and pointing as specified in this Section. b. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush and rub with hard wood float dipped in water containing 2 pounds of Portland cement per gallon. c. Rub surfaces until form marks and projections have been removed. d. Spread grindings from rubbing operations uniformly over surface with brush in such manner as to fill pits and small voids. e. Moist cure brushed surfaces and allow to harden for 3 days: 1) After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with carborundum stone of approximately Number 50 grit until entire surfaces have smooth texture and uniform color. 2) Continue curing for remainder of specified time. f. If any concrete surface is allowed to become too hard to finish in above specified manner, sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed to view, whether finished or not. 1) While still damp, rub over surface, plastic mortar, as specified for brushed surfaces and handstoned with Number 60 grit carborundum stone, using additional mortar for brushed surfaces until surface is evenly filled without excess of mortar. 2) Continue stoning until surface is hard. 3) After moist curing for 3 days, make surface smooth in texture and uniform in color by use of Number 50 or Number 60 carborundum stone. 4) After stoning, continue curing until 7 day curing period is completed. C. Horizontal Concrete: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, use following finishes for horizontal concrete surfaces as indicates in section "Concrete Finishing—Application": 1. S1 Finish: Screed to grade and leave without special finish. 2. S2 Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish. 3. S3 Finish: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks. Provide smooth finish free of all irregularities. 4. S4 Finish: Steel trowel finish, without local depressions or high points, followed by a light hairbroom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or brushes. Perform brooming parallel to slab drainage. Provide resulting finish that is rough enough to provide nonskid finish. Finish shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Owner and/or Engineer. 5. S5 Finish: Nonslip abrasive: After concrete has been screeded level and hardened enough to support a man standing on a board, sprinkle abrasive from shake screen into surface at a uniform rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square feet of surface area, wood float into finish, then trowel abrasive into surface with steel trowel properly exposing abrasive in surface as required to provide non slip surface. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 11 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING -APPLICATION A. Finish concrete surfaces as indicated on the Drawings. B. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. C. Defects: Concrete with excessive honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcing, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects)which affect the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished as specified above. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 308.1 and ACI 318. C. Curing shall be continuous for a minimum of 7 days or until 70% of the specified compressive strength has been obtained. D. Contractor shall submit the curing method selected from those published in ACI 308.1 to the Engineer of Record for approval. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field testing will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory, retained by the Owner at his expense, in accordance with ACI 318. 1. Two copies of all test reports shall be furnished directly to the Owner. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed testing firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Engineer for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Concrete Inspections: 1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. 2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures. E. Strength Test Samples: 1. Sampling Procedures: ASTM C172. 2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31, cylinder specimens, standard cured. 3. Sample concrete and make one set of four 6-inch diameter by 12-inch long test cylinders or five 4-inch diameter by 8-inch long test cylinders for every 50 cu yds or less of each class of concrete placed each day, or any fraction thereof. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 12 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 5 sets of cylinders, take samples from five randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 5 batches are used. 5. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting and field cure. F. Field Testing: 1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143. 2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173 or ASTM C231. 3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064. 4. Measure slump and temperature at commencement of concrete placement, for each compressive strength concrete sample, and for each batch (minimum)or every 10 cubic yards (maximum)of concrete. 5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete at commencement of concrete placement, for each compressive strength concrete sample, and for each batch (minimum)or every 10 cubic yards (maximum)of concrete. G. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Test Method: ASTM C39. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Test one cylinder at 7 days. 4. Test two 6-inch diameter by 12-inch long cylinders or three 4-inch diameter by 8-inch long cylinders at 28 days. 5. Retain one cylinder for testing when requested by Engineer. 6. Dispose of remaining cylinders when testing is not required. H. Core Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Sampling and Testing Procedures: ASTM C42. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Drill three cores for each failed strength test from concrete represented by failed strength test. 3.9 DEFECTS A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Concrete with honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcing, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects)which affects the serviceability or structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. 1. As described in ACI 309R, honeycomb occurs when the mortar does not fill the space between the coarse aggregate particles and when it shows on a surface, it is necessary to chip out the area and make a repair. C. The surface of the concrete shall not vary in alignment more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347. D. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished as specified in the "Concrete Finishing" paragraphs above. E. Patch imperfections as directed by Engineer. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 13 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, design strength, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. D. Failure to Meet Strength Requirements: 1. The Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions, or to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens, which failed. 2. If additional curing does not give the strength required, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or removal and replacement of those portions which fail to develop required strength. 3. Specimens will be considered to have failed when average strength for any period of placing is less than values indicated in the followin table: No. Days Consecutive Placing of Percent of Strength Specified 6gy One Class of Concrete 1 85 2 95 3 95 5 or more 100 4. When additional curin of ortonS of the Structure IS ordered b the Engineer, it shall be g p Y done at Contractor's expense and no claim for extra compensation for such additional curing shall be allowed. 5. In no case shall the Contractor be required to provide such additional curing beyond a total of 21 days, except where average strength of specimens, representing concrete placed on any three consecutive days, fall below 80% of the value specified in the "Concrete Mix" section of this specification. In this case, curing shall be continued until cores drilled from portions of the structure involved show an average strength equal to that specified in the "Concrete Mix"section of this specification. Cores shall have a diameter of approximately three times the maximum size aggregate and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C42. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 14 of 14 Cast-In-Place Concrete Phase 2 Section 03 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 03 60 00 GROUTING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment necessary for installation of non-shrink grout at the following locations: 1. Under steel column bearing plates. 2. Masonry Joints. 3. Elsewhere as indicated on the drawings. B. Related Work: 1. Section 04 22 00—Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature on grout proposed for use. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver in original unopened containers and store in a dry place under cover. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature of 40 degrees F. or above for at least 72 hours following placement. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Grout shall be factory premixed grout conforming to ASTM C1107, Grades B or C. Subject to compliance with requirements, use one of the following: 1. Non-Metallic Grout: Where grout is exposed to view or weathering: "Five Star Grout"— Five Star Products, Inc. "Supergrout 1000"—Conchem, Inc. "Master Flow 713" or"Set Grout"— Master Builders, Inc. "Crystex"—L&M Chemicals "Euco NS"— Euclid Chemical Company 2. Metallic Grout: Where covered by earth, concrete or masonry, or otherwise concealed from view, Contractor, at his option, may use: "Embeco 885" or Embeco 636"— Master Builders, Inc. "Ferro-Grout"—L&M Chemicals ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Grouting Phase 2 Section 03 60 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 "Firmix"— Euclid Chemical Co. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. Contractor shall inspect all Work for location and readiness for grouting. Do not proceed until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 2. Remove all grease, oil, curing compounds and foreign and loose materials from concrete and surfaces to receive grout. 3. Mechanically roughen concrete surfaces to receive grout. Remove all loose materials after roughening. 4. Wash concrete surfaces clean and saturate with water for 24 hours prior to placement of cement based grout. Remove excess water after saturation. 5. Build edge forms and/or dams as required. B. Grouting: 1. Provide and maintain protection to ensure that Work to be grouted is maintained at proper temperature and in its set position during the grouting operation and until the grout has thoroughly hardened. 2. Clean and moisten surfaces to be grouted. Remove all free water immediately prior to placing grout. 3. Mix and install grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Completely fill all spaces to be grouted. 4. After grout has acquired its initial set, trim to lower edge of bearing place and remove excess material. Consolidate exposed edges to a dense, uniform surface. C. Curing: Cure grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Grouting Phase 2 Section 03 60 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Work consists of furnishing all labor, material and equipment necessary for completion of the following work: 1. Structural steel framing and support members, tension rods or cables, pipe columns, struts and braces complete with required braces, connection plates, welds, washers, bolts, nuts, shims, anchor bolts and templates. 2. Base plates, cap plates, and shear stud connectors. 3. Erecting, connecting, field welding and adjusting for plumb and level. 4. All other work normally related to the above, as shown on drawings, or specified under this section. B. Related Work: 1. Grouting Under Base and Bearing Plates: (See Structural Drawings) 2. Support Framing for Openings in Metal Deck: Section 052000— Miscellaneous Metal 3. Steel Supports for Mechanical or Electrical Equipment: Division 15 and 16 Sections. C. Work Furnished But Not Installed: Anchor Bolts, Anchor Bolt Templates, Loose Bearing Plates and Embedded Items: Installed under Division 3 and/or Division 4 Sections. D. Definitions: 1. Structural Steel: That work defined in Section 2.1 of the AISC "Code of Standard Practice", as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Erector Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication and erection of structural steel for projects of similar size and difficulty. Subject to approval of the Owner. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Welder Qualifications: Welding shall be done only by welding operators currently qualified according to AWS D1.1. C. Reference Standards: Meet requirements of the following standards; use the latest editions including supplements. These standards are general in nature and are adopted except where superseded by this specification. 1. Design, Detailing, Fabrication and Erection: AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Buildings, latest edition adopted by governing building code. 2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Unless noted otherwise, the Owner's Designated Representatives are assigned as follows, in accordance with Section 1.2 of the Standard. a. Sections 6 and 7: References to "the Owner" shall be defined as the "General Contractor" except in sections 6.1.3, 7.11.3.3 and 7.11.4 where "the Owner" is the owner of the proposed structure. 3. Welding: Meet requirements of AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1, latest edition. 4. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of AISC Allowable Stress Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, latest edition. 5. Exposed Structural Steel: Meet requirements of AISC for"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", Section 10: Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel, latest edition. 6. Surface Preparation: Meet requirements of specifications contained in Steel Structures Painting Council's Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, latest edition. D. Meetings: 1. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and attend a meeting prior to beginning steel erection at the site. E. Unidentified Members: Structural steel members shown on plans but not identified as to size, section and/or material grade will be included in the bid price for the work by assuming sizes, sections and/or material grades, shown for similarly loaded members having approximately the same overall length. All such members and their associated cost, will be identified in the bid for the work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop and Erection Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Clearly indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, anchorages, ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 framed openings, size and type of fasteners, cambers and clearances. b. Indicate welded connections using Standard AWS welding symbols. State AWS pre-qualified weld designations for all types of groove welds used. Clearly indicate net weld lengths, sizes and welding sequences. 2. Erection Drawings: a. Submit erection drawings defining location of each assembly or piece within the structure. Provide sufficient details to describe all field welding. Clearly identify all high strength bolts not required to be tensioned (a snug tight as defined by AISC). If drawings are submitted in multiple packages, each submittal shall be complete with all erection drawings, details and piece drawings. Subsequent submittals of erection drawings which modify or add to earlier versions will be clearly marked. b. Submit setting drawings for bolts and plates installed by others. Submit this information to the concrete contractor so it may be utilized for installation of such items. 3. Reproduction of the Contract Documents is not permitted. B. Contractor Requested Changes: 1. All contractor requests for substitutions of member sizes or material grades or modification of the strength or configuration of the structural framing for the contractor's convenience, erection sequence, or construction equipment, shall be subject to the Owner's written approval. Additional costs for such changes shall be borne by the contractor. 2. Contractor shall compensate the structural engineer of record to make these changes or review the design calculations of others and modify the construction documents. C. Welding Procedure: Submit 1 copy welding procedure to engineer for record and one copy to the testing agency for review. Welding Procedures shall minimize distortions due to welding and through thickness stresses due to restraint of welding shrinkage. 1. Submit welding procedure specifications per AWS D1.1 for all groove welds. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials to be installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates, directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. Templates shall be permanently marked with column center lines and north arrow. B. Storage of Structural Steel: Support structural steel members which are stored at the project site above ground on platforms, skids, or other supports, upright to ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weather-tight and dry place, until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. Where materials are to be stored on structure, store in a manner that will not cause distortion or damage the supporting structure. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS Protection: Protect any adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated, meet requirements of ASTM A-992 Structural Steel, (FY=50 ksi) latest edition. B. High-Strength Structural Steel: Meet requirements of ASTM A-572 High- Strength Structural Steel, Grade 50 with special requirements per AISC Technical Bulletin #3 unless other grade is shown on the drawings. C. Unfinished Bolts: Meet requirements of ASTM A-307, Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners, latest edition, with hexagonal heads and nuts. D. High Strength Bolts: Meet requirements of ASTM A-325 High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, latest edition, including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers. E. High Strength Bolt Direct Tension Indicators: Meet requirements of ASTM F959, latest edition. F. Pipe: Meet requirements of ASTM A-53, Type E or S, Grade B, ASTM A-500, Grade B, or ASTM A-501 excluding furnace butt welding, latest edition. Black finish except where indicated to be galvanized. G. Tube: Meet requirements of ASTM A-500, Grade B, latest edition. H. Headed Anchor Studs (HD.A.S.): Meet requirements of AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code, latest edition, Type B. I. Deformed Anchor Studs (D.A.S.): Made from ASTM A-108 low carbon steel cold worked and deformed per ASTM A-496. Minimum yield stress = 60 ksi; minimum tensile strength = 80 ksi. Minimum bend diameters are per ASTM A-496. J. Rebar: Rebar used for welding shall meet the requirements of ASTM A706. Rebar bends shall meet the minimum bend diameters listed in ACI 318, latest edition. K. Drilled-In Inserts: Size and type as noted on the drawings. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 L. Filler Metals for Welding: Meet requirements of AWS D1.1, 70 Series. M. Shop Paint: Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC 13, min. 2 coats. N. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for touch-up of welds and weld areas. Comply with MIL-P-21035 (ships) or SSPC Paint-10. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent practicable, in accordance with reference standards cited herein and final shop drawings. 2. Use detailing and fabrication procedures that account for distortion and shrinkage due to welding processes, both in the shop and in the field. 3. Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation. Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. B. Connections: 1. Provide connections as shown or noted on the drawings. The design of connections not shown or noted shall be provided by the Owner upon request. Standard framing connections not shown shall be bid on the basis of connection tables on pages 4-9 thru 4-31 of the AISC "A Manual of Steel Construction",ASD. 2. Alternate connections designed by the Contractors Engineer may be submitted with one set of stamped calculations for record. 3. Alternate connection concepts shall be pre-approved during bidding. 4. All connections shall be designed for 110% of the value noted on plan. C. Shop Painting: 1. Surface Preparation: After fabrication and shop assembly, clean off all loose rust, loose mill scale and weld spatter, slag or flux deposits in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: a. Surfaces to be covered in the completed structure: SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning". b. Surfaces exposed to weather in the completed structure: SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 2. Painting: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Immediately after surface preparation, apply specified primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils per coat. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. Omit shop paint at locations as follows: a. Surfaces embedded in concrete. b. Surfaces to receive welding. C. Contact surfaces in high-strength bolted friction-type (slip-critical) connections. d. Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 3. Galvanizing: Where shown on the drawings, structural members shall be galvanized in accordance with the ASTM A-123, A-153, A-386 or ASTM A-563 requirements. D. Marking: Mark all members in protected, plainly visible locations in accordance with reference numbers on setting diagrams. The member work point at each end of columns shall be determined and marked in the shop with a center punch or other acceptable means. Marking shall be placed on the flanges and web at each end of columns. Work point shall be as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 7.11.2(a). E. Cutting and Fitting: Perform all necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of other trades. Secure correct information for required openings both before and after steel is delivered. No cutting or drilling will be permitted on the job without the acceptance of the Owner. F. Finishing: Completely assemble and weld subassemblies with finished surfaces before finishing. G. Welding: Comply with AISC specifications and latest American Welding Society standards. Welds not specified shall be 3/16" fillet continuous but not less than the AISC minimum based on the thickness of the parts joined. H. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain the required lengths will not be permitted without prior acceptance of the Owner unless shown on the drawings. I. Cambering: Camber beams and girders where indicated on the drawings. J. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights called for are not readily available, secure the Owner's acceptance of suitable sizes in time to prevent delay due to such substitutions. K. Stud Connectors: Automatically end weld according to AWS D1.1. Shop weld where possible. Thoroughly clean surface where stud is to be attached. Remove mill scale by grinding or sandblasting where it is sufficiently thick to ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 interfere with proper welding. Refer to Section 05320 for studs field installed by welding through deck. 2.3 ANCHORS A. General: Provide all anchors for columns, beams, plates, etc., as shown on drawings, shop drawings or as required. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554—36 & 55 ksi yield strength, with suitable nuts and plain washers. Size and length as shown on drawings, hooked unless otherwise indicated. Other material may be used as permitted by current AISC standards. C. Expansion Anchors: Wedge type with current ICBO approved and published ICBO Research Report. Complete with required nuts, washers and manufacturer's installation instructions. Size and manufacturer as indicated on drawings. 1. Interior Use: For use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture, provide carbon steel anchors conforming to ASTM A307 with zinc plating in accordance with FS 22-Z-235. 2. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments, and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A133. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel bolts with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 3. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Owner, provide one of the following: "Kwik-Bolt II"—Hilti Fastening Systems "Parabolt"—Molly Fastener Group "Red Head Wedge Anchor"— Phillips D. Adhesive Anchors: Threaded carbon steel rod conforming to ASTM A307 complete with required nuts, washers, adhesive system and manufacturer's installation instructions. Current ICBO approval and published ICBO Research Report required. Size and manufacturer as indicated on drawings. 1. Exterior or Exposed Use: In exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior cladding materials, provide galvanized or stainless steel anchors. Galvanized anchors shall conform to ASTM A153. Stainless steel anchors shall be Series 300 stainless steel threaded rods with Series 300 or Type 18-8 stainless steel nuts and washers. 2. Where anchor manufacturer is not indicated, subject to compliance with requirements and acceptance by the Owner, provide one of the following: "HVA Adhesive Anchor"— Hilti Fastening Systems "Parabond Capsule Anchor"—Molly Fastener Group ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 3— EXECUTION 1.1 INSPECTION Prior to start of erection, the steel erector shall check the elevation for all bearing surfaces and the location of all embedded anchor bolts and connection plates, and report all deviations from the Contract Documents to the General Contractor. Do not proceed with erection until all unacceptable conditions are corrected. 1.2 PREPARATION Field Measurements: Take measurements on site as required for correct fabrication and installation. Fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit of structural steel. 1.3 INSTALLATION A. Erection: 1. General: Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications, including supplements, with additional requirements of this section. 2. Base and Bearing Plates: Set base and bearing plates level and at correct elevations on roughened surfaces cleaned of all bond reducing materials. Temporarily support on steel wedges or shims until supported members are plumbed and grouting is completed. 3. Field Assembly: a. Assemble structural steel frames to the lines and elevations indicated within the specified erection tolerances. b. Align the various members forming a complete frame or structure after assembly and adjust accurately before being fastened. C. Measure and adjust for distortion and shrinkage of field welded assemblies as erection proceeds. d. Splice only where indicated on drawings. 4. Field Connections: Make field connections with bolts, high-strength bolts or field welding unless otherwise indicated. Tighten all high-strength bolts used in column splices, connections of beams and girders to columns, and where noted on the drawings to provide the minimum tension shown in Table J3.7 of AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, ASD," June 1, 1989. Clean existing surfaces before welding to existing steel. No drifting or cutting to enlarge unfair holes will be allowed. Make minor corrections by reaming. Serious defects may not be corrected in the field but shall be called to the attention of the Owner for a decision as to the method and/or procedure. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 8 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5. Compression Splices: Fasten splices in compression after bearing surfaces have been brought into contact. Clean bearing surfaces before assembling. Close all gaps 1/32"wide or greater by driving non-tapered mild steel shims full depth of the bearing surface along the full length of the gap. 6. Temporary Bracing: a. Consider all structural steel as non-self-supporting steel frames. Provide suitable temporary bracing as necessary to maintain structural steel in the proper position until permanently secured. Permanently secured is when the structure has its complete gravity and lateral load resisting systems in place including floor and roof diaphragms, vertical bracing and/or shear walls and foundations. Leave temporary bracing in place as required for safety. b. Contractor shall coordinate installation of all non-structural steel items which will load the non-self-supporting structural steel frame. The structural steel frame temporary supports shall resist all loads from these non-structural steel items. 7. Field Modification: Obtain written acceptance from the Owner before the use of flame cutting for field modification or re-fabrication of structural steel. The structural steel fabricator shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field. 8. Drilled-In Inserts: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in accurately drilled holes of required diameter and depth. Where adhesive inserts are used, thoroughly clean hole of all debris and drill dust by wire brushing and compressed air prior to installation of insert and adhesive system. Do not drill holes in concrete until material has achieved full design strength. B. Erection Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice, except as follows: 1. Columns: a. Maximum deviation of column from established column line shall not exceed 1", accumulative from all sources. b. Bases of all columns shall be located on established centerlines (plan dimension)within +/-1/8". Bases shall be at specified elevation +/-1/16". C. Maximum variation between top elevations of all columns shall not exceed '/". Maximum variation between top elevations of any two adjacent columns shall not exceed 1/8" 2. Members Connecting to Columns: a. Horizontal deviation of member working point from position with respect to supporting column working line shall not exceed +/- 1/16"from the location shown on drawings. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 9 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. Elevation deviation of member working point with respect to upper splice line of supporting column shall not exceed +1/8" or —1/4" from the elevation shown on drawings. 3. Cambered Steel Beams: Fabrication camber shall be adjusted to compensate for conditions of shipping, handling and erection. Maximum deviation of vertical camber at mid span of beam after erection, prior to placing deck+3/8", -0" maximum. 4. Other Members: Deviation of member working point horizontal location and elevation with respect to the supporting member shall not exceed +/- 1/16" from the location and elevation shown on the drawings. 5. Leveling and Plumbing: Base leveling and plumbing on a mean temperature of 70 degrees F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Erection Tolerances: 1. Surveys, made by a surveyor with experience on similar projects, employed by the General Contractor and acceptable to the Owner shall be made as follows: a. Determine actual plan location and elevation at the top and bottom of each column immediately upon completion of erection. 2. Survey reports shall be submitted to the Owner within 24 hours after recording the data. Such reports shall, in addition, identify all deviations of member location and/or elevation in excess of allowable tolerances specified. B. Engineer's Inspection: 1. Shop inspection by the Engineer for all columns and 20% of beams and girders shall include examination of steel for straightness and alignment, conformance to length and camber tolerances, fissures, mill scale and other defects and deformities, as described in ASTM A6 and examination of aforementioned fabricated pieces for conformity with approved shop drawings. Testing of welding will be performed as required herein. 2. Field inspection by the Engineer of erected steel will be such as to assure that the work conforms to specified requirements and will include: a. Inspection of field welding as required herein. b. Ascertainment of proper fit and alignment. C. Ascertainment of proper installation and tensioning of bolts. 3. Welding and Materials: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 10 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Inspection of welding by the Engineer will be such as to assure that the work conforms to specified requirements, and will include: (1) Ascertainment that electrodes used for manual shielded metal-arc welding and the electrodes and flux used for submerged arc welding conform to the requirements herein. (2) Ascertainment that the welding is performed only by welding operators and welders who are properly certified. The Testing Agency shall witness such qualification testing of welding operators and welders, as may be required. (3) Ascertainment that the fit-up,joint preparation, size, contour, extent of reinforcement, and length and location of welds conform to specified requirements and the contract drawings, and that no specified welds are omitted or unspecified welds added without approval of the Owner. b. The Engineer shall perform tests in the Fabricator's shop as follows: (1) All welds: 100% visual. (2) All full or partial penetration grove welded connections and splices: 100% ultrasonic. (3) All other welds: 10% magnetic particle. (4) Embedded plates and assemblies manufactured by the steel fabricator shall be tested in the following quantities: (a) Assemblies supporting structural elements: 100%. (5) Test components of those embedded plates and assemblies to be tested as follows: (a) Welded reinforcing bars and deformed anchors: 100% visual 10% magnetic particle. Complete penetration groove welds to reinforcing bars; 100% ultrasonic. (b) Stud connectors shall have all studs visually and acoustically tested. Studs which have visual defects and/or do not ring when struck with a hammer shall be bent 15 degrees. If the bent stud does not fracture, stud is acceptable and may be left bent. (c) Plates: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 11 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 (1) Embedded plates thicker than 3/8"shall be ultrasonically tested along the center line of the plate width. Such tests shall be made after stud/rebar shop welding. (2) Any discontinuity shall be cause for rejection. d. If defective welds are discovered, the remaining uninspected welds shall receive such ultrasonic or magnetic particle inspection as may be required by the Owner. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. e. The welding inspector will have the authority to reject weldments. Such rejection may be based on visual inspection where in his opinion the weldment would not pass a more detailed investigation. f. Reports by the Testing Agency's inspector will contain, as a minimum, an adequate description of each weld tested, the identifying mark of the welder responsible for the weld, critique of any defects noted by visual inspection or testing, and a statement regarding the acceptability of the weld tested, as judged by current A.W.S. standards. Reports shall be distributed as early as possible but not later than one work week after the tests have been performed. The Owner shall be notified by phone if, in the judgement of the inspector, test results require immediate comment. g. Radiographic testing may be substituted for ultrasonic. 4. Bolted Connections: a. Visually inspect all bolted connections to ascertain that all bolts, nuts and required washers have been installed and are of proper type and that all faying surfaces have been brought into snug contract. Verify the specified surface preparation of the faying surface has been correctly prepared. 5. Tensioned High Strength Bolts: a. Standard Bolts: (1) Inspect the bolt tightness of 10% of the bolts (minimum of 2), selected at random in each high strength bolted connection. If rejectable bolts are found in any connection, all remaining bolts in that connection shall be inspected for tightness. Inspection procedure shall be in accordance with "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation (Research Council on Structural Connections, latest edition). ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 12 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. Twist Off(Self-Indicating) Bolts and Bolts with Direct Tension Indicator Washers: (1) Perform a visual inspection of all high strength bolted connections to assure that all torque-off splines have been sheared. For bolts with Direct Tension Indicator Washers, inspect all washers with feeler gage to assure that all washers have been deformed the correct amount. (2) When splines are not sheared, or Indicator Washers are not properly deformed, the Testing Agency shall determine that proper bolt tension has been achieved by the application of a properly calibrated testing torque or the Contractor may, at his option, remove and replace all bolts with unsheared splines and all bolts without properly deformed Indicator Washers. All cost of additional inspection required by this paragraph shall be borne by the Contractor. 6. Drilled-In Inserts: a. Self-Expanding Inserts: The Testing Agency shall inspect self- expanding, drilled-in inserts shown on the structural drawings as follows: (1) Prior to installation, the Testing Agency shall determine that the installing contractor has the proper materials and equipment for drilling holes in the receiving surface of required diameter and length. (2) All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that they have been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. b. Adhesive-Bonded Inserts: The Testing Agency shall inspect adhesive-bonded, drilled-in inserts as follows: (1) The Testing Agency shall be present at the site to observe the installation of the first 10 inserts placed. Such observation shall be to ensure that drilled holes are of required diameter and depth, holes are properly cleaned prior to installation of the insert, and that holes are completely filled with properly mixed adhesive after installation. (2) All inserts shall be visually inspected after installation to ensure that the insert has been installed perpendicular to the receiving surface and to proper depth. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 13 of 13 Structural Steel Phase 2 Section 05 12 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 05 12 43 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE Provide all labor, materials and equipment to accomplish all miscellaneous metal work; including, but not limited to lintels, support angles and frames, their anchorage and other items of ferrous metals indicated or required for completion of the project. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with applicable provisions unless otherwise indicated. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA Show complete details and instructions for fabrication, assembly, and installation. Furnish anchor bolts required for installation in other work; furnish templates for bolt installation. Submit two copies for approval. 1.04 INSERTS AND ANCHORAGES Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be built into other work for installation of miscellaneous metal items; coordinate delivery to job site to avoid delay. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING: A. Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. D. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366. E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, Grade G90 zinc coating. (minimum 2 oz. per square foot of surface area. F. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron (ASTM A 47)or cast steel (ASTM A 27) inserts, with steel bolts, washers and shims; hot dip galvanized. G. Shop Paint: FS TT-P-86, Type II, or, SSPC-Paint 14. Apply to cleaned and degreased steel surfaces at rate to provide a 2.0-mil dry film thickness, minimum 2 coats. H. Galvanizing: ASTM A 386 for a assembled products; A 153 for iron and steel hardware. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Miscellaneous Metal Phase 2 Section 05 12 43 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Shop paint all items not specified to be galvanized after fabrication. B. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. C. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where possible. 3.02 ROUGH HARDWARE Furnish Custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for framing and supporting and anchoring woodwork. Galvanize, unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 LOOSE BEARING PLATES Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as shown. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. Galvanize after fabrication. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS Provide as required to complete work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other work; spaced not more than 24"o.c. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown; continuous welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other work. B. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with bedding mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to three parts sand and only enough water for packing and hydration, or use commercial non-shrink grout material. C. Touch up shop paint after installation. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Miscellaneous Metal Phase 2 Section 05 12 43 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes load bearing and non-load bearing formed steel infill stud framing and bearing floorjoists. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07 21 16— Blanket Insulation. 3. Section 07 90 00—Joint Protection. 4. Section 09 29 00—Gypsum Board. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute: 1. AISI General- Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -General Provisions. 2. AISI Header- Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design. 3. AISI NAS- North American Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 4. AISI PM -Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 2. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code- Steel. 2. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel. D. California Department of Health Services: 1. CA/DHS/EHLB/R-174 - Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. E. Green Seal: 1. GC-03-Anti-Corrosive Paints. F. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers: 1. NAAMM ML/SFA 540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. G. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. SSPC Paint 15- Steel Joist Shop Paint. 2. SSPC Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II - Organic). H. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association: 1. SSMA- Product Technical Information. I. International Building Code (IBC). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Size components to withstand design loads as follows: 1. Wind Load: 90 mph, 3-sec gust; occupancy category II; exposure C; in accordance with IBC 2015 as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1. Exterior Studs: 1:600 of span. 2. Interior Studs: 1:240 of span. C. Wall System: 1. Design to AISI NAS, AISC General, and AISC Header. 2. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 3. Design system to accommodate: a. Construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. b. Expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. 4. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with International Building code (IBC), as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select interior stud thickness to resist minimum 10 psf uniform lateral load and maximum 1/240 deflection. B. Select exterior stud thickness to resist minimum wind pressures created by wind velocity as determined by performance requirements specified and maximum 1/600 deflection. C. Minimum stud thicknesses and strength shall consider any and all component attachment requirements, such as windows, doors, louvers, storefronts, curtain walls, etc. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work. 2. Indicate stud layout. 3. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted or welded framing connections. 4. Submit calculations for loadings and stresses of all metal stud framing, including specially fabricated framing, under Professional engineer's seal licensed in the state of Texas. C. Product Data: Submit data on standard framing members, connections, and connecting elements; describe materials and finish, product criteria, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Mill Certifications: Submit mill certifications for steel delivered to site. Certify steel bare metal thickness in 0.001 inch, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation in 2 inch or 8 inch gauge length, chemical analysis, and galvanized coating thickness. F. Design Data: Submit design calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Texas. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AISI NAS. B. Design shall be in compliance with the IBC and Texas Department of Insurance for Windstorm (where applicable) requirements and shall consider any and all requirements for components to be attached to cold-formed metal framing, such as doors, windows, storefronts, curtain walls, louvers, etc. C. Furnish framing materials in accordance with SSMA- Product Technical Information. D. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Framing: AISI General and AISI NAS. 2. Headers: AISI Header. 3. Trusses: AISI Truss. 4. Wall Studs: AISI WSD. 5. Lateral Design: AISI Lateral. E. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1. Current member of Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. C. Design structural elements under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the state of Texas. D. Form, fabricate, provide, and connect components in accordance with NAAMM ML/SFA 540- Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 01 31 00— Project Management &Coordination: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate placement of components within stud framing system as required. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Manufacturers: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 2. MBA Building Supplies. 3. Nuconsteel, A Nucor Company. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C955. 2.2 FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1003/A1003M; Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated: 1. Grade: As determined by performance requirements specified. 2. Coating: G90. B. Studs: Steel sheet, formed to channel shape, punched web, size as determined by performance requirements specified. 1. 20 gauge minimum for interior non-bearing studs. 2. 18 gauge minimum for interior bearing studs. 3. Refer to structural plans for exterior wall in-fill studs. C. Joists, Purlins: Steel sheet, formed to channel shape, solid web; size and gauge as determined by performance requirements specified. D. Track: Steel sheet, formed to channel shape; same width as studs, tight fit; gauge as determined by performance requirements specified, solid web. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements specified. C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type II Organic. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Self-drilling, Self-tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, hot dip galvanized. B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated, drilled expansion bolts, and cast-in-place anchor rods. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of formed sections of sizes and profiles required. B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements. C. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 31 00— Project Management &Coordination: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces and building framing components are ready to receive Work. C. Verify rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.2 ERECTION OF STUDS A. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall and partition layout. Secure in place with fasteners or by welding at maximum 24 inches oc, or as determined by performance requirements specified, whichever spacing is less. Coordinate installation of acoustic sealant with floor and ceiling tracks, if required. B. Place studs as determined by performance requirements specified; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie, fastener or welding method. C. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door jambs, and window jambs. D. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Erect load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. F. Fully seat axial loaded studs in receiving tracks (maximum 1/16 inch gap between stud and track web). G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Install studs with deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. J. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. L. Touch-up field welds and damaged metallic coatings surfaces with primer to match shop coating. M. Complete framing ready to receive windows, doors, louvers, storefronts, curtain walls, and sheathing. 3.3 ERECTION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A. Install framing components. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. C. Place joists and purlins as determined by performance requirements specified; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports using fastener or welding method. D. Set floor and/or ceiling joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or install load distributing member to top of stud track. F. Install web stiffeners at reaction points. G. Touch-up field welds and damaged metallic coatings surfaces with primer to match shop coating. H. Complete framing ready to receive sheathing. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Indicated Position: +/- 1/8 inch. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Maximum Variation of Members from Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 7 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Phase 2 Section 05 40 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES (Wood framing studs, bearing &non-bearing and joists may be utilized in lieu of cold formed metal framing.) A. Structural &non-structural wall framing. B. Blocking. C. Plywood. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 20 00— Finish Carpentry. B. Section 07 21 16—Blanket Insulation C. Section 07 62 00—Sheet Metal Flashing &Trim 1.3 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee)-Softwood Lumber Standards. B. APA(American Plywood Association). C. NFPA(National Forest Products Association. D. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau). E. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE/WARRANTY A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by SPIB. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. B. Provide/submit manufacturer's standard warranty for Fiber Cement Board products specified herein, or utilized. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB. B. Non-structural Light Framing: No. 2 Yellow Pine. C. Studding: No. 2 Yellow Pine with Fb of not less than 1300 and E of 1,400,000. D. Miscellaneous Framing: No. 2 Yellow Pine. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION CONNECTORS A. Galvanized connectors to anchor framing components shall be shown and detailed on drawings. Simpson or Teco. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations. 2.4 BLOCKING A. Miscellaneous Blocking, Solid Bridging, Etc.: All such wood members in contact with concrete or stucco to be pressure preservative treated; No. 2 Yellow Pine. Isolate treated wood blocking from direct contact with metal studs. B. Roof Blocking: No. 2 Yellow Pine, 19 percent maximum moisture content, preservative ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Rough Carpentry Phase 2 Section 06 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 treatment. 2.5 PLYWOOD A. Bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of plywood which identifies compliance by veneer grade, group number, span rating where applicable, and glue type. B. Sheathing: 1. APA rated Exposure 1 or Exterior; panel grade CD or better. 2. Wall sheathing: a. Minimum 9 mm(11/32 inch)thick with supports 406 mm(16 inches)on center and 12 mm (15/32 inch)thick with supports 610 mm(24 inches)on center unless specified otherwise. b. Minimum 1200 mm(48 inches)wide at corners without corner bracing of framing. 3. Roof sheathing: a. Minimum 9 mm(11/32 inch)thick with span rating 24/0 or 12 mm(15/32 inch)thick with span rating for supports 406 mm(16 inches)on center unless specified otherwise. b. Minimum 15 mm(19/32 inch)thick or span rating of 40/20 or 18 mm(23/32 inch)thick or span rating of 48/24 for supports 610 mm(24 inches)on center. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Place horizontal members, crown side up. D. Construct load bearing framing member's full length without splices. E. Stud walls at 16"o.c.with single 2x sole plate and double top plate (unless indicated otherwise). F. Wood touching concrete shall be treated and have 30 Ib. felt underlayment. 3.2 SHEATHING A. Provide plywood or structural-use panels for sheathing. B. Lay panels with joints staggered,with edge and ends 3 mm(1/8 inch)apart and nailed over bearings as specified. C. Set nails not less than 9 mm(3/8 inch)from edges. D. Install 50 mm by 101 mm(2 inch by 4 inch) blocking spiked between joists, rafters and studs to support edge or end joints of panels. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Rough Carpentry Phase 2 Section 06 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 06 11 40 WOOD BLOCKING 1. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Miscellaneous blocking. B. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ALSC-American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards. B. APA: American Plywood Association. C. AWPA(American Wood Preservers Association)C1 -All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. D. AWPA(American Wood Preservers Association) C20 -Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. E. NFPA: National Forest Products Association. F. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. G. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. H. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. 2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB, WCLIB, WWPA. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Blocking: #2 Yellow Pine, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat where indicated. Isolate treated wood blocking in direct contact with metal studs. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Wood Blocking Phase 2 Section 06 11 40 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. B. Fire Retardant treatment for wood shall be produced by a licensed treatment plant. Fire retardant chemical shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay, shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), shall comply with formulation FR-1 of the current edition of AWPA Standard P49, and shall be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. Treated wood shall have a flamespread of less than 25 when tested in an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 1. Corrosion Properties: Fire retardant treated wood in contact with carbon steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, copper and red brass shall exhibit corrosion rates less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) per year when tested in accordance with Fed. Spec. MIL-L-19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2. 2. Testing: Testing on fire performance, strength and corrosion properties of fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. C. Fire Retardant Treatment: Manufacturer's solution for fire retardant treatment of wood. 1. Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA Standard U1. 3. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. 3.2 SCHEDULES A. Miscellaneous Blocking, Solid Bridging, Etc.: All such wood members in contact with concrete or stucco to be pressure preservative treated; No. 2 Yellow Pine. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Wood Blocking Phase 2 Section 06 11 40 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 06 16 43 GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work in this section includes, but is not limited to: Wall, ceiling and soffit sheathing. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. 05 40 00-Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2. 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry. 3. 06 20 00-Finish Carpentry. 4. 07 90 00-Joint Protection. 5. 09 91 00- Painting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature indicating material composition, thickness, sizes and fire resistance. C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's written certification that product meets specified requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-resistance ratings: Where applicable, provide materials and construction that are identical to those of assemblies whose fire-resistance ratings are indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original packaging, containers and bundles with manufacturer's brand name and identification intact and legible. B. Storage and handling: Store level and handle materials to protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, exposure to weather, breakage and damage to edges. Provide air circulation under covering and around stacks of materials. 1.5 LIMITATIONS A. Do not use sheathing as a base for nailing or mechanical fastening. Fasteners should be flush to the face of the board, not countersunk. B. The use of forced air heaters creates volumes of water vapor which, when not properly vented, can condense on building materials. The use of these type heaters and any resulting damage is not the responsibility of G-P Gypsum. Consult heater manufacturer for proper use and ventilation. Avoid any condition that will create moisture in the air and condensation on the exterior walls during periods when the exterior temperature is lower than the interior. C. When panels are used in slanted wall applications,that portion of the wall must be temporarily protected from the elements by the use of a weather barrier such as#15 felt prior to application of the cladding.Also, exposed wall ends such as may be found in parapets must be covered to prevent water from infiltrating the cavity. D. G-P Gypsum does not warrant and is not responsible or liable for the performance of the cladding or exterior systems applied over sheathing. The suitability and compatibility of any system is the responsibility of the system manufacturer or design authority. E. Do not laminate sheathing to masonry surfaces; use furring strips or framing spaced at manufacturer's specifications. F. Sheathing is not intended for roof applications. G. Sheathing is not intended for tile applications. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 4 Gypsum Sheathing Phase 2 Section 06 16 43 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 H. Sheathing is not a structural product and should not be used in lieu of plywood where required. I. Do not apply sheathing below grade. J. For all installations, design details such as fasteners, sealants and control joints per system specifications must be properly installed per system specifications. Openings and penetrations must be properly flashed and sealed. Failure to do so will void the warranty. K. Sheathing is exceptionally resistant to weather, but it is not intended for immersion in water or sustained exposure to water and moisture. Cascading roof/floor water should be directed away from the sheathing until appropriate drainage is installed. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Materials Warranty: Provide sheathing manufacturer's standard warranty covering sheathing materials for five years commencing on date of purchase. B. Weathering Warranty: Provide sheathing manufacturer's standard warranty covering in- place exposure damage to sheathing for six months commencing on date of purchase by contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEATHING BOARD A. Acceptable Products: 1. 5/8" Dens-Glass Gold sheathing 2. 5/8" Dens-Glass Gold Fireguard sheathing B. Substitutions: As described in Section 01 60 00. C. Characteristics: 1. Size: a. Dens-Glass Gold sheathing: 1/2" (12.7mm)thick by 4' by 8', 9' or 10' (1.9 Ib. per square foot). b. Dens-Glass Gold Fireguard Sheathing: Nominal 5/8" (15.9mm)thick by 4' by 8', 9' or 10' (2.5 Ib. per square foot). 2. Composition: a. Gypsum sheathing manufactured in accordance with ASTM C 1177 with glass mats both sides and long edges, water-resistant treated core. 3. Fire resistance: a. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. b. 1/2" or 5/8" Dens-Glass Gold sheathing: Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. C. 5/8" Dens-Glass Gold Fireguard: Sheathing is rated "Type X" as defined in ASTM C 36 when tested according to ASTM E 119 and can be used as a replacement to any other generic assembly utilizing a 5/8"Type X gypsum board (see GA-600 for numeric assemblies). Dens-Glass Gold Fireguard sheathing is UL classified, Type DGG in UL designs N501, N502, N505, U301, U302, U305, U309, U337, U411, U425, U467, U473, X508, X516. 2.2 WEATHER BARRIER A. See Section 07 25 00—Weather Barriers. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint tape: 2"wide, 1 0x1 0 glass mesh tape. B. Joint compound: G-P Gypsum setting-type joint compound. C. Nails, wood framing: Hot dip, 11-gauge galvanized nails with 7/16" head, 1 1/2" min. length. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 4 Gypsum Sheathing Phase 2 Section 06 16 43 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Screws, metal framing: 1. Type S-12, bugle head, self-tapping, rust-resistant, fine thread for heavy-steel gauge (12 to 22). 2. Type S, bugle head, rust-resistant sharp point and fine thread for light-gauge metal framing or furring. E. Screws, metal or wood framing: 1. Wafer head, rust-resistant, Type S-12 drill or Hi-Lo, min. 1" length. Or Type W rust- resistant, bugle head, coarse thread, sharp point for wood. F. Sealants, caulk and tape: 1. Dow Corning 795 or equivalent; Pecora 895 or equivalent. 2. Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent; Pecora AC-20 acrylic latex sealant; GE Silicone Silpruf Sealant; Tremco Dymonic 3. 2"wide 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equivalent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Examine sub framing; verify that surface of framing and furring members to receive sheathing does not vary more than 1/4"from the place of faces of adjacent members. 3.2 SHEATHING A. Provide sheathing where indicated on drawings. Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable instructions in GA-253 and ASTM C 1280. B. Install Dens-Glass Gold sheathing with gold side out. C. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints. D. Wood framing:Attach Dens-Glass Gold sheathing to wood framing with nails spaced 4" o.c. at perimeter for racking shear resistance; 8" o.c. at perimeter where there are framing supports and where racking shear resistance is not required; and 8"o.c. along intermediate framing in field for both conditions. E. Metal framing:Attach Dens-Glass Gold sheathing to metal framing with screws spaced 8" o.c. at perimeter where there are framing supports; and 8" o.c. along intermediate framing in field. F. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink. G. Locate fasteners minimum 3/8"from edges and ends of sheathing panels. H. Building paper: If required, install building paper or equal with flashing around openings. I. Finishing: 1. Seal fasteners using Dow Corning 795 or Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent. 2. Finish joints using Dow Corning 795 or Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent. Reinforce with 2"wide 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equivalent. 3.3 CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Joint treatment and finish preparation: 1. Painted ceilings and soffits a. Apply joint tape over joints and embed in setting-type joint compound specified. b. Skim coat surface with setting-type joint compound for smooth finish. C. Prime and paint with exterior grade, good quality paints. Caution: THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS CONTINUOUS FILAMENT FIBERGLASS Fiber released during normal handling of this product can cause skin, eye and respiratory irritation. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 4 Gypsum Sheathing Phase 2 Section 06 16 43 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Avoid breathing dust and contact with skin and eyes. Follow these standard work practices: •Wear long-sleeved, loose-fitting clothing, gloves and eye protection. • Use a respirator, such as a 3M Model 9900 or equivalent. •Wash exposed areas with soap and warm water after handling. •Wash work clothes separately from other clothing; rinse washer thoroughly. Operations which generate high airborne fiber concentrations (over 10 fibers/cc) require additional respiratory protection. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 4 Gypsum Sheathing Phase 2 Section 06 16 43 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework. B. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09 91 00—Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. AWI -Quality Standards. B. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. D. HPMA (Hardwood Plywood Manufacturer's Association) HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. E. NHLA(National Hardwood Lumber Association). F. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Premium quality. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 6000. B. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Trim: Pine or Fir. B. Wood Window Sills: Birch. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Finish Carpentry Phase 2 Section 06 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.2 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI laminate manufacturer to suit application. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel, galv. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of Yellow Pine species, No. 2. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES A. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. 2. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3. Install trim with nails at 6 inch on center. Wall adhesive by gun application. B. Miscellaneous Carpentry Items 1. Provide/install miscellaneous wood trim and 1X2 wood trim at gypsum board wall juncture with exposed gypsum board ceilings. 2. Provide/install wood window sills at interior. 3.3 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09 91 00. C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Finish Carpentry Phase 2 Section 06 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry. B. Section 06 20 00— Finish Carpentry. C. Section 07 90 00—Joint Protection. D. Division 22; Plumbing fixtures. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Woodwork Institute (AWI) B. ANSI/BHMA A156.9 -Cabinet Hardware. AWI -Quality Standards. C. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood. D. FS MMM-A-130 -Adhesive, Contact. E. NEMA LD3- High Pressure Decorative Laminates. F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. ANSI -208.2 1986 Medium Density Fiberboard 48 Ib. G. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. H. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. I. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard. J. ANSI -A208.1 - 1989 Industrial Particleboard 45 Ib. K. NEMA LD3 - 1985 American Laminators Association ALA 1988 Thermoset Melamine panels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work to premium quality in accordance with "Quality Standards"of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 1. Section 400B for Custom Laminate Clad Casework. 2. Section 1600B Modular Plastic Clad Casework. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, samples and product data under Special Provisions requirements. B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods,joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to r receive the work. Protect items from weather while in transit. B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with a constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum relative humidity of 60 to 80 percent. PART2 PRODUCTS ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 4 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets Phase 2 Section 06 41 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.1 CASEWORK- LAMINATE CLAD A. AWI Premium Grade B. Construction. Details shall conform to Flush Overlay without Face Frame. All cabinet hardware shall be furnished and installed by the casework manufacturer. C. Identification of Parts 1. Exposed Parts-Surfaces visible when: a) Drawer fronts and doors are closed. b) Behind clear glass doors. C) Bottoms of cabinets are 42" or more above finished floor. d) Tops of cabinets are below 78" above finish floor. 2. Semi-Exposed Parts-Surface visible when: a) Drawers/Doors are in the open position. b) Bottoms of cabinets are more than 30" and less than 42" above finish floor. 3. Concealed Surfaces-Surfaces are concealed when: a) Surfaces are not visible after installation. b) Bottoms of cabinets are less than 30" above finish floor. C) Tops of cabinets are over 78" above finish floor and are not visible from an upper level. d) Stretchers, blocking and/or components are concealed by drawers. 2.2 CABINET MATERIALS A. Body Members. Tops, ends, partitions, bottoms, rails 3/4". B. Shelves. 3/4" Industrial Particleboard 45 Ib. for spans up to 36". 1" Industrial Particleboard 45 Ib. for spans up to 48". C. Backs. 1/4" particleboard with backer. D. Doors and Drawer Fronts. 3/4" MDF medium density fiberboard. E. Drawers. 1/2 FAS Grade hardwood birch or red oak for sides, back, and sub fronts. 1/4" birch or oak plywood for bottoms. 1/4" laminated safety or 1/4" tempered. F. High pressure decorative laminate (HPDL)Type I. Application per manufacturers' specifications. All plywood components shall have HPDL covering as follows: Brand and color as selected by Architect-.050 (1/16)thickness for full wall, splashes above 6" countertop solid resin splash. .030 vertical grade HPDI for exposed ends, doors, shelves, upper cabinet bottoms, exposed back and support panels. .020 HPDL cabinet liner, almond color for all semi-exposed surfaces at sink base cabinets and backs of doors and drawers. .020 back sheet, HPDL brown for a concealed area. The Architect will select plastic laminate colors from manufacturer's full range of solid colors, standard patterns and special patterns. G. Countertops. For all sink and lavatory tops: (select). H. Semi-exposed surfaces other than sink cabinets to be 3/4" melamine panel equal to Roseburg "RMP" Resin Tite". Almond or white as selected by Architect. Vinyl coated boards not acceptable. I. Edge-banding - For all components parts. Apply .050 (1/16) Heavy Duty PVC Banding of color and texture to match HPDL. J. Hardware. 1. Hinges -5 knuckle institutional grade Heavy Duty Concealed. 2. Catches - Epco 592 or equal. Doors over 36" 3 per leaf, over 72" 4 per leaf. 3. Pulls- Stanley 4484 26D over brass or equal. 4. Adjustable shelf- KV#256 clip on #255 standards, recessed flush. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 4 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets Phase 2 Section 06 41 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5. Drawer Guides - KV#1429 full extension (100#cap.). 6. Under Mount Slides— KV#8000P20. 7. Locks 5 pin Tumbler master or grand master as needed. National#8053 for doors, #8060 for drawers, elbow catch Ives A-2 at inactive pair. 8. Adjustable Shelves on Wall - KV#80 Standards Light Duty KV#87 Heavy Duty KV#180 Brackets Light Duty KV#187 Heavy Duty Brackets As selected by Architect 9. Hardware Schedule: a. Each cabinet door to have: 2 hinges 1 catch 1 pull 1 lock at each single base cabinet door b. Each drawer to have: 1 pull 1 set drawer slide 1 lock at each drawer C. Each computer cabinet to have: 1 set under mount slide 2.3 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative: CCA; AWPB Standard LP-Z or LP-ZZ type manufactured by Wolman. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate casework per AWI specifications and as specified. B. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. C. Apply HPDL finish in full sheets. Tops up to 12'-0" long shall be one piece. Fit corners and V-joints to hairline finish. Secure joints with mechanical fasteners. Locate counter joints minimum of 24" from sink cutouts. D. Cabinet Construction: Concealed Joint 1. Construction doweled or blind dado, NO visible fasteners. Ends, side panels, and rails shall have minimum 8mm dowel, 128mm on center. 2. Cabinet back recessed and dadoed into sides. 3. Provide nailer for attachment to walls. 4. Sink cabinet back shall be removable. 5. Sink base cabinets to have corners reinforced at top with metal corner braces. Braces to facilitate attachment of counter top to cabinet while reinforcing ends to front and back rails. 6. Back splashes shall be integral with countertop. 7. Cabinet bases shall be exterior glue, plywood frame front and back rails with intermediate jumper- maximum 24" o.c. 8. Scribes - provide scribes where cabinets butt walls with maximum 1"width scribe. 9. Counter tops at sinks to have coved back splash square corner at all other locations. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 4 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets Phase 2 Section 06 41 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 10. All cabinet doors and drawer fronts must have .020 cabinet liner balance to .030 vertical face. 11. Attach drawer fronts with minimum 4 screws and pulls through bolt. Provide cushion bumps for doors and drawers. 12. Drawers shall be dovetail or dowel construction with bottom dado into sides, backs, and sub-fronts. Glue and clamp so that drawers do not rattle. Use intermediate support for drawers over 24". Pre-finish drawer with clear finish equal to AWI System#2. Dado joint NOT allowed. 13. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify all locations from onsite dimensions. Prime coat contact surfaces of cut edges. 14. Install all cabinet hardware. 15. Tolerances and Quality. Flushness between factory assembled joints- maximum .010. Flatness of cabinet doors- measured diagonally per lineal foot, maximum .036. Maximum gap between back end of adjustable shelf and case between back end of adjustable shelf and case side, maximum 1/16 inch. 16. Edge Joint Quality. All laminate edges shall be ease (sharp corner removed). Chip out of the laminate shall be invisible when viewed at 48 inches. 17. Particleboard, MDF and hard board will not be allowed in any lavatory, sink cabinet or wet area. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FINISH CASEWORK A. Comply with AWI Special Provisions requirements for Installation. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall-mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units, counter tops. E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. F. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. Set bases to bed of sealant. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under Special Provisions requirements. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean work under Section 01 70 00. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 4 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets Phase 2 Section 06 41 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies a self-adhering sheet membrane used as underlayment for sloped roofs. 1. Severe climate application, Grace Ice &Water Shield°. B. Related Sections: Refer to the following specification sections for coordination: 1. Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07 41 13– Metal Roof Panels. 3. Section 07 62 00–Sheet Metal Flashing &Trim. C. Referenced Standards: Comply with the requirements of the following standards published by ASTM International to the extent referenced in this section. 1. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-Tension. 2. ASTM D461 - Standard Test Methods for Felt. 3. ASTM D 903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds. 4. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. 5. ASTM D3767 - Standard Practice for Rubber—Measurement of Dimensions. 6. ASTM E96- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 7. ASTM G90– EMMAqua test. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and applicable codes at the location of the project. B. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience producing roofing underlayment. C. Installer: Minimum 2 years experience with installation of similar underlayment. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Protect from damage. B. Cover materials and store in dry condition between temperatures of 40 and 90 degrees F (5 and 32 degrees C). Use within one year of date of manufacture. Do not store at elevated temperatures as that will reduce the shelf life of the product. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: GCP Applied Technologies, Inc, 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, MA 02140, Toll Free 866-333-3726, www.gcpat.com. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Roof Underlayment: Provide Grace Ice and Water Shield by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc. with the following characteristics: 1. Material: Cold applied, self adhering membrane composed of a high strength polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive and interwound with a disposable release sheet. An embossed, slip resistant surface is provided on the polyethylene. 2. Color: Gray-black. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing Phase 2 Section 07 13 26 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Membrane Thickness: 40 mil (1.02 mm)ASTM D3767 procedure A(Section 9.1). 4. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1720 kN/m2)ASTM D412 (Die C modified). 5. Elongation, Membrane: 250%ASTM D412 (Die C modified). 6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected @-20°F (-29°C)ASTM D1970. 7. Adhesion to Plywood: 3.0 lbs/in. width (525 N/m)ASTM D903. 8. Permeance (Max): 0.05 Perms (2.9 ng/m2s Pa)ASTM E96. 9. Material Weight Installed (Max): 0.3 Ib/ft2 (1.3 kg/m2)ASTM D461. 10. Primer: Water-based Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc. 11. Code and Standards Compliance: Grace Ice and Water Shield meets the following: a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Class A fire classification under fiber-glass shingles and Class C under organic felt shingles (per ASTM E108/UL 790). b. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Classified Sheathing Material Fire Resistance Classification with Roof Designs: P225, P227, P230, P237, P259, P508, P510, P512, P514, P701, P711, P717, P722, P723, P732, P734, P736, P742, P803, P814, P818, P824 c. ICC ESR-1677 approval according to AC-48 Acceptance Criteria for Self-Adhered underlayments used as Ice Barriers. d. Miami-Dade County Code Report NOA 12-1115.02. e. Canadian Construction Materials Centre (CCMC) 13670-L f. City of Los Angeles RR 25330 g. Florida State Approval Report No. FL289-R3 PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to start of installation, inspect existing conditions to ensure surfaces are suitable for installation of roofing underlayment. Verify flashing has been installed. Starting work indicates installers acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation: Install roofing underlayment on sloped surfaces at locations indicated on the Drawings, but not less than at hips, ridges, eaves, valleys, sidewalls and chimneys, and surfaces over interior space within 36 inches (914 mm)from the inside face of the exterior wall. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions including but not limited to the following: 1. Schedule installation such that underlayment is covered by roofing within the published exposure limit of the underlayment. 2. Do not install underlayment on wet or frozen substrates. 3. Install when surface temperature of substrate is a minimum of 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) and rising. 4. Remove dust, dirt, loose materials and protrusions from deck surface. 5. Install membrane on clean, dry, continuous structural deck. Fill voids and damaged or unsupported areas prior to installation. 6. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces using specified primer at a rate of 500-600 square feet per gallon (12-15 sqm/L). Priming is not required for other suitable clean and dry surfaces. 7. Install membrane such that all laps shed water. Work from the low point to the high point of the roof at all times. Apply the membrane in valleys before the membrane is applied to the eaves. Following placement along the eaves, continue application of the membrane up the roof. Membrane may be installed either vertically or horizontally after the first horizontal course. 8. Side laps minimum 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) and end laps minimum 6 inches (152 mm) following lap lines marked on underlayment. 9. Patch penetrations and damage using manufacturer's recommended methods. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing Phase 2 Section 07 13 26 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect from damage during construction operations and installation of roofing materials. Promptly repair any damaged or deteriorated surfaces. B. Repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect. C. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protective film and reclean as necessary immediately before final acceptance. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing Phase 2 Section 07 13 26 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 21 13 BOARD INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the following specifications as applicable to the specific product or end use: 1. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM C 578: Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. b. ASTM C 518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. C. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES), Evaluation Report. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations, including installation instructions. B. Sustainable Design: Submit manufacturer's sustainable design certifications as indicated. C. Warranty: Submit documentation for limited product warranty. [30 years or lifetime]. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain exterior building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Each insulation board must be labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, ASTM material specification reference, and identification of the third party inspection agency used for building code qualification. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store in a dry area and protect from water, direct sunlight, flame, and ignition sources. Do not install insulation that has been damaged or wet. 1. In the event the board insulation becomes wet,wipe dry prior to installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Owens Corning Insulating Systems, LLC, Toledo, OH 43659; B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 for Product Substitution Procedures. 2.2 FOAM PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type X, 15 psi minimum compressive strength, 1.30 Ib/cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m). 1. Thermal Resistance: (180 day real-time aging as mandated by ASTM C578, measured per ASTM C 518 at mean temperature of 75F): R-5.0 per inch of thickness,with 90% lifetime limited warranty on thermal resistance. 2. Blowing Agent Formulation: Zero ozone depleting. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Board Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Edge Condition: Square. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84): Flame spread less than 25, smoke developed less than 450, certified by independent third party such as Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 5. Indoor Air Quality: Compliance certified by independent third party such as GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified®and/or GREENGUARD Children and Schools Certified 5M 6. Recycled Content: Minimum 20%, certified by independent third party such as Scientific Certification Systems. 7. Warranty: Limited lifetime warranty covering all ASTM C578 physical properties. 8. Panel Size: Provide 2"thick by 4 ft. wide by 8 ft. long. PART 3- EXECUTION [Not Used] END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Board Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 21 16 BLANKET INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01 70 00— Execution and Closeout Requirements. C. Section 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). 1. ASTM C553, Specification for Mineral Fibre Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 2. ASTM C665, Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 3. ASTM C1320, Standard Practice for Installation of Mineral Fiber Batt and Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction. 4. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. Thermal batt and blanket mineral fibre: 1. Unfaced glass fiber thermal insulation to ASTM C665 Type:l, thickness and RSI value as indicated on drawings. 2. Semi-rigid mineral wool batt insulation to CSA/ULC-S702, made from basalt rock and slag, thickness and RSI value as indicated on drawings. B. Acoustic batt insulation: 1. Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation to ASTM C665, Type I, thickness as indicated. a. Flame spread: 10 to ASTM E84. b. Smoke development: 10 to ATSM E84. C. Sound transmission Class: STC 49. d. Dimensional stability: linear shrinkage less than 0.1%. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces and for sound attenuation as noted on drawings. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Blanket Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Fit insulation closely around electrical boxes, pipes, ducts, frames and other objects in or passing through insulation. C. Do not compress insulation to fit into spaces. D. Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and minimum 50 mm from sidewalls and CSA B149.1 and CSA B149.2 Type B and L vents. E. Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Owner's Representative. 3.3 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Blanket Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 21 29 SPRAYED INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contractual Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Light density, open & closed celled, flexible, 100 percent water blown polyurethane foam insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing 2. 05 40 00 -Cold Formed Metal Framing 3. 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 4. 09 29 00 -Gypsum Board 5. Divisions 21 through 48 (Where Applicable) C. Coordinate mechanical ventilation and fresh air supply with Mechanical sections and ASHRAE Guidelines for optimum indoor air quality. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2. ASTM D 2863: Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index) 3. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 4. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 5. ASTM E 2178: Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 6. ASTM E 283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. B. Product test reports performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire-test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. C. Evaluation Report: Evidence of compliance of foam-plastic insulations with International Building Code (IBC), International Residential Code (IRC), International Energy Conservation Code (IECC), International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO) D. Manufacturer's certificate certifying insulation provided meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Installer's certificate showing the Icynene installation certification. F. Sample warranty 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Product produced in an ISO9001 registered factory. B. Single Source Responsibility: Single source product from one manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Icynene Licensed Dealer (applicator) who has been trained and certified by Icynene. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Sprayed Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 E. Toxicity/Hazardous Materials 1. Provide products that contain no urea-formaldehyde 2. Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs, HCFCs, or HFCs during the manufacturing or application process will not be permitted 3. Provide products that contain no PBDEs 4. Provide products that are "Low-emitting" 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for handling and protection prior to and during installation. B. Store both components in a temperature controlled area between 50 deg F (15 deg C) and 100 deg F (32 deg C). Do not allow product to freeze. C. Use only those components that are supplied by the Manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard limited lifetime warranty. B. Refer to www.icynene.com for full warranty terms. PART 2- PRODUCTS I Pili, ,ecru on (]esci Vbes an open...ce:1l prrro(aI uct 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Polyurethane Spray Foam Insulation: ICYNENE LD-C-50TM by Icynene Inc. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. ICYNENE LD-C-50TM Spray Foam Insulation: Low-density, water-blown, conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518; 3.7 hr/sq ft/degree F/BTU a. Heat Flow Reduction: 1) Through 1 inch: 75 percent 2) Through 3.5 inches 93 percent 3) Through 5.5 inches 95 percent 4) Through 10.5 inches 98 percent 2. Air Permeance (for 2 inches of material): ASTM E 283; <0.02 L/S.m2 @75 Pa 3. Air Permeance (for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 2178; < 0.02 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa 4. Water Vapor Transmission (for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 96; 11 perms [627 ng/(Pa.s.m2)] 5. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 a. Flame Spread: Less than 20 b. Smoke Development: Less than 400 C. Oxygen Index 23 percent 6. Bacterial and Fungal Growth and Food Value: Texas Tech. University; not a source of food for mold (no growth) ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Sprayed Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Product Description: 1. ICC/ES Evaluation Report No. ESR 1826 2. IAPMO-ES Report No. 0165 3. Collaborative for High-Performance Schools (CHPS) "Low-emitting material" per CA 01350 Criteria 4. Effective "breathing," (Vapor Permeable), air barrier material that can move with the building to maintain the air barrier characteristic for the life of the building. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered factory. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Review placement area to determine final location will not be within 3 inches of any heat source where the temperature will exceed 200 deg F per ASTM C 411 or in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates and cavities of loose materials capable of interfering with insulation placement. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Site mix liquid components manufactured by Icynene and supplied by Independent Icynene Licensed Dealer. B. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Apply insulation to produce thickness required for indicated R Value. 1. R-3.7 is achieved at 1 inch. D. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Any repairs must be effected by an Icynene Licensed Dealer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS I Pilis secon (Jesci ober a cIosea:J ce:1 prrro(J uct 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Polyurethane Spray Foam Insulation: ICYNENE MD-C-200TM by Icynene Inc. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. ICYNENE MD-C-200TM Spray Foam Insulation: Medium-density, conforming to the following: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Sprayed Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Thermal Resistance (for 1 inch of material) (R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518; 6.5 hr.sq ft.degree F/BTU 2. Air Permeance (for 1 inch of material): ASTM E 283: <0.02 L/s.m2 @75 Pa 3. Water Vapor Transmission (for 1.5 inches of material): ASTM E 96; 0.9 perms 4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 a. Flame Spread: Less than 25 b. Smoke Development: Less than 450 C. Product Description: 1. ICC/ES Evaluation Report No. ESR 3199 2. Collaborative for High-Performance Schools (CHPS) "Low-emitting material" per CA 01350 Criteria 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered factory. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Review placement area to determine final location will not be within 3 inches of any heat source where the temperature will exceed 180 deg F per ASTM C 411 or in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates and cavities of loose materials capable of interfering with insulation placement. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Site mix liquid components supplied by Icynene and installed by Independent Icynene Licensed Dealer. B. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Apply insulation to produce thickness required for indicated R Value. 1. R-6 is achieved at 1 inch. D. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Any repairs must be effected by an Icynene Licensed Dealer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS I Pilis secon (Jesci ober an open ce:1I pro(Juct wlthout requuiJng QheniiaJgnn Qlon Ibanner 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. "Fire Resistant" Polyurethane Spray Foam Insulation: ICYNENE Classic Max (LD-C-50- v2) by Icynene Inc. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Sprayed Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. ICYNENE Classic MaxTM (LD-C-50-v2) Spray Foam Insulation: Light density, open celled, 100%water-blown, conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518; 3.7 hr/sq ft/degree F/BTU a. Average insulation contribution in a full fill stud wall: 1) 2 inch by 4 inch: R13 2) 2 inch by 6 inch: R20 2. Air Permeance (for 3.5 inches of material): ASTM E 283; <0.009 L/S.m2 @75 Pa 3. Air Permeance (for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 2178; < 0.01 L/s.m2 @ 75 Pa 4. Water Vapor Transmission (for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 96; 11 perms [627 ng/(Pa.s.m2)] 5. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 a. Flame Spread: Less than or equal to 25 b. Smoke Development: Less than or equal to 450 6. Bacterial and Fungal Growth and Food Value: Texas Tech. University; not a source of food for mold (no growth) C. Product Description: 1. ICC/ES Evaluation Report No. ESR 1826 2. Collaborative for High-Performance Schools (CHPS) "Low-emitting material" per CA 01350 Criteria 3. Light density, open celled, flexible, 100%water-blown polyurethane foam insulation. 4. Effective vapor permeable, air barrier material that can move with the building to maintain the air barrier characteristic for the life of the building. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered factory. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Review placement area to determine final location will not be within 3 inches of any heat source where the temperature will exceed 200 deg F per ASTM C 411 or in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates and cavities of loose materials capable of interfering with insulation placement. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Site mix liquid components manufactured by Icynene and supplied by independent Icynene Licensed Contractor. B. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Apply insulation to produce thickness required for indicated R Value. 1. R-13 is achieved in a full fill 2 inch by 4 inch stud wall. 2. R-20 is achieved in a full fill 2 inch by 6 inch stud wall. D. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Sprayed Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.4 REPAIRS A. Any repairs must be effected by an Icynene Licensed Contractor. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Sprayed Insulation Phase 2 Section 07 21 29 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather barrier membrane B. Seam Tape C. Flashing D. Fasteners 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International 1. ASTM C920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 9. ASTM E2357; Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies B. AATCC—American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists 1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI 1. Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance (Gurley Hill Method) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. C. Samples: Weather Barrier membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch. D. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Refer to Section 01 70 00 Execution & Closeout Requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of similar weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 4 Weather Barriers Phase 2 Section 07 25 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. B. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by system manufacturer. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. DuPont Building Innovations; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1-800-44-TYVEK(8-9835); http://www.construction.TYVEK.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: Textured, spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPont- Tyvek°StuccoWrap°and related assembly components. B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: 0.004 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 50 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 210 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: 2.1 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Resistance: 300 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 30/30 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method A. 7. Tear Resistance: 7/9 lbs, when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 5, Smoke Developed: 25 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: 3 inch wide, DuPont- Tyvek°Tape as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations. B. Fasteners: 1. DuPont- Tyvek°Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4" or 2" metal gasketed washer. C. Sealants 1. Refer to Section 07 90 00 Joint Protection. 2. Products: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 4 Weather Barriers Phase 2 Section 07 25 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Adhesive: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primer: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. 2. Products: a. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer F. Flashing 1. DuPont" FlexWrap", as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. 2. DuPont" StraightFlashT", as manufactured by DuPont Building Innovations: straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations and masonry ties, etc. 3. Preformed Inside and Outside Corners and End Dams as manufactured by DuPont: Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction with DuPontTA° Thru-Wall Flashing. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION—WEATHER BARRIER A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. C. Apply wrap with grooved surface pattern in vertical direction. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level E. Shingle weather barrier over back edge of weep screed. Seal weather barrier with sealant or tape to weep screed. Ensure weeps are not blocked. F. Subsequent layers shall overlap lower layers a minimum of 6 inches horizontally in a shingling manner. G. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. H. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. I. Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont- StraightFlashTI or weather barrier manufacturer approved alternate to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation cladding anchors. 3.3 SEAMING A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 4 Weather Barriers Phase 2 Section 07 25 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non-flanged windows—all cladding types) A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.5 FLASHING (for use with non-flanged windows—all cladding types) A. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont- FlexWrapTI or DuPont- FlexWrapT' NF a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont- FlexWrapT' edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPont- FlexWrapT' at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. . Mechanical fastening is not required for DuPont- FlexWrapT' NF. D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont- StraightFlashT' at jambs.Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start DuPont- StraightFlashTI at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install DuPont- FlexWrapTI or DuPont- FlexWrapT' NF at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window installation. H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing.Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont- StraightFlashTI over the 45-degree seams. J. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealants per sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Notify manufacturer's designated representative to obtain [required] periodic observations of weather barrier assembly installation. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 4 Weather Barriers Phase 2 Section 07 25 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exposed fastener metal wall panels, with related metal trim and accessories providing wall siding for Metal Bldg. (Sect. 13 34 19) meeting Texas Windstorm Inland I condition. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation"for thermal insulation installed under metal panels. B. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels"for factory-formed metal roof panels. C. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied Joint Sealants. D. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for steel framing supporting metal panels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA): www.aamanet.orq: 1. AAMA 621 - Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) & Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. AAMA 809.2 -Voluntary Specification Non-Drying Sealants. B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): www.asce.org/codes-standards: 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. C. ASTM International (ASTM): www.astm.orq: 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 755 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 3. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM C 645 - Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 5. ASTM C 754 - Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6. ASTM C 920- Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 7. ASTM D 1003 - Standard Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastics. 8. ASTM D 2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 9. ASTM D 4214 -Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 10. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 11. ASTM E 331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 12. ASTM E 1646 -Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 13. ASTM E 1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems. 14. ASTM E 1980 - Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low- Sloped Opaque Surfaces. D. International Accreditation Service (IAS): 1. IAS AC 472 - Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems, Part B. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Prior to erection of framing, conduct preinstallation meeting at site attended by Owner, Architect, manufacturer's technical representative, inspection agency and related trade contractors. 1. Coordinate building framing in relation to metal panel system. 2. Coordinate openings and penetrations of metal panel system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Source: Provide metal panel assembly and accessories from a single manufacturer providing fixed-base roll forming, and accredited under IAS AC 472 Part B. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section with minimum five years experience in manufacture of similar products in successful use in similar applications. 1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review: a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements. b. Samples of each component. C. Sample submittal from similar project. d. Project references: Minimum of five installations not less than five years old, with Owner and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty. f. IAS AC 472 certificate. 2. Substitutions following award of contract are not allowed except as stipulated in Section 01 6000. 3. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article. C. Installer Qualifications: Experienced Installer with minimum of five years experience with successfully completed projects of a similar nature and scope. 1. Installer's Field Supervisor: Experienced mechanic, able to communicate with Owner, Architect, and installers, supervising work on site whenever work is underway. D. Buy American Compliance: Materials provided under work of this Section shall comply with the following requirements: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Buy American Act of 1933 BAA-41 U.S.0 §§ 10a— 10d. 2. Buy American provisions of Section 1605 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA). 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels. Include details of each condition of installation, panel profiles, and attachment to building. Provide details at a minimum scale 1-1/2-inch per foot of edge conditions, joints, fastener and sealant placement, flashings, openings, penetrations, and special details. Make distinctions between factory and field assembled work. 1. Indicate points of supporting structure that must coordinate with metal panel system installation. 2. Include data indicating compliance with performance requirements. 3. Include structural data indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with requirements, witnessed by a professional engineer. B. Qualification Information: For Installer firm and Installer's field supervisor. C. IAS Accreditation Certificate: Indicating that manufacturer is accredited under provisions of IAS AC 472. D. Buy American Certification: Manufacturers' letters of compliance acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that products comply with requirements. E. Florida State Building Code Certificate. F. Miami-Dade County Notice of Acceptance. G. Manufacturer's Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect products of metal panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage. Protect panels and trim bundles during shipping. 1. Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal panel system and accessory items without misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction operations. 2. Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Provide wood collars for stacking and handling in the field. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: On manufacturer's standard form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panel assemblies that fail in materials and workmanship within one year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Panel Finish Warranty: On Manufacturer's standard form, in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal panels that evidence deterioration of factory-applied finish within 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, including: 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: a. Color fading in excess of 5 Hunter units per ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of No. 8 rating per ASTM D 4214. C. Failure of adhesion, peeling, checking, or cracking. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: MBCI Metal Roof and Wall Systems, Division of NCI Group, Inc.; Houston TX. Tel: (877)713-6224; Email: infombci.com; Web: www.mbci.com. 1. Provide Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal wall panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from variations in both ambient and internal temperatures. Accommodate movement of support structure caused by thermal expansion and contraction. Allow for deflection and design for thermal stresses caused by temperature differences from one side of the panel to the other. C. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on uniform pressure, importance factor, exposure category, and basic wind speed indicated on drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Withstand inward and outward wind-load design pressures in accordance with applicable building code with maximum deflection of L/180 of the span with no evidence of failure. D. Texas Department of Insurance: Comply with requirements of TDI Product Evaluation ID: EC- 96. The design loads determined for the building or structure shall not exceed the design load rating specified for the products shown in the limitations section of this product evaluation. E. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 1680: Maximum 0.006 c/iii/q /i. (0 030 II / /eir sq, iin) at .24 Ilb//sq Vii. (300 Il Ia)static-air-pressure difference. F. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1646: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 20 lbf/sq ft (958 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.3 METAL PANEL MATERIALS A. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Gra(l Coatng C Ila 33 (Girdm de 340, CoaG:ling CIla AZ.II\A150), prepainted by the coil-coating process per ASTM A 755/A 755M. 2.4 METAL WALL PANELS A. Panel: 7.2 Panel Profile: Ribbed-Profile, Exposed Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Metal panels consisting of formed metal sheet with fastener leg for concealed attachment to wall framing., installed by lapping edges of adjacent panels. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, 7.2 Panel. 2. Panel Width: 36 inches (913.5 inii ). 3. Panel Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. 4. Nominal Coated Thickness: 24 gauge. 5. Panel Surface: Smooth. 6. Exterior Finish: Signature 300, Fluoropolymer two-coat system. 7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.5 METAL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete metal panel assembly incorporating base, corner, and opening trims and miscellaneous flashings, in profiles as indicated. Provide required fasteners, closure strips, support plates, and sealants as indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashing and Trim: Match material, thickness, and finish of metal panel face sheet. C. Panel Fasteners: Concealed Fastening System clips etc designed for this panel. D. Joint Sealers: Manufacturer's standard or recommended liquid and preformed sealers and tapes, and as follows: 1. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer's standard non-curing butyl tape, AAMA 809.2. E. Steel Sheet Miscellaneous Framing Components: ASTM C 645, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 33 (2180) hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Provide factory fabricated and finished metal panels and accessories meeting performance requirements, indicated profiles, and structural requirements. B. Panel Lengths: Form panels in continuous lengths for full length of detailed runs, except where otherwise indicated on approved shop drawings. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Form from materials matching metal panel substrate and finish. 2.7 FINISHES A. Finishes, General: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: 0.2 — 0.3 mil primer with 0.7 - 0.8 mil 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat, AAMA 621. 1. Basis of Design: MBCI, Signature 300. C. Interior Finish: 0.5 mil total dry film thickness consisting of primer coat and wash coat of manufacturer's standard light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine metal panel system substrate and supports with Installer present. Inspect for erection tolerances and other conditions that would adversely affect installation of metal panel installation. 1. Inspect metal panel support substrate to determine if support components are installed as indicated on approved shop drawings. Confirm presence of acceptable supports at recommended spacing to match installation requirements of metal panels. 2. Panel Support Tolerances: Confirm that panel supports are within tolerances acceptable to metal panel system manufacturer but not greater than the following: a. IA inch (6 iinii ) in 20 foot (6,1 iin) in any direction. B. Correct out-of-tolerance work and other deficient conditions prior to proceeding with metal panel system installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, girts, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members according to ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover exposed underlayment per Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Exposed Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Install weathertight metal panel system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, approved shop drawings, and project drawings. Install metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated, free of waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses, and distortions. Anchor panels and other components securely in place. Provide for thermal and structural movement. B. Panel Sealants: Install manufacturer's recommended tape sealant at panel sidelaps and endlaps. C. Panel Fastening: Attach panels to supports using screws, fasteners, and sealants recommended by manufacturer and indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Fasten metal panels to supports at each location indicated on approved shop drawings, with spacing and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 2. Provide weatherproof jacks for pipe and conduit penetrating metal panels of types recommended by manufacturer. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Dissimilar Materials: Where elements of metal panel system will come into contact with dissimilar materials, treat faces and edges in contact with dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal panel trim, flashing, and accessories using recommended fasteners and joint sealers, with positive anchorage to building, and with weather tight mounting. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel assembly, including trim, copings, flashings, sealants, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with details of assemblies utilized to establish compliance with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently weather resistant. B. Joint Sealers: Install joint sealers where indicated and where required for weathertight performance of metal panel assemblies, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Prepare joints and apply sealants per requirements of Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective films immediately in accordance with metal panel manufacturer's instructions. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. B. Replace damaged panels and accessories that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 7 Formed Metal Wall Panels Phase 2 Section 07 42 13.13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fireproof fire stopping and fire safing materials and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 29 00 -Gypsum Board: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing. B. Division 22 - Plumbing: Plumbing work requiring firestopping. C. Division 23—Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: HVAC Work requiring firestopping. D. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E119- Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. ASTM E814-Test Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fireproofing Materials: ASTM E119 and ASTM E814 to achieve a fire rating as noted in plans. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: A material, or combination of materials, to retain the integrity of time-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases. It shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Duct, cable, conduit, and piping penetrations through floor slab and through time-rated partitions or fire walls. 2. Openings between floor slabs and curtain walls, including inside hollow curtain walls at the floor slab. 3. Penetrations of vertical service shafts. 4. Openings and penetrations in time-related partitions or fire walls containing fire doors. 5. Locations where specifically shown on the Drawings or where specified in Schedule of this Section. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under Special Provisions requirements. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years' experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Fire Stopping Phase 2 Section 07 84 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 minimum 3 years' experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of combustibility. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials. 1.10 SEQUENCING A. Sequence Work to permit firestopping materials to be installed after adjacent and surrounding work is complete. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 3M Contractor Products, Product: Firestopping Materials. B. Substitutions: Under Special Provisions requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Material shall constitute on or more of the following products: 1. 3M Brand Caulk CP-25 N/S No. Sag. 2. 3M Brand Caulk SP-25 S/L Self Leveling. 3. 3M Brand Wrap/Strip FS-195. 4. 3M Brand Composite Sheet CS-195. 5. 3M Brand Penetrating Sealing Systems 7900 Series. 6. 3M Brand Fire Barrier Moldable Putty 7. 3M Brand Fire Barrier Sponge. 8. Interam Fire Dam 150 Caulk. 9. Mineral Fiberboard, mineral fiber matting, sheet metal. 10. Other products compatible with the above materials as certified by 3M in their published data. B. Other Requirements 1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent. 2. Side Effects During Installation: Non-toxic. 3. Long Term Side Effects: None. C. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Dam Material: As instructed by manufacturer. B. Retainers: As instructed by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Verify that openings are ready to receive the Work of this Section. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Fire Stopping Phase 2 Section 07 84 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.3 APPLICATION Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating to uniform density and texture. B. Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items requiring firestopping. C. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean Work under Special Provisions requirements. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under Provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine firestopped areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing firestopped areas. B. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection (and approval) by the applicable code authorities. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. Location END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Fire Stopping Phase 2 Section 07 84 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 90 00 JOINT PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and joint backing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C919- Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. B. ASTM C920- Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. ASTM D1565- Flexible Cellular Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with all disciplines. B. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve water tight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: Single component, low modulus, moisture curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non- bleeding; color as selected; Spectrum 1 manufactured by Tremco. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Joint Protection Phase 2 Section 07 90 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Elongation Capability 100 percent 2. Service Temperature Range -65 to 300 degrees 3. TT-S-00230C (COMB-NBS)Type III, Class A. 4. TT-S-001 543A(COM-NBS)Class A. ASTM 920-86. 5. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. B. Acoustical Sealant: Tremco Acoustical Sealant C. Exterior flatwork joint cap sealant: (where green streak G610 and G628 are not used): Pourable type sealant(conforming to requirements of AASTO M173 or ASTM D1190) FS TT-S-00227e, Type I at flatwork; Type II non-sag at CMU wall. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1565; round, cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required 2:1 width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work as required during the course of construction. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation. B. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Joint Protection Phase 2 Section 07 90 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 07 95 13 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. Work included: 1. Interior floor expansion joint covers 2. Interior wall expansion joint covers 3. Interior ceiling expansion joint covers 4. Exterior wall expansion joint covers B. Related work specified elsewhere includes: 1. Section 04 22 00 -Concrete Unit Masonry 2. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry 4. Section 09 29 00 -Gypsum Board 1.2 REFERENCES: A. Reference standards; as referenced herein 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 3. Council of American Building Officials (CABO) 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Joint cover systems shall allow unrestrained movement of joint without disengagement of cover. B. Joint size/movement range: As indicated on drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product description indicating compliance with specified requirements. Include installation instructions for each type of expansion control material. B. Shop drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings for expansion control conditions. Include requirements for blockouts. Submit prior to concrete placement or other construction adjacent to expansion joints. C. Submit certification or copies of independent test reports, by CABO approved testing/listing agency, indicating compliance with **fire resistance rating and ** specified performance requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturer: Furnish assemblies from one manufacturer with a minimum of five years experience in the design and fabrication of expansion joint cover assemblies. B. Installer: Firm with a minimum of five years experience in installation of systems similar to those required by this project and acceptable to manufacturer. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 5 Expansion joint Cover Assembilies Phase 2 Section 07 95 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. Deliver joint covers to jobsite in new, clean, unopened containers of size and strength to protect materials during shipping. B. Store materials in original containers in dry location. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year material and workmanship warranty. B. Finish warranty: Warrant fluoropolymer coating to remain free, under normal atmospheric conditions, from peeling, checking, cracking, chalking in excess of numerical rating of 8 when measured in accord with ASTM D4214-89, of fading in excess of 5 N. B. S. units during warranty period. Warranty period shall be 5 years. C. Warranties shall begin at Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER: A. MM Systems Corporation, 50 MM WAY, PENDERGRASS, Georgia 30567; 1-800- 241-3460 or 706-824-7500 www.mmsystemscorp.com B. Expansion control systems of similar design and construction, as manufactured by other manufacturers, may be submitted for Architect's consideration as required in Section 01 60 00 Product requirements. Acceptance is subject to compliance with specified design criteria, as evidenced by submittal of specified product data. Submittals shall comply with requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Aluminum: Alloys meeting ASTM B221-95a 1. Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy 2. Plates: 6061-T6 alloy 3. Sheet: 5052-H32 alloy B. Bronze: 1. Extrusions: CDA Alloy C385, Architectural Bronze 2. Sheet: CDA Alloy C280, Muntz Metal. 3. Tube, pipe and strip: Half hard brass, UNS, Alloy C2600 (CDA Alloy 260, Cartridge Brass). C. Stainless steel: AISI Type 302/304, 2B finish D. Visual seal: System manufacturer's standard elastomeric seal. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection range. E. Filler/gasket: Elastomeric. Color shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. F. Fire barrier material: In accord with test reports and listing agency requirements. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 5 Expansion joint Cover Assembilies Phase 2 Section 07 95 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 G. Finish for exposed aluminum components: 1. Aluminum wall and ceiling: b. Anodized finish: 204-R1 clear anodize: 0.04-0.07 mil thick anodic coating conforming to AA-M10C22A31. 2.3 FIRE-RATED SYSTEMS: A. Acceptable products: 1. One-hour rated walls and Ceilings: Pyro-Flex 1000W, with specified cover for walls. B. Characteristics: 1. Prefabricated fire barrier assemblies shall have ratings not less than the rating of adjacent construction when tested in accord with, UL 263, ANSI A2.1, NFPA251, ASTM E119-95a and ASTM E1399-91 including hose stream test for walls. 2. System shall be capable of anticipated movement while maintaining fire rating. 3. Coverless applications shall maintain fire rating without joint cover system. 2.4 ALUMINUM COVERS: A. Acceptable products: 1. DX-100 Series at wall/ceiling conditions 2. X-N-1 Series at wall/wall (corner) conditions 3. VSS Series at exterior wall conditions B. Materials: Mill finish aluminum plate with non-skid serrations. 2.4 FABRICATION: A. Factory fabricates expansion joint components to greatest extent practicable. Manufacturer, based on minimum and maximum size of joints indicated, shall determine size of joint components. B. Fabricate units in single length without intermediate joints where practicable. C. Aluminum protection: Treat surfaces in contact with concrete with a factory applied chromate conversion coating for corrosion resistance. D. Apply protective tape for wall expansion joint covers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Prepare surfaces to receive expansion joint systems in accordance with manufacturer's product data and approved shop drawings. B. Clean surfaces adjacent to and including joints prior to installation. Repair surfaces as required to provide a smooth, even sound surface. Surfaces shall be free of debris, oils, dust or other deleterious materials. C. Install blockouts for expansion joint systems in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data. Coordinate installation of blockouts with cast-in-place concrete work. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 5 Expansion joint Cover Assembilies Phase 2 Section 07 95 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Shim only as approved by manufacturer. 3.2 APPLICATION: A. Install manufactured expansion control assemblies in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, except where more stringent requirements are specified herein. Cover and protect expansion joint cover assemblies from construction traffic. B. Fire-rated systems: Install fire-resistant barriers in conjunction with expansion joint covers to achieve the specified fire rated system in accordance with manufacturer's fire barrier product data or installation instructions. C. Compression seals: 1. Apply adhesive to ** armored "joint blockouts. 2. Position seal over joint and compress into joint as directed by manufacturer's product data. 3. Splice, miter and bond seals in accordance with manufacturer's product data as required for installation. 4. Install seal to align flush with adjacent surfaces when compressed. D. Aluminum frame/cellular seal system: 1. Mechanically fasten frames to substrates. Set frames in same sealant as specific for horizontal traffic joints in Sealant and Caulking Section. Top edges of frames shall be flush with adjacent surfaces. Fill blockouts with concrete, flush with top edge of frames and adjacent surfaces. 2. Install adhesive in channel of frames to receive seals. Do not allow adhesive to set. 3. Install neoprene seal in channels of frames. Place cover plate over each edge of seal and screw in place. E. Aluminum compression seal with frames: 1. Install adhesive in channel of frames to receive seals. Do not allow adhesive to set. 2. Install seal in channels of frames. F. Heavy-duty traffic joints: 1. Blockouts shall be smooth level and sound. Do not shim heavy-duty traffic joints. 2. Mechanically fasten each side of frame to blockouts in substrates; top edges of frames shall be flush with adjacent surfaces. 3. Install expansion plate and bolt frame cover to frames. 4. Install watertight vinyl gutter system. G. Interior joints: 1. Secure joint assembly in place with anchors spaced at maximum of 2'-0"o.c.. 2. Level floor joints to top of joint with flooring material or Architect approved grout. H. Exterior expansion systems: Mechanically fasten frames to each side of joint and attach interior and exterior seals. I. Roof joint covers: Attach to curbs and substrates at 2'-0"o.c. maximum. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 5 Expansion joint Cover Assembilies Phase 2 Section 07 95 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 J. Remove excess and misplaced sealants as work progresses. K. Remove protective film or coverings from expansion joint covers upon completion of adjacent construction. End of Section ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 5 Expansion joint Cover Assembilies Phase 2 Section 07 95 13 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 12 13 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel Frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 08 14 16— Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09 91 00 - Painting: Field painting of frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 —Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/SDI-100 -Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C. ASTM A525- Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM E152—Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. F. NFPA 80— Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 252— Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. H. UL 10B— Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacing's, location of cut-outs for hardware, reinforcement. D. Frames installed in exterior openings: Manufacturer's shall provide certification signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in Texas that the exterior door and frame assemblies (including removable mullions and hardware) meet or exceed the minimum positive and negative wind pressures as determined &documented by the Structural Engineer of Record. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Hollow Metal Frame Phase 2 Section 08 12 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 14 gage thick material, base metal thickness, galvanized. B. Interior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness, factory primed. C. Fire Rated: See Door Schedule. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames as welded units. B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. C. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. D. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. 2.4 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 2.0 oz./sq. ft. for exterior units. B. Primer: Baked. C. Finish: Field painted in color to be selected. D. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.11, NFPA 80 at fire rated openings &as recommended by frame manufacturer for scheduled wall type. B. Install exterior frames to meet minimum wind pressure design criteria indicated on drawings. C. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 and doors in Sections 08 13 13 and 08 14 16. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Hollow Metal Frame Phase 2 Section 08 12 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 12 16 ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum door frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06 20 00—Finish Carpentry B. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors C. Section 08 71 00—Door Hardware D. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing E. Section 09 29 00 -Gypsum Board 1.3 REFERENCES A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA 605.2 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings. C. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM B221 Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Wires, Shapes and Tubes. D. Aluminum Association: 1. AA ASD-1 Aluminum Standards and Data. E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. F. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. 1. UL Standard 10(b) Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL Standard 63 Fire Door Frames. 3. UL Building Materials Directory. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products to be provided. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings showing elevation of frames, profile, design, construction details, methods of assembling sections, hardware locations, dimensions, anchorage and fastening methods, wall opening construction and finish requirements. Indicate location of each frame in Project. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage experience Installer who has completed installations of aluminum frames similar in design to extent to those required for project and whose work has resulted in construction with record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 4 Aluminum Frames Phase 2 Section 08 12 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Provide aluminum framing systems produced by firm experience in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have record of successful in-service performance. C. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain aluminum framing systems from one source and from single manufacturer. D. Design Criteria: 1. Drawings indicate the size (to fit typical dry wall portion construction described) profile and dimensional requirements of aluminum frames required and are based on specific types and models indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials in original unopened packaging with labels intact. 2. Handle frames in a manner to prevent damage to finishes. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Aluminum Frames: 1. Avalon, Dual Lock Partition Systems (800-678-0566) (FKA Alumax). 2. Frameworks by Frameworks Manufacturing (713-692-5222). 3. Aluminum Frames by Kawneer. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 33 00. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Frames: Extruded aluminum 1. Standard alloys shall conform to requirements published in AA ASD-1 and ASTM B221; 6063 T5 alloy. 2. Thickness: 0.062" minimum. 3. Finish: To be selected from manufacturer's standard Anodized finishes. 4. Products: Avalon — Eagle and Phoenix Series (FKA Alumax). B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be non- corrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard non-corrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Frames: 1. Frames shall be knock-down units consisting of separate header, strike and hinge jambs with snap-on casing, fabricated to sizes indicated on Drawings. 2. Thickness of main frame members shall be increased to 0.130" minimum at frame and hinge anchorage. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 4 Aluminum Frames Phase 2 Section 08 12 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Frames shall be supplied with a notch at top of jamb and corner brackets to provide for correct alignment with header and add strength to joint. 4. Stops shall be provided with a continuous nylon backed wool pile sound and light seal around perimeter. 5. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Members shall be clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their lengths. 6. Frames shall be pressure fit type that are installed after partition is in place. Frames shall be anchored at bottom of each jamb. Additional anchors shall be furnished per manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Intermediate mullions shall maintain 1-1/2" profile. 8. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 9. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. 10. Fasteners: Exposed fasteners not permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMES: A. Prior to installation rough openings shall be check and corrected for size, squareness, alignment and plumbness. B. Slip header and jambs into rough opening, allowing header to rest on jambs. Align to scheduled opening width and height, achieving equal wall capture at both jambs. C. Check level of header and squareness and plumb of jambs. Measure width at each hinge location. D. Attach flat corner angles at faces of head. Anchor jambs and header in legs of frame at top and bottom of jambs at approximately 15" on center. E. Install mitered trims by snapping over receiver tabs and lightly tapping with a rubber mallet. F. Tolerances: 1. Squareness: +1/16" a. Measured on a line 90 degrees from one jamb, at upper corner or frame at other jamb. 2. Alignment: +1/16" a. Measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: +1/16" a. Measured at face corners of jambs on parallel line. 4. Plumbness: +1/16" a. Measured on the jamb at floor. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Final Adjustments: 1. Check and re-adjust operating finish hardware just prior to final inspection and after painting hinges. 2. Remove and replace defective work. 3.3 CLEANING ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 4 Aluminum Frames Phase 2 Section 08 12 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation complying with requirements contained in the "Glazing" Sections for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout remainder of construction period to ensure that aluminum frames will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal wear at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 4 Aluminum Frames Phase 2 Section 08 12 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 13 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel Doors. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 12 13 Hollow Metal Frames. B. Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware. D. Section 09 91 00 Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. ANSI/SDI 100 Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C. ASTM A653-97 (M97)- Steel Sheet, Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot- Dip Process. D. Door Hardware Institute (DHI)The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, cutouts for glazing and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut outs for hardware reinforcement. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. E. Doors installed in exterior openings: Manufacturer's shall provide certification signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in Texas that the exterior metal door and frame assemblies (including removable mullions and hardware) meet or exceed the minimum positive and negative wind pressures as determined &documented by the Structural Engineer of Record. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI 100 and ANSI A117.1. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Hollow Metal Doors Phase 2 Section 08 13 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS A. Exterior Insulated Doors (Non-thermally Broken): SDI 100 Grade 2 Model 1. B. Interior Doors: SDI-100 Grade I Model 1. C. See drawings for Fire Rating. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. B. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel flush end closure. Seal joints watertight. C. Configure exterior doors with special profile to receive recessed weather-stripping. 2.3 FINISH A. Primer: Baked. B. Finish: Field painted in colors to be selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with ANSI/SDI 100 and DHI. B. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 12 13, and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Hollow Metal Doors Phase 2 Section 08 13 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush &flush glazed configuration, non-rated. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 12 13—Hollow Metal Frames. C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP- Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. AWI -Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling and special blocking for hardware & identify cutouts for glazing. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Premium Grade. B. Affix the AWI Quality Grade Stamp to each unit of product. The AWI Quality Grade Stamp shall display Premium Grade as specified. C. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500, systems and grades identified in schedule. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.7 ��IlI�Tr1RV REQUIREMENTS (If rotor- rJnnrc�� 8GI 118d) ,n �11� I'lnv-vvnvrrCAP,c ,--Atinn: CAP,fnrm to ACTAA ��F�r I�I�,��r III OR R tolled Fir�Ted Plnnr A hly: GG Rfnrm to nI CPA 80 for fir ted In �. �-ccnr �--rr vvvr�zSBe a--C�-c �-rcrS$ as r 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under Special Provisions requirements. B. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Flush Wood Doors Phase 2 Section 08 14 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01 70 00 to the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Two (2)years. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Non-Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC - HPDL Plastic Laminate Clad with .050" NEMA LD-3 plastic laminate. B Gere (Selig Fire Rated): AVVI eon+inn 1300 HPDL Type FD 1 V3; plastin laminate Glad ..i+h nFn" niGnnA ARd 1 D_Q nlagtin lOm0RAtA 2.3 FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Plastic Laminate Facing (Interior): NEMA LD-3, General Purpose Fire Rated Type, 0.050 inch thick, matte finish, color and pattern, as selected. 2.4 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type II -water resistant. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Fabricate rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and UL 10B requirements. Attach fire rating label to door C. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. D. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Plastic laminate same as door facing. E. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. F. Bond edge banding to cores. G. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. H. Factory pre-fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B 1no4011 fire Fo4erJ rJenFc in onnnrrJonne I.4th A\AA Quality StandaFd A1CPA An Apd to \A/oFnenL HeFsay Fern iiremapts C. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. D. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Flush Wood Doors Phase 2 Section 08 14 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 at bottom edge only. E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges. F. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08 12 13 and hardware specified in Section 08 71 00. H. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. I. Paint tops and bottoms of doors two (2)coats. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. B. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. See Door Schedule. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Flush Wood Doors Phase 2 Section 08 14 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 42 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 -General Requirements, and Drawings apply to Work of this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum doors complete with hardware. 2. Accessories necessary to complete Work. C. Products Furnished but Not Installed Under this Section: Inserts and anchoring devices that are to be built into structure. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 13 Certificates 2. Section 01 45 00 Quality Control 3. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements 4. Section 01 70 00 Execution &Closeout Requirements 5 Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 6. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 7. Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 8. Section 07 90 00 Joint Protection 9. Section 08 80 00 Glazing 10. Section 09 21 13 Plaster Assemblies 11. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 501 Methods of Test for Exterior Walls 501.2 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems 2605 Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels 606.1 Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum 607.1 Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum 608.1 Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum 701/702 Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals 1503 Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections 1801 Voluntary Specification for the Acoustical Rating of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Glazed Wall Section CW-10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site CW-DG-1 Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual CWG-1 Installation of Aluminum Curtain Walls SFM1 Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual TIR-A8 Structural Performance of Composite Thermal Barrier Framing Systems ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A117.1 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings—Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes B308 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded C716 Standard Specification for Installing Lock-Strip Gaskets and Infill Glazing Materials C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen E330 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference E331 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Static Air Pressure Difference E1886 Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure E1996 Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes E2188 Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance E2190 Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials F. Federal Specifications (FS): TT-P-641 G(1) Primer Coating; Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (For Galvanized Surfaces) TT-P-645A Primer, Paint, Zinc-Molybdate, Alkyd Type G. Florida Building Code (HVHZ)/Miami-Dade County (BCCO): TAS 201 Testing Application Standard - Impact Test Procedures TAS 202 Testing Application Standard - Criteria for Testing Impact& Nonimpact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure TAS 203 Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading H. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual I. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Paint 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film) J. Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC): 4-010-01 DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General Standard: In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply with applicable provisions of AAMA SFM-1 "Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual'for design, materials, fabrication and installation of component parts along with TDI Evaluation ID DR-558. B. Design Requirements: 1. Provide entrance system including necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 2. Fabricate system(s)to match system glazing method and installation requirements. 3. Perimeter conditions shall allow for installation tolerances, expansion and contraction of ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 adjacent materials, and sealant manufacturer's recommended joint design. 4. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage or moisture disposal. 5. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. 6. Do not assume glass, sealants, and interior finishes contribute to framing member strength, stiffness, or lateral stability. 7. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 8. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50%of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 9. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. 10. Provide concealed fastening. 11. Perimeter fasteners to be installed per anchor chart locations based on surrounding structure and design loads. 12. Where anchor inspections are required, sill design with appropriate access will be provided. 13. Framing systems shall accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to structural movement and surface temperature differentials of 180 degrees F without causing buckling, stress on glass, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects. 14. Provide uniform color and profile appearance at components exposed to view. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind loads: Provide framing system capable of withstanding wind load design pressures of+70 psf acting inward and -80 psf acting outward. The design pressures are to be tested in accordance with ASTM E-330. 2. Large missile impact resistant per ASTM E 1996. 3. Cycle tested per ASTM E 1886. 4. Forced Entry tested per AAMA 1304. 5. Cycle tested per ASTM E 1886. D. Interface: 1. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices, which need to be preset and built into structure by appropriate trade. 2. Supply on timely basis to avoid delay in Work. 3. Instruct other trades of proper location and position. 4. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates and installation instructions. 5. Anchor design to accommodate minimum 1" (25.4mm) building structure tolerance in all directions 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for each manufactured product. 2. Include information for factory finishes, hardware, accessories and other required components. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings indicating elevations, dimensions, arrangement of units,joint locations, detailed design, member profiles (including thermal breaks), member connections, fabrication, installation and finish of specified systems. 2. Show following items where applicable: a. Details of special shapes and composite members ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. Joint connections for framing systems and entrance doors C. Reinforcing d. Location of exposed fasteners e. Glazing methods and accessories f. Internal sealant requirements g. Anchorage h. Interfacing with building construction i. Clearly show where and how manufacturer's system deviates from Contract Drawings and these Specifications. D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that installed system is in compliance with specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. F. Warranty: Submit specified warranties. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: To ensure quality of appearance and performance, obtain materials for systems from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturer(s) approved by systems manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer should be experienced with products covered under this Section and capable of providing a door system capable of meeting or exceeding the performance criteria noted in this Section. C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional Engineer registered and licensed in State where Project is located. D. Installer Qualifications: Installer should have successful experience in installation of products covered in this Section on similar projects in scope and size if requested by Owner, installer shall provide a reference list of similar completed projects. E. Perform work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 "Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual". F. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1 and local amendments. 1.06 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Conduct pre-installation conference in accordance with Section 01 31 00. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Sections 01 60 00 and 01 70 00. B. Protect finished surfaces to prevent damage. C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings, which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. D. Do not leave coating residue on surfaces. E. Replace damaged units. F. Deliver glass units with manufacturer's labels intact on interior side of glass. Ensure labels indicate glass thickness, unit location, glass strength and orientation of units in vertical position. G. Protect glass edges and corners to prevent chipping, cracking, and other similar damages. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ensure ambient and surface temperatures and joint conditions are suitable for installation of materials. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty in form acceptable to Owner jointly signed by manufacturer, installer and Contractor warranting work to be watertight, free from deflective materials, defective workmanship, glass breakage due to defective design, and agreeing to replace components which fail within 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty shall cover following: 1. Complete watertight and airtight system installation within specified tolerances. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Glass and glazing gaskets will not break or"pop"from frames due to design wind, expansion or contraction movement or structural loading. 3. Glazing sealants and gaskets will remain free from abnormal deterioration or dislocation due to sunlight, weather or oxidation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products by one of the following: Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope° 803 Airport Road Terrell, TX 75160 (800) 869-4567 B. Approved Equal: Kawneer— IR350 Medium stile doors with door hardware. C. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01 60 00. D. Acceptable Entrance Systems: StormMaxTM MSD-375 MEDIUM STILE DOORS 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005-Hl 6 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 2. Minimum thickness of[0.080] inch for main framing members. B. Internal Reinforcing: 1. ASTM A36 for carbon steel; or ASTM B308 for structural aluminum. 2. Shapes and sizes to suit installation. 3. Shop or factory coat steel components after fabrication with alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. C. Inserts and Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 2. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication; comply with ASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating. D. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with materials being fastened. 2. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent disengagement; deforming of fastener threads is not acceptable. 3. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 4. For exposed locations, provide flathead fasteners with finish matching item fastened. E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead-shield or toothed-steel, drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. F. Shims: Non-staining, non-ferrous, type as recommended by system manufacturer. G. Protective Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat; or alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P- 645. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Components: Zinc oxide conforming with FS TT-P-641. I. Glazing Gaskets: 1. Compression type design, replaceable, molded or extruded, of neoprene, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM). 2. Dow Corning 995 structural silicone sealant at glazing bead with FG-5188 EPDM spacer gasket. J. Weatherstripping: 1. Provide WP-085 wool pile weathering in AS-6 adjustable astragal. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Provide D-120 vinyl weatherstripping in bottom door rail. 2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Section 08 80 00. 2.04 DOOR HARDWARE A. Hardware Items: 1. Butt hinges: BH1-NRP. 2. Surface closers: SMC-100. 3. Panic devices: Jackson 2086 Concealed Vertical Rod Panic. Finish to match aluminum storefront and entrance door. 4. Cylinders: CY-5. 5. Electric strikes: 7100-540-24V-AC. 6. Thresholds: TH-49. 7. Weather-stripping: Manufacturer's standard. 2.05 SYSTEM FABRICATION A. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. B. Fabricate components true to detail and free from defects impairing appearance, strength or durability. C. Fabricate units to withstand loads, which will be applied when system is in place. D. Reinforce components as required at anchorage and support points, at joints, and at attachment points for interfacing work. E. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required to maintain rigidity and accommodate design loads. F. Separate dissimilar metals with protective coating or preformed separators to prevent contact and corrosion. G. Comply with Section 08 80 00 for glazing requirements. H. Entrance Doors: 1. Fabricate with mechanical joints using internal [steel] reinforcing plates and shear blocks attached with fasteners and by welding. 2. Provide extruded aluminum glazing stops permanently anchored on silicone bead side and removable on the opposite side. H. Hardware: 1. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware. 2. Comply with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 3. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. I. Welding: 1. Comply with recommendations of the American Welding Society. 2. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces; restore mechanical finish. 2.06 FINISHES A. Clear Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA-M12C22A31 and AAMA 611. 2. Architectural Class [I, II], etched, medium matte, clear anodic coating, 0.7 mil minimum thickness. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 01 45 00. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other Work. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable provisions of AAMA SFM- 1 "Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual". B. Align assemblies plumb and level, free of warp or twist, aligning with adjacent Work. C. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb and level: a. 1/8 inch in 10'-0"vertically. b. 1/8 inch in 20'-0" horizontally. 2. Limit offsets in theoretical end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignment: a. 1/16 inch where surfaces are flush or less than 1/2 inch out of flush and separated by not more than 2 inches. b. 1/8 inch for surfaces separated by more than 2 inches. D. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frame. F. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. G. Separate dissimilar materials at contract points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with protective coating or preformed separators to prevent contact and electrolytic action. H. Set threshold in full bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles to provide weathertight construction. I. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealant and backing materials between assemblies and adjacent construction in accordance with requirements of Section 07 92 00. J. Glazing: Refer to requirements of Section 08 80 00. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Test door operating functions. Adjust closing and latching speeds and other hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials and other unsightly marks. B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 7 Aluminum-Framed Entrances Phase 2 Section 08 42 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 -General Requirements, and Drawings apply to Work of this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Storefront system, complete with reinforcing, fasteners, anchors, and attachment devices. 2. Accessories necessary to complete work. C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchoring devices which are built into masonry. 2. Anchoring devices which are cast in concrete. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 33 13 Certificates 2. Section 01 45 00 Quality Control 3. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements 4. Section 01 70 00 Execution &Closeout Requirements 5 Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 6. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 7. Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers 8. Section 07 90 00 Joint Protection 9. Section 08 80 00 Glazing 10. Section 09 21 13 Plaster Assemblies 11. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 501.2 Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage. 2. 2605 Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 3. 606.1 Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 4. 607.1 Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 5. 608.1 Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 6. 701.2 Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping. 7. Manual#10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site. 8. SFM1 Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A117.1 Safety Standards for the Handicapped. 2. Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings-Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 Structural Steel. 2. A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. B221 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Aluminum-Framed Stormfronts Phase 2 Section 08 43 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5. B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. 6. E283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 7. E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Static Air Pressure Difference. E. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. TT-P-641 G(1) Primer Coating, Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (For Galvanized Surfaces). 2. TT-P-645A Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type. F. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. Paint 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage, or moisture disposal. 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. 3. Provide concealed fastening. 4. Provide entrance and storefront systems, including necessary modifications, to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 5. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 6. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 7. Where anchor inspections are required, sill design with appropriate access will be provided. 8. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Air infiltration: Tested in accordance with Miami— Dade County and Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-202) and ASTM E 283 at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf. 2. Water infiltration: No uncontrolled leakage when tested in accordance with Miami— Dade County and Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-202) and ASTM E331 at test pressure of 15 psf. C. Hurricane Resistance Requirements 1. Large Missile Impact per Miami— Dade County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO) and Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-201) and (ASTM E 1886/1996)test requirements. 2. Cyclic Load Test per Miami— Dade County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO) protocol (PA-203), Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-203)and (ASTM E 1886/1996)test requirements. 3 Uniform Static Load Test per Dade—County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO) and Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-202) and ASTM E 330. D. Structural Requirements, as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330: 1. Wind loads for exterior assemblies: a. Basic loading: 1) [+70 Maximum] psf acting inward for FG-5000 Dry-Glaze Option 2) [-70 Maximum] psf acting outward for FG-5000 Dry-Glaze Option E. Deflection: Maximum calculated deflection of any framing member in direction normal to plane of wall when subjected to specified design pressures shall be limited to L/180 of its clear span. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Aluminum-Framed Stormfronts Phase 2 Section 08 43 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Testing Requirements: Provide components that have been previously tested by an independent testing laboratory certified by Miami —Dade County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO), Florida Building Code (FBC) and ASTM. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications. 2. Include information for factory finishes, hardware, accessories, and other required components. 3. Include color charts for finish indicating manufacturer's standard colors available for selection. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings covering fabrication, installation and finish of specified systems. 2. Include following: a. Fully dimensioned plans and elevations with detail coordination keys. b. Locations of exposed fasteners and joints. 3. Provide detailed drawings of: a. Composite members. b. Joint connections for framing systems and for entrance doors. C. Anchorage. d. System reinforcements. e. System expansion and contraction provisions. f. Glazing methods and accessories. g. Internal sealant requirements. 4. Schedule of finishes. D. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturers standard samples indicating quality of finish. 2. Where normal texture or color variations are expected, include additional samples illustrating range of variation. 3. Submit samples for each type of glass, 12 x 12 inch size. E. Test Reports: 1. Standard Systems: Submit certified copies of previous test reports substantiating performance of system in lieu of retesting. Include other supportive data as necessary. F. Qualification Data: 1. Submit installer qualifications verifying years of experience. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: To ensure quality of appearance and performance, obtain materials for systems from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturer approved by systems manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of specified systems. C. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM1 and manufacturer's written instructions. D. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1 and local amendments. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 01 60 00 and 01 70 00. B. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings, which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. D. Do not leave coating residue on any surfaces. E. Replace damaged units. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Aluminum-Framed Stormfronts Phase 2 Section 08 43 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty in form acceptable to Owner jointly signed by manufacturer, installer and Contractor warranting work to be watertight, free from deflective materials, defective workmanship, glass breakage due to defective design, and agreeing to replace components which fail within 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty shall cover following: 1. Complete watertight and airtight system installation within specified tolerances. 2. System is structurally sound and free from distortion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope°, Terrell, TX. B. Approved Equal: Kawneer— IR501 Storefront system. C. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01 60 00. D. Acceptable Storefront Framing Systems: Flush Glazed System, center set, exterior loaded: Series 5100—2 '/2"x 5" mullion profile; accommodates 1-5/16" laminated glass. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 2. Minimum thickness of[0.080] inch for main framing members. B. Internal Reinforcing: 1. ASTM A36 for carbon steel; or ASTM B308 for structural aluminum. 2. (1 '/4"x 4 9/16" x'/4")steel channel (vertical mullions)and (1 '/4"x 4 11/16" x 12 ga)steel channel (vertical jambs). 3. Steel components factory coated with alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. C. Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 2. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication; comply with ASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating. D. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with items being fastened. 2. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 3. For exposed locations, provide Phillips flathead screws with finish matching item fastened. 4. For concealed locations, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners. E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead-shield or toothed-steel, drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. F. Protective Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat; or alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P- 645. G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Components: Zinc oxide conforming with FS TT-P-641. H. Glazing Gaskets: 1. Compression type design, replaceable extruded, of neoprene, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM)at exterior gasket. Profile and hardness as required to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal. 2. Dow—Corning #795 structural silicone sealant at interior gasket with Norton "V-2110" ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Aluminum-Framed Stormfronts Phase 2 Section 08 43 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SSA spacer tape. I. Weatherstripping: 1. Provide D-1913 EPDM fin seal in AS-6 adjustable astragal. 2. Provide D-174 silicone weatherstripping in bottom door rail. J. Internal Sealants and Sealant Tapes. 2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Section 08 80 00. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Coordination of Fabrication: 1. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand loads, which will be applied when system is in place. B. General 1. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 2. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to structure. 3. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing protective coating or preformed separators, which will prevent contact and corrosion. 4. Comply with Section 08 80 00 for glazing requirements. C. Aluminum Framing: 1. Provide members of size, shape and profile indicated, designed to provide for glazing from [exterior] [interior]. 2. Fabricate frame assemblies with joints straight and tight fitting. 3. Reinforce internally with structural members as necessary to support design loads. 4. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 5. Seal horizontals and direct moisture accumulation to exterior. 6. Provide flashings and other materials used internally or externally that are corrosive resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding and compatible with adjoining materials. 7. Provide manufacturer's extrusions and accessories to accommodate expansion and contraction due to temperature changes without detrimental to appearance or performance. 8. Make provisions in framing for minimum edge clearance, nominal edge cover and nominal pocket width for thickness and type of glazing or infill used in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and FGMA Glazing Manual. D. Welding: 1. Comply with recommendations of the American Welding Society. 2. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces; restore mechanical finish. E. Flashings: Form from sheet aluminum with same finish as extruded sections. Material thickness as required to suit condition without deflection or"oil canning". 2.05 FINISHES A. Clear Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA-M12C22A31 and AAMA 611. 2. Architectural Class [I, II], etched, medium matte, clear anodic coating, 0.7 mil minimum thickness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 01 45 00. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Aluminum-Framed Stormfronts Phase 2 Section 08 43 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb and level: a. 1/8 inch in 10'-0"vertically. b. 1/8 inch in 20'-0" horizontally. 2. Limit variations from theoretical locations: 1/4 inch for any member at any location. 3. Limit offsets in theoretical end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignment: 1/16 inch from flush surfaces not more than 2 inches apart or out-of-flush by more than 1/4 inch. B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frame. D. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. E. Separate dissimilar materials at contact points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent contact and corrosion. F. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles to provide weathertight construction. G. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealant and backing materials between assemblies and adjacent construction in accordance with requirements of Section 07 92 00. H. Glazing: Refer to requirements of Section 08 80 00. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Test door operating functions. Adjust closing and latching speeds and other hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials and other unsightly marks. B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Aluminum-Framed Stormfronts Phase 2 Section 08 43 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes (if not included by Metal Bldg. mfg.) A. Fixed Window Units- ENERGSAVE Architectural 1. Peerless G241 Fixed Thermal Aluminum Windows 1.2 Related Sections A. Section 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry B. Section 07 90 00—Joint Protection C. Section 08 80 00—Glazing 1.3 References A. AAMA-American Architectural Manufacturers Association: 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 "Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and unit skylights". 2. AAMA 502-12 "Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products". 3. AAMA 701/702-11 "Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstripping and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals". 4. AAMA 901-10 "Voluntary Specification for Rotary& Linear Operators in Window Applications". 5. AAMA 902-07 "Voluntary Specification for Sash Balances". 6. AAMA 904-09 "Voluntary Specification for Multi-bar Hinges in Window Applications". 7. AAMA 910-10 "Voluntary- Life Cycle-Specifications and Test Methods for AW Class Architectural Windows and Doors". 8. AAMA 920-11 "Specification for Operating Cycle Performance of Side-Hinged Exterior Door Systems". 9. AAMA 1304-02 "Voluntary Specification for Forced Entry Resistance of Side-Hinged Door Systems". 10. AAMA 1503-09 "Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections". 11. AAMA 2605-13 "Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels" 12. AAMA CW-10-12 "Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site" 13. AAMA 501.8-12 "Standard Test Method for Determination of Resistance to Human Impact of Window Systems Intended for Use in Psychiatric Applications". 14. AAMA 513-12 "Standard Laboratory Test Method for Determination of Forces and Motions Required to Activate Operable Parts of CW and AW Class Operable Windows, Sliding Glass Doors and Terrace Doors in Accessible Spaces" 1.4 Submittals A. Product Data: test reports or waiver from an AAMA accredited laboratory; manufacturer's specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Window location chart; typical window elevations; details of assemblies, hardware and glazing details for units glazed by the window manufacturer. C. Samples: each specified finish for aluminum; other samples as requested. 1.5 Quality Assurance ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Aluminum Windows Phase 2 Section 08 51 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled craftspeople who have demonstrated a successful history of installing windows for five years. B. Product Requirements: 1. Acceptance will be by addendum only as no verbal approvals will be allowed. 2. Submit bid on prequalified products in prebid written addendum. Bidder must identify manufacturer and model of product on which the bid is based. 3. Furnish a valid AAMA"Authorization for Product Certification" or waiver indicating the windows for the project conform to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08. 4. Furnish visible, permanent SGCC certification labels indicating conformance with ANSI Z97.1-09 and/or 16 CFR 1201 on tempered glass lites, if included on the project, and laminated glass lites, if included on the project. 5. Furnish visible, permanent IGCC certification labels indicating compliance with ASTM E 2190-10 on the insulating glass units. 1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Store Products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Handle and protect windows and accessories in accordance with AAMA CW-10-15 until project completion. 1.7 Project Conditions A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.8 Warranty A. Manufacturer's Warranties: 1. Windows: Manufacturer shall warrant for one year against defects in material and workmanship under normal use. 2. Insulating Glass Units: Glass manufacturer shall warrant seal for ten years against visual obstruction from film formation or moisture collection between internal glass surfaces, excluding that caused by glass breakage or abuse. 3. Powder Paint Finish: Finish conforming to AAMA 2605 shall be warranted for twenty years against checking, cracking, chalking or fading. PART2 PRODUCTS 3.1 Manufacturers A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Peerless Products, Inc., which is located at: 2403 S. Main St.; Ft. Scott, KS 66701; Toll Free Tel: 866-420-4000; Tel: 620-223-4610; Fax: 620-224-3107; Email: request info (adowell@peerlessproducts.com)Web: http://www.peerlessproducts.com. B. Approved equal: Kawneer —Model: IR501 T. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 3.2 FIXED WINDOW UNITS- ENERGSAVE ARCHITECTURAL A. Product: Peerless G241 Fixed Thermal Aluminum Windows 1. AAMA Certification: Conformance with FW-AW90. B. Configuration: 1. Fixed; glass plane in line with the window exterior plane. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Aluminum Windows Phase 2 Section 08 51 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Construction: 1. Aluminum Extrusions: extruded by the window manufacturer from commercial quality 6063-T5 alloy; free from defects impairing strength and durability. 2. Window Frame: Extruded aluminum with integral structural thermal break installed by the window manufacturer in the frame members; exterior and interior finishes applied by the window manufacturer; frames assembled by the window manufacturer. a. Frame Depth: 3 1/4 Inches (83 mm). b. Fabricated with equal-leg frame. 3. Frame: Double tubular head, sill, and jambs miter cut and fastened with two zamac corner gussets per corner; corners sealed by window manufacturer with sealant conforming to AAMA 800-10. 4. Integral Mullions: Double tubular integral mullion fastened with two Zamac gussets per frame member without penetrating the frame member with fasteners;joints sealed by window manufacturer with sealant conforming to AAMA 800-10. 5. Thermal Break: The thermal break separating the exterior and interior aluminum extrusions shall be a mechanical crimp-in-place system utilizing multi-directional glass fiber reinforced polyamide nylon ribbed struts with locking mechanical connections to the aluminum extrusions. The thermal break shall not be compromised by hardware or metal fasteners. 6. Glazing: exterior ExxonMobil SantopreneTM foam gasket; 1 inch (25 mm) insulating glass; two weep holes under each glass pocket for drainage with hooded weeps painted to match the window finish; foam backer rod and silicone heel bead forming an internal seal; interior SantopreneTm bulb gasket threaded into aluminum glazing beads; specified glass glazed by the window manufacturer. D. Performance: 1. AAMA Certification: Conformance to AW-PG90-FW specifications in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-08 when tests are performed on the prescribed 60 inches by 99 inches (1524 mm by 2515 mm) minimum test size with the following test results: 2. Air Infiltration: Not to exceed AAMA 101 standard of maximum 0.1 cfm/square foot when tested per ASTM E283-12 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf. 3. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water leakage when tested per ASTM E331-09 and ASTM E547-09 at a static air pressure difference of 15 psf. 4. Uniform Deflection: No more than L/175 when tested per ASTM E330-14 at a static air pressure difference of 90 psf. 5. Uniform Structural Load: No glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, and maximum .2% permanent deformation of the span of any frame member when tested per ASTM E330-14 at a static air pressure difference of 135 psf. 6. Forced-entry Resistance: Reasonable security against forced entry and the test window shall achieve a Grade 40 when tested per ASTM F588-07. E. Thermal NFRC Simulation: Thermal computer simulation per NFRC 100-2010 on a 60 inches by 99 inches (1524 mm by 2515 mm)test size glazed with 1 inch (25 mm) insulating made with 1/4 inch (6 mm)soft coat low E coating on surface#2, argon gas in the airspace made with a stainless steel spacer, and 1/4 inch (6 mm) clear glass, with the following test result: 1. Standardized Thermal Transmittance to be maximum 0.297 btu/hr/sq.ft/degree F. F. Thermal AAMA Testing: Per AAMA 1503-09, on a 47 inch by 59 inches (1194 mm by 1499 mm)test size glazed with 1 inch (25 mm) insulating glass made with 1/4 inch (6 mm)soft coat low E coating on surface#2, plain air in the airspace made with a stainless steel spacer, and 1/4 inch (6 mm)clear glass, with the following test results: 1. Condensation Resistance Factor: minimum 71 frame CRF and 72 glass CRF. 2. Thermal Transmittance: maximum 0.35 btu/hr/sq.ft/degree F U value. G. Thermal NFRC Testing: Per NFRC 102-2010 on a 47 inch by 59 inches (1194 mm by 1499 mm)test size glazed with 1 inch (25 mm) insulating glass made with 1/4 inch (6 mm)soft coat low E coating on surface#2, plain air in the airspace made with a stainless steel spacer, and 1/4 inch (6 mm)clear glass, with the following test result: 1. Standardized Thermal Transmittance to be maximum 0.34 btu/hr/sq.ft/degree F. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Aluminum Windows Phase 2 Section 08 51 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 H. Acoustical Testing: per ASTM E90-09 on a 46-1/4 inches x 59 inches (1175 mm x 1499 mm) test size glazed with 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) insulating glass made with exterior 5/16 (7.9 mm) laminated glass- 1/8 inch (3 mm)glass x .060 inch (1.5 mm) PVB interlayer x 1/8 inch (3 mm)glass-and 13/16 inch (20.6 mm) airspace and interior 1/4 inch (6 mm) laminated glass — 1/8 inch (3 mm)glass x .030 inch (0.76 mm) PVB interlayer x 1/8 inch (3 mm)glass: minimum 40 STC and 31 OITC. 3.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Material: Extruded aluminum; nominal .062 inch (1.6 mm)wall; with exposed surfaces finished to match window color and finish performance; concealed fasteners; required weather seals; designed for unrestricted expansion and contraction. B. Mullions: 1. Vertical three-piece mullion with polyamide strip thermal break C. Sill angle. 3.4 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Materials: 1. Spacer: tubular stainless steel. 2. Spacer color: Stainless metal color. 3. Primary seal: polyisobutylene. 4. Secondary seal: Silicone. 5. Airspace Fill: Argon filled. B. Performance: 1. Dual-seal durability: AAMA Certification: Conformance with ASTM E 2190-10; visible, permanent IGCC certification label. C. Glazing: 1. Type: 1" Insulating Glass. 2. Exterior: 1/4" (6.35mm) Clear Tempered 3. Interior: 3/16" (5mm) Clear Annealed /0.090" (2mm) Sentry Guard Plus lonoplast/ 3/16" (5mm) Clear Annealed. 4. Impact Rated Glass Windload Design: Provide to meet the Design/Performance requirements specified in structural plans. 3.5 FINISH ON EXTERIOR ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS A. Application: on clean extrusions free from objectionable surface blemishes; on exposed surfaces visible when installed product's operating sash is closed. Electrostatic spray by an Approved Applicator and appropriate oven bake process. B. Coating: Superior Performance Powder coating: One-coat dry system with resin containing fluoropolymer; thermosetting; alternative finishes will not be acceptable. C. Quality Standard: Conforming to AAMA 2605-13, including 10 years Florida exposure. [AAMA 2604-13, including 5 years Florida exposure.] D. Pretreatment: Mechanically clean and chemically pretreat fabricated items in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements and AAMA requirements with a Chrome Free Treatment. E. Coating Quantity: One single color coating, additional coating quantities will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to barrier coats, primers and clear coats. F. Dry Film Thickness: Eighty percent of measurements on primary exposed surfaces shall exceed 1.9 mils with a standard thickness range of 1.9 to 3.14 mils, except inside corners and channels. G. Environmental Factors: Less than 3% harmful VOC's (Volatile Organic Compounds) emitted during powder coating application process. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Aluminum Windows Phase 2 Section 08 51 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 H. Color: Chosen from manufacturer's standards. 3.6 FINISH ON INTERIOR ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS A. Application: on clean extrusions free from objectionable surface blemishes; on exposed surfaces visible when installed product's operating sash is closed. Electrostatic spray by an Approved Applicator and appropriate oven bake process. B. Coating: Superior Performance Powder coating: One-coat dry system with resin containing 70%fluoropolymer; thermosetting; alternative finishes will not be acceptable. C. Quality Standard: Conforming to AAMA 2605-13, including 10 years Florida exposure. [AAMA 2604-13, including 5 years Florida exposure.] D. Pretreatment: Mechanically clean and chemically pretreat fabricated items in accordance with coating manufacturer's requirements and AAMA requirements with a Chrome Free Treatment. E. Coating Quantity: One single color coating, additional coating quantities will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to barrier coats, primers and clear coats. F. Dry Film Thickness: Eighty percent of measurements on primary exposed surfaces shall exceed 1.9 mils with a standard thickness range of 1.9 to 3.14 mils, except inside corners and channels. G. Environmental Factors: Less than 3% harmful VOC's (Volatile Organic Compounds)emitted during powder coating application process. H. Color: Chosen from manufacturer's standards. 3.7 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.8 PREPARATION A. Prepare openings to be in tolerance, plumb, level, provide for secure anchoring, and in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.9 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with approved shop drawings and window manufacturer's recommendations with skilled craftspeople who have demonstrated a successful history of installing windows for a specified number of years. Provide required support and securely fasten and set windows plumb, square, and level without twist or bow. Install in proper relationship with adjacent construction. B. Apply sealant per sealant manufacturer's recommendations at joints, wipe off excess, and leave exposed sealant surfaces clean and smooth. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Adjust windows as necessary for smooth and weathertight operation. 3.11 CLEANING ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Aluminum Windows Phase 2 Section 08 51 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Peel the Preserve protective film from the window or door glass surfaces when the window or door installation is complete, leaving these surfaces ready for use without the need for glass cleaning. B. Leave the installed windows and doors clean and free of construction debris. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Aluminum Windows Phase 2 Section 08 51 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for doors. 1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 08 12 13—Hollow Metal Frames: Furnish templates for frame preparation. B. Section 08 13 13 — Hollow Metal Doors: Furnish templates and cylinders for door preparation. C. Section 08 14 16 — Flush Wood Doors: Furnish templates and cylinders for door preparation. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute/Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (ANSI): 1. ANSI/BHMA A156. B. International Code Council/American National Standards Institute (ICC/ANSI)/ADA: 1. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Standards for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 3. American with Disabilities Act(ADA). C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 1784 Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies. 3. UL/ULC Listed. 4. UL305- Panic Hardware. D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. DHI Publication - Keying Systems and Nomenclature. 2. DHI Publication -Abbreviations and Symbols. 3. DHI Publication - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 4. DHI Publication-Sequence and Format of Hardware Schedule. E. National Fire Protection Agency(NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protective's. 3. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 4. NFPA 105 Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. F. Building Codes 1. IBC International Building Code. 2. Local Building Code. G. Miami Dade Building Code Compliance: 1. Provide products where indicated with NOA numbers approved by Miami-Dade Building Code Compliance. H. Texas Department of Insurance: 1. Provide products where indicated with Report Numbers as evaluated by TDI Windstorm Inspection Program. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. C. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Approval of the hardware list by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for furnishing all required finish hardware. All doors not designated to receive any hardware shall be furnished with hardware to match similar doors at no additional cost to Owner. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A117.1 —Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ADA—Americans with Disabilities Act. 3. ANSI A117.1. 4. ANSI A115 Series, Door and Hardware Prep. 5. ANSI A156 Series, Hardware. 6. SGMS 1201 —Auxiliary Hardware. 7. BHMS 1301 —Materials and Finishes. 8. NFPA 80—Standards for Fire Doors. 9. DHI Publications Keying — Procedures Abbreviations and Symbols, Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors, Recommended Location for Builders Hardware. 10. UL 305. 1.8 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial institutional door hardware with 3 years documented experience approved by manufacturer. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ a qualified person to assist in the work of this section. 1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to doors and frames. B. Disabled Accessibility Requirements: 1. In accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act, the following standards shall be included when bidding doors and door openings, controls and operating mechanisms, and signage. (Standards as set forth by the State Purchasing and General Services Commission and by The Americans with Disabilities Act.) Any items not conforming to these or any other standards, codes or ordinances shall be brought to the attention of the project architect for his/her interpretation. 2. State Purchasing and General Services Commission ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Doors and Openings. Raised thresholds and floor level changes at Doorways: Changes in level at doors shall not exceed one-half inch (1/2") in height and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. b. Door Hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five (5) lbs. Preferred designs include but are not limited to: lever-operated mechanisms, push-type mechanisms, and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface may be made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to the contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those hazardous areas. C. Door Closers: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three seconds to move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees. d. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with this paragraph. For hinged doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch. 1) Exterior doors shall not exceed 8.5 Ibf. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 Ibf. is insufficient to compensate for air-pressure differentials. 2) Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding 5 Ibf. 3) Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the maximum opening force allowed by the governing authority or applicable building code. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide five-year warranty under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Warranty: Include coverage for door closers. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01 70 00. B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPLIERS A. As listed in Hardware Schedule. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges (Butts): McKinney, Stanley, Hager & Soss. ANSI A-156.1 and A-1-156.7, template, full-mortise, heavy duty, ball and plain bearing as required (Min. 4 'h x 4 '/2). Non-removable pins. Non-ferrous (all doors). B. Locksets: Yale (Facility standard). Heavy Duty, Commercial Grade. Mortise at exterior doors & Cylindrical at interior doors, unless scheduled otherwise. Lever handles on all doors, unless scheduled otherwise. C. Exit Devices &Trim: Yale (Facility standard). D. Closers: Sargent, Yale, Norton & LCN. E. Protection Plates: Rockwood, Ives, &Trimco. F. Stops/Holders/Bumpers: Rockwood, Trimco & Ives. G. Flush Bolts: Rockwood, Trimco & Ives. H. Gasketing; Pemko, &National Guard . I. Thresholds: Pemko &National Guard. 2.3 KEYING A. All Lock cylinders are to be keyed to Owner's instructions and into facility keying system. Furnish 2 ea. keys per lock. 2.4 FINISHES A. Finishes: US26D & US32D B. Thresholds &Closers: AL 2.5 GRADE—BHMA Grade 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or instructed by the manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplier to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. HARDWARE SET No.1 Door Number(s): 231 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 'h" NRP US32D Mc 1 Ea. Exit Device 7150F-WS x AU626F US32D YA 1 Ea Closer UNI-3501 x SNB AL YA 1 Ea. Kickplate K1050 10"h x 34" US32D RO 1 Ea Threshold 2005V x 36" PE 1 Ea.Gasketing 303AV 1 pc. 36", 2 pc. 84" PE 1 Ea. Raindrip 346C x 40" PE B. HARDWARE SET No.2 Door Number(s): 215, 216, 217, 218, 219, 220, 226, 227, 228, 229, &230 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 'h" NRP US26D Mc 1 Ea. Locket-Office AU5404LN x 497 US26D YA 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Ea. Silencers 608 RO C. HARDWARE SET No.3 Door Number(s): 204, 209,&223 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 'h" NRP US26D Mc 1 Ea. Locket-Storeroom AU5405LN x 497 US26D YA 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Ea. Silencers 608 RO D. HARDWARE SET No.4 Door Number(s): 210&224 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 'h" NRP US26D Mc 2 Ea. Flush Bolts 555-12" US26D RO 1 Ea. Locket-Storeroom AU5405LN x 497 US26D YA 2 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1 Ea. Astragal 359A x 84" PE 2 Ea. Silencers 608 RO E. HARDWARE SET No.5 Door Number(s): 205 &206 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 '/2" US26D Mc 1 Ea. Push 30S US32D RO 1 Ea. Pull 33E US32D RO 1 Ea. Kickplate K1050 10"h x 34" US32D RO 1 Ea Closer 3501 x SNB AL YA 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 1 Ea. Silencers 608 RO F. HARDWARE SET No. 6 Door Number(s): 207 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 '/2" US26D Mc 1 Ea. Passage Set AU5401 In x 497 US26D YA 1 Ea. Occupancy Deadbolt V21-D292 US26D YA 1 Ea. Kickplate K1050 10"h x 34" US32D RO 1 Ea. Closer 3501 x SNB AL YA 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Ea. Silencers 608 RO G. HARDWARE SET No.7 Door Number(s): 213 &221 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 '/2" NRP US26D Mc 1 Ea. Locket-Classroom AU5408LN x 497 US26D YA 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Ea. Silencers 608 RO H. HARDWARE SET No.8 Door Number(s): 232 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 '/2" NRP US26D Mc 1 Ea. Locket-Classroom AU5408LN x 497 US26D YA 1 Ea. Closer 3501 x SNB AL YA 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Ea. Silencers 608 RO ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 I. HARDWARE SET No.9 Door Number(s): 211 Each to have: 3 Ea. Hinges TA2314 4 '/2"x 4 '/2" NRP US32D Mc 1 Ea. Exit Device 7100 x AU626F US32D YA 1 Ea Closer 3501 x SNB AL YA 1 Ea. Kickplate K1025 10"h x 34" US32D RO 1 Ea. Wall Stop 409 US32D RO 3 Ea. Silencers 608 RO J. HARDWARE SET No.10 Door Number(s): 201A, 208, 208A, 2088, 225, &225A Each to have: 1 Ea. Cylinder Rim or mortise as required US32D YA Balance of hardware furnished with door END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 7 Door Hardware Phase 2 Section 08 71 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing required throughout Project and not specified as a part of other Sections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 90 00-Joint Protection. B. Section 08 13 13—Hollow Metal Doors. C. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 08 51 13—Aluminum Windows. E. Section 10 23 10—Glazed Interior Wall and Door Assemblies. 1.3 GLASS & GLAZING SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Glass and glazing is specified with the following components. Unless otherwise noted, glass and glazing specified elsewhere shall conform to materials and glazing requirements and procedures specified in these Sections: 1. Section 08 42 26 "All Glass Entrances." 2. Section 10 23 10 "Glazed Interior Wall and Door Assemblies." 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. ANSI Z97.1 -Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. C. ASTM C1036- Flat Glass. D. ASTM C1048- Heat-Treated Flat Glass- Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. E. FGMA-Glazing Manual. F. FGMA-Sealant Manual. G. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07 90 00. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative wind loads, as determined &documented by Structural Engineer of Record. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. D. Impact Resistance: 1. Windstorm: a. New curtainwall and storefront systems. See structural drawings for windstorm criteria. 2. Human Impact: a. Club Lounge glass wall. b. Club Lounge drink wall. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 1 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data on Glass Types Specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations and special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that glass, meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop Drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under Division 1 requirements. B. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. Insulating Glass Units: Warrant for 10 years from date of acceptance of Project to be free from delamination and failure of seals and not to develop material obstruction of vision as a result of dust, moisture or film formation on internal glass surfaces. B. Low-E Glass: Warrant for 10 years from date of acceptance of Project to be free of peeling or other deterioration of the Low-E coating. C. Laminated Glass: Warrant for 10 years from date of acceptance of Project to be free from delamination and discoloration. D. Glazing Sealant's Warrant for 10 years per sealant manufacturer's standard warranty of merchantable quality. Warranty shall certify that cured sealants: 1. Will perform as a watertight weatherseal. 2. Will not become brittle or crack due to weathering or normal expansion and contraction of adjacent surfaces. 3. Will not harden beyond a Shore A durometer of 50, nor soften below a durometer of 10. 4. Will not change color when used with compatible back-up materials. 5. Will not bleed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Manufacturers: PPG, LOF, Guardian Industries, Ford Glass, Hordis Brothers Inc., or equal. Provide all tinted and Low-E glass from the same manufacturer for the entire project. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 2 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glass types, thicknesses and fabricated assemblies are scheduled in the Glass Schedule included in PART 3. EXECUTION of this Section. Where no thickness is given, it shall be determined by glass manufacturer as specified in Article 1.04 System Description of this Section. Adjacent tinted and Low-E glass shall have the same light transmittance. 1. Clear Annealed Float Glass: Clear float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, quality q3. 2. Heat Strengthened Clear Float Glass: As specified for clear annealed float glass except heat strengthened to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind HS. 3. Tempered Clear Float Glass: As specified for clear annealed float glass except fully tempered to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. 4. Annealed Tinted Float Glass: Glare reducing float glass conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2, quality q3, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. a. PPG "Solex", green color, or equal. b. LOF "Blue-Green ", blue-green color, or equal. C. PPG "Azurelite", blue color, no substitutions. d. PPG "Solargray", gray color, or equal. e. PPG "Solarbronze", bronze color, or equal. 5. Heat Strengthened Tinted Float Glass:As specified for annealed tinted float glass except heat strengthened to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind HS. 6. Tempered Tinted Float Glass: As specified for annealed tinted float glass except fully tempered to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. 7. Clear Wire Glass: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, clear rolled glass conforming to ASTM C- 1036, Type II (flat), Class I, Form 1 (wired and polished both faces), wired with welded polished wires, 1/2 inch (13 mm)x 1/2 inch (13 mm) square pattern, smooth wires vertical, manufactured by Hordis Bros., Sierracin/Transtech, or equal. 8. Annealed Obscure Glass: Conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class I, Form 3, Finish 1, pattern p3 "hammered"texture glass. 9. Tempered Obscure Glass: As specified for annealed obscure glass except conforming to ASTM C 1048, kind FT. 10. Obscure Wire Glass:As specified for Clear Wire Glass, except Form 3, Finish 1, pattern p3 "hammered"texture glass. 11. Clear Fire Rated Tempered Safety Glass, 20 Minute Rated: "Pyroswiss", no known equal, with UL or Warnock-Hersey label, manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 2425 Carillon Point, Kirkland, WA 98003, Tel. 1-800-426-0279. 12. Clear Fire Rated Safety Glass Ceramic, 20 - 90 Minute Rated: "Firelite Plus", no known equal, with UL or Warnock-Hersey label, manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 2425 Carillon Point, Kirkland, WA 98003, Tel. 1-800-426-0279. 13. Annealed Low-E Clear Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 500(2)", or equal, clear float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2, quality q3. 14. Tempered Low-E Clear Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 500(2) ", or equal, float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, tempered to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. 15. Annealed Low-E Tinted Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 500(2)", or equal, clear float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2, quality q3. 16. Heat Strengthened Low-E Tinted Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 500(2)", or equal, tinted float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, heat strengthened to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind HS. 17. Tempered Low-E Tinted Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 500(2) ", or equal, float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, tempered to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 3 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 18. Heat Strengthened Low-E Tinted Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 1000(2)", or equal, tinted float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, heat strengthened to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind HS. 19. Tempered Low-E Tinted Float Glass: PPG "Sungate 1000(2)", or equal, tinted float glass with transparent reflective coating on inboard (No. 2) surface, tempered to conform to ASTM C 1048, Kind FT. 20. Spandrel Glass: Tempered spandrel glass conforming with DD-G-1403, Grade B, Style II, color as shown or selected by University. 21. Insulating Glass: a. Manufacturer and Unit Fabrication: By a member of the Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Assn. (SIGMA) and fabricated in accordance with SIGMA recommendations, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. b. Class: "CBA" and certified as such by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC). C. Construction: ASTM E 774 organic elastomeric sealed edge (no metal edges permitted) consisting of a polyisobutylene primary seal and a silicone secondary seal, with the interior air space hermetically sealed and provided with a concealed desiccant agent. Secondary seals other than silicone shall not be used. d. Where visible through the glass, the exposed surface of the metal spacer tube shall be painted with thermosetting, siliconized acrylic paint, or equal, color to match the color of aluminum frame at the interior of the building. e. Configuration: As per Glass Schedule. 22. Laminated Glass: Fabricated using heat and pressure with Monsanto, or approved equal, clear polyvinyl butyral sheet interlayer, configuration of assembly as per Glass Schedule. Laminated glass shall conform to requirements of Reference Standard 1.2.B. 23. Glazing Materials and Accessories: Glazing materials and accessories shall be fully compatible with the materials and finishes with which they are in contact. Neoprene and EPDM materials shall not come in contact with silicone sealant materials. Silicone rubber spacers, setting and edge blocks and gaskets shall be either Type I (designed to prevent adhesion) or Type II (designed for adhesion) as per glazing system manufacturer's recommendations for each condition of use. a. Glazing Tapes: Preformed, preshimmed polyisobutylene-butyl tape, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide x thickness to suit proper face clearance of glass, black color; "Pecora BB-50 Extru-Seal", PTI "606", Tremco Preshimmed#440, or "Polyshim" ("Polyshim" only where glass lites exceed 150 united inches), or equal. b. Glazing Sealants: One component, silicone-based sealant, black color; Dow-Corning 795" or General Electric "Silpruf 2000", or equal. Sealants shall be recommended by the manufacturer for the particular condition of use. C. Glazing Sealants (Butt Glazing And Steel Windows): One component, silicone based sealant, black color except clear color at butt glazing; Dow- Corning 795" or"999-A", or General Electric "Gesil N 2600", "SCS 100" or "SCS 1200", or equal, as per manufacturer's recommendations for the particular condition of use. d. Primers (If Required for Sealants): Non-staining and non-etching type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. e. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone rubber conforming to ASTM C 864, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness, and which will permit permanent mounting. Blocks shall be 0.1-inch (2.5 mm) long for each square foot of glass area (but no less than 4 inches (100 mm))x 1/16 inches (1.6 mm) less than full channel width and of thickness to provide proper bite and minimum edge clearance for glass. Where length of block may become excessive, ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 4 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 lead blocks having a length of 0.05"for each square foot of glass (4 inches (100 mm) minimum) may be used. Do not use lead blocks for insulating, laminated or wire glass. f. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone rubber conforming to ASTM C 864, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness, and which will permit permanent mounting. Blocks shall be 3 inches (75 mm) minimum length x full channel width and of thickness or configuration to provide 1/8 inch (3 m) (nom.) clearance between block and glass edge. g. Glazing Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone rubber conforming to ASTM C 864, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness, size as required by glazing conditions, continuous (do not use intermittent spacers). h. Insulation (Glass Spandrels): Owens-Corning Fiberglas "CW 225-FSK", or approved equal, fiberglass, semi-rigid, friction fit board with integral aluminum foil vapor barrier, "R"value as indicated on Drawings. Include galvanized steel mounting channels as required by job conditions. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Cut glass to full fit and play, consistent with glass and glazing material manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the Drawings and References, Codes and Standards Article. B. Follow code requirements and glass manufacturer's recommendations for minimum bite and edge and face clearances. C. Cut lights to smooth straight edges, clean, free of nicks and flares; nipping not permitted. Follow glass manufacturer's directions exactly for tinted and Low-E glass. D. Where glass edges (including cut openings) are required to be exposed, grind smooth and polish. E. Tempered and heat strengthened glass shall be horizontally treated only. Fabrication and treatment shall, where at all possible, be such that roller distortion lines (where they may occur)will run horizontally (parallel to sill and head) after installation. F. Glass Identification: 1. Tempered and heat strengthened glass shall bear the manufacturer's identification as to type and thickness. 2. Glazing in fire rated doors and fire rated windows shall bear UL classification marking in accordance with UL 9. 3. Manufacturer's and UL identifications for glazing shall be permanently etched so as to be visible after glass has been set in place and glazed. 4. Glass other than tempered, heat strengthened, and UL-marked glass shall not have labels. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Inspect surfaces to receive glazing materials and report defects which might adversely affect the glazing work. Commencing work implies acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory. D. Weep systems shall be open. E. Surfaces shall be free of condensation and moisture. F. Steel surfaces shall be primed and dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean rebates and glazing reveals free of foreign matter, special coatings, dust, grease, projections and irregularities prior to setting glass. Solvents used for cleaning shall not etch or damage glass or metal surfaces. B. Wipe glass free of dust and oil. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 5 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to recommendations of glass manufacturer where such covers points not shown on Drawings or specified herein. B. Remove "loose"stops furnished with the units and reinstall as a part of the glazing operation. C. Handle Iites so as to prevent nicks and flares on glass edges. D. Install glass exceeding 1/8"thickness on identical setting blocks permanently mounted and centered at 1/4 points. If necessary, to reduce deflection of horizontal supporting member, blocks may be placed at 1/8 points or with the nearest end 6" (whichever is greater) from edge of glass unit. Ensure that blocks are equidistant from centerline of glass. Do not obstruct weep holes. E. Provide permanently mounted edge blocks at head and jambs of dry-glazed lights to prevent damage to glass edges during installation and lateral shifting of glass due to thermal and seismic loads and vibrations. Follow recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Assn. Glazing Manual. F. Set glass to maintain bite, edge and face clearance stipulated by code and the glass manufacturer. G. Take special precautions to protect laminated glass edges from deterioration of vinyl interlayer by moisture. H. Glaze dry-glazed aluminum doors and frames as per manufacturer's directions using glazing gaskets and seals furnished with the units. I. Miter gaskets at corners and install so as to prevent pulling away at corners. Gaskets with gaps or other visible irregularities on door and window units shall be corrected by manufacturer or fabricator at no additional cost to University. J. Set interior non-wired glass in fixed stops with glazing tape one face. K. Wire glass installed in metal frames and stops shall be embedded in metal sash putty, and all exposed joints between the metal and the glass struck and pointed. L. Steel Windows: 1. Clean surfaces to receive glazing materials. 2. Apply glazing tape against fixed stops with corners butted tightly (do not overlap). Install head and sill tape first and extend full width of opening. Tape shall be straight without dips and so placed that it will finish flush with top of stop after glass is installed. 3. Set glass on glazing blocks at 1/4 points (if required by size) and properly position glass in opening. Remove paper backing from tape and press glass against tape to ensure full contact. 4. Snap stops in place making sure that exterior glazing sealant reveal is maintained all around. 5. Apply glazing sealant in exterior reveal all four sides. Tool to uniform, smooth bead with 1/16"watershed surface. M. Where butted glass without mullions is required, seal with silicone sealant in strict accord with sealant and glass manufacturer's directions. Set glass so that joint is plumb and glass edges are aligned to provide for a uniform joint width of 3/8" (max.). Mask edges of glass to confine sealant to joints and to avoid contact with either face. Use primers where so required. Neatly tool joints to slightly concave surface using recommended tooling agent. Remove masking from glass and clean glass surfaces completely free of sealant material. N. Set pattern glass with smooth side to exterior, and to room side of corridors. O. Insulation (Spandrel Glass): Attach mounting channels for insulation to aluminum framing members in accord with glass manufacturer's recommendations and so as to maintain a minimum distance of I" between glass surface and insulation face. Cut insulation to fit tightly. Orient foil vapor barrier to the interior. Seal edges,joints, penetrations, tears and holes with compatible adhesive foil tape. P. Close and tightly seal all partly used sealant containers, and store protected in well- ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 6 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ventilated area at temperature recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct field check(test) of glazing in exterior for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2. B. After substantial cure of exterior glazing sealants which are exposed to the weather, test for water leaks. Flood the joint exposure with water directed from a 3/4 inch (38 mm) garden hose held perpendicular to the wall face, 24 inches (600 mm) from the joint, connected to a water system with 43 psf minimum static water pressure. Move stream of water along joint at an approximate rate of 20 feet (6 m) per minute. C. Test approximately 5 percent of total glazing system in locations which are typical of every joint condition and which can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct tests in presence of the Project Manager, who will determine actual percentage of joints to be tested and the actual period of exposure to water from hose, based upon extent of observed leakage or lack thereof. D. Repair glazing installation at leaks or, where leakage is excessive, replace glazing sealants. E. Where nature of observed leakage indicates possibility of inadequate glazing joint bond strength, the Project Manager may direct that additional testing be performed at a time when joints have been fully cured, followed by natural exposure through both extreme temperatures, and returned to range of temperature in which it is feasible to conduct testing. Repair or replace work as required for permanent elimination of leakage. 3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Separate float glass and place in designated containers for recycling. B. Separate tempered glass and place in designated containers for recycling. C. Separate corrugated cardboard in accordance with the approved Waste Management Plan in Division 01 Section"Construction Waste Management",and place in designated containers for recycling. D. Place used sealant containers in designated containers for legal disposal. 3.6 CLEANING A. Initial cleaning of glass surfaces is a part of this Section. Follow glass manufacturer's directions exactly for cleaning tinted and Low-E glass. Do not use abrasive cleaners or sharp instruments. Final cleaning and periodic cleaning of glass for protection from etching due to alkaline runoff from cementitious surfaces or due to construction soil is a part of the General Subcontract and is specified as a part of Division 01. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed glass from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Identification or caution markers shall not be applied to glass surfaces nor shall they be applied to metal surfaces in any way which would damage or stain the metal. C. Replace glass broken or damaged prior to acceptance of Project. Costs occasioned by replacement shall be borne by those causing the damage. 3.8 GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass types are indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Phase 2 Project Number 20094A 7 of 7 Glazing Section 08 80 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed-Blade Extruded-Aluminum Louvers: 1. Horizontal drainable-blade louver. B. Stationary Hurricane Louvers, Miami-Dade County Approved. C. Louver Screens. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 22 00—Concrete Unit Masonry. B. Section 06 10 00—Rough Carpentry. C. Section 07 90 00—Joint Protection. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA): 1. AMCA 500-L- Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating. 2. AMCA 501 -Application Manual for Air Louvers. 3. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program- Product Rating Manual for Air Control Devices. 4. AMCA 512-AMCA Listing Label Program. Water and Air Certification. 5. AMCA 512-AMCA Listing Label Program. Water, Air, Wind-Driven Rain Certification. 6. AMCA 512-AMCA Listing Label Program. Water, Air, Sound Certification. 7. AMCA 512-AMCA Listing Label Program. Air Certification. 8. AMCA 540-Test Method for Louvers Impacted by Windborne Debris. a. K6746MD-AMCA 540 Basic Lev D or Enhanced Level E. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 666 -Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 3. ASTM A 788 -Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, General Requirements. 4. ASTM B 26- Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Sand Castings. 5. ASTM B 209 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 6. ASTM B 221 -Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire. 7. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM D822 - Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. 10. ASTM D 1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 11. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 12. ASTM D2244 - Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences From Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 13. ASTM E 90- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 14. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 15. ASTM E 413 -Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association (AAMA). 1. AAMA 611 -Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. AAMA 2603-Voluntary Specification. Performance Requirements and Test Procedures For. Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions. 3. AAMA 2604- High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. 4. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum. D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches (1220 mm)wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided. C. Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a louver 48 inches (1220 mm)wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided. D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions. E. Minimum Weather Louver Effectiveness: Weather louver effectiveness rating shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with: 1. AMCA Standard 500-L. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for each product and assembly specified. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Cleaning methods. C. Engineering Review: Submit theoretical calculations prepared by a professional engineer specializing in the application of welding technology demonstrating that each fillet weld joining blade and frame members will withstand a minimum of 526 pounds of force in shear. D. Shop Drawings: For units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing of elements. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings and adjacent construction; free area for each size indicated for louvers; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations. 1. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control systems for motorized adjustable louvers and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. E. Product Certificates: 1. Air Performance: Certificates signed by Air Movement and Control Association International Inc (AMCA)certifying that the manufacturer's stock units are tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and are licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal in accordance with AMCA Standard 511. 2. Water Penetration: Certificates signed by Air Movement and Control Association International Inc (AMCA)certifying that the manufacturer's stock units are tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 and are licensed to bear the AMCA Certified ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Ratings Seal in accordance with AMCA Standard 511. 3. Weather Louver Effectiveness: Certificates signed by Air Movement and Control Association International Inc (AMCA) certifying that the manufacturer's stock units are tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-1-99, Section 8.3.2 -Wind Driven Rain Water Penetration Test, and are licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal in accordance with AMCA Standard 511. 4. Provide AMCA Certification -Water, Air for louvers as scheduled. 5. Provide AMCA Certification -Water, Air, Wind-Driven Rain for louvers as scheduled. 6. Provide AMCA Certification -Water, Air, Sound for louvers as scheduled. 7. Provide AMCA Certification -Air for louvers as scheduled. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Selection Samples: Two complete color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes. H. Samples for Verification: For each finish specified, two samples representing actual finishes specified; prepared on Samples of same thickness and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years manufacturing similar products. The manufacturer shall have implemented a program for the management of quality objectives, continual improvement, and monitoring of customer satisfaction to assure that customer needs and expectations are met. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years experience installing similar louvers. C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. D. Source Limitations: Obtain products through one source from a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory-applied color finish. E. Welding Standards: As follows: 1. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 2. Comply with AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel." F. AMCA Standard 500-L:Air performance, water penetration and air leakage ratings shall be determined in accordance with Air Movement and Control Association International Inc (AMCA)Standard 500, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating." G. AMCA Standard 511: Air performance, water penetration and air leakage ratings shall be licensed in accordance with Air Movement and Control Association International Inc. (AMCA) Standard 511, "Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices," latest edition. H. AMCA Standard 512: Ratings shall be determined in accordance with Air Movement and Control Association International Inc (AMCA) Standard 512, "AMCA Listing Label Program," latest edition. I. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. J. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated adjustable louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and industry standards. B. Store products indoors in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Field Measurements: Verify openings and adjacent construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty for louver systems for a period of 1 year from date of installation, no more than 18 months after shipment from manufacturing plant. When notified in writing from the Owner of a manufacturing defect, manufacturer shall promptly correct deficiencies without cost to the Owner. B. Manufacturer shall provide 5 year limited warranty for Class I anodized finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: The Airolite Co.; P.O. Box 410; Schofield, WI 54476. ASD. Phone: 715-841-8759. Fax: 715-841-8773. Email: info@airolite.com. Web Site: www.airolite.com. B. Acceptable manufacturer: Ruskin C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.2 LOUVERS, GRILLES AND VENTS -GENERAL. A. Louvers shall be mechanically fastened construction and furnished with bird screen, insect screen, sill pans, supports, installation hardware and finishes as specified or required for a complete installation. B. Louver shall be of welded construction and furnished with bird screen, insect screen, sill pans, supports, installation hardware and finishes as specified or required for a complete installation. C. The supporting structure shall be designed to accommodate the point loads transferred by the louvers when subject to the design wind loads. D. Performance Requirements: 1. Structural Performance: Provide products capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by component rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. a. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure)of 25 Ibf/sq. ft. (1200 Pa), acting inward or outward. b. Thermal Movements: Provide products that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects: C. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F (100 degrees C), material surfaces. 2. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units 48 inches (1220 mm)wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high. Test units according to AMCA 500. a. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units. b. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens. 3. Airborne Sound Transmission Loss: Provide acoustical louvers complying with airborne sound transmission loss ratings indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units according to ASTM E 90 and certified under AMCA standard 511. 4. Weather Louver Effectiveness: Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturers stock units in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-L, Section 8.3.2 -Wind Driven Rain Water Penetration Test. E. Materials: 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. 2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5052 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. 3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319. 4. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275)zinc coating, mill phosphatized. 5. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316 with a#2 polish. 6. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. a. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 7. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 8. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 but containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. F. Fabrication: 1. Assemble units in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. a. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Where height of units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close- fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates and without interrupting blade-spacing, or grille or screen pattern. 2. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. 3. Fabricate frames, including integral sills for louvers, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 4. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. 5. Louvers shall be of welded construction. 6. Louvers shall be of mechanically fastened construction. 2.3 MIAMI-DADE COUNTY APPROVED STATIONARY HURRICANE LOUVER(HVHZ) A. Miami-Dade, Horizontal Blade, Drainable Head Louver: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Product: Drainable Louver Type K6746MD with visible mullions as designed and manufactured by The Airolite Company LLC. a. Miami-Dade Notice of Acceptance Number: Florida Product Approval No.: 10093; Miami-Dade NOA No.: 12-0830.05. 2. Application: Louvers shall be tested in accordance with Miami-Dade protocols TAS- 201, TAS-202 and TAS-203 and approved for open structure building envelope protection for single unit sizes up to 6 feet wide by 12 feet high (1829 mm by 3658 mm)or 12 feet wide by 6 feet high (3658 mm by 1829 mm), for wet room protection. 3. Miami-Dade County Protocols Compliance: a. PA-201 Large and Small Missile Impact Test. b. PA-202 Uniform Static Air Pressure Test. C. PA-203 Cyclic Wind Pressure Test- Maximum Design Pressure Rating +/- 150 psf(7.2 kPa). 4. AMCA Listing Label Compliance: a. 540-Test Method for Louvers Impacted by Windborne Debris. 5. Material: Extruded Aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. 6. Louver Depth: 6 inches (152.4 mm). 7. Blade: 0.081 inch (2.06 mm). Blades shall be drainable and spaced approximately 4 inches (102 mm)on center. 8. Frame: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm). 9. Test Standard: AMCA Standard 500-L. 10. Free Area-4 feet by 4 feet (1219 mm by 1219 mm) unit: 9.41 ft2 (0.88 m2). 11. Percent Free Area: 59%. 12. Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 1,077 fpm (5.476.35 m/s). 13. Air Volume Flow Rate at Beginning Point of Water Penetration: 10,135 cfm (4.78 m3/S). 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide louvers with screens as manufactured by The Airolite Co. at locations indicated on Drawings. B. General: Provide exterior louvers with louver screens. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening, unless otherwise indicated. C. Attachment: Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced 18 inches (458 mm)o.c. D. Louver Screen Frames: As manufactured by The Airolite Co; to sizes indicated on Drawings. 1. Fabrication: Mitered corners. 2. Metal: Roll formed aluminum. 3. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 4. Finish: Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh. E. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As manufactured by The Airolite Co. 1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm)square mesh, 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) wire. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish units after assembly. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Compliance: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-Ml2C22A41 complying with AAMA 611. 1. Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates and openings using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrates under project conditions. B. Do not proceed with installation until substrates and nailers have been prepared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions. C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Locate and place units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. 2. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. 3. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. 4. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers as indicated on Drawings. 5. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 6. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. B. Install concealed gaskets, flashings,joint fillers, and insulation, as installation progresses, where weathertight joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with requirements. B. Protect products from damage until completion of project. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 7 Fixed Louvers Phase 2 Section 08 91 19 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile and Accessories: 1. ColorBody Porcelain. 2. Trim and Accessories. 3. Setting Materials. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Section 01 70 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements. D. Section 07 90 00 -Joint Protection. E. Section 10 28 13-Toilet Accessories. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI A108.1A- Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar. 2. ANSI A108.1 B- Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A108.1 C- Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar-or- Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 4. ANSI A108.4 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives or Water-Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 5. ANSI A108.5 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 6. ANSI A108.6- Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical- Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy. 7. ANSI A108.8 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical- Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. 8. ANSI A108.9 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 9. ANSI A108.10 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. 10. ANSI A118.1 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 11. ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and - Grouting Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 12. ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 13. ANSI A118.5 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. 14. ANSI A118.6 - Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts. 15. ANSI A118.7 - Polymer Modified Cement Grouts ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Tiling Phase 2 Section 09 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 16. ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 17. ANSI A118.9 -Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units 18. ANSI A118.10 - Load bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thinset Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Stone. 19. ANSI A118.11 - Exterior Grade Plywood (EGP) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 20. ANSI A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. 21. ANSI A137.1 -Specifications for Ceramic Tile. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 50- Standard Practice for Sampling, Sample Preparation, Packaging, and Marking of Lime and Limestone Products. 2. ASTM C 144- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 4. ASTM C 241 - Standard Test Method For Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic. 5. ASTM C 503 - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone. 6. ASTM C 615 - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone. 7. ASTM C 629 - Standard Specification for Slate Dimension Stone. 8. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath. 9. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction or Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull meter Method. 10. ASTM D 4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2019. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: Tile on walkway surfaces shall be provided with the following values as determined by testing in conformance with ASTM C 1028. 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet). 2. Step Treads: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet). 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum of 0.8 (Wet). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00-Submittal Procedures. B. [ Product Data]: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Selection Samples: Color charts illustrating full range of colors and patterns. E. Selection Samples: Samples of actual tiles for selection. F. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Tiling Phase 2 Section 09 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. For each shipment, type and composition of tile provide a Master Grade Certificate signed by the manufacturer and the installer certifying that products meet or exceed the specified requirements of ANSI A137.1. H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum two years' experience. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type and color of tile from a single source. Obtain each type and color of mortar, adhesive and grout from the same source. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C)during tiling and for a minimum of 7 days after completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide for Owner's use a minimum of 2 percent of the primary sizes and colors of tile specified, boxed and clearly labeled. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Daltile Corporation, which is located at: 7834 C.F. Hawn Fwy. P. O. Box 170130; Dallas, TX 75217; Toll Free Tel: 800-933-TILE; Tel: 214- 398-1411; Fax: 214-309-4584; Email: request info (crai .horde daltile.com}; Web: www.daltile.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.2 TILE A. General: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions and other characteristics indicated. Provide tile in the locations and of the types, colors and pattern indicated on the Drawings and identified in the Schedule and the end of this Section. Tile shall also be provided in accordance with the following: 1. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected under Submittal of samples, blend tile in the factory and package so tile taken ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Tiling Phase 2 Section 09 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 from one package shows the same range of colors as those taken from other packages. 2. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. 3. Factory Applied Temporary Protective Coatings: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. B. ColorBody Porcelain Tile: 1. Product: "Continental Slate" Series. 2. Size and Shape: 6 x 6 x 5/16 inch 3. Surface Finish: Matte. 4. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range. 5. Accent Band: Match wall tile for moisture absorption, surface finish. Provide for up to two accent color bands. Colors to be selected by architect. 6. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure. B. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, thinset bond type. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, 100 percent solids. D. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6; color as selected. E. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7; color as selected. F. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced with 2 inch (50 mm)wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1, and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces, and are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Tiling Phase 2 Section 09 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates. C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge. F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through Al 08.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Install thresholds where indicated. I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.4 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. B. Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive. C. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Tiling Phase 2 Section 09 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and bathtub walls, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. D. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W202, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat. E. Over wood studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W231, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. F. Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W241, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation. B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades. C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other similar type walkways. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Tiling Phase 2 Section 09 30 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system and perimeter trim. B. Acoustical tile and panels. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 29 00—Gypsum Board. B. Division 23 -Air Conditioning: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. C. Division 26 - Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. C. ASTM E1264 -Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products. D. UL- Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Suspended acoustical tile. B. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal grid system components and acoustical units. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Grid Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assembly and combustibility requirements for materials. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 70 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under provisions of Section 01 31 00. B. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. C. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Acoustical Ceilings Phase 2 Section 09 51 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Provide one (1) box of extra acoustical tiles to Owner. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Acoustical panel. Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replacement of acoustical panels that falls within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging or warping. 2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects. B. Warranty period for acoustical panels is one (1)year from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty period for grid system is ten (10)years from date of Substantial Completion. D. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run the concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design) B. United States Gypsum (USG). C. Substitutions: As described in Section 01 60 00. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Components: Components: Main beams and cross tees, base metal and end detail, fabricated from commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with exposed flange design. Exposed surfaces chemically cleansed, with aluminum cap. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching. 1. Fire Performance: FireGuard 2. Duty Rating: Heavy Duty 3. Face Dimension: 15/16" 4. Profile Type: Exposed Tee 5. Material: Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel 6. Color: White 7. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft annealed, with a yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Black color.- E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system as specified. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Acoustical Panels: 1. Surface Texture: Fine 2. Composition: Fiberglass 3. Color: White 4. Size: 24"x 24" x 1" 5. Edge Profile: Square 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.90 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 26 ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Acoustical Ceilings Phase 2 Section 09 51 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 8. Fire Performance: Class A 9. Light Reflectance White Panel: 0.90 10. Acceptable Product: Armstrong Optima 3352. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.2 INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636 manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Wall angles to be black. 3.3 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. F. Cut tile panels to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Field rabbet tile panel edge. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of units. G. Where bullnose concrete block corners or chamfered column corners or round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: two (2) degrees. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Acoustical Ceilings Phase 2 Section 09 51 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 65 13.13 RESILIENT BASE PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 01 General Requirements, Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Resilient Wall Base 1.3 SUBMITTALS, RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers: 1. Technical data sheet 2. Care & maintenance document 3. Warranty For each material and accessory proposed for use (available at www.flex cofloors.co ). C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard- size samples of each resilient product color, texture and pattern required. E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide resilient wall base materials manufactured in the United States of America by a firm with a minimum of 10 years' experience with resilient rubber materials of type equivalent to those specified. B. Provide resilient wall base, flooring materials, adhesives, accessories and subfloor preparation products from one manufacturer to ensure color matching and compatibility. C. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing technical training and technical field service representation. 1.5 RELATED WORK A. Installer must be professional, licensed, insured and acceptable to manufacturer of resilient flooring materials. Project Managers or Field Supervisors must be INSTALL (International Standards & Training Alliance) certified CFI (Certified Floorcovering Installers) Certified and/or an FCICA (The Flooring Contractors Association) CIM (Certified Installation Manager) for the requirements of the project or equivalent. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within the range recommended by Flexco of 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) and 85 degrees F (29 degrees C). 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 5 Resilient Base Phase 2 Section 09 65 13.13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range of(± 10 degrees F)65 degrees (18 degrees C)and 85 degrees F (29 degrees C) in the spaces to receive the resilient products during: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. C. Maintain relative humidity between 40% and 65%during installation. D. Avoid conditions in which dew point causes condensation on the installation surface. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard limited commercial warranty to cover manufacturing defects PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis-of-Design: Flexco Floors 11401 East 6th Street I Tuscumbia, AL 35674 1 P: (800) 633-3151 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Roppe, Armstrong &Johnsonite. C. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. TRADITIONAL WALL BASE 1. FLEXCO BASE 2000 THERMOPLASTIC RUBBER (TP)WALL BASE-specify rubber wall base with the following characteristics: Meets the performance requirements for the following Industry Standards: a. ASTM F1861, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic), Group 2 (layered), Style A&B (straight, cove) b. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Class A. C. ASTM E648 (NFPA 253), Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux, Class 1, >0.45 W/cm2. d. ASTM E662 (NFPA 258), Standard Test Method for Smoke Density, Passes, <450 e. ASTM F137, Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials protocols, Passes f. ASTM F386, Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces, Passes g. ASTM F925, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring, Excellent h. ASTM F1515, Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring protocols, Passes i. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): j. NFPA 253, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source k. NFPA 255, Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials I. NFPA 258, Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials M. CAN/ULC-S102.2 n. FSR 10, SDS 60 B. FLEXCO RUBBER WALL BASE IS A THERMOPLASTIC RUBBER (TP) 1. Flexco Base 2000 Wall Base 2. Flexco Base 2000 4" height. 3. Flexco Base 2000 120' length rolls. 4. Cove (Style B). ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 5 Resilient Base Phase 2 Section 09 65 13.13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 5. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color selections. 6. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is SCS FloorScore®Certified and meets California Specifications Section 01350 7. TP BASE 2000 rubber base and accessories do not contain chemicals that may be hazardous to human health 8. TP BASE 2000 rubber base meets NSF 332 Gold Criteria 9. TP BASE 2000 rubber base meets CHPS Criteria 10. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is manufactured in the U.S.A. 11. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is manufactured in a Facility that is ISO 14001 Certified 12. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is free of materials known to be teratogenic, mutagenic or carcinogenic 13. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is free of Halogens 14. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is free of Asbestos 15. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is free of Phthalates 16. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is free of Heavy Metals 17. TP BASE 2000 rubber base is free of any Red List Chemicals 2.3 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Substrate/Background Preparation Products: 1. Adhesives: Adhesives should be selected based on the site conditions and use of the space being installed. B. Recommended Adhesive Products: 1. Excelsior WB-600 Acrylic Wall Base Adhesive provided by Flexco a. Unit Size: 30 oz. cartridge, 1 Gallon &4 Gallon b. Coverage: 30—70 linear feet per cartridge, 180—340 linear feet per gallon C. Standard installations over porous backgrounds d. 100 % solids, solvent free and low VOCs e. Hard set adhesive adding to dimensionally stable materials f. Excellent sheer strength 2. Excelsior C-630 Contact Adhesive provided by Flexco a. Unit Size: 1 Quart b. Coverage: 20—40 Square Feet per unit/ 120 — 140 Linear Feet per unit C. Standard installations over porous and non-porous substrates d. Hard set adhesive adding to dimensionally stable materials e. Excellent sheer strength f. Superior bond strength g. Great for environments with topical moisture C. Accessories: Items needed to complete the installation. Recommended accessory products: a. Flexco Factory Corners b. Rubber Corner Blocks C. Mini-Rubber Corners d. Color-matched Caulks D. Maintenance Materials: Proper maintenance of the installation is critical to the long term performance of the flooring products being specified. Using the appropriate chemicals to maintain the product according to the environment in which it is specified is critical. Recommend maintenance products: 1. Excelsior NC-900, All-Purpose Neutral pH Cleaner provided by Flexco a. For initial maintenance b. For daily and routine maintenance PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 5 Resilient Base Phase 2 Section 09 65 13.13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. General Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Supply a safe, climate-controlled building as detailed in Flexco Technical Data Sheets. 2. Ensure substrate/background meets the requirements of ASTM F1861, Flexco Technical Data Sheets and Excelsior Technical Data Sheets. 3. Provide a secure storage area that is maintained permanently or temporarily at normal operating temperature and humidity conditions between 65° F and 85° F and between 40% and 65% relative humidity, for at least 48-hours prior to and during the application of the wall base, so the contractor can acclimate the rubber base materials per manufacturer's instructions. 4. Provide an installation area that is weather tight and maintained either permanently or temporarily at ambient service temperature and humidity. Normal operating temperature and humidity conditions are between 65° F and 85° F and between 40% and 65% relative humidity, for at least 48-hours prior to and during the application of the wall base per the manufacturer's instructions. 5. Ensure areas with direct prolonged exposure to sunlight are protected with protective UVA/UVB restrictive coatings or films. 6. In areas where the walls are subject to direct sunlight through doors or windows, the doors and windows should be covered using blinds, curtains, cardboard or similar for the time of the installation and 72-hours after the installation to allow the adhesive to cure. Note: These areas should be installed using wet adhesives only. 7. Conduct initial maintenance prior to final usage per the Flexco Care & Maintenance Documents. Do not conduct initial maintenance until adhesive has cured per the adhesive technical data. 8. Provide trained installers that are professional, licensed, insured and acceptable to manufacturer of resilient rubber wall base materials. 9. Ensure installers or installation teams meet one of the following requirements: a. Have completed INSTALL (International Standards &Training Alliance) b. CFI (Certified Floorcovering Installers)training programs C. Certified by INSTALL or CFI. d. Are being supervised by Project Managers or Field Supervisors that are INSTALL (International Standards &Training Alliance)certified, CFI (Certified Floorcovering Installers)Certified and/or an FCICA(The Flooring Contractors Association) CIM (Certified Installation Manager). 10. Follow all requirements in the appropriate Flexco and/or Excelsior Technical Data Sheets, Care & Maintenance Documents, Warranties and other technical documents or instructions. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. General: Follow guidelines laid out in Division 01, Section 01 45 00—Quality Control. B. Verification of Conditions: Inspect all substrates/backgrounds to ensure they are clean, smooth, permanently dry, structurally sound and without voids. Confirm all areas are properly sealed and acclimated per manufacturer's requirements. C. Verification of Products: In accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements, visually inspect material for size, style, color or visual defects prior to installing. Any material that is incorrect or visually defective shall not be installed. 3.3 SUBSTRATE/BACKGROUND PREPARATION A. All work required ensuring substrate/background meets manufacturers' guidelines are the responsibility of the general contractor. B. Preparation: Ensure substrate/background meets the requirements of ASTM F1861 for resilient wall base and/or Flexco Technical Data Sheets and Excelsior Technical Data Sheets. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 5 Resilient Base Phase 2 Section 09 65 13.13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Substrates/backgrounds must be free of visible water or moisture, dust, sealers, paint, residual adhesives and adhesive removers, solvents, wax, oil, grease, mold, mildew and any other extraneous coating, film, material or foreign matter. 2. Acclimate all products to be used during the installation and the installation environment prior to installation according to the manufacturers written instructions. 3. Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate/background to prevent transferring through to the surface of the resilient wall base. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Follow all relevant guidelines detailed in Division 01, as well as wall base and adhesive manufacturer's technical data sheets. B. Resilient Vinyl Wall Base: Install material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Select the appropriate adhesive for the application and job site conditions. 2. Install material according to roll sequence or with like run numbers. 3. Ensure material is rolled appropriately into the adhesive using a hand roller. 3.5 CLEANING & MAINTENANCE A. General: Clean up installation area and vacuum dust or wipe material to remove any dirt, dust or debris. B. Initial Maintenance: Conduct initial maintenance per the manufacturer's recommended procedures stated in the Maintenance Documents. All documentation is available upon request or from the Flexco website: www.flexcofloors.com . Excelsior Cleaning products are the recommended products for use. All can be found linked to the product on the Flexco website or at www.excelsiorproducts.net. C. Regular Maintenance: Conduct maintenance on regular intervals as needed. Insufficient cleaning will reduce the wear life of the wall base and alter the aesthetic properties of the wall base. The amount of maintenance depends directly upon the amount of dirt and particulates the area is subjected to. 3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. General: Follow Section 01 70 00— Execution & Closeout Requirements for these activities, protecting installed construction. B. Protection: Protect newly installed material from damage by other trades. Be sure all construction debris is picked up and vacuumed or removed prior to leaving the area. Limit usage and foot traffic according to the adhesive's requirements. When moving appliances or heavy furniture, protect wall base from scuffing and tearing using temporary floor protection as well. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 5 Resilient Base Phase 2 Section 09 65 13.13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 65 19.23 VINYL TILE FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY Section Includes: SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE 1.02 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS A. ASTM International 1. D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 2. D2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction as Measured by the James Machine. 3. D3389, Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance (Rotary Platform, DoubleHead Abrader). 4. E595, Standard Test Method for Total Mass Loss and Collected Volatile Condensable Materials from Outgassing in a Vacuum Environment. 5. E648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Flooring Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. 6. E662, Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 7. E1428, Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Performance of Antimicrobials in or on Polymeric Solids Against Staining by Streptoverticillium reticulum (A Pink Stain Organism). 8. F150, Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring. 9. F710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 10. F925, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring. 11. F970, Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit. 12. F1482, Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use under Resilient Flooring. 13. F1515, Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring by Color Change. 14. F1700, Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. 15. F2055, Standard Test Method for Size and Squareness of Resilient Floor Tile by Dial Gage Method. 16. G21, Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. Other Referenced Documents 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)253, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)258, Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)99, Standard for Health Care Facilities. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification summary sheet for specified products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, finish colors, patterns and textures. C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures. D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Vinyl Tile Flooring Phase 2 Section 09 65 19.23 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. E. Maintenance Information: Maintenance information for installed products in accordance with Division 1 sections. 1. Methods for maintaining installed products. 2. Precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. F. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installing work similar to that required for this project. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Performance characteristics: Provide resilient vinyl floor covering with the following Fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance with ASTM method (and NFPA method) indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. ASTM E648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems; Class 1, Greater than 0.45 W/cm2. b. ASTM E662 (NFPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; <450. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain floor tile and manufacturer's recommended adhesive from a single supplier. D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, Manufacturer's conditions, recommended adhesive depending on product, substrate type and type of installation, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with requirements in Division 1. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 1. B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with Identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and acclimated to site conditions at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas to receive Conductive/Static Dissipative Flooring shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the permanent HVAC set at a uniform temperature of 65-85 degrees F for 48 hours prior to, during and thereafter installation of Conductive/Static Dissipative Flooring. Conductive/Static Dissipative Flooring and adhesive shall be conditioned in the same manner. Flooring must be unboxed at least 48 hours prior to installation in the areas in which it will be installed. B. Existing Conditions: [Specify existing conditions affecting product use and installation]. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Finishing Operations: Install Vinyl Floor Tile after finishing operations, including painting and ceiling operations, etc; have been completed. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Vinyl Tile Flooring Phase 2 Section 09 65 19.23 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials)Section. 1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of floor tile equal to 5% of amount to be installed. 2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra materials. 3. Maintenance of finished floor covering to be conducted per Manufacturer's Maintenance Guide. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. One year limited warranty for manufacturing defects. 2. Ten year Limited Wear Warranty. Vinyl Tile Flooring will not wear out for a period of ten (10)years, if installed, maintained, and used strictly in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and under normal wear and traffic conditions for which it was designed. 3. Lifetime warranty for Electrical Resistance. 4. Do not use in, around or near commercial kitchens. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE A. Manufacturer: Flexco Corporation 1. Contact: 1401 E. 6th Street Tuscumbia, AL 35674 Phone: 800-633-3151 Fax: 800-346-9075 Web: www.flexcofloors.com B. Test results 1. ASTM D570, Water Absorption of Plastics; < 0.15%. 2. ASTM D2047, Slip Resistance; > 0.60. 3. ASTM D3389, Abrasion Resistance; Less than 1 gram loss. 4. ASTM E595, Outgassing; Excellent. 5. ASTM E648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux; Class 1, > 1.08 W/cm2 6. ASTM E662 (NFPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; Passes, <450 7. ASTM E1428, Staining by Streptoverticillium Reticulum (A Pink Stain Organism); 0, No stain. 8. ASTM F925, Resistance to Chemicals; Passes, List of chemicals available. 9. ASTM F1515, Light Stability; Passes. 10. ASTM G21, Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; Excellent resistance. 11. FED-STD-209E, Airborne Particulate Cleanliness; Excellent (Test results available). 12. EN425, Castor Chair Test; Passes (Test results available). C. Product Warranty 1. Manufacturer's one year limited warranty for manufacturing defects. 2. Manufacturer's ten year limited wear warranty. D. Product: 1. Flexco®Natural Elements Premium LVT Wood Plank. a. Color(to be selected by Architect): b. Nominal Size: 6" (152.4 mm)x 48" (1219.2 mm). ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Vinyl Tile Flooring Phase 2 Section 09 65 19.23 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Finish: Embossed. d. Edge Finish: Beveled. 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: As described in Section 01 60 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's requirements as published in manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Adhesive: Solvent Free ESD Epoxy adhesive for all installations. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Confirm substrate conditions (which have been previously addressed under other sections) are acceptable for product installing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage while installing. B. Substrate Preparation: Prepare substrate to be free of paint, old adhesive, sealers, coatings, finishes, dirt, film-forming curing compounds, or other substances which may affect the adhesion of floor covering to the substrate. 1. Concrete Substrate: Reference Standard ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. If the following test results exceed the floor covering manufacturer's limits, installing shall not commence until results conform to limits. a. Concrete Moisture Test: Per ASTM F1869 Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. 5 Lbs or less. b. Concrete Moisture Test: Per ASTM F2170 Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs using in situ Probes. 75% RH or less. C. Concrete pH Test: Perform pH tests on concrete regardless of its age or grade level or history of use. Readings below 7.0 and above 10.0 can adversely affect resilient flooring or adhesives, or both. 2. Wood Substrate: Per ASTM F1482, Wood subfloor/underlayment assemblies shall be double layer construction, with a total thickness of not less than 1". a. There shall be minimum 18 inches of well-ventilated air space beneath all wood subfloors. b. Crawl spaces shall be insulated and protected by a moisture vapor barrier. C. Do not install over"sleeper" underlayment systems or wood underlayment installed over concrete. d. Do not install over Lauan panels, CCA Plywood, Fire rated plywood, plywood with knots, underlayment made of pine or other soft woods, particle board, Oriented Strand Board (OSB) Masonite TM or other hardboard underlayment, hardwood flooring, textured or cushioned flooring, treated or otherwise coated wood material or other uneven or unstable substrates. e. Unacceptable surfaces shall be covered using a 1/4-inch or thicker panel underlayment per section d. f. Wood Underlayments: Use only plywood underlayment that is warranted by the underlayment manufacturer for use as an underlayment for sheet ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Vinyl Tile Flooring Phase 2 Section 09 65 19.23 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 vinyl floor covering in commercial applications. g. Refer to Division 6 Carpentry sections for wood subfloor construction. 3. Ceramic Tile, Cementitious Terrazzo and Metal: Refer to Conductive/Static Dissipative Product Data Sheet for installation over these substrates. 4. Do not install over existing floor covering or over substrates not approved by manufacturer. 3.04 INSTALLING A. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for ESD Solid Vinyl tile for detailed specifications on installing. 1. Conductive Tile grounded installation: To ground the conductive flooring to a known ground, use the 1"wide x 0.004"thick x 18" long copper foil strips, supplied by manufacturer. Place approximately 9"of the strip into the adhesive while it is wet in order to achieve a 100% transfer to the copper foil backing, under the tile nearest the ground point. Recommended adhesive is also to be applied to the front/face of the copper foil strip in order to achieve a 100% transfer from the front/face of the copper strip to the tile's backing. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for details regarding grounded installations. 2. Heat welded seams [insert this section if required] (select one) a. The tile shall be pre-grooved for manufacturer's unitized Installation. Vinyl welding beads, 0.160" in diameter, shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. b. Seams shall be grooved to accept vinyl welding beads, 0.160" in diameter, which shall be installed according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not heat-weld for first 48 hours. 3. Flash Cove Procedure a. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for flash cove installation. b. Install Cove Stick Filler at the wall and floor junction. C. Install Resilient Cove Cap on the wall at (insert desired height). d. Install metal inside and outside corners, to same height as cove cap. e. Butterfly corners can also be installed based on installer expertise. 4. Finish Floor Covering Designs: As selected by Architect. 5. Accessories: Architect shall specify manufacturers' color coordinated accessories as required, including (but not limited to) resilient wall base, stair nosing, reducers or other edgings, welding rods for heat welded seams. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with minimum 72 hours' notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits to confirm installing of product is in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Site Visits: (Specify number and duration of periodic site visits). 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of substantial completion. B. No heat welding for first 48 hours. C. Restrict foot traffic from new floor covering for first 48 hours. D. Restrict furniture, fixtures and rolling traffic for first 72 hours. E. Restrict cleaning/buffing for first 72 hours. 3.07 INITIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES A. General: Include in contract sum cost for initial maintenance procedures and execution ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Vinyl Tile Flooring Phase 2 Section 09 65 19.23 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 by professional maintenance personnel after floor covering has been installed for 72 hours as specified in the manufacturer's maintenance instructions. 3.08 CLEANING A. Cleaning: See manufacturer's maintenance instructions. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of. B. Floor finishes: Do not use floor finishes, sealers or waxes of any kind, as they may form an insulating layer on the tile surface and adversely affect the performance of the product. 3.09 TESTING FOR ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE A. Manufacturer will test Conductive/Static Dissipative Solid Vinyl Floor Tile installations upon request for electrical resistance approximately 7 days after the installation. The adhesive must be allowed to properly cure and the flooring system to stabilize to the ambient conditions. The electrical resistance will be tested according to ASTM F150, EOS/ESD S7.1, NFPA 99, and UL 779. 1. Test will be conducted at 10 volts for Conductive, point to point and point to ground. Testing will also be conducted according to any special test method or procedure as specified herein. 2. Test will be conducted at 100 volts for Static Dissipative, point to point and point to ground. Testing will also be conducted according to any special test method or procedure as specified herein. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Vinyl Tile Flooring Phase 2 Section 09 65 19.23 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 6616 TERRAZZO TILE Part 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Types of Terrazzo Tile work included: 1. Terrazzo Tile Floor and Wall Tile 2. Precast Terrazzo Accessories B. Setting material, grouts, sealants and caulks C. Installation of terrazzo tiles D. Related work not specified under this section 1. Concrete Floors: Section: 03 30 00 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C-140, C-150, C-293, C-373, C-482, C-485, C-499, C-502, C-609, C-648, C-650, C-674, C-1243, C-1378, C-1523 2. ANSI A137.1 9.6 section B. Tile Council of America (TCNA) 1. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook—latest edition C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A108.1 thru A108.17 2. ANSI A118.1 thru A118.15 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Setting and Grouting Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of grout and setting materials. B. TCNA Standards: Comply with specifications under the current Handbook for Tile Installation C. Manufacturer to supply written Terrazzo Tile Protocol upon request. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaging and Shipping: Terrazzo Tile to be delivered in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer identification including size, color, manufacture date and job number. B. Nominal 12"x 12", 16" x 16" and 12" x 24" tiles are boxed, banded and palletized. Our 24" x 24" are unboxed, banded and palletized. C. Storage and Protection: Terrazzo Tile is to be stored indoors, in a climate-controlled environment, sheltered from moisture in original packaging. Protect from damage by other trades. D. Report all damage due to shipment immediately. Customer is required to sign the Bill of Lading slip noting damaged product. Picture proof is required. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Terrazzo Tile Phase 2 Section 09 66 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by the installation materials manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside the installation material manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer/Installer shall warrant installed terrazzo tile and accessories for a period of 1 year from date of substantial completion against product defects. B. Maintenance related matters are not considered a product defect and are not warrantable. Part 2—Products 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Wausau Tile, Inc. B. Substitutions:As described in Section 0160 00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150 Specifications for Portland Cement. B. Aggregates: All aggregates to meet ASTM C-33 specifications, cleaned and properly graded to size. Aggregate shall be blended to meet individual project requirements. a. The aggregates used have a natural color range and come in a variety of sizes and colors.Therefore, the aesthetic class/shade range as per ASTM test C609 will vary from a V1 rating to a V2 rating. b. The aggregates used have a natural color range.This can cause slight variances in overall color.Tiles should be blended at the job site from several cartons/pallets during installation C. Marble chips, size to conform with NTMA gradation standards. D. Coloring: Pigments used shall be inorganic, resistant to alkalinity and used per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Caulks & Sealants: a. Urethane or Polyurethane Sealant b. Color to be selected by Architect from standard color pallet. F. Cleaner: Liquid neutral chemical cleaner,with pH factor between 7 and 8, of a. formulation recommended by sealer manufacture for type of precast terrazzo b. used and complying with NTMA requirements. G. Sealer: ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protector applied to the terrazzo tile prior to packaging. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Terrazzo Tile Phase 2 Section 09 66 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Precast Surfaces and Edges: a. Chamfered face edges b. Surfaces to be uniform in appearance and free of blemishes c. Factory Polish or Honed. d. Back of tile will be ground flat and free from protrusions B. Color to be selected from Wausau Tile, Inc.Terrazzo Tile color palette. C. Standard sizes: a. Floor tile: 12" x 12" b. Wall Base: 4"H x 12" 2.03 FABRICATION A. Mechanically vibrated in molds. B. Hydraulically pressed by 900-ton/3250 psi press C. Steam-cured with 100 percent humidity for 18 hours at 140 degrees F D. Factory finish: In-line back and face grinding E. Factory applied initial protectant F. Packaged and palletized Part 3 -Execution 3.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Documented inspection of Terrazzo Tile quality control tests. B. In house testing is completed on the first day's production and every 5,000 square feet after for all projects.Testing is performed on the 7th day and the 28th day after the tile has been pressed. a. Compression -ASTM C140> 8,000 psi average b. Absorption -ASTM C140<5%average c. Flexural -ASTM C293 > 1000 psi average d. Specular Gloss Testing at 60 degrees-ASTM D523 e. Stain testing/initial protection testing C. All projects over 10,000 square feet will have one set of tests sent to a third-party test lab. D. All records are kept at Wausau Tile, Inc.for a period of 5 years. 3.02 TEST RESULTS A. Independent Test Lab completed and verified the following data: a. 1113/16"x 1113/16" x%"thick Traditional Series Cement Terrazzo Tile i. C373 Water Absorption—Passes (Semi-Vitreous) ii. C482 Bond Strength ->300 psi. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Terrazzo Tile Phase 2 Section 09 66 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 M. C485 Warpage Edge+/-.001%or.002 in. iv. C485 Warpage Diagonal +/- .003%or .010 in. V. C499 Nominal Size -range of.029 in. vi. C499 Thickness -range of.029 in. vii. C502 Wedging+/-.023%or.028 in.viii. C609 Color Uniformity-V1—V2 ix. C648 Breaking Strength ->500 lbs. X. C650 Resistance to Chemical Substance-not affected X1. C674 Flexural properties-> 1000 psi. average xii. Dynamic DCOF—Passes at factory xiii. ANSI A137.1 Section 9.6.1 "Wet Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF)" xiv. Average Polished Finish = .46/Average Honed Finish = .54 xv. C1243 Deep Abrasion Wear—passes (meets p3 standards) xvi. C1378 Resistance to staining-not affected. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. All installations of Terrazzo Tile shall comply with the appropriate Installation method as depicted in the current edition of the Tile Council of North America Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Installation. B. The Architect or other design professional shall select which methods to be specified. All Specifications must also conform to local codes, ordinances, trade practices, and climate conditions. C. When setting Wausau Tile, Inc. Cementitious Terrazzo Tile an ANSI A118.4 mortar is required. The setting materials manufacturer's printed installation instructions are to be followed in every instance. D. When setting Wausau Tile, Inc. Epoxy Terrazzo Tile an ANSI A118.3 epoxy adhesive is required. The setting materials manufacturer's printed installation instructions are to be followed in every instance. E. A minimum of 95 percent thin-set coverage is recommended on the back of the tile with no voids exceeding two square inches and no voids with 2" of the edges. All corners and edges must be fully supported and back buttering is required on tiles larger than 12" to reach these requirements. F. ANSI A-108.5 installation specifications that correspond with the selected TCNA Installation Method are required.This includes substrate and surfaces inspections, location and frequency of EJ 171 Movement Joint Guidelines, Placement Techniques, and grouting procedures. a. Minimum recommended grout joint width is 1/8" b. Deflection requirement of L/360 c. The maximum allowable substrate variation can be no more the 1/8" in 10' and 1/16" in 24". G. Applied Initial Protectant-3M ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protector: ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Terrazzo Tile Phase 2 Section 09 66 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. When using a heavy pigmented grout, it's recommended to use a grout release prior to grouting. A test area is recommended to ensure the grout release was adequately applied. b. If a slight grout haze occurs, it can be effectively removed from the tile by using a 3M"' Eraser Pad 3600 Pink pad with water and or 3MTm Neutral Cleaner. A floor buffer might be recommended to assist in cleaning c. If a more difficult stain occurs, use a Scotch-BriteTm DoodlebugTm Easy Erasing Pad 4610 along with water and or 3MTm Neutral Cleaner. A floor buffer might be recommended to assist in cleaning. d. For additional protectant information and long-term care guidelines, please contact 3M via 1-800-852-9722 or www.1. -rn/..fg.�Pub 3.04 CARE & MAINTENANCE A. Cleaning a. Dust mop or vacuum to remove sand, dust and other contaminants off the surface b. Clean up spills immediately and damp mop lightly soiled floors with a neutral cleaner per 3MTM c. For more aggressive cleaning use a mechanical buffer or auto scrubber along with a 3MTm Red Buffer Pad 5100 and Neutral Cleaner per the manufacturer's recommendations. d. For cleaning combined with light polishing, the Scotch-Brite TM Purple Diamond Pad Plus may be used on an auto scrubber. e. If a stain occurs, see 3M's technical bulletin titled Repair of Etch or Stained Terrazzo Tiles to assist with the repair. f. DO NOT use acidic cleaners, cleaners that contain citrus (d-limonene), 2-butoxyethanol (butyl cellusolve), amine-based cleaners, isopropyl alcohol, solvent based cleaners, degreasers, or non-neutral cleaners g. DO NOT use spray buff products or chemical dust mop treatments. h. RESTROOM APPLICATION—If the product is installed in a residential or commercial restroom additional coat of a topical seal will be required to protect the floor. Restroom applications will also require a more stringent care and maintenance program. B. Extended Care and Maintenance a. Terrazzo Tile may be periodically burnished using Scotch-Brite TM Purple Diamond Pad Plus to maintain gloss. No additional ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protector needs to be applied to restore gloss. b. When the terrazzo tile no longer returns to gloss by burnishing, an additional application of ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protector should be applied. c. ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protector will wear down over time due to floor traffic. On average, high traffic areas should be recoated as needed. Light to moderate traffic areas should be recoated as needed. d. Please contact 3M via 1-800-852-9722 or www.3m.com/facility and follow their procedures for reapplication of ScotchgardTM Stone Floor Protector. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Terrazzo Tile Phase 2 Section 09 66 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 e. Acceptable Alternates: i. Aqua Mix Sealers Choice Gold ii. Premium no-sheen, natural-look, low VOC, water-based penetrating sealer. Apply product per manufactures published instructions.To ensure maximum performance and expected wear of the sealer, use Aqua Mix cleaners. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Terrazzo Tile Phase 2 Section 09 66 16 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide and install all modular carpet and installation work as required by contract documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer— 1. The carpet manufacturer shall have no less than fifteen years of production experience with modular carpet similar to type specified. Published product literature of carpet manufacturer must clearly indicate compliance of products with requirements of this section. 2. Commitment to quality- carpet manufacturer must provide verification of its registration to the ISO 9001/9002 Quality Management System. 3. Commitment to sustainability-carpet manufacturer must demonstrate environmental responsibility through programs of source reduction, recycling, reuse and conservation and registration to the ISO 14001 Environmental Management System. B. Installation Provider— 1. The installation provider must be directly responsible for the quality of the completed floorcovering installation, including both the quality of the materials and labor used in the installation. The installation provider must directly warrant to owner that all products, materials and services related to the floorcovering installation (including any floorcovering(s), adhesive(s) and/or other products or materials used in the installation)will meet specifications set forth herein. The product warranty required herein must be provided directly by the carpet manufacturer. 2. The installation provider must have successful carpet installation experience similar to the work of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS Please submit each of the following with your bid (unless otherwise noted): A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Manufacturer's Data -Two (2) copies of carpet manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for carpet and related items specified. C. Fiber Verification —Certification from the fiber producer verifying use of the premium branded, type 6,6 or type 6 fiber in the submitted carpet product. Premium branded fibers are identified as Invista, Solutia, Universal or Aquafil. Fibers extruded by carpet mills will be considered "unbranded" for purposes of this specification. D. All applicable product warranties provided by manufacturer. E. Installation provider's proof of insurance, copy of contractor's license and worker's compensation certificate. F. Samples- Standard size carpet samples of each type of carpet, in each specified pattern, color and construction. G. Any alternatives to specified product(s)or approved manufacturers must be submitted for approval at least ten (10)working days prior to bid or proposal. H. Maintenance Instructions-Two (2)copies of the manufacturer's carpet maintenance instructions. I. Green House Gas Status of Product—The average quantity of greenhouse gas emissions associated with the life cycle of the product, a description of the green ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 6 Tile Carpeting Phase 2 Section 09 68 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 house offsets used to make the product greenhouse gas neutral (climate neutral), and the name of the V party organization certifying such offsets. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide the following written warranties by carpet manufacturer for a period of not less than 15 years: 1. Wear- Surface fiber wear shall not be more than 10% by weight in 15 years. (Note: Wear warranty shall not require use of chair pads) 2. Static- Static generation at less than 3.0 kV at 70° F, and 20% R.H. 3. No delamination 4. No edge ravel 5. No dimensional instability(i.e., shrinkage, curling and doming)which adversely affect the ability of the tile to lay flat. B. Submit manufacturer's NVLAP certified test results to show that carpet meets or exceeds product performance specification criteria for carpet testing requirements under Section 2.1 hereof. C. Installation provider shall warrant for(1)year following substantial completion that all installation services have been performed with quality workmanship and shall promptly correct all services not meeting this warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MODULAR CARPET TILE PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Modular carpet tile shall meet the following performance standards: A. Carpet Flammability 1. Pill Test (ASTM D2859) Passes or Pill Test (CPSC FF-1-70) Passes 2. Radiant Panel Test (ASTM E648) > 0.45 watts/cm2, Class 1 B. Smoke Density(ASTM E662) <450 Flaming Mode C. Dimensional Stability (Aachen Method Din 54318) < 0.1% change D. Static Generation at 70° F (AATCC 134 w/neolite) <2.5 kV at 20% R.H. E. Lightfastness (AATCC 16E) >_4.0 after 60 hours F. Gas Fade (AATCC 23) 4 G. Ozone Fade (AATCC 109) 4 H. Antimicrobial 1. Antimicrobial (ASTM 2471-05) Complete to Partial Inhibition (high)on or primary and fiber layers Antimicrobial (AATCC 174, Part II) > 95.0% reduction ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 6 Tile Carpeting Phase 2 Section 09 68 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 I. Fungicidal (AATCC 174, Part III) No growth J. Soil/Stain Protection (AATCC 175-1991) > 8.0 on the Red 40 Stain Scale K. Sustainable Carpet Assessment Standard —NSF 140 Gold level as certified by 3rd party such as SCS (platinum when GlasBacRE is backing) 2.2 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Modular carpet tile shall meet the following specifications: A. Yarn System: 100% Invista Type 6,6; Solutia Type 6,6; Universal Type 6,6 or Aquafil Type 6 Nylon. Fiber must have a cross-section modification ratio no greater than 2.5. (Note: Bidder may propose yarn with a % of biobased material with satisfactory explanation of modification) B. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed C. Construction: Tufted D. Patterning: Integrated (topical application or wet patterning not allowed) E. Texture: Textured Loop F. Gauge/Stitch: Minimum 1/12 G. Pile Height: Minimum .148 H. Pile Weight: Maximum 22 oz per yard (lower face weights are preferable if equal or superior performance can be substantiated by Appearance Retention Testing) I. Primary Backing: Must be non-woven. Woven primary backings not allowed. J. Secondary Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoplastic Composite (polyolefin- free) containing not less than 39% post-consumer and/or postindustrial material content. Secondary backing must be 100% recyclable at the end of its useful life. K. Soil/Stain Resistance: Application by fiber producer and manufacturer required. L. Antimicrobial: Antifungal and Antibacterial ASTM E 2471-05 Standard Test Method for Use of Seeded Agar for Screening Assessment of Antimicrobial Activity in Carpet. Minimum allowable growth ratings for a "passing result" on washed and unwashed carpet samples after 72 hours incubation is complete to partial inhibition (high)on shaven primary and unshaven fiber layers. Or, if AATCC 174 Parts 2&3 (AATCC 171 Washed) is used, must pass both Part 2 and Part 3 of AATCC 174 with a minimum of 90% reduction both gram negative and gram-positive bacteria and no macroscopic growth against the fungi. 2.3 MINIMUM CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS IN ADDITION TO PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS A. Nylon Specification -All nylon fiber shall be branded (premium)type 6,6 or type 6 nylon from Invista, Solutia, Universal or Aquafil with performance certification from the fiber manufacturer. Fiber must have a cross-section modification ratio no greater than 2.5. B. Any and all products must pass Carpet and Rug Institute "Green Label +" certification. Product certification of the specified product must accompany submittal. C. Finished modular product is required to be 3rd party certified as climate neutral. D. Antimicrobial, registered by the EPA for use in carpeting, with broad spectrum efficacy against the growth of bacteria and fungi for a minimum of 15 years, assuming proper maintenance. The antimicrobial ingredient shall meet standards set by the U.S. General Services Administration (GSA)for Antimicrobial Carpet as supported by independent lab testing less than six months old. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 6 Tile Carpeting Phase 2 Section 09 68 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Manufacturer must provide a stamped EPA technical data sheet for carpet. Antimicrobial must contain no arsenic, formaldehyde or heavy metals (tin, lead, mercury, silver, copper or zinc), be non-halogenated (no fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine) and non-phenolic. Blends of amine neutralized phosphated esters are preferable. Antimicrobial must have low water solubility (30ppm), a vapor pressure of 12mm Hg at 27° C, and an oral LD50 toxicity rate less than 2.4 grams/kg. 2. The preservative should be incorporated into the primary latex coating of the product during the manufacturing process, not topically applied to the carpet fibers. 3. The antimicrobial treated carpet when new must pass GSA parameters for treated carpets via AATCC method 174 parts II and III. Initial performance must be 90% reduction of the microorganisms (Staphylococcus aureus 6538 and Klebsiella pneumoniae 4352) and no fungal growth on either the primary backing or fibers both on washed (AATCC method 174) and non-washed samples. The Standard Test Method for Use of Seeded Agar for Screening Assessment of Antimicrobial Activity in Carpet (ASTM E 2471-05) may be used in lieu of AATCC method 174 parts II and III. 4. The antimicrobial treated carpet must maintain, for the warranted life of the carpet, a minimum of 90% reduction of the microorganisms (Staphylococcus aureus 6538 and Klebsiella pneumoniae 4352) listed in AATCC method 174 part II, provided the carpet is maintained as specified. Additionally, the antimicrobial treated carpet must maintain a "no macroscopic growth" rating against Aspergillus niger 6275 at the primary backing in accordance with AATCC 174 part III. 5. The preservative must be environmentally responsible i.e. (biodegradable and not toxic to non-target species). 6. Efficacy of the preservative should be documented in professional peer reviewed scientific publications. 2.4 RELATED CARPET MATERIALS A. Leveling compound - Latex type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. Must be compatible with carpet adhesive and curing/sealing compound on concrete. B. Installation connectors -Compounded acrylic adhesive, applied to PET polyester backing with PET polyester release liner (clear 3"x 3" polyester squares with small quantity of a pressure sensitive adhesive applied on one side of the polyester film). The squares connect the carpet modules together to form a stable surface over almost any hard surface. The connectors shall contain no liquid components and shall have "zero" calculated VOC's. C. Carpet edge guard, non-metallic- Extruded or molded heavy duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile indicated, and with minimum two-inch-wide anchorage flange; colors selected by architect/designer from among standard colors available within the industry. D. Miscellaneous materials -As recommended by manufacturer of carpet. Other carpeting products to be selected by installation provider to meet project requirements. E. Electrostatic (Dissipation low-generation) 1. Surface Resistivity-Across face of carpet (<2.0 x 109 and >1.5 x 105)or (0.15 to 2000 megaohms) 2. Transverse or Volume Resistivity-Through face of carpet (<2.0 x 1010 and > 1.5 x 105 ohms)or (0.15 to 2000 megaohms) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 6 Tile Carpeting Phase 2 Section 09 68 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. All existing carpet and existing carpet waste be reused or recycled in an "environmentally friendly" manner. A reclamation plan must be submitted that will provide directions for the reclamation of all carpet at the job site. "Environmentally friendly" carpet recycling methods also should be performed subsequent to job completion. As used herein, "environmentally friendly" methods consist of either: 1. Repurposing - reusing the product in another application such as facilitating the donation of used carpeting to charities and other nonprofit organizations. 2. Recycling -turning waste materials into new materials of the same value, such as vinyl backing into vinyl backing 3. Upcycling -turning waste materials into more valuable products. For example, using waste PET (plastic from soda bottles)to create panel fabric. 4. Downcycling -creating less valuable products from waste materials. For example, turning nylon face fiber into car parts or carpet padding, including nylon face fiber in recycled backings, or using carpet for waste-to-energy utilizing the most efficient burning system possible. (In the case of down cycling, manufacturer must justify down cycling process used.) B. Description of Reclamation Services - Carpet must be removed from the existing installation and prepared for pickup based on the type of material and reclamation option selected. Specifications for removal from the jobsite include: 1. Removal of carpet tile for recycling: a. Carpet tile must be palletized and secured for shipping, (i.e., shrink wrap, banding, strapping). b. Carpet tile must be kept dry and free of any moisture damage. C. Carpet tile must be clean of any non-carpet debris. 2. Removal of performance broadloom for recycling: a. Performance broadloom should be rolled, palletized and secured for shipping. Cut pieces of performance broadloom are also acceptable, secured for shipping. b. Performance broadloom must be kept dry and free from moisture damage. C. Rolls must be clean of any non-carpet debris. 3. Removal of broadloom carpet for downcycling. a. Rolled carpet should not exceed six (6)feet in length x one (1)foot diameter. b. Carpet must be accumulated and kept dry for shipping and processing. C. Rolls must be clean of any non-carpet debris. 4. Repurposing of carpet material. a. Approval of old carpet for possible donation will be determined at the jobsite. b. All possible recycling options must be clearly presented and/or submitted on paper subsequent to job start. C. A certificate will be furnished upon request verifying the reclamation of the carpet and the pounds of material diverted from the landfill. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. A"no-glue" method of installation is preferred using materials described in 2.4.2 above. In the event a releasable glue method of installation is required, the following adhesive description applies. Adhesive must be water-based and allow for removal of carpet tile at any time without damage to carpet or substrate. Adhesive must contain antimicrobial preservative and have "zero" calculated VOC's. 2. Install carpet under open-bottom obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 6 Tile Carpeting Phase 2 Section 09 68 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Provide cut outs where required. Conceal cut edges with protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 4. Run carpet under open bottom items such as heating convectors and install tight against walls, columns and cabinets so that the entire floor area is covered with carpet. Cover over all floor type door closures. 5. Install edging guard at all openings and doors wherever carpet terminates, unless indicated otherwise. 6. Cutting shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, using the tools designed for the carpet being installed. 7. Use leveling compound where necessary. Any floor filling or leveling shall have a minimum of 4'0" of feather. 8. Expansion joints- Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting. B. Installation 1. Install carpet according to carpet manufacturer's printed instructions and in accordance with the Carpet and Rug Institute's Installation Standard. 2. "Chair Pads" shall not be recommended or required within installation instructions. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion of the installation in each area, all dirt, carpet scraps, etc. must be removed from the surface of the carpet. B. Remove debris, and sort pieces to be saved from scraps to be redirected and recycled. C. Construction manager shall protect carpeting against damage during construction. D. At the completion of the work and when directed by the construction manager, vacuum carpet using commercial dual motor vacuum of type recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove rejected carpeting and replace with new carpeting. Remove any protruding yarns with shears or sharp scissors. 3.4 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, verify that work is complete, properly installed and acceptable. B. Preliminary Acceptance - Upon completion of the carpet installation of each floor, it shall be inspected by owner, the construction manager and installation provider. 3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MEASUREMENTS The manufacture of all modular carpet tile must meet the following criteria: A. Greenhouse gas emissions from purchased electricity and on-site combustion attributable to the manufacturing location (including outsourcing) must not exceed 2 Ib of carbon dioxide per square meter(1.75 lbs/yd2). B. Nonrenewable energy per unit of production at the manufacturing location (including outsourcing) must not exceed 15,000 BTU per square meter(12,542 BTU per square yard). C. Solid waste generated at the manufacturing location (including outsourcing) regardless of disposal method must not exceed 0.5 lbs per square meter(0.42 lbs per square yard). D. Water intake for manufacturing purposes at the manufacturing location (including outsourcing) must not exceed 1 gallon per square meter(0.83 gallons per square yard). END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 6 Tile Carpeting Phase 2 Section 09 68 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM D16- Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016-Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. AWWA(American Water Works Association) -C204-Chlorinated Rubber-Alkyd Paint Systems for the Exterior of Above Ground Steel Water Piping. D. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers)-Industrial Maintenance Painting. E. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association)-Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. F. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) -Painting-Architectural Specifications Manual. G. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council)—Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide all labor, material and equipment for priming, painting, coating or staining the following: 1. Exterior and (exposed to view) interior primed or unprimed ferrous metal. 2. Exterior and (exposed to view) interior galvanized surfaces and sheet metal. 3. Interior roof structure & metal deck. (Black color) 4. Exterior and (exposed to view) interior wood. 5. Exterior Cement Siding &Soffits. 6. Interior Gypsum Board walls&ceilings. 7. Aluminum roof vents, fans, hoods etc. at Metal Roof(match metal roof color). 8. Exposed ductwork. B. Following items are not to be painted: 1. Pre-finished metal flashing/trim/siding & roofing. 2. Stainless steel or aluminum items (including door frames). 3. Copper(piping and flashing). 4. Prefinished equipment that is factory primed and painted to suitable finish, unless specifically shown to be job painted for color coordination purposes. 5. Grab bars/Plastic laminate covered doors &cabinetwork. 6. Plumbing fixtures or toilet accessories. 7. Exterior masonry surfaces. 8. Finish flooring or Suspended Lay-in ceilings. C. It is intended that all interior and exterior exposed surfaces be finished; either factory prefinished or coated/painted on the job except unfinished items listed above as not to be painted_This includes wall/ceiling surfaces, etc., in ancillary spaces such as mechanical spaces. D. Taping, floating, and texturing of drywall is covered under Section 09 29 00. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each paint and coating product should ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 include: 1. Product characteristics. 2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Primer requirements and finish specification. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Application methods. 6. Clean-up Information. C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range of manufacturer's color samples available. D. Coating Maintenance Manual: upon conclusion of the project,the Contractor or paint manufacturer/supplier shall furnish a coating maintenance manual, such as Sherwin- Williams"Custodian Paint Maintenance Manual" report or equal. Manual shall include an Area Summary with finish schedule, Area Detail designating where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, Safety Data Sheets, care and cleaning instructions,touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience approved by manufacturer. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Materials used on this project shall contain no lead. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field sample of paint under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Locate where directed. C. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. C. Container label to include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Provide lighting level of 60 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Provide 1 gallon of each color,type, and surface texture to Owner. C. Label each container with color, type,texture, room locations, and in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers- Paint 1. PPG. 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams. B. Manufacturers- Primer Sealers 1. PPG 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams. C. Manufacturers-Field Catalyzed Coatings 1. PPG 2. Benjamin Moore. 3. Sherwin-Williams. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac,turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions. B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 5. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. C. Seal with shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Imperious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. F. Concrete Floors (if being painted): Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved.Allow to dry. G. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. H. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with SSPC lacquer thinner or solvent wipe.Apply coat of etching primer. I. Concrete and Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.Allow to dry. J. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale,weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent.Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. K. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. L. Interior and Exterior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust, grit, and foreign matter prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. M. Fiber Cement Board (Primed): Wipe off dust, grit, and foreign matter prior to painting. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required,tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. 3.4 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Paint shop primed equipment. B. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. D. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint,to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles,to match face panels. F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. G. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports except where items are prefinished. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01 70 00. B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.7 SCHEDULE-SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING A. Metal Fabrications (Section 05 50 00): Exposed surfaces of lintels, and other miscellaneous items. 3.8 SCHEDULE- EXTERIOR SURFACES (based on Sherwin-Williams) A. CMU—Concrete Masonry Units Primer: Loxon Block Surfacer,A24W200 Two coats: A-100 Exterior Latex B. Con crete/M aso n ry/P laste r/Stu cco/E I FS/Ce mentiti o us Siding Primer: Loxon®Concrete &Masonry Primer Sealer,A24W8300 Two coats: A-100 Exterior Latex C. Concrete/Masonry—Clear Sealer Sealer: Loxon®40% Silane Water Repellent, LX31T0040 Clear Apply per manufacturer's recommendations 1 „.. 1 „.. 1 „.. 1 „.. �„ D. Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Metals Primer: Pro IndustrialTA° Pro-Cryl®Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Acrylic E. Wood Primer: Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W8041 Two coats: A-100 Exterior Latex 3.9 SCHEDULE- INTERIOR SURFACES (based on Sherwin-Williams) A. Lobby/Common Areas 1. CMU-Concrete Masonry Units Primer: PrepRite®Block Filler, B25W25 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 2. Masonry and Concrete Primer: Loxon®Concrete &Masonry Primer Sealer,A24W8300 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Gypsum Board Textures: Walls (medium orange peel). Ceilings (smooth) Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 4. Wood—Paint Primer: PrepRite ProBlock® Latex Primer/Sealer B51 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Acrylic 5. Wood—Stain Stain: Minwax®250 Interior Stain Two coats: Minwax Water Based Polyurethane Varnish 6. Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Metals Primer: Pro IndustrialTA° Pro-Cryl®Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Acrylic B. Restrooms/Corridors 1. CMU-Concrete Masonry Units Filler: Loxon Block Surfacer,A24W200 Two coats: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy 2. Masonry and Concrete Primer: Loxon Concrete &Masonry Primer Sealer,A24W8300 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 3. Gypsum Board -Walls Texture: Medium Orange Peel Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 Two coats: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy 4. Gypsum Board—Ceilings and Soffits Texture: Smooth Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 5. Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Metals Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Acrylic C. Offices/Conference Rooms/Break Rooms 1. Gypsum Board -Walls Texture: Medium Orange Peel Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 2. Gypsum Board—Ceilings and Soffits Texture: Smooth Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 3. Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Metals Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Acrylic D. Warehouse/Distribution 1. CMU—Concrete Masonry Units Primer: PrepRite®Block Filler B25W25 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 2. Masonry and Concrete Board—Ceilings and Soffits Primer: Loxon®Concrete &Masonry Primer Sealer,A24W8300 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 6 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Ferrous & Non-Ferrous Decking—Including Bar Joists Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Water Borne Acrylic Dryfall, B42-80 Series 4. Ferrous Metal Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro Industrial Acrylic E. Boiler Room/Physical Plant/Maintenance Office 1. Masonry &Concrete Walls Primer: Loxon Concrete &Masonry Primer Sealer,A24W8300 Two coats: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy 2. Masonry &Concrete Ceilings Primer: Loxon®Concrete &Masonry Primer Sealer,A24W8300 Two coats: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex 3. Ferrous Metals Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series Two coats: Pro-Industrial Acrylic F. Concrete Floors—Pigmented 1. Light Duty Two coats: ArmorSeal®Tread-PlexTA° Slip-Resistant Additive: H&C SharkGrip® 2. Medium/Heavy Duty Two coats: ArmorSeal 1000 HS Epoxy B67-2000 Series Slip-Resistant Additive: H&C SharkGrip® 3.10 SCHEDULE-COLORS A. Colors to be selected by Architect and approved by Owner. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 7 of 7 Painting Phase 2 Section 09 91 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 10 14 67 TACTILE SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room Name/Number Signs. B. Directional Signs. C. Gender Appropriate Restroom Signs. D. Fire Exit Signs. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. B. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). D. Architectural Barriers Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Provide (30) room name/number signs for interior space/doors. B. Provide (6) directional or informational signs. C. Provide (2) gender appropriate restroom signs. D. Provide (2) fire exit signs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data and installation instructions for each type of sign specified. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show layout, signage copy, size and type of mounting for each sign. 2. Indicate location of each individual sign in the project. D. Selection Samples: Sample of two for each sign with full range of color, pattern, and surface texture available. E. Verification Samples: Sample of two for each sign type for verification of quality, color, pattern, and surface texture. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualification: 1. Specializing in the products specified with minimum five years' experience. 2. Single source responsibility: Obtain signs from one source and a single manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes, ADAAG and ANSI A117.1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01 60 00. C. Package signs, labeled in name groups. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Seton Identification Products. 2. Corpus Christi Stamp Works. 3. Allenite 755 System. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Tactile Signage Phase 2 Section 10 14 67 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Andco PME 1000 Series. 5. ASI Intouch System. 6. Bestsigns HC300 ADA System. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Room Name/Number Signage: 1. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors & styles. 2. Sign Size: 8 inches (203 mm)wide by 4 inches (102 mm) high. 3. Lettering: 5/8 inch (16 mm) high, raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) with domed grade 2 braille. Letter style shall be San Serif. B. Directional or Informational Signage: 1. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors & styles. 2. Sign Size: 10 inches (250 mm)wide by 10 inches (250 mm) high. 3. Graphics: International symbol of accessibility for indicated information, with directional arrows as required. 4. Lettering: 5/8 inch (16 mm) high, raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), with domed grade 2 braille. Letter style shall be San Serif. 5. Allow for up to six (6) directional or informational signs. 6. Allow for up to 45 characters per sign. C. Restroom & Fire Exit Signage: 1. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors &styles. 2. Sign Size: 6 inches (152 mm)wide by 9 inches (229 mm) high. 3. Graphics: International symbol of accessibility for indicated information. 4. Lettering: 5/8 inch (16 mm) high, raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm), with domed grade 2 braille. Letter style shall be San Serif. D. Accessories: Installation accessories specified in manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces to receive signs have been finished, and that finishes are dry and correctly cured. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install room and door signs in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and ADA requirements. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Tactile Signage Phase 2 Section 10 14 67 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. 2. Section 10 28 13 -Toilet Accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A167- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Compartment Configurations: 1. Toilet partitions: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layout, elevations, trim, closures, and accessories. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data for panels, hardware, and accessories. 3. Samples: Showing available colors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in manufacture of solid plastic toilet compartments with products in satisfactory use under similar service conditions. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in work of this Section. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Contract Documents are based on Hiny Hiders by Scranton Products. (www.scrantonproducts.com) B. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.2 MATERIALS ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Toilet Compartments Phase 2 Section 10 21 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters: 1. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high pressure, forming single thickness panel. 2. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments. 3. 1 inch thick with edges rounded to 1/4 inch radius. 4. Fire hazard classification: Not required. 5. Color&Texture: To be selected from manufacturer's full color&texture range. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy and temper. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Hinges: Regal hinge fabricated from heavy-duty cast aluminum, wrap around flanges, adjustable on 30-degree increments, through bolted to doors and pilasters. B. Door Strike and Keeper: 1. 6 inches long, fabricate from heavy-duty extruded aluminum with bright dip anodized finish, with wrap-around flanges secured to pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolts. 2. Bumper: Extruded black vinyl. C. Latch and Housing: 1. Heavy-duty extruded aluminum. 2. Latch housing: Bright dip anodized finish. 3. Slide latch and paddle. D. Coat Hook/Bumper: 1. Combination type, chrome plated Zamak. 2. Equip outswing handicapped doors with second door pull and door stop. E. Door Pulls: Chrome plated Zamak. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Doors and Dividing Panels: 55 inches high, mounted 14 inches above finished floor. B. Pilasters: 82 inches high, fastened to pilaster sleeves with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt. C. Pilaster Sleeves: 3 inches high, 20 gage stainless steel, secured to pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt. D. Wall Brackets: 1-1/2" long Aluminum Stirrup. Stirrup brackets are mounted to pilaster with stainless steel, tamper resistant sex bolts. Panels are through-bolted into brackets with stainless steel, tamper resistant sex bolts. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction is accomplished with#14 x 1-1/2"stainless steel phillips-head screws and plastic anchors. E. Headrail: Heavy-duty extruded aluminum, anti-grip design, clear anodized finish, fastened to headrail bracket with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head sex bolt and at top of pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. F. Headrail Brackets: 20 gage stainless steel, satin finish, secured to wall with stainless steel tamper resistant Torx head screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01 40 00. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built in framing, anchorage, and bracing. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Toilet Compartments Phase 2 Section 10 21 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install compartments in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Install rigid, straight, plumb, and level. C. Locate bottom edge of doors and panels 14 inches above finished floor. D. Provide uniform, maximum 3/8 inch vertical clearance at doors. E. Not Acceptable: Evidence of cutting, drilling, or patching. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 70 00. B. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. C. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. D. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Toilet Compartments Phase 2 Section 10 21 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 10 26 13 CORNER GUARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. This section includes the following types of wall protection systems: 1. Corner Guards B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements related to this section: 1. Section 05 40 00: Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 2. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Board. 4. Section 09 91 00: Painting. 1.2 References A. National codes (IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA and Life Safety) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1.3 Submittals A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures". B. Product data and detailed specifications for each system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate. C. Shop drawings showing locations, extent and installation details of corner guards. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction. D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as proposed for this work, for verification of color, texture, pattern and end cap attachment and alignment. 1. 12" (304.8mm) long sample of each model specified including end cap and mounting hardware. E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of each component with requirements indicated. F. Maintenance data for wall protection system components for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3 years' experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project. B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Not less than 5 years' experience in the production of specified products and a record of successful in-service performance. C. Code compliance: Assemblies should conform to all applicable codes including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA, Life Safety and CA 01350. D. Fire performance characteristics: Provide engineered PETG wall protection system components with UL label indicating that they are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for Class 1 characteristics listed below: 1. Flame spread: 25 or less 2. Smoke developed: 450 or less E. Impact Strength: Provide assembled wall protection units that have been tested in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F476. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Corner Guards Phase 2 Section 10 26 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Chemical and stain resistance: Provide wall protection system components with chemical and stain resistance in accordance with ASTM D543. G. Color match: Provide wall protection components that are color matched in accordance with the following: 1. Delta Ecmc of no greater than 1.0 using CIELab color space. H. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall protection system manufactured by the same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture and physical properties. 1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to show manufacturer. B. Store materials in original, undamaged packaging in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight and exposure to the elements.A minimum room temperature of 40°F (4°C) and a maximum of 100°F (38°C) should be maintained. C. Material must be stored flat. 1.6 Project Conditions A. Materials must be acclimated in an environment of 65°-75°F (18°-24°C) for at least 24 hours prior to beginning the installation. B. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Interior surface protection products specified herein and installed on the submittal drawings shall be manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. 2.2 Materials A. Engineered PETG: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn 4000 with shadowgrain texture, nominal .078" (1.98mm) thickness. Chemical and stain resistance should be per ASTM D543 standards as established by the manufacturer. Colors to be indicated in the finish schedule from one of manufacturer's standard color range. B. Aluminum: Extruded aluminum retainers should be 6063-T6 alloy, nominal .062" (1.57mm) thickness. Minimum strength and durability properties as specified in ASTM B221. C. Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum retainers. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer. 2.3 Corner Guards A. Engineered PETG Corner Guards to be Acrovyn 4000 by Construction Specialties: Surface mounted guards consisting of a continuous retainer with snap-on Acrovyn 4000 cover. Color matched end caps to be provided for both partial and full height applications. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction. 1. Model SM-20N 90° surface mounted corner guard with 3" (76mm) legs, '/" radiused cover and aluminum retainer. Architect to select from one of(64) Acrovyn solid colors. For odd degree corners specify model SM-20MN. 2. Corner Guard shall be 4'-0"tall. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Corner Guards Phase 2 Section 10 26 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.4 Fabrication A. General: Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 Preparation A. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by manufacturer's instructions. B. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.3 Installation A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb. B. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 65°-75°F (18°-24°C) and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation. C. Adjust installed end caps as necessary to ensure tight seams. 3.4 Cleaning A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean guards and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommended cleaning method. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work. 3.5 Protection A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Corner Guards Phase 2 Section 10 26 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 10 26 23.11 DECORATIVE PROTECTION PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Decorative protection panels. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 20 00- Finish Carpentry. 2. Section 10 26 23.11 - Decorative Protection Panels. 3. Section 06 41 16—Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 4. Section 09 21 16—Gypsum Board Assemblies 5. Section 09 28 16—Glass-Mat Faced Gypsum Backing Boards 1.2 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: In addition to requirements, comply with applicable provisions of following for design, materials, fabrication, and installation of component parts: 1. ANSI / NEMA LD-3: High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 2. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. GreenGuard Gold Indoor Air Quality Certified® 4. Class 1/A Fire-rated (UL723/ASTM E-84). 5. SEFA 8.1 approved. 6. ASTM G 22 Bacterial Growth Resistance. 7. ASTM E 162: Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 8. IMO FTP Code Part 2: Smoke and Density Test. 9. IMO FTP Code Part 5: Test for Surface Flammability. 10. ISO: International Organization for Standardization. 11. ISO 9001: Quality Management Systems. 12. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code. 13. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1 of 4 Decorative Protection Panels ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Section 10 26 23.11 Phase 2 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Product data for each specified product. Include manufacturer's technical data sheets and published instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Each installation. 1. Anchorages to other construction, including requirements for concealed supports. 2. Use same unit designations used on Drawings. C. Verification Samples: Not less than 5 by 7 inches (127 by 177.8 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. Provide actual color samples. Electronic color samples will not be accepted. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer. B. Product Certificates: For the following: 1. Decorative protection panels. C. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's written maintenance instructions. B. Manufacturer warranties transferrable to Owner. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating and installing decorative plastic laminate finished work with a minimum 3 years experience. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance with a minimum 3 years experience. C. Mock-Up: 1. Build mockups to verify selections made under submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects, set quality for materials and construction, set quality standard for fabrication and installation. 2. Acceptable mock-ups may remain as part of the Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. a. Acceptable mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package and ready materials according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not deliver components until Project is fully enclosed. C. Store products inside building protected from light, heat and moisture and never store in contact with floor or outside wall surfaces. Do not expose to continuous direct sunlight. 2 of 4 Decorative Protection Panels ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Section 10 26 23.11 Phase 2 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Store horizontally. 2. Sheets must be handled by two people. 3. Stored at a temperature per Formica Corporation technical guide requirements. D. Provide protective coverings of suitable material. Take special precautions at corners. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate sizes and locations of cut-outs and other related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior laminate construction can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide decorative protection panels with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Source Limitations: Obtain decorative protection panels materials through one source from a single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: 1. Basis of Design: Formica Corporation; HardStop Decorative Protection Panels. a. Contact: ftp:// .forica.co /en/us b. Manufacturer Representative: Cathy Amoruso, Formica, cell: 713-252-1372 email: Cathy.Amoruso@formica.com 2. Substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. B. Decorative Protection Panels 1. Description: Decorative protection panels. a. Impact resistant panels. 2. Panel Core Material: Treated fiberglass core. Class A Fire-rated. 3. Laminate Grade: a. Grade H1, 0.0677 Inches -0.0827 Inches (1.72mm-2.1 mm). 4. Laminate Color(s): a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of available colors. 5. Laminate Finish: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of available finishes. 2. Laminate Application(s): a. Gypsum board. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 3 of 4 Decorative Protection Panels ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Section 10 26 23.11 Phase 2 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Aluminum Trim Profiles for Seam Treatments: 1. Thicknesses: a. All trims 0.055-inch. b. Corner guard trim 0.065-inch. 2. Profile Types: 1. Inside corners. 2. Outside corners. 3. Division bars. 4. Corner guards. 5. End caps. 3. Colors, Finish and Patterns: a. As selected by architect from manufacturer's full line of available colors, finishes, and patterns. B. Adhesives: 1. Bonding Laminate: Franklin Advanced Polymer adhesive recommended. See Formica technical guide for recommended adhesive by substrate type. C. Sealant: 1. Color Coordinated Sealant: 100% silicone or acrylic caulk material by Color-Rite Incorporated as recommended by Formica Corporation. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Conform to Formica Corporation standard practices, procedures, conditions including preconditioning, material recommendations, machining, equipment and workmanship. B. Router base should be clean and free of burrs and debris. Table saws should be clean, flat, and free of burrs. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install decorative protection panels in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, approved submittals. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements. C. Accessory Materials: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean decorative protection panels and aluminum trims in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protection: 1. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces. END OF SECTION 4 of 4 Decorative Protection Panels ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Section 10 26 23.11 Phase 2 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet accessories. B. Grab bars. C. Utility Shelf/Mop Rack. D. Attachment hardware. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A117.1 -Safety Standards for the Handicapped. B. ASTM A123-Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. C. ASTM B456- E lectrod e posited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Architectural Barriers Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) for access for the handicapped. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel:ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass:ASTM B19, flat products;ASTM B16/B16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet:ASTM A653/A653M,with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation 1 of 3 Toilet Accessories Phase 2 Section 10 28 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices:ASTM Al53/A153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating:ASTM B456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). H. Mirrors:ASTM C1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. I. ABS Plastic:Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product Manufacturers: 1. ASI —American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation 4. Koala Kare Products B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.3 SCHEDULE (All items to be mounted to heights & locations to meet ADA/TAS requirements). A. Grab Bars (2 Required) 1. ASI —3700 Series—Type 57 2. Locate as shown on drawings. Center of bars to be within 33"to 35" above floor. B. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser&Waste Receptacle (2 required) 1. ASI —Model 0467-9 2. Locate as shown on drawings. Dispenser height to be 48" maximum above floor. C. Toilet Tissue Dispenser(2 required) 1. ASI —Model 0263-1A 2. Wall or partition mounted where shown on drawings. D. Mirror(4 required) 1. ASI —0600 Series—Model 2436 2. Wall mounted centered above Lavatory. Bottom edge of reflecting surface to be 40" maximum above floor. E. Robe Hook(4 required) 1. ASI —Model 7312 2. Locate one each on interior door face of Restroom doors. Locate remaining where instructed by architect. Center of hook to be 48" maximum above floor unless shown otherwise on drawings. F. Utility Shelf/Mop Rack(1 Required) 1. ASI —Model 1308-3 2. Wall mounted per manufacturer's instructions and where shown on drawings. Mount bottom of mop strip at 66" above floor. G. Bench (A.D.A. compliant) 1. Bradley—Lennox Pedestal—42"wide X 20"deep X 18-1/2" high. 2. Floor mounted per manufacturer's instructions. Locate where shown on drawings. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation 2 of 3 Toilet Accessories Phase 2 Section 10 28 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. The total number of keys for each accessory shall be determined by LAWA. 2.5 FINISHES A. As defined by each individual product. B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings instructed by the manufacturer. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. C. Coordinate with framing &gypsum board sections of work and responsible individuals to insure installation at blocking as required for certain of the various items herein specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers'written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf,when tested according to ASTM F446. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation 3 of 3 Toilet Accessories Phase 2 Section 10 28 13 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDED A. ADA compliant fire extinguishers cabinets B. Accessories C. Fire Extinguishers will be provided by owner. Contractor shall coordinate with owner and mount fire extinguishers to meet applicable codes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Unit Masonry. B. Section 05 40 00: Cold-Formed Metal Framing. C. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry. D. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Board. E. Section 09 91 00: Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 10— Portable Fire Extinguishers B. ANSI/UL 711 — Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguisher C. UL 299— Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, and location. B. Product Data: Provide cabinet operational features, color and finish and anchorage details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall anchoring requirements D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re- certification requirements. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to 2015 International Fire Code and NFPA for extinguisher cabinets. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. J.L. Industries B. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. C. Johnson-Lee, Div. of W.F. Lee Corp. 2.2 EXTINGUISHERS ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 2 Fire Protection Specialties Phase 2 Section 10 44 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Extinguishers provided by Owner. 2.3 CABINETS A. Metal: Formed aluminum, Fire rated. B. Configuration: Semi-recessed type, exterior nominal dimensions of 9.5 inch wide x 24 inch high x 6 inch deep. C. Trim Type: Rolled edge with 2.5 inch wide face. Cabinet must comply with ADA maximum projection requirements. D. Door: 18 gage thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; full glass with recessed pull (Std. on ADA doors) E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. 2.4 ACCESSORIES Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, baked enamel finish. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. B. Pre-drill for anchors. C. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch. D. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. 2.6 FINISHES A. Cabinet and Door: Anodized to clear color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, height from finished floor to as indicated on plans. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Coordinate with owner provided extinguishers and place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets or on wall brackets as indicated on plans. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 2 Fire Protection Specialties Phase 2 Section 10 44 00 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 05 00 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Requirements, and Division 1 of the Specifications, apply to all Sections of Division 22. B. Other Contract Documents complement the requirements and apply to the work of Division 22. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this Section shall include the furnishing of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division, and as called for in the Plumbing Drawings. 1. All facilities, supervision, coordination, transportation, handling, labor and methods for the fabrication, installation, interconnections, painting and other finishes, start-up, tests, adjustments, clean-up and other necessary work for the complete and satisfactory systems and equipment, ready for operation and use, shall be included. 2. Whenever the words "Contractor" appear in this Division, they refer to the Contractor responsible for work specified in that Section. 3. The Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents including all drawings, all sections of the Specifications, plumbing and fire-protection design requirements and system design details. a. The Contractor is responsible for ascertaining the extent all those documents, drawings, sections of specifications, design requirements, and system design details affect work herein specified. 4. Report all errors, omissions, conflicts or code violations to Architect and Owner prior to commencement of work. B. Drawings for the work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and indicate the general arrangement and locations of the work, follow as closely as actual construction and as other work permits. 1. Because of the scale of the drawings, not all basic items such as necessary duct and pipe offsets, pipefittings, access panels and sleeves may be on the plans. 2. Contract documents show design basis equipment. 3. Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for installing the Owner approved equipment. Substitutions of equal quality, capacity, performance, efficiency, weight, physical size, and configuration to fit in the space provided for the design basis equipment may be allowed if pre- approved by Mechanical Engineer. 4. If the Contractor selects equipment other than the design basis, he is responsible for the necessary design modifications and for coordination with other trades to meet all intended requirements of the original design documents. 5. The location and the sizes of equipment, duct and pipefittings, access panels, sleeves, inserts, and other basic items required by code or other Sections shall be coordinated and included for the proper installation of the Work. C. The Contractor shall make any required changes from the Contract Documents to make this work conform to the building construction or the work of other trades at no additional cost to the Owner and shall not impact the project's time schedule. 1. The Contractor shall indicate all changes from the Contract Documents on the shop drawings. 2. Submit the shop drawings to the Architect, Engineer, and Owner for approval before commencing the work. 3. Failure to follow the approval procedure may result in the forced removal of all work, performed prior to approval. 4. Final "as build"documents shall include all changes. 22 05 00 - 1 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Equipment specification may not deal individually with the minor items required such as components, parts, controls, and devices that may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment design performance and warranties. 1. The equipment supplier shall include such required items whether or not specifically called for in the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall properly install them. E. Contractor shall verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the complete installation to insure proper operation of the equipment furnished under Division 22 of the Specifications. F. Contract Documents may call for Plumbing Contractor to install specific equipment furnished by others, including Owner purchased equipment. G. Consider the specifications and drawings as complimentary one to the other. 1. Where equipment items, material and labor are specified, indicated, called for or implied by either the drawings or the specifications, they shall be deemed as specified by both and included as part of the contract. 2. Should conflicts occur between the drawings and the Division 22 Specifications, the more stringent requirements shall apply and take precedent. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: All work shall be in compliance with, of all applicable Laws, Codes, Standards and Regulations of Governmental Bodies having jurisdiction overwork performed for or on behalf of the Owner, and over the applicable job site 1. See Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements a. If there should be conflicting requirements between above referenced codes than the following rules shall apply: 1. The Mechanical Engineer or the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall provide final code interpretations and resolutions of conflicts 2. The code that affords the greatest degree of life safety shall take precedent. B. Contractor shall request the A/E for clarification of any part of the contract documents, which may be in conflict with the above codes and regulations. 1. Contractor shall prepare proposed changes for review and approval by A/E and Owner. 1.4 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Protect any existing active services: water, gas, sewer, and electric, against damage. B. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. C. When encountering services requiring temporary interruption or relocation, request procedural information from authority having jurisdiction and coordinate work with the utility service users. D. Where abandoning an existing service, terminate in conformance with the Utility or Municipality having jurisdiction, and shown termination points on "as-built" construction plans. 1.5 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall carefully inspect the site to be familiar with conditions that affect the work. 1. Contractor shall verify points of connection of utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. 2. Contractor shall verify available space in the existing structure and accessibility required for the installation of work under this contract and inform the A/E to conditions, which may be detrimental or will prevent proper execution of the work. B. The submittal of a bid is an acknowledgement that the Contractor performed the site inspection and has no conflicts with performing the work. 1. If a conflict arises do to an observable condition the Contractor should have seen in the pre- bid site visit, the Owner is under no obligation to authorize any additional payments. C. Submittal of bid shall indicate that the Contractor has included all required allowances in the bid. 22 05 00 - 2 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. The Owner shall not make allowances for any code violations or errors resulting from Contractor's failure to visit job site and review all contract documents, applicable codes, and standards. 1.6 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. B. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Authority. C. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all documentation, and issue closure, see Section 01 77 00- Contract Closeout, for substantial completion details. D. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Commissioning, for detailed commissioning requirements PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL A. Each system component installed by Contractor shall meet or exceed the performance specification requirements listed in the Contract Documents including drawings, specifications, Plumbing and Fire Protection Design Requirements and Design Details. 1. Components with a lesser degree of performance or quality as determined by the Owner, Building Department, design A/E or documented as inferior shall be replaced with no additional charge to Owner. B. Materials and equipment shall be new, unused, standard current products from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall bear label of the Underwriters' Laboratory for the intent use or shall be materials approved by the code-enforcing agency. C. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment or material are required, these shall be the product of a single manufacturer throughout entire project and shall fit in the allocated spaces provided, complying with all clearances and codes. D. All hardware and accessory fittings shall be a type designed, intended or appropriate for use, be compatible, and compliment the item with which they are used. 1. They shall have corrosion protection suitable for atmosphere they are installed. 2. All such hardware shall be U.S. standard size. E. All materials including insulation,jackets, and adhesives shall have a Flame Spread Rating not exceeding 25, and Smoke Developed Rating not exceeding 50, when tested in accordance with NFPA 255, "Methods of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 1. Submittal data shall specifically indicate those ratings. F. All equipment and piping supports shall be hot dipped galvanized except for special corrosion protection as otherwise noted in Contract Documents. 1. Hangers for copper pipe shall be vinyl coated. 2. Do not use copper clad hangers. G. Plumbing and fire protection system components shall conform to federal, state, and local sound emission and vibration isolation guidelines. 1. Objectionable noise or excessive vibration created in any part of the building by operation of any equipment under this contract is not permitted. H. Follow installations directions and recommendations of material and equipment manufacturers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Licensed Contractors shall perform construction work as required by AHJ. 1. The Contractor shall not work outside the scope of his license. 2. Any person who is not licensed must work under direct supervision of a person who has a license required by the state law and by the county or municipal licensing ordinances. 22 05 00 - 3 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. The Owner may request the change of the job supervisor. 4. Workers skilled and competent in the type of work involved shall accomplish the installation. 5. Workmanship throughout shall correspond to the standards of the best trade practices. B. Contractor shall install all systems and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, and equipment or material manufacturer recommendations and instructions. C. Work lines and established grades shall be in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall furnish to all trades, in ample time, any information they need to construct all equipment bases, trenches, pits, chases, and openings in floors, walls, and finishes to provide required working clearances. 2. The contractor shall set all sleeves, anchor bolts, or inserts to fasten equipment before pouring of adjacent concrete. D. Coordinate location of all Division 21 &22 work with Division 23, 25, 26, 27 &28. 1. Do not run piping, and similar Division 21 &22 work in NEC dedicated service areas for electrical equipment, including above panel boards, starters, communication panels, control panels, telephone backboards, data panels, and similar electrical elements. 2. Do not install water piping directly above electrical equipment. 3. In electrical rooms with required piping, provide drain pan(s) to protect the electrical equipment. 4. Refer questionable locations to the A/E for resolution prior to installation and correct non- conforming installed work at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Cap or plug all piping systems (hot water, potable water, pneumatic piping, at the end of each workday until system is complete to prevent contamination. 3.2 COORDINATION OF WORK AND DRAWINGS A. Each contractor and subcontractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of his equipment/labor with the General Contractor and work of other Contractors and trades. 1. The contractor shall coordinate the work of different trades to prevent interference between piping, ductwork, equipment, and structural work. B. Recommend each contractor prepare their shop drawings at 1/4"to V-0"scale clearly indicating all applicable components and coordinate the same with other trades. 1. Recommend shop coordination drawings show in detail the space conditions of all concerned trades, and be reviewed and accepted by the A/E. 2. Contractor's failure to coordinate work between trades using coordination shop drawings or other means will not cause for any additional cost changes to the Owner, and/or changes to the project schedule. 3. If the contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades or causes interference with work of other trades, the contractor shall make necessary changes in the work to correct the condition, at no additional cost to the Owner, and/or changes to the project schedule. 3.3 SUBMITTALS A. Method or procedures for submitting shop drawings and submittal data shall comply with the General Conditions. B. Prior to ordering equipment and material, the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the manufacturer's cut sheets to the Engineer for review and acceptance 1. Submittal data shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment. 2. Including dimensions, required service and maintenance clearances, wiring diagrams, performance curves, ratings, control sequence. 3. Layout plan showing the arrangement of the equipment with piping, and other data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. C. Other submittals shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Valves 2. Pipe insulation 3. Controls 22 05 00 - 4 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Thermometers and gauges 3.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Contractor shall follow the contract drawings and specifications, unless he submits written request for a substitution and receives written acceptance from the Engineer and OWNER. 1. Owner's representative shall review the request and either approve or deny the in writing. B. All approval procedures regarding proposed substitutions as "approved equal" or"Engineer and Owner approved"shall meet the requirements of Section 01 60 00. 3.5 ACCESS PANELS A. Contractor shall provide required access panels or doors for all serviceable equipment in concealed locations whether or not called for on the drawings. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Coordinate the placing of openings in the existing or new structures as required for installation of the Plumbing Work. B. Any additional patching and finish work required for unnecessary openings due to failure to inspect and coordinate work, is at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Any additional cutting and patching of the structure necessary due to failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for leaving of openings, is at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide cutting and patching, surface finishing and painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of work, and furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 1. Do not cut structural members without written prior approval of the A/E. 2. Minimize cutting by using core drills, power saws, or other machines that will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and be performed by artisans skilled in the respective craft. 3.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves are required for all piping passing through masonry or concrete partitions (walls, floors ceilings, roofs) and through concrete beams, foundations, and footings. 1. Position sleeves in formwork prior to placement of concrete. 2. Provide concrete reinforcing around sleeves. B. Sleeves for piping passing through non-load bearing or non-fire or smoke rated walls and partitions may be required if included in the design documents by the Engineer. 1. When required, sleeves shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: pipes 2'h" and smaller-24 gage; 3"to 6"-22 gage; over 6" -20 gage. C. Sleeves for piping passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and allow free movement of pipe due to expansion and contraction. 1. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. 2. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter for pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, terminate sleeves flush with wall, partitions, and ceilings, and shall extend '/2" above finished floor level. 1. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water. 2. Caulk floor sleeves. F. Flash sleeves passing through waterproofing membrane as required by Division 7. G. Protect pipe penetrations through fire-rated partitions (walls, floors, or ceilings) in per with FBC. 1. Protected penetration shall retain the original integrity of the fire rated partition. 2. Unprotected penetrations through fire-rated partitions not allowed. 22 05 00 - 5 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. All materials, products, and procedures used to complete the fire stopping assemblies shall be tested, listed, and approved by testing laboratories such as U.L. or Factory Mutual and comply with requirements of ASTM-E-119. 4. Securely fasten sleeves to the partition that are part of the required approved fire stopping. 5. Close off annular spaces between sleeves, pipes, and between penetrating item and adjacent work with UL listed and approved fire stopping materials and caulk airtight. 6. Insulation and coverings shall not penetrate the fire-rated partition unless it is part of the approved U.L or Factory Mutual fire-stopping assembly. 7. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. 3.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons at each sleeve opening into finished spaces. B. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. C. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. D. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with setscrews or other approved devices. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Take special care for the protection of equipment and materials furnished. 1. Store and completely protect all materials from damage. 2. Keep materials and equipment clean and dry, free from deterioration by weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is completed. 3. Do not install damaged or defective materials. 4. Touch up any damage from rust, paint, etc., and scratched or marred finishes on equipment to match original finish or completely refinished to restore equipment to original condition. B. Provide protect of any previously finished area from mars or other damage when an installation or connection of equipment requires work in areas previously finished by other Contractors., 1. The Contractor shall provide drop cloths, or any other materials necessary to protect floors, walls, furniture, equipment, etc. from soil or damage. C. Contractor shall arrange with other Contractors for promptly repairing and refinishing any damage to the building or its contents incurred by the installation or testing of the systems installed at no charge to the Owner. D. Where insulated piping extends to exposed areas, or to weather exposed areas, provide finish or jacket as specified in section 22 07 19. E. Contractor may weld in the existing buildings under an approved fire watch and other required safety measures. 1. Contractor's work, and construction means, methods, materials, and equipment used shall not compromise the building fire safety, as well as safety and welfare of coworkers and building occupants. 3.10 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION A. Identification of plumbing systems shall be as specified in Section 22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION. 3.11 WIRING AND ELECTRICAL WORK FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. All electrical work, equipment, and wiring shall comply with NEC. B. The Plumbing Contractor, unless specified otherwise, shall furnish all Division 22 equipment. C. Division 26 shall provide power services for equipment furnished by Plumbing Contractor to include safety disconnect switches, wiring, and final connections. 22 05 00 - 6 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. The Plumbing Contractor shall check all electrical service and control connections to ensure proper operation of equipment and systems installed under work in Division 22. 3.12 EXCAVATING TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Provide excavation necessary for water supply, sanitary, and storm piping, etc., and backfill such trenches and excavations after the installation, testing, and approval of work. 1. Take care in excavating, that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. 2. Where a line must pass under footing, make the crossing by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. 3. Keep excavation free from water by pumping if necessary. 4. Do not open any greater length of trench, in advance of pipe or utility installation, than that authorized. B. Trenches for piping and utilities located inside foundation walls and five-foot outside of the wall shall be at less than 16" but no more than 24"wider than the outside diameter of the pipe. 1. Site conditions shall govern the width of trenches for piping and utilities located more than five-feet outside of building foundation walls, except for sewers. C. Excavate trenches for sanitary and storm pipe may be laid at the proper alignment and depth and the maximum trench width at the outside top of the pipe is less than 24". 1. Other trench widths governed by site conditions. D. Shape the trench bottom so that when pipe is in place the lower fourth of the circumference for the full length of the barrel is supported on compacted-fill. 1. Dig bell holes so that no part of the weight of the pipe is supported by the bell, and not larger than necessary for proper jointing. 2. Excavate all piping requiring excavation below the compacted fill required for the structure to at least 6" below pipe invert. E. Make trenches true to grade by means of substantial and accurately set batter-boards. F. Immediately after testing and/or inspection, carefully backfill the trench with earth free from clods, brick, etc., to a depth one-half the pipe diameter and then firmly puddle and tamp in such a manner as not to disturb the alignment or joints of the pipe. 1. Thereafter, puddle and tamp the every vertical foot. G. Burial depth of gravity drain lines shall have precedence over non-gravity systems. 1. Offset chilled water and domestic water lines as required to coordinate with gravity lines. H. The Contractor shall coordinate exact location, depth, and scope of underground piping, electrical conduits, and similar utilities. 1. Routing shown on drawings is schematic coordinate actual routing with field conditions, grades, and work of other trades, then document in "as-built"drawings. 3.13 ANCHORING EQUIPMENT A. Securely anchor all equipment designed for permanent mounting to its supporting surface in compliance with IMC. B. A minimum of two bolts are required per each piece of equipment. 1. Bolts shall be of sufficient size to prevent equipment from overturning or moving from original mounting position. 3.14 CORROSION A. Make provisions to prevent corrosion due to contact of metallic pipe and equipment with moisture or dissimilar materials. B. When joining a pipe with another pipe, valve, fitting, or piece of equipment constructed of dissimilar metal install an insulated joint to prevent formation of galvanic couple. C. Pipe hangers and supports of dissimilar metal shall be isolated from contact with pipe. 22 05 00 - 7 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Metal pipe and equipment shall be isolated from direct contact with concrete or other corrosive materials and soils. 3.15 TESTS A. Test all materials, equipment, and systems that require testing by these specifications or by any applicable regulation or code, in the presence of owner or authority having jurisdiction. 1. Test all items requiring pressure or leakage tests before concealing from view. 2. Rectify all defects disclosed by tests and the repeat the tests. a. Continue process until installation passes all required test. 3. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment used in tests. B. Contractors'tests shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with the commissioning requirements. 1. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Commissioning, for further details. 3.16 COMPLETION OF WORK A. Prior to acceptance of the installation and final payment of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide and complete the following: B. CLEANING: as required by Special Conditions applicable to this Division of the work. 1. At the conclusion of the construction, the site and structure shall be cleaned thoroughly of all debris and unused materials remaining from the plumbing construction. a. Clean all areas and temporary storage spaces of all packing boxes, wood frame members and other waste materials used in the plumbing construction. 2. Clean the entire piping system and equipment internally. 3. Drain all tanks fixtures and pumps and prove free of sludge and accumulated matter. 4. Remove all temporary labels, stickers, etc. from all fixtures and equipment. a. (Do not remove permanent nameplates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc.). C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Refer to Section 01 91 00—Commissioning for Operations and Maintenance Data requirements. D. AS-BUILT PRINTS: 1. Requirements and methods of preparing and procedure for submitting project record as-built prints shall be in accordance with Division 1. 2. Contractor shall keep day-to-day records of all changes (redline drawings), and upon completion of the work, shall submit the redline drawings to the A/E to incorporate these changes into the original ACAD drawing files in order to create the record drawings (as-built drawings). a. Provide a CD containing -copies of all as-built drawing files in both ACAD and TIF format to the Owner at the date of substantial completion. 3. The drawings shall show: a. All equipment and piping (including underground). b. The fire protection sprinkler system layout with dimensions and reference points. c. All other concealed non-accessible work, i) Branching arrangement and valve location for piping systems. ii) The locations of all water hammer arrestors and potable water shutoff valves in system. iii) The locations of control system sensors and other control devices. iv) Work of change orders not shown on contract documents. 22 05 00 - 8 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. WARRANTY 1. The warranty for all plumbing equipment (whether manufacturer's or contractor's warranty) shall comply with Section 01 78 00. 2. All equipment and systems, unless specified otherwise, shall have a manufacturer's warranty for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. a. This warranty shall be against defective materials, design, and workmanship. 3. The plumbing contractor shall repair or replace any component of the Division 22 work under warranty, which proves to be defective, at no cost to the Owner. 4. The Contractor upon receipt of notice from the Owner of a failure during the warranty period shall respond the same day and complete warranty service work in a timely manner. 5. During warranty period, document all responses to warranty calls made by the Contractor by leaving a copy of the mechanics service ticket with the school Principal upon completion of the warranty work, prior to leaving the site. a. Without proper documentation, the Owner cannot acknowledge repairs are complete. 6. Required optional extended manufacturer or vendor warranties for specific items, their performance, or expected durability will be explicitly included in Division 22 Specifications. a. Manufacturer or vendor shall repair or replace any defective component under extended warranty at no cost to the Owner. 3.17 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. B. Provide competent, factory-authorized personnel to provide instruction to Facilities Service personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. C. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. D. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 - 9 of 9 Basic Plumbing Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 05 05 STARTING AND COMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Starting and Commissioning of Plumbing Systems. B. Demonstration and Instructions. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. All Divisions of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STARTING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS: A. Coordinate schedule for start-up and commissioning of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Owner's representative seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item. C. Do not start-up or operate Plumbing systems until construction of building envelope is complete and system components will not be subjected to damage from dirt, dust, construction debris, and weather, or by use of construction personnel. D. Clear dirt, dust, and grout on exterior or interior surfaces of fixtures, equipment, heat exchangers, heating coils, burners, and the like, prior to acceptance by Owner. E. Verify that specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. H. Activate and operate all plumbing equipment and systems and verify that all systems are functioning properly in all modes and sequences of operation. When verification is complete, demonstrate all modes and sequences to Owner's representative. Verify hot water temperature settings, relief valve operation, regulator operation, tempered water settings, temperature and pressure balancing valve operation, flue damper operation, combustion efficiencies, flush valve operation, and the like. I. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve 22 05 05 - 1 of 1 Starting and Commissioning of Plumbing Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. J. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS: A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of plumbing equipment and systems to Owner's personnel two (2) weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Demonstrate project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six(6) months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operation and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. G. Record training sessions and provide copy to Owner. 3.3 STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS: A. Upon completion of the plumbing systems installation, contractor shall test and operate all individual components of the system. Demonstrate that the installation is functioning in all modes of operation as a complete and integrated system and is performing in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's personnel shall be trained in the operation and maintenance of the system. All operating schedules, parameters, and set-points shall be entered into the acceptable document form. 1. Provide startup and commissioning data to the Owner in Operation and Maintenance Manual. END OF SECTION 22 05 05 - 2 of 2 Starting and Commissioning of Plumbing Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 05 10 MINOR PLUMBING DEMOLITION PART1GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section. B. The General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the following: 1. Owner has salvage rights to all existing items on site. 2. Remove plumbing services, and associated items as indicated on drawings. 3. Provide protection for adjacent existing areas before, during, and following removal operations. 4. Leave interior clean, ready for further construction. B. Owner removed items: 1. The Owner will remove all movable items and certain fixed items identified by the drawings or as discussed in the pre-construction meeting. C. Owner Salvaged Items: 1. The drawings identify items removed by Contractor and Owner Salvaged. 2. Owner has salvage rights to Contractor Removed/Owner Salvaged items. 3. Take care not to damage Owner Salvaged items removed by Contractor. PART 2MATERIALS 2.1 REMOVED ITEMS A. Remove from site all items,walls, structural, mechanical, electrical, and finish materials other than Owner salvage or retained items within the remodeled areas as indicated. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL WORK A. Disconnect all service piping necessary to the completion of removal operations. 1. Cap abandoned service lines not extended or reused with materials compatible with existing piping. 2. Re-route existing services required to remain. 3. Remove from site plumbing fixtures from remodeled areas not specifically noted on drawings to be Owner salvaged. B. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of his demolition schedule. C. Contractor shall provide a set of, As-build, plans indicating the changes and any abandoned systems. END OF SECTION 220510- 1 of 1 Minor Plumbing Demolition DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS and SUPPORTS for PLUMBING PIPING PART1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports B. Equipment bases and supports C. Sleeves and seals D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping B. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping D. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers E. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design and Manufacture F. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application G. MSS SP89- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Fabrication and Installation Practices H. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems I. NFPA 14 - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems J. UL 203 - Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Services 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing and hydronic piping B. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13 C. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14 PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Fire Protection Piping: 1. Conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 2. Hangers for pipe sizes 2 to 1'/2" use carbon steel, adjustable swivel split ring. 3. Hangers for pipe sizes 2" and over, use carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or trapeze hangers, use steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall support for pipe sizes to 3", use cast iron hook. 6. Wall support for pipe sizes 4" and over, use welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical support, use steel riser clamps. 8. Floor support use cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 22 05 29- 1 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 9. Copper pipe support, use carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. B. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89 2. Hangers for pipe sizes 2 to 1'/2", use carbon steel adjustable swivel split ring. 3. Hangers for pipe sizes 2" and over, use carbon steel adjustable clevis. 4. Multiple or trapeze hangers, use steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall support for pipe sizes to 3", use cast iron hook. 6. Wall support for pipe sizes 4" and over, use welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical support use steel riser clamp. 8. Floor support, use cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper pipe support, use vinyl coated carbon steel ring, adjustable. a. Do not use copper plated or copper clad hangers. C. Plumbing Piping -Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for pipe sizes 2 to 1'/2" use carbon steel adjustable swivel split ring. 3. Hangers for cold pipe sizes 2" and over, use Carbon steel adjustable clevis. 4. Multiple or trapeze hangers, use steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Vertical support use steel riser clamp. 6. Floor support for cold pipe any size, use cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper pipe support use vinyl coated carbon steel ring, adjustable. a. Do not use copper plated or copper clad hangers. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.3 INSERTS A. Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms, size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.4 FLASHING A. Metal flashing: 26-gage galvanized steel. B. Metal Counter-flashing: 22-gage galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing, 5-Ib/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing, 1-Ib/sq ft sheet lead D. Flexible Flashing, 47-mil thick butyl sheet; compatible with roofing E. Caps, steel 22-gage minimum; 16-gage at fire resistant elements 2.5 SLEEVES A. For materials, refer to Section 01 50 00, Item 3.7. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 22 05 29- 2 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4". D. Where concrete slabs form-finished ceiling, locate inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below, and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal and vertical piping in accordance with IPC International Plumbing Code. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 2"space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place pipe hanger within 12" of each turn or elbow. D. Use hangers with 1'/2" minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5' maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Provide vinyl coated carbon steel hangers and supports. 1. Do not use copper plated or copper clad hangers. 2. Avoid contact of dissimilar metals. J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. 1. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not exposed. 3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4"thick and extending 6" beyond supported equipment. 1. Refer to Section 03 30 00. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members. 1. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after installing vibration isolation components. 3.5 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter-flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3" minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one-inch minimum into hub, 8" minimum clear on sides with 24"x 24"sheet size. 1. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead; 10" clear on sides with minimum 36"x 36"sheet size. 1. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor, shower, and mop sink drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. F. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14" minimum high above roof surface. 1. Flash and counter flash with sheet metal, seal watertight. 22 05 29- 3 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Attach counter flashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. 3. Flatten and solder joints. 3.6 SLEEVES A. For construction and execution, refer to Section 01 50 00, item 3.7. END OF SECTION 22 05 29- 4 of 4 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION for PLUMBING PIPING and EQUIPMENT PART1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Pipe Markers 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color-coding for plumbing identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. E. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and installation. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of section 01 77 00. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE MARKERS: A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. 2. Minimum information indicating direction of flow arrow and identification of fluid conveyed. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Provide flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 22 05 53- 1 of 1 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 05 93 TESTS —PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. B. The General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide labor, materials, and supervision necessary to perform all piping tests of systems: 1. Domestic Water Systems 2. Sanitary Systems B. Additional tests as specified in other sections. 1. Perform these tests in addition to those specified in this section. C. If a governing body requires tests over and above those specified herein, the Contractor shall perform the test and provide certification for approval by such governing body or agency. D. Perform additional tests as may be required by utility companies or agencies supplying the particular service such as city water, natural gas, medical gases, etc. E. Provide certified test reports for all systems. 1.3 EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide all devices, equipment, gases, etc., necessary conduct the required tests. 1. Do not use devices installed in the work for test purposes. B. Materials are subject to standard test by manufacturer before shipment. 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Make test during installation and after completion. 1. Tests are at expense of Contractor. B. Conduct and obtain approval of all piping concealed in building construction, chases, etc., prior to concealment. 1. Contractor failing to make such tests must assume all costs of removing and replacing defective piping and must pay all costs of cutting and repairing building construction made necessary by this neglect to end of guarantee period. C. Make tests prior to insulating piping or backfilling of underground work. 1. Make hydrostatic tests with cold water, the minimum duration shall be four hours. D. Test in presence of Owner's representative, who may direct Contractor to perform tests in presence of some other appointed witness. 1. The Architect, Owner's representative, and/or permitting agency shall witness all Contractor performed test without exception. 2. Contractor is responsible for correct testing, observation of results, and corrections as necessary. E. The Contractor shall make provisions for the thorough inspection of the installation and in no case hide any part of construction from the inspector. F. Do not apply test pressures to a hot valve. 1. In event, such testing is necessary, install temporary block ahead of valve. 2. Final test of connection against hot valve shall be by examination under service pressure. G. Disconnect and protect from damage any system device not designed for the test pressure. H. All parts of system under test must be under constant supervision with authority to bleed off excess pressure that may develop. 1. No tests shall remain on work unless continuously attended. 2. Use care so that excess pressure does not develop because of temperature changes. 22 05 93 - 1 of 1 Tests— Plumbing Piping Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 I. Work shall be completely leak free at any joint, fittings, accessory, or attachment. 1. If repairs are necessary, re-test work after correction. 2. Correct defects made manifest by these tests before proceeding with other work. 1.5 CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS A. For each system tested, provide a certificate testifying that the system was tested as specified and provide the following data: 1. Identification of system tested referencing specific equipment connected to system. 2. Date tested 3. Test pressure and duration of test 4. Recorded test pressure at end of test 5. Media used for testing 6. List necessary repairs made before the system passed the leak test 7. Signature of Contractor 8. Signature of witness 9. Other data as required by the system specification 1.6 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A. Perform a hydrostatic test at 125-psig minimum for minimum 4-hour duration. B. After test, blow clean with potable water; leave lines clean of all sediment and debris. C. Sterilize all lines with chlorine as specified. 1.7 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS A. Perform a hydrostatic test at 10 ft. head pressure minimum for minimum 4-hour duration. B. After test, blow clean with potable water; leave lines clean of all sediment and debris. C. Sterilize all lines with chlorine as specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Not Used END OF SECTION 22 05 93 - 2 of 2 Tests— Plumbing Piping Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART1GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209: Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate B. ASTM C534: Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form C. ASTM C547: Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation D. ASTM C553: Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation E. ASTM C921: Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation F. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 B. Product Data: For each product used in this project, provide catalog data for insulation,jackets and accessories, and installation instructions. C. Samples: Not required 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall meet a flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Applicator shall be a company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3-years experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Store insulation in original wrapping, and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID FIBER GLASS INSULATION A. Provide molded, heavy density, noncombustible; one-piece pipe insulation made from inorganic glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin with K-value shall be 0.24 at 75°F per ASTM C547. B. Provide factory installed all service jacket of white kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with glass fibers and self-sealing lap for longitudinal seam and butt strips for circumferential joints per ASTM C921. C. Provide 18-ga, Type 304 stainless steel tie wire with twisted ends on 24" centers but not less than two-tie wires per insulation section. D. For fittings and valves, provide one-piece, molded, 20-mil thick, PVC covers with fiberglass inserts. 1. Use pressure sensitive, color matching vinyl tape to seal PVC fitting covers to jacket of insulation per ASTM C921 22 07 19- 1 of 3 Plumbing Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.2 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION A. Provide flexible, closed-cell, slit tubing form, elastomeric pipe insulation. 1. For large diameter pipe, provide sheet form. 2. K-value shall be 0.27 at 75°F. 3. Use contact adhesive to seal longitudinal seams and circumferential joints per ASTM C534. B. For fittings and valves, fabricate insulation from mitered-cut tubular form using contact adhesive to seal joints. C. If necessary, provide two layers of insulation to obtain specified thickness, staggering the longitudinal and circumferential joints. 2.3 ALUMINUM JACKET A. For pipes, provide 16-mil thick, stucco embossed pattern finish, Type-1100 aluminum jacket, ASTM B209 and for horizontal pipe, locate longitudinal lap on bottom. B. For fittings, provide 24-mil thick, die shaped, smooth finish, Type-1100 aluminum jacket, ASTM B209. C. Provide 0.5"wide, 20-mil thick, Type-3003 aluminum bands on maximum 24" centers but not less than two bands per jacket section. 2.4 SHIELDS AND INSERTS A. At all pipe hangers or pipe supports, provide 12" long, 1800-arc, galvanized sheet metal shields matching the insulation outside dimension. B. For pipes larger than 2" diameter, provide 12" long, 1800-arc, cellular glass insulation inserts. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before applying insulation, verify the following: 1. The inspection, testing, and approval of piping are complete. 2. The surfaces are clean (all foreign material removed) and dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On exposed insulation provide jacket or finish, and locate longitudinal seams in least visible locations. 1. Where insulated piping extends to weather exposed areas, provide specified aluminum sheet metal jacket. C. Piping insulation or covering shall not penetrate fire-rated assembly unless the specific material has been tested an approved as part of the fire-rated assembly. D. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. E. For above grade applications, maintain 0.5" air space on all sides of the insulation. F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. G. Domestic Hot Water Pipe (Interior and Above Grade Applications): For hot water supply and return pipes, provide 1"thick, rigid fiberglass insulation. H. Domestic Cold Water Pipe: For cold water supply and return pipes, provide 1"thick, rigid fiberglass insulation. I. Condensate Pipe (Interior and Above Grade Applications): Provide 3/"thick, cellular foam insulation. 22 07 19- 2 of 3 Plumbing Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 END OF SECTION 22 07 19- 3 of 3 Plumbing Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work consists of all plumbing work indicated on drawings and specified herein. B. Included are requirements for fees/permits for installation and inspection of all plumbing work. C. Also see "Instructions to Bidders," "General Conditions," "Supplementary General-Conditions," "Special Conditions," and "General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work"which are hereby made part of this section and govern in the event there is a conflict with this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings B. Valves C. Sanitary sewer piping system D. Domestic water piping system E. Storm water piping system F. Natural gas piping system 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.3- Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 ns 300 B. ANSI/ASME B16.18—Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings C. ANSI/ASME B16.22—Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings D. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings- DWV E. ANSI/ASME B16.29- Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings- DWV F. ANSI/ASME Sec. 9 -Welding and Brazing Qualifications G. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal H. ANSI/ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fitting, Schedule 40 I. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless J. ASTM B88- Seamless Copper Water Tube K. ASTM B306- Copper Drainage Tube (DWV) L. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 M. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) N. ASTM D2683- Socket-Type Polyethylene Fillings for Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pile O. ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings P. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings Q. ASTM D3033 -Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings R. ASTM D3034-Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings S. ASTM F477- Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe T. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal U. AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water V. ASTM D635 - Flame Retardant 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME and applicable state labor regulations. C. Provide Welder Certification in accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec. 9. 1.5 SUBMITTALS 221000- 1 of 4 Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipefittings, valves, and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5-FEET OF BUILDING A. See section 22 05 00 part 2.1 f for additional material requirements. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 1. Fittings: PVC 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld 2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 1. Fittings: PVC 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld (Not allowed in plenums) 2.3 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5-FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: 1. ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn 2. Fittings: a. Soldered: ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper b. Pressed: ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, copper press fitting with EPDM O-ring 3. Joints: a. Soldered: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA b. Pressed: ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, copper press fitting with EPDM O-ring 2.4 WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn 1. Fittings: a. Soldered: ANSI/ASME B16.18 - bronze sand casting, ANSI/ASME B16.22 -wrought copper, ANSI/ASME B16.23 - cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 -wrought copper. b. Pressed: ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, copper press fitting with EPDM O-ring 2. Joints: a. Soldered: Grooved joints or ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA b. Pressed: ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, copper press fitting with EPDM O-ring 2.5 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2" and under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2": 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16"thick preformed neoprene bonded. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Ductile iron housing clamps to engage and lock, where required, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; 'C' shape pressure responsive synthetic rubber sealing gasket conforming to ANSI/NSF-61; steel bolts, nuts and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. 1. IPS Steel Piping: a. Rigid Type: Use coupling housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9 and NFPA 13. b. Flexible Type, use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. i) May use flexible couplings in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment connectors. 22 10 00- 2 of 4 Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 ii) Place couplings in close proximity to the vibration source. c. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. 2. Hard Copper Tube: Housings cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolts pads. a. Housings coated with copper colored alkyd enamel. b. Manufacture to copper tube dimensions with FlushSeal@ type gasket. D. Dielectric Connections: Union or waterway with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, steel or ductile iron grooved end, and water impervious isolation barrier. 2.6 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2": 1. Bronze body, stainless steel ball with Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle. 2. Valves in copper pipe use soldered joint ends or end compatible with piping system. B. Over 2": 1. Cast steel body; chrome plated steel ball, Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle. 2. Ductile iron body; chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, Teflon seat, lever handle. 2.7 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. B. Ductile iron body, stainless steel trim, spring-assisted, aluminum bronze, or elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc, grooved ends. 2.8 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem, and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends, and remove burrs. B. Remove all scale and dirt on inside and outside of pipe and connectors before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group the piping at a common elevation and location whenever practical. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. H. Arrange water piping to drain at low points. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover. 1. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. J. When welding pipe support members to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to weld. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. L. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. 22 10 00- 3 of 4 Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. N. Fire Sprinkler Piping: 1. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer, and the grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. Use gaskets molded and produced by the groove-coupling manufacturer. 3. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. 4. Grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. 5. Factory trained representative shall periodically inspect the product installation. 6. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. 7. Use pipe certified for use with the manufacturer's system. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Use an approved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations or as approved by engineer. B. Install unions or grooved joint couplings downstream of valves at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. D. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. E. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed, and clean. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet, or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50-to 80-mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15% of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24-hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25-mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water of 1.0-mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24-hours after flushing, from 5% of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AVVWA C601. END SECTION 22 10 00- 4 of 4 Plumbing Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 20 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART1GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work consists of all plumbing work indicated on drawings and specified herein. B. Also included are all fees and permits for installation and inspection of all plumbing work. C. Direct attention to "Instructions to Bidders", "General Conditions", "Supplementary General Conditions", "Special Conditions", and "General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical Work"which are hereby made part of this section and shall govern in the event there is a conflict with this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and floor drains B. Cleanouts C. Backflow preventers D. Water hammer arrestors E. Hose bibs hydrants F. Trap Primers G. Mixing valve H. Clothes washer hook-up I. Oil Water Separators 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASSE 1012- Backflow Preventors with Immediate Atmospheric Vent B. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers C. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventors, Reduced Pressure Principle D. ANSI Al 12.21.1 - Floor Drains E. ANSI Al 12.21.2 - Roof Drains F. ANSI Al 12.26.1 -Water Hammer Arrestors G. PDI WH-201 -Water Hammer Arrestors H. IBC- International Building Code 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Reduced pressure backflow preventers, size to service and provide two gate valves. 22 20 00- 1 of 1 Plumbing Specialties DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. SPC 606.5- ball valves 2" and smaller ball or gate 22 or larger. 2. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventors: a. ANSI/ASSE 1013 bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs. b. Two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure. c. Non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. d. The above based on the Series 900 as manufactured by Watts. B. Pipe drains to the exterior: Provide backflow device on all make up water lines for mechanical equipment. 2.2 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE A. Mixing valve rated at 8-10 GPM at 45-PSI differential pressure with check valve, volume control shutoff on outlet and strainer stop check on inlet. B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Leonard #TM-554-15 2. Powers 3. Symmons PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 1. Provide competent, factory-authorized personnel to provide instruction to FS personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. 2. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. 3. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements. B. Demonstration and Training shall be provided for the following equipment: 1. Double Check Backflow Preventors 2. Thermostatic Mixing Valves END OF SECTION 22 20 00- 2 of 2 Plumbing Specialties DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water heaters B. Packaged water heating systems C. Water storage tanks D. Water softeners E. Pumps F. Circulators 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE 90A- Energy Conservation in New Building Design B. ASME Section 8 D—ASME Boiler& Pressure Vessels Codes C. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code D. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code E. NFPA 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code G. UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters H. UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters I. IBC - International Building Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01 33 00—Submittals Procedures B. Product Data: 1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, and power requirements. 3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. a. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tapings, and performance data. 2. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tapings, and drains. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01 33 00—Submittals Procedures, procedures for submittals. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Section 01 77 00- Contract Closeout, procedures for submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22 30 00- 1 of 4 Plumbing Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA) 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI) 5. National Electrical Manufacturers'Association (NEMA) 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation; operate within 25% of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA, ANSI 2 21.22, NFPA 54, NFPA 70, UL 174, UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. B. Conform to ASME Section 8 D for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. C. Conform to ASME Section 8 D for tanks. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00- Material Equipment and approved equals: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Section 01 78 00 -Warranties. B. Provide 5-year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters, packaged water heating systems. 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Section 01 78 00- Operation and Maintenance Data. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. All manufacturers shall be a United States based company doing business in the U.S. for at least 10-years. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATER A. Type: Automatic electric fired vertical storage. B. Performance: 1. Minimum recovery rate per design documents with 100°F temperature rise. 2. Maximum working pressure is 150 psig. 22 30 00- 2 of 4 Plumbing Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with 1-inch thick glass fiber; encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. D. Controls: 1. An automatic water thermostat with adjustable temperature range from 120°to 170°F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls, electrical junction box, and operating light. 2. Wire double element units so elements do not operate simultaneously. E. Accessories: 1. Brass water connections, dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, thermometer, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. 2. ANSI rated vacuum relief valve if required, expansion tank if required. 3. Emergency drain pan. 2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Casing: Bronze rated for 125 psig working pressure with stainless steel rotor assembly. B. Impeller: Bronze C. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and 2-oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. D. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. E. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters and water softeners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. In addition, install water heaters to applicable AGA, ANSI, NFPA 54, UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting and electrical work to achieve operating system. C. Domestic Water Heater Exchangers: 1. Install domestic water heater exchangers with clearance for tube bundle removal without disturbing other installed equipment or piping. 2. Pipe relief valves and drains to nearest floor drain. D. Pump: 1. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. a. Support piping adjacent to pump such that the pump casings carry no weight. b. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4" and over. 2. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitations, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25% of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 1. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. B. Demonstration and Training shall be provided for the following equipment: 1. Domestic Hot Water Heaters 22 30 00- 3 of 4 Plumbing Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 END OF SECTION 22 30 00- 4 of 4 Plumbing Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART1GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. The General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide fixtures, trim, accessories, labor, and supervision necessary for the plumbing fixture installation. 1.3 FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. Fixtures, trim and accessories shall be of type and model numbers as scheduled on the drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts giving manufacturer's model numbers, fixtures and rough-in dimensions and construction material for each type of fixture, trim, and accessory scheduled. B. Submit to the construction manager cutout trim plates for sinks, installed in counter tops. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule on plumbing plans for fixtures' manufacturer and model number. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, then make water supply, waste and vent connections. B. Set fixtures in center of stalls, between partitions where required, verify dimensions for spacing. C. Setting shall be absolutely tight and rigid on proper ground. 1. Use Miracle Adhesive Corporation Tub-Caulk or approved equal pointing materials under all setting surfaces. 2. Grout water closets. D. Cover the fixtures with paper glued in place after they are set to prevent damage during the balance of construction. 1. At the conclusion of the work, remove the paper and properly clean the fixtures E. This section shall be responsible for the protection of the fixtures until acceptance by Owner. Replace damaged fixtures at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Floor mount all mop sinks in custodial closets or areas. G. Install lavatory carriers on all lavatories in toilet rooms, individually and group facilities. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 22 40 00- 1 of 1 Plumbing Fixtures DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 1. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. 2. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. 3. Refer to Section 22 05 05, Plumbing Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements. B. Demonstration and Training shall be provided for the following equipment: 1. Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers END OF SECTION 22 40 00- 2 of 2 Plumbing Fixtures DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 00 BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART1GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Requirements, and Division 1 of the Specifications, apply to all Sections of Division 23. B. Other Contract Documents complement the requirements and apply to the work of Division 23. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work of this Section shall include the furnishing of systems, equipment and materials specified in this Division, and as called for in the Mechanical Drawings. 1. All facilities, supervision, coordination, transportation, handling, labor and methods for the fabrication, installation, interconnections, painting and other finishes, start-up, tests, adjustments, clean-up and other necessary work for the complete and satisfactory systems and equipment, ready for operation and use, shall be included. 2. Whenever the words "Contractor" appear in this Division, they refer to the Contractor responsible for work specified in that Section. 3. The Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents including all drawings, all sections of the Specifications, HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Protection System Design Details, and shall be responsible for ascertaining to what extent all those documents, drawings, sections of specifications, design requirements, and system design details affect work herein specified. 4. Report all errors, omissions, conflicts or code violations to Architect and Owner prior to commencement of work. B. Drawings for the work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the work and indicate the general arrangement and locations of the work, follow as closely as actual construction and as other work permits. 1. Because of the scale of the drawings, not all basic items such as necessary duct and pipe offsets, pipefittings, access panels and sleeves may be on the plans. 2. Contract documents show design basis equipment. 3. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the Owner/Architect approved equipment of equal quality, capacity, performance, efficiency, weight, physical size, and configuration to fit in the space provided for the design basis equipment. 4. If the Contractor selects equipment other than the design basis, he is responsible for the necessary design modifications and for coordination with other trades to meet all intended requirements of the original design documents. 5. The location and the sizes of equipment, duct and pipefittings, access panels, sleeves, inserts, and other basic items required by code or other Sections shall be coordinated and included for the proper installation of the Work. C. The Contractor shall make any required changes from the Contract Documents to make this work conform to the building construction or the work of other trades at no additional cost to the Owner and shall not affect the project's time schedule. 1. The Contractor shall clearly indicate and list all changes from the Contract Documents on the shop drawings and submit them to the Architect, Engineer, and Owner for approval before commencing the work. 2. Failure to follow the approval procedure may result in the forced removal of all work, performed prior to approval. 3. Final "as built"documents shall include all changes. D. Equipment specification may not deal individually with the minor items required such as components, parts, controls, and devices that may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment design performance and warranties. 1. The equipment supplier shall include such required items whether or not specifically called for in the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall properly install them. 230500 - 1 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Contractor shall verify with the supplier of the equipment the requirements for the complete installation to insure proper operation of the equipment furnished under Division 25 of the Specifications. F. Contract Documents may call for Mechanical Contractor to install specific equipment furnished by others, including Owner purchased equipment. G. Consider the specifications and drawings as complimentary one to the other. 1. Where equipment items, material and labor are specified, indicated, called for or implied by either the drawings or the specifications, they shall be deemed as specified by both and included as part of the contract. 2. Should conflicts occur between the drawings and the Division 23 Specifications, the more stringent requirements shall apply and take precedent. 1.3 DEFINITION OF THE WORK A. DEFINITIONS 1. PIPING: As used in these documents, means pipe, fittings, valves, flanges, unions, specialties, accessories and appurtenances necessary for, or incidental to, a complete system. 2. DUCTWORK: As used in these documents, means all air delivery and recirculation and exhaust ducts whether of sheet metal or other material, and includes all connections, accessories and appurtenances necessary for and incidental to a complete system. 3. PROVIDE: As used in these documents, means to furnish and install. The words "furnish" "include" or"install' used in the Specifications or on the Drawings, means to deliver to the job site or to install and test complete and ready for operation systems and items mentioned. The word "install' shall also apply to equipment furnished by others, including Owner purchased equipment. Any item indicated either in the Specification or on the Drawings shall be included in the Work. 4. CONCEALED WORK: As used herein refers to piping, ductwork, and accessories above solid material ceilings and within walls, partitions, shafts, service spaces, under ground, or not normally exposed to view and enclosed on all sides by finish materials. Access to piping and ductwork would demolish finish materials. 5. CONCEALED BUT ACCESSIBLE: As used in these documents, refers to piping, ductwork, and accessories accessible above or through suspended ceilings, in walls at access panels or in chases with access doors. 6. EXPOSED WORK: Refers to ductwork, piping or equipment normally exposed to view within rooms or open area. Consider ductwork, piping, or equipment in mechanical or electrical equipment rooms as "Exposed Work", unless noted otherwise on the plans. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: All work shall be in compliance with, of all applicable Laws, Codes, Standards and Regulations of Governmental Bodies having jurisdiction overwork performed for or on behalf of the Owner within the legal boundaries locally governed. 1. The Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) provide final code interpretations and resolutions of conflicts. Additionally: a. The code that affords the greatest degree of life safety shall take precedent. b. Legislative Acts c. Governing Codes d. Standards Design Criteria e. Guides and References f. Specifications g. HVAC, plumbing and fire-protection details h. Commonly recognized construction methods and materials. B. Contractor shall request the A/E for clarification of any part of the contract documents, which may be in conflict with the above codes and regulations. 1. Contractor shall prepare proposed changes for review and approval by A/E and Owner. 23 05 00 -2 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.5 FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Contractor shall pay all fees, obtain required permits and coordinate inspections as are required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction over the site. 1.6 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Protect any existing active services: water, gas, sewer, and electric, against damage. B. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. C. If contractor encounters active services requiring temporary interruption or relocation, the contractor shall contact the authorities having jurisdiction for procedures and coordination of work with the utility service users. D. Where abandoning existing utility services terminate them in conformance with the Utility or Municipality having jurisdiction and shown the termination points on "as-built" construction plans. 1.7 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall carefully inspect the site to be familiar with conditions that affect the work. 1. Contractor shall verify points of connection of utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. 2. Contractor shall verify available space in the existing structure and accessibility required for the installation of work under this contract and inform the A/E to conditions, which may be detrimental or will prevent proper execution of the work. B. The submittal of a bid is an acknowledgement that the Contractor performed the site inspection and has no conflicts with performing the work. 1. If a conflict arises do to an observable condition the Contractor should have seen in the pre- bid site visit, the Owner and Owner's Representative is under no obligation to authorize any additional payments. C. Submittal of bid shall indicate that the Contractor has included all required allowances in the bid. 1. The Owner's Representative shall not make allowances for any code violations or errors resulting from Contractor's failure to visit job site and review all contract documents, applicable codes, and standards. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Method or procedures for submitting shop drawings and submittal data shall comply with the General Conditions. B. Prior to ordering equipment and material, the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the manufacturer's cut sheets to the Engineer for review and acceptance 1. Submittal data shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment. 2. Including dimensions, required service and maintenance clearances, wiring diagrams, performance curves, ratings, control sequence. 3. Layout plan showing the arrangement of the equipment with piping and ductwork, and other data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating characteristics. C. Other submittals shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Valves 2. Pipe insulation 3. Vibration isolation 4. Controls 5. Hydronic specialties 6. Thermometers and gauges 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS D. Contractor shall follow the contract drawings and specifications, unless submitted requests are approved by Owner's Representative. 23 05 00 - 3 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Owner's representative shall review the request and either approve or deny the in writing. E. All approval procedures regarding proposed substitutions as "approved equal" or"Engineer and Owner approved"shall meet the requirements of Section 01 60 00. 1.10 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. B. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Authority. C. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and closure of all issues; refer to Section 01 77 00- Contract Closeout, for substantial completion details. D. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for detailed commissioning requirements PART 2MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL A. Each system component installed by Contractor shall meet or exceed the performance specification requirements listed in the Contract Documents. 1. Components with a lesser degree of performance or quality as determined by the Owner, design A/E, or documented as inferior in the final Test and Balance Report are not acceptable, and Contractor shall replace with no additional charge to Owner. Replacements shall be scheduled as to not to disrupt ongoing activities. B. Materials and equipment shall be new, unused, standard current products from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall bear label of the Underwriters' Laboratory for the intent use or shall be materials approved by the code-enforcing agency. C. Facility Services pre-approved remanufactured equipment used for repair/replacement work in existing structures. D. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment or material are required, these shall be the product of a single manufacturer throughout entire project and shall fit in the allocated spaces provided, complying with all clearances and codes. E. All hardware and accessory fittings shall be a type designed, intended or appropriate for use, be compatible, and compliment the item with which they are used. 1. They shall have corrosion protection suitable for atmosphere they are installed. F. All materials including insulation,jackets, and adhesives shall have a Flame Spread Rating not exceeding 25, and Smoke Developed Rating not exceeding 50, when tested in accordance with NFPA 255, "Methods of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". 1. Submittal data shall specifically indicate those ratings. G. All equipment and piping supports shall be hot dipped galvanized except as otherwise noted in Contract Documents for specific corrosion protection. Do not install unprotected supports. 1. Hangers for copper pipe shall be vinyl coated. 2. Do not use copper clad hangers. H. Air conditioning system components shall conform to federal, state, and local sound emission and vibration isolation guidelines. 1. Objectionable noise or excessive vibration created in any part of the building by operation of any equipment under this contract is not permitted. Contractor shall take steps to remedy objectionable noise or excessive vibration. 2. Contractor shall attenuate noise, and isolate various items of equipment from the building structure and take all steps that may be necessary to eliminate objectionable noise or excessive vibration produced by Division 23 equipment. 3. If noise attenuation or vibration isolation measures do not produce, satisfactory results replace all components, which prove to be in violation at no additional cost to the Owner, to comply with codes and ordinances having jurisdiction at the job site. I. Follow installations directions and recommendations of material and equipment manufacturers. 23 05 00 -4 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 3EXECUTION 3.2 GENERAL A. The Mechanical Contractor must be licensed in good standing in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction. B. Licensed Contractors shall perform construction work. 1. The Contractor shall not work outside the scope of his license. 2. Any person who is not licensed must work under direct supervision of a person who has a license required by the state law and by the county or municipal licensing ordinances. 3. The job supervisor must experience of installing the tonnage of HVAC equipment specified in the contract documents. 4. The Owner's Representative may request the change of the job supervisor. 5. Workers skilled and competent in the type of work involved shall accomplish the installation. 6. Workmanship throughout shall correspond to the standards of the best trade practices. C. Work other than interior work shall commence as soon as the building has sufficiently advanced in construction layout. 1. No interior work shall be installed until the building roof is in place and watertight and the building is completed to a stage, that in opinion of the A/E, is acceptable and not detrimental to work to be installed. D. Contractor shall install all systems and equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, and equipment or material manufacturer recommendations and instructions. 1. Contractor shall commission, prepare, and adjust HVAC and other mechanical systems prior to Owner's independent test& balancing work. E. Work lines and established grades shall be in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall furnish to all trades, in ample time, any information they need to construct all equipment bases, trenches, pits, chases, and openings in floors, walls, and finishes to provide required working clearances. 2. The contractor shall set all sleeves, anchor bolts or inserts to fasten equipment before pouring of adjacent concrete. F. Coordinate location of all Division 23 work with other Divisions. 1. Do not run piping, ductwork and similar Division 23 work in NEC dedicated service areas for electrical equipment, including above panel boards, starters, communication panels, control panels, telephone backboards, data panels, and similar electrical elements. 2. Do not install water piping directly above electrical equipment. 3. In electrical rooms with required piping, provide drain pan(s) to protect the electrical equipment. 4. Refer questionable locations to the A/E for resolution prior to installation and correct non- conforming installed work at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Cap or plug all piping systems at the end of each workday until system is complete to prevent contamination. H. Provide a schematic wiring diagram for each component of HVAC system including controls. 1. Diagrams shall be located in mechanical rooms and mounted on wall at eye level. I. Provide a schematic duct diagram indicating room numbers and component locations. J. Locate the diagram for each air handler in mechanical room, mounted on wall at eye level. 3.3 COORDINATION OF WORK AND DRAWINGS A. Each contractor and subcontractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of his equipment/labor with the General Contractor and work of other Contractors and trades. 1. The contractor shall coordinate the work of different trades to prevent interference between piping, ductwork, equipment, and structural work. B. Recommend each contractor prepare their shop drawings at 1/4"to V-0"scale clearly indicating all applicable components and coordinate the same with other trades. 1. Recommend shop coordination drawings show in detail the space conditions of all concerned trades, and be reviewed and accepted by the A/E. 23 05 00 - 5 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Contractor's failure to coordinate work between trades using coordination shop drawings or other means will not cause for any additional cost changes to the Owner, and/or changes to the project schedule. 3. If the contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades or causes interference with work of other trades, the contractor shall make necessary changes in the work to correct the condition, at no additional cost to the Owner, and/or changes to the project schedule. 3.4 ACCESS PANELS A. Contractor shall provide required access panels or doors for all serviceable equipment in concealed locations whether or not called for on the drawings. Coordinate with other trades prior to installation to avoid interference issues. Coordinate with Architect for exact final location prior to installation. 3.5 ACCESS AND SERVICE SPACE A. Provide clearances, service space, and access to appliances and equipment in provided equipment spaces. Make allowances for maintenance and repair service. Do not install ancillary components in a manner which blocks service and/or maintenance access. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Coordinate the placing of openings in the existing or new structures as required for installation of the HVAC Work. B. Any additional patching and finish work required for unnecessary openings due to failure to inspect and coordinate work, is at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Any additional cutting and patching of the structure necessary due to failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to failure to furnish, on schedule, the information required for leaving of openings, is at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Provide cutting and patching, surface finishing and painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of work, and furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 1. Do not cut structural members without written prior approval of the A/E. 2. Minimize cutting by using core drills, power saws, or other machines that will provide neat, minimum openings. 3. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft. 3.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves are required for all piping passing through masonry or concrete partitions (walls, floors ceilings, roofs) and through concrete beams, foundations, and footings. 1. Position sleeves in formwork prior to placement of concrete. 2. Provide concrete reinforcing around sleeves. B. Sleeves for piping passing through non-load bearing or non-fire or smoke rated walls and partitions may be required if included in the design documents by the Engineer. 1. When required, sleeves shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: pipes 2'h" and smaller-24 gage; 3"to 6"- 22 gage; over 6" -20 gage. C. Sleeves for piping passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. D. Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulation and to allow free movement of pipe due to expansion and contraction. 1. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. 2. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter for pipe and waterproofing material. E. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, terminate sleeves flush with wall, partitions, and ceilings, and shall extend '/2" above finished floor level. 1. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water. 2. Caulk floor sleeves. 23 05 00 -6 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Flash sleeves passing through waterproofing membrane as required by Division 7. G. Protect pipe penetrations through fire-rated partitions (walls, floors, or ceilings) in per with NFPA. 1. Protected penetration shall retain the original integrity of the fire rated partition. 2. Unprotected penetrations through fire-rated partitions are not allowed. 3. All materials, products, and procedures used to complete the fire stopping assemblies must be tested, listed, and approved by testing laboratories such as U.L. or Factory Mutual and comply with requirements of ASTM-E-119. 4. Securely fasten sleeves to the partition that are part of the required approved fire stopping. 5. Close off annular spaces between sleeves and pipes, and between penetrating item and adjacent work with UL listed and approved fire stopping materials and caulk airtight. 6. Insulation and coverings shall not penetrate the fire-rated partition unless it is part of the approved U.L or Factory Mutual fire-stopping assembly. 7. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. H. Sleeves for round and rectangular ductwork shall be galvanized sheet steel. 1. Duct coverings shall not penetrate a wall or floor required to have fire-resistance rating or required to be fireblocked —refer to NFPA. 3.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons at each sleeve opening into finished spaces. B. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. C. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. D. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with setscrews or other approved devices. 3.9 PROTECTION A. Take special care for the protection of equipment and materials furnished. 1. Store and completely protect all materials from damage. 2. Keep materials and equipment clean and dry, free from deterioration by weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is completed. 3. Do not install damaged or defective materials. 4. Touch up any damage from rust, paint, etc., and scratched or marred finishes on equipment to match original finish or completely refinished to restore equipment to original condition. B. Provide protect of any previously finished area from mars or other damage when an installation or connection of equipment requires work in areas previously finished by other Contractors. 1. The Contractor shall provide drop cloths, or any other materials necessary to protect floors, walls, furniture, equipment, etc. from soil or damage. C. Contractor shall arrange with other Contractors for promptly repairing and refinishing any damage to the building or its contents incurred by the installation or testing of the systems installed at no charge to the Owner. D. Where insulated piping extends to exposed areas, or to weather exposed areas, provide finish or jacket as specified in section 23 07 19. E. Welding is permitted in the existing buildings as long as the contractor provides for an approved fire watch and other required safety measures. 1. Contractor's work, and construction means, methods, materials, and equipment used shall not compromise the building fire safety, as well as safety and welfare of coworkers and building occupants. 3.10 HVAC IDENTIFICATION A. Identification of HVAC systems shall be as specified in Section 23 05 53, HVAC Piping & Equipment Identification. 3.11 WIRING AND ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 00 - 7 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. All electrical work, equipment, and wiring shall comply with NEC. B. A standard wiring color code shall be established for each electrical and control component of the system and all similar devices shall be wired alike, maintaining the established color code throughout the entire project. C. The Mechanical Contractor, unless specified otherwise, shall furnish all Division 23 equipment, complete with motors and controls. 1. The Mechanical Contractor shall set the motors in place. 2. Some low power single-phase equipment may be furnished with unit mounted disconnects. D. Division 16 shall provide power services for motors and equipment furnished by Mechanical Contractor to include safety disconnect switches, (except unit mounted disconnects), motor starters, wiring and final connections. 1. For special requirements for starters and disconnects in kitchen and exterior locations refer to Division 26. 2. Provide the entire fire alarm system including interlock wiring required for air handling unit shutdown. Coordinate installation with Fire Alarm Contractor. E. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide internal wiring, equipment control wiring, interlock wiring (except fire alarm system) for equipment furnished and temperature control wiring. F. The Mechanical Contractor shall check all electrical service and control connections to ensure proper operation of equipment and systems installed under work in Division 23. G. Division 26 shall furnish motor starters for motors furnished by Mechanical Contractor, except where other sections specify the equipment supplier furnishes them (e.g. chillers). H. Mechanical Contractor shall furnish variable frequency drives (VFD) and set the same in place, ready for wiring under Division 26 requirements. 3.12 EXCAVATING TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Provide excavation necessary for water supply piping, underground chilled water piping, etc., and backfill such trenches and excavations after the installation, testing and approval of work. 1. Take care in excavating, that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. 2. Where a line must pass under footing, make the crossing by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. 3. Keep excavation free from water by pumping if necessary. 4. Do not open any greater length of trench, in advance of pipe or utility installation, than that authorized. B. Make trenches true to grade by means of substantial and accurately set batter-boards. C. Immediately after testing and/or inspection, carefully backfill the trench with earth free from clods, brick, etc., to a depth one-half the pipe diameter and then firmly puddle and tamp in such a manner as not to disturb the alignment or joints of the pipe. 1. Thereafter, puddle and tamp the every vertical foot. D. The Contractor shall coordinate exact location, depth, and scope of underground piping, electrical conduits, and similar utilities. 1. Routing shown on drawings is schematic coordinate actual routing with field conditions, grades, and work of other trades, then document in "as-built"drawings. 3.13 CONCRETE WORK A. Provide concrete bases and housekeeping pads for HVAC equipment unless noted otherwise, on typically larger pads, that the general contractor is responsible. B. Provide equipment anchor bolts and coordinate their proper installation and accurate location. 3.14 ANCHORING EQUIPMENT A. All equipment designed permanent mounting, anchor to its supporting surface in compliance Authority Having Jurisdiction Requirements. Provide documentation indicating conformance. 23 05 00 - 8 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.15 CORROSION A. Make provisions to prevent corrosion due to contact of metallic pipe and equipment with moisture or dissimilar materials. B. When joining a pipe with another pipe, valve, fitting, or piece of equipment constructed of dissimilar metal install an insulated joint to prevent formation of galvanic couple. C. Pipe hangers and supports of dissimilar metal shall be isolated from contact with pipe. D. Metal pipe and equipment shall be isolated from direct contact with concrete or other corrosive materials and soils. 3.16 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Paint all exposed metal surfaces, unless specified otherwise. 1. HVAC equipment shall have factory finish as specified; any damage to that finish shall be field primed and painted to match existing. 2. Clean and prime all ferrous metal equipment and supports, not factory finished, with a suitable primer and given two finish coats of exterior enamel. B. Prime all exposed galvanized metal, including ducts, with galvanized metal primer and paint with enamel paint to match surrounding area. C. Clean and prime all other unpainted ferrous metal including all pipe sleeves or equipment supports with metal primer suitable to the metal, and finish with two coats, one flat and one enamel. D. Clean, prime, and paint all equipment and piping, after installing the insulation with one color semi- gloss coat and with one-color enamel paint, as selected by owner. 3.17 TESTS A. Test all materials, equipment, and systems that require testing by these specifications or by any applicable regulation or code, in the presence of owner or authority having jurisdiction. 1. Test all items requiring pressure or leakage tests before concealing from view. 2. Rectify all defects disclosed by tests and the repeat the tests. a. Continue process until installation passes all required test. 3. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment used in tests. B. Contractors'tests shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with the commissioning requirements. 1. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further details. C. Contract the services of a qualified third party testing agency or manufacturer's representative to perform the specified electrical tests and commissioning required testing. 1. The testing agency or manufacturer's representative shall provide all test calibrated test equipment. 3.18 COMPLETION OF WORK A. Prior to acceptance of the installation and final payment of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide and complete the following: B. CLEANING: as required by Special Conditions applicable to this Division of the work. 1. At the conclusion of the construction, the site and structure shall be cleaned thoroughly of all debris and unused materials remaining from the mechanical construction. a. Clean all areas and temporary storage spaces of all packing boxes, wood frame members and other waste materials used in the mechanical construction. 2. Clean the entire piping system and equipment internally. a. The Contractor shall open all dirt pockets and strainers, completely blowing down as required and clean strainer screens of all accumulated debris. b. Clean the strainers in the presence of the Test and Balance firm. 3. Drain all tanks fixtures and pumps and prove free of sludge and accumulated matter. 4. Remove all temporary labels, stickers, etc. from all fixtures and equipment. 23 05 00 - 9 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. (Do not remove permanent nameplates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc.). 5. Thoroughly clean heating and air conditioning equipment, tanks, pumps, traps, etc., and install new filters or filter media. C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Refer to Section 23 05 05—HVAC Commissioning for Operations and Maintenance Data requirements. D. AS-BUILT PRINTS 1. Requirements and methods of preparing and procedure for submitting project record as-built prints shall be in accordance with Division 1. 2. Contractor shall keep day-to-day records of all changes, and upon completion of the work, incorporate these changes on the clean copies of the original ACAD drawings. a. Provide 5-copies of as-built ACADs to the Owner at the date of substantial completion. b. One of the five-sets shall be on 11"x 17" paper. 3. The drawings shall show: a. All of the equipment and piping (including underground) b. Ductwork with dimensions and reference points c. All other concealed non-accessible work; i) Branching arrangement and valve location for piping systems ii) Locations of dampers and heaters in duct systems iii) Locations of control system sensors and other control devices iv) Work of change orders not shown on contract documents. E. WARRANTY 1. The warranty for all mechanical equipment (whether manufacturer's or contractor's warranty) shall comply with Section 01 77 00 in the General Conditions. 2. All equipment and systems, unless specified otherwise, shall have a manufacturer's warranty for a period of 1-year from the date of substantial completion. a. This warranty shall be against defective materials, design, and workmanship. 3. The mechanical contractor shall repair or replace any component of the Division 23 work under warranty, which proves to be defective, at no cost to the Owner. 4. The Contractor upon receipt of notice from the Owner of a failure during the warranty period shall respond the same day and complete warranty service work in a timely manner. 5. During warranty period, document all responses to warranty calls made by the Contractor by leaving a copy of the mechanics service ticket with the Owner's Representative upon completion of the warranty work, prior to leaving the site. a. Without proper documentation, the Owner will not acknowledge repairs are complete. 6. Required optional extended manufacturer or vendor warranties for specific items, their performance, or expected durability will be explicitly included in Division 23 Specifications. a. Manufacturer or vendor shall repair or replace any defective component under extended warranty at no cost to the Owner. 3.19 SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. System Functional Performance Testing is part of the Commissioning Process. B. The Contractor shall perform all Functional Performance Testing and the Commissioning Authority shall witness and document the testing. C. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for functional performance tests and commissioning requirements. 3.20 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 23 05 00- 10 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Provide competent, factory-authorized personnel to provide instruction to Owner's personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. C. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. D. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements. END OF SECTION 23 05 00- 11 of 11 Basic HVAC Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 05 STARTING AND COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Starting and Commissioning of HVAC Systems. B. Demonstration and Instructions. C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. All Divisions of Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STARTING AND COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS: A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Owner's representative seven (7) days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions that may cause damage. D. Do not start-up or operate HVAC systems until construction of building envelope is complete and system components will not be subjected to damage from dirt, dust, construction debris, and weather. E. Provide temporary caps on ductwork and piping to prevent entry of debris. Where adequate protection is not provided, all systems shall be cleaned or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner. F. Clear dirt, dust, and grout from equipment on exterior of casings, interior surfaces, heat exchangers, heating and cooling coils, burners, and the like, and interior surfaces of ductwork prior to acceptance by Owner. G. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. H. Adjust electrical amp draw on motors to within 80% of rated amp draw. I. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. 23 05 05 - 1 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 J. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. K. Activate and operate all HVAC equipment and systems and verify that the system is functioning properly in all modes and sequences of operation. When verification is complete, demonstrate all modes and sequences to Owner's representative. L. When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. M. Adjust return air to 500 fpm at each air unit inlet. N. Replace drive packages as necessary to achieve design air flows. O. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. Provide a copy of the report in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS OF HVAC SYSTEMS: A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of HVAC equipment and systems to Owner's personnel two (2) weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Demonstrate project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six(6) months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operation and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. G. Record training sessions and provide copy to Owner. 3.3 HVAC -DEHUMIDIFICATION OF BUILDING: A. Start-up of HVAC cooling systems shall be accomplished in such a manner as to cool and dehumidify the space without the formation of condensation on building surfaces and elements, furniture, equipment, or appurtenances. Precautions should be taken by the contractor not to allow excessive humidity to develop in the building prior to final connection and activation of the HVAC system. Should it become necessary, the contractor shall procure the required equipment to properly dry and dehumidify the space so as not to force the HVAC to perform beyond its intended ability. Should damage 23 05 05 -2 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 occur due to start-up procedures, contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with repair or replacement of damaged elements. 3.4 HVAC TESTING,ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING: A. Mechanical Division will provide the services to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing of system. Provide data to Owner in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Reports will be submitted by the testing agency to the Owner's representative indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.5 STARTUP OF HVAC SYSTEMS: A. Upon completion of the HVAC installation, contractor shall test, balance, adjust, and operate all individual components of the HVAC system. Demonstrate that the installation is functioning in all modes of operation as a complete and integrated HVAC system and is performing in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's personnel shall be trained in the operation and maintenance of the system. All operating schedules, parameters, and set-points shall be entered into the acceptable document form. 1. Provide startup data to the Owner in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. PART 4 COMMISSIONING 4.1 COMMISSIONING SITE OBSERVATIONS A. The Commissioning Authority will make periodic site observation visits to review construction activities, focusing on the following: 1. General conformance with construction documents 2. General conformance with Project guidelines and industry standards 3. Equipment access for maintenance and operations 4. Safety provisions for operations and maintenance personnel 5. Other items of interest to the Owner B. The Commissioning Authority will prepare and issue a Field Report outlining the general and specific observations made during the visit. 1. The Field Report distribute is to the Owner's Project Manager, Architect, Design Engineers, and the Construction Manager. 2. They will have the opportunity to review and comment on the issues noted during the site visits. C. The Owner, Architect, or Design Engineer shall direct the Construction Manger to take corrective action to resolve issues noted on the Field Reports. 1. The directive will be as a Change Order, ASI, or other applicable format as outlined in other Division 1 specification. D. The Commissioning Authority shall enter any issues observed during the site visits on a Master Issues Log, which also tracks resolution of the issues. 4.2 CONTRACTOR'S TESTS A. Subcontractor/Installers shall forward to the Commissioning Authority through the General Contractor's Commissioning Coordination Supervisor a list and schedule of specified contractor tests. B. Unless specified otherwise, provide a minimum one-week notice to the Commissioning Authority for specified Contractor's tests. 23 05 05 - 3 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Submit Contractors'test reports to the Commissioning Authority and Owner's Representative within one week of the successful completion of each test. 4.3 SYSTEM READINESS CHECKLISTS A. Prior to the scheduled start of verification testing, check out systems to confirm readiness for testing. B. In addition to verifying proper installation of all equipment and associated hardware, perform and document sensor calibration or provide documentation verifying manufacturer's performance of calibration one week prior to verification testing. 1. A sensor is any device that measures a system parameter for control purposes or for monitoring the system performance. 2. The Commissioning Authority may observe sensor calibration procedures. C. Submit System Readiness Checklists to the Commissioning Authority within 1-week of completing the checklist. 1. Do not start system verification testing until documentation indicates the system is ready for testing. 4.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Sample functional performance test procedures establishing the level of detail and acceptance criteria are included at the end of this specification. B. Commissioning Authority will provide input into the master scheduling process as to the timing and duration of the functional performance test procedures. 1. The master scheduling process will include the designation of contractor personnel required to perform the functional performance test procedures. C. Construction Manager, Contractors/Installers, and Specialty Contractors shall review and comment on the final detailed functional performance test procedures developed by the Commissioning Authority based on the system shop drawings and submittals. 1. Provide feedback as to the efficiency of the procedures and possible alternate approaches to achieving the same results. D. Construction Manager, Contractors/Installers, and Specialty Contractors shall provide personnel and equipment as required to perform the functional performance test procedures under the direction of the Commissioning Authority. 4.5 CORRECTIVE ACTIONS A. Construction Manager, Contractors/Installers, and Specialty Contractors shall perform corrective actions for resolution of deficiencies found during: 1. Contractor testing 2. Test and balance 3. System checkout 4. Verification testing B. A deficiency is equipment that does not function as expected and more than 5-minutes is required to correct the problem. C. Construction Manager, Contractors/Installers, and/or Specialty Contractors are responsible for functional performance retesting of items requiring corrective action as described in Section 3.6 Verification Tests. 1. Provide staff, time, and equipment necessary to execute the section of the Verification Test Procedure that includes the deficiency. 2. The Owner may elect to recover the additional costs for the Commissioning Authority to observe and direct retesting. 3. The Owner shall determine the amount and method of recovering these additional costs. 23 05 05 -4 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. The Commissioning Authority shall identify deficiencies and provide documentation and management of the deficiencies by a Corrective Action Report (sample attached), or other mutually agreed upon format. 1. The Construction Manager will have the Corrective Action Report within one working day of discovery. 2. The Construction Manager, Contractors/Installers, and/or Specialty Contractors are responsible for documenting actions taken to correct the deficiency. 3. Deficiency Identification Process (by Commissioning Authority): a. Date b. Description of deficiency c. Enter deficiency into Master Corrective Action Log d. Give original form to General Contractor Commissioning Coordination Supervisor e. Distribute copies to: i) Construction Manager ii) Owner's Project Manager iii) Design Engineers 4. Corrective Action Direction (by General Contractor) a. Obtain the original form b. Date of direction c. Description of corrective action required d. Name of person issuing the direction e. Give the original form to the subcontractor/installer who will perform the corrective action. f. Distribute copies to: i) Owner's Project Manager ii) Design Engineers iii) Commissioning Authority 5. Subcontractor/Installer Corrective Action Completed (by Contractor/Subcontractor/Installer or Specialty Contractor) a. Obtain the original form b. Date of correction c. Description of final equipment status or corrective action performed d. Name of person performing the work e. Subcontractor submit the original form to the General Contractor's Commissioning Supervisor f. General Contractor to approve and submit original form to Commissioning Authority g. Distribute copies to: i) Owner's Project Manager ii) Design Engineers iii) Commissioning Authority 6. Verification of Corrective Action Completion (by Commissioning Authority) a. Date of retest b. Status description; resolved or more work required c. Name(s) of person(s) performing verification d. Enter resolution into Master Corrective Action Log e. Distribute copies to: i) Owner's Project Manager ii) Design Engineers iii) Construction Manager E. During construction or testing, anyone finding deficiencies may document the deficiencies on an attached Corrective Action Report (CAR)within one working day of discovery. 1. Forward these deficiencies to the Commissioning Authority. 23 05 05 - 5 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4.6 ATTACHEMENTS -COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION A. Corrective Action Report Form B. Operation and Maintenance Training Plan form C. Commissioning Document Requirements Table D. Commissioning Site Observation form END OF SECTION (Attachments follow) 23 05 05 -6 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 CORRECTIVE ACTION REPORT (CAR) CAR#X-XXX Deficiency noted during which evolution: Contractor testing, test and balance, system checkout, verification testing, other: System/Equipment Identification: Description of deficiency: Name: Company: Date: Attach additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Send original to the CM Cx Supervisor and a copy to: Owner's Project Manager, and Design Engineers Corrective Action Direction (by General Contractor): Name: I Company: Date: Attach additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Send original to the Subcontractor and a copy to: Owner's Project Manager, Design Engineers and Commissioning Authority Corrective Action Completed Satisfactorily(by subcontractor) ❑Yes ❑ No Comments on final equipment status or performance of corrective action: Name: I Company: Date: Attach additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Send original to CM Cx Supervisor for submittal to the Commissioning Authority, Owner's Project Manager, and Design Engineers Verification of Corrective Action Completion (by Commissioning Authority) ❑Yes ❑ No Comments: Name: Company: Date: Attach additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Send copies to the CM, Owner's Project Manager, and Design Engineers 01810-7 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING PLAN System/Equipment Identification: Training Plan (by contractor) -attach a detailed training agenda Training to be conducted by: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Time Required: Attach additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Send original to the Owner's Project Manager for approval Agenda Approval (by Owner's Project Manager) Approved? ❑ Yes ❑ No Comments: Name: Company: Date: Attached additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Attendees (Owner's operations & maintenance staff) Name/Affiliation: Name/Affiliation: Acceptance of the Training The training has satisfactorily provided the Owner's personnel with the knowledge to operate and maintain the equipment discussed during the training session? Project Manager ❑Yes ❑ No Name: Date: O&M Representative ❑Yes ❑ No Name: Date: If No, briefly describe the additional training required: Attach additional pages if necessary, number of attached pages: Send original to the Owner's Project Manager and copies to the Commissioning Authority 01810-8 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS TABLE (Submit all items to the Commissioning Authority) DOCUMENTATION SUBMIT BY: SUBMIT WHEN: General Contractor Construction Manager Within 2 weeks of contract award commissioning coordination Supervisor Subcontractor commissioning Responsible Within 2 weeks of contract award coordination Supervisors Subcontractor Project submittal list (List of all Construction Manager Within 2 weeks of contract award required submittals for the job) Training Documentation Plan Construction Manager Within 8 weeks of contract award (video recording plan) Submittals Construction Manager Submit copies to Commissioning Authority at same time they are submitted to the Design Engineers Project construction Construction Manager Immediately upon issuing documentation: meeting minutes, CCDs, ASI's, RFI's, CO's, etc. Training Plans Responsible Within 4 weeks of submittal acceptance Subcontractor Operation and maintenance Construction Manager Within 4 weeks of submittal acceptance manuals Equipment startup report Responsible Submit with Systems Readiness Checklist Subcontractor Contractors'test reports Responsible Within 1 week of test completion Subcontractor Verification test schedule Construction Manager Within 4 weeks of the start of verification testing Sensor calibration Building Automation Within 1 week of the start of verification documentation Specialty Contractor testing Complete test and balance T.A.B. Specialty Within 1 week of completion of work and report Contractor prior to HVAC verification testing System Readiness Checklist Responsible Within 1 week of check out completion and Subcontractor prior to verification testing 01810-9 of 20 HVAC Commissioning DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS: COMMISSIONING SITE OBSERVATION#XX Report Date: PROJECT: Project Name— XX-XX-XX Project No: Date of Observations: XX-XX-XX Project Name Prepared By: Project Address Quality Control Check: Project Architect Name Project Engineer Present at Site: Name (Facilities Services) Copies To: Construction Manager's PM Project File SPECIFIC OBSERVATIONS: IHC-XX-XX 1.1 Item Classification Reference Drawing: Reference Specification: Non-Compliant with Drawings/Specifications Non-Comphant with Industry Standards Negative Impact on Operations/Maintenance Issue Impact Resolution Accepted By: Resolved By: Reviewed By: Date: Date: Date: [Owner] [Contractor/Installer] [CxA] 23 05 05- 1 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 APPENDIX A The Contractor shall designate team members to participate in the pre-commissioning checks and the functional performance testing specified herein. In addition, the Owner will be represented by a representative as noted below. The team members shall be as follows: Designation Function Q Contractor's Chief Quality Control Representative M Contractor's Mechanical Representative E Contractor's Electrical Representative T Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Representative C Contractor's Controls Representative O Owner's Representative (PM, FS, BD, ECO) U Architect/Engineer's Representative Appendices A and B are provided as a general checklist and have been prepared to best match the various equipment selected during the design of this project. Each checklist shown in Appendices A and B shall be reviewed and modified as necessary to reflect equipment actually installed during construction of the project. The commissioning team shall review the accuracy and applicability of each item in the checklist and revise as needed. Equipment shown in the checklist but not installed for the project shall be annotated as "NA". Likewise, equipment installed but not listed in the checklist shall be added or revised accordingly. A note as to why it was added or revised shall be inserted with the reviewer's initial. The commissioning team shall also add or modify to any of the equipment checklist items as required and/or specified by the equipment manufacturer. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each pre-commissioning checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date, unless an "X" is shown indicating that participation by that individual is not required. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each functional performance test checklist shall be indicated by signature and date. PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKLISTS Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Checklist Item Q M E T C O U a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. __ X X X b. Piping system cleaned. __ X X X c. Water balance complete. _ X X _ X d. Water balance with design maximum flow. _ X X _ X e. TAB Report submitted. _ X X _ X 23 05 05- 2 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Pre-commissioning Checklist- Single Zone DX Air Handling Unit For Air Handling Units: Checklist Item Q M E T C O U Installation a. Vibration isolation devices installed. X X X b. Inspection and access doors are operable and sealed. __ X _ X c. Casing undamaged. __ X X X _ d. Insulation undamaged. X X X _ e. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. __ X X X _ f. Fan drive/belt adjusted. __ X _ X g. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. __ X X X _ h. Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided. __ X X X _ Electrical a. Power available to unit disconnect. X X X b. Power available to unit control panel. _ X _ X __ c. Proper motor rotation verified. _ X X _ X _ d. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. _ X _ X X _ Coils a. Piping properly connected. __ X _ X b. Piping pressure tested. __ X X X h. Any damage to coil fins has been repaired. __ X X X Controls a. Control valves/actuators properly installed. X X X b. Control valves/actuators operable. _ X X X c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. _ X X ___ 23 05 05- 3 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 d. Dampers/actuators operable. _ X X e. Verify proper location and installation of zone sensor. _ X X X Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) a. Construction filters removed and replaced. _ X X _ X b. TAB results within limits specified X X X c. TAB Report submitted. _ X X _ X Pre-commissioning Checklist- DX Air Cooled Condensing Unit Checklist Item Q M E T C O U a. Check condenser fans for proper rotation. __X_X Electrical a. Power available to unit disconnect. X X X b. Power available to unit control panel. _X_X c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls _X_X Controls Checklist Item Q M E T C O U a. Unit safety/protection devices tested. __X X b. Control system and interlocks installed. __X X c. Control system and interlocks operational. __X X 23 05 05- 4 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Pre-commissioning Checklist- Ductwork Checklist Item Q M E T C O U Installation a. Ductwork complete. __ X X X b. As-built shop drawings submitted. __ X X X c. Ductwork leak test complete. __ X X X d. Ductwork insulated as required. __ X X X e. Thermometers and gauges installed as required. __ X X X f. Verify open/closed status of dampers. __ X X X g. Flexible connectors installed as specified __ X X X Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) a. TAB operation complete. _ X X _ X Pre-commissioning Checklist- Controls Checklist Item Q M E T C O U a. Control valves/actuators properly installed. X X X b. Control valves/actuators operable. _ X X c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. _ X X d. Dampers/actuators operable. _ X X e. Verify proper location, installation and calibration of duct static pressure sensor. _ X X f. Fan air volume controller operable. _ X X g. Air handler controls system operational. _ X X Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) a. Construction filters removed and replaced. _ X X _ X b. b. TAB report submitted. _ X X _ X 23 05 05- 5 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 c. TAB results within limits specified _ X X _ X d. TAB results for outside air intake within limits specified. _ X X _ X Pre-commissioning Checklist- Exhaust Fan Checklist Item Q M E T C O U Installation a. Fan drive/belt adjusted. _ X X _ X Electrical a. Power available to fan disconnect. X X X b. Proper motor rotation verified. _ X X — X c. Verify that power disconnect is located within sight of the unit it controls. _ X — x X Controls a. Control interlocks properly installed. _ X _ X b. Control interlocks operable. _ X _ X c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. _ X X — X d. Dampers/actuators operable. _ X X X e. Verify proper location and installation of zone sensor. _ X X X Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) a. TAB results within limits specified in X X X b. TAB Report submitted. _ X X _ X 23 05 05- 6 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Pre-commissioning Checklist- HVAC System Controls For HVAC System: Checklist Item Q M E T C O U Installation a. As-built shop drawings submitted. _ X X X b. Layout of Thermostats matches drawings. _ X X X c. Owner given instructions on Tstat usage. _ X X X d. Components properly labeled. _ X X X e. Owner provided training _ X X X f. Control wiring labeled at all terminations, splices, and junctions. _ X X X g. Shielded wiring used on electronic sensors. _ X X X Main Power a. Power available to Thermostat. X X X Testing, Adjusting and Balancing a. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report submitted. _ X X _ X 23 05 05- 7 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 APPENDIX B FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS Functional Performance Test Checklist-Air Handling Unit For Air Handling Unit: 1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air handling unit as per specification including the following: a. The following shall be verified when the supply fan operating mode is initiated: (1) All dampers in normal position. (2) All valves in normal position. (3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. b. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized. (1) Outside air damper at minimum position. (2) Return air damper open. (3) Relief air damper at minimum position. (4) Cooling mode: (a) Expansion valves modulating to maintain cooling mode supply air temperature setpoint. (5) Heating Mode: a. Staging control modulating to maintain heating mode supply air temperature setpoint. c. Unoccupied mode of operation (1)All dampers in normal position. (2) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as specified in sequence of operation. d. The following shall be verified when the supply fan off mode is initiated: 23 05 05- 8 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 (1)All dampers in normal position. (2)All valves in normal position. (3) Fan de-energizes. e. Verify cooling coil and heating coil operation by varying control settings from cooling mode to heating mode and returning to cooling mode. f. Verify safety shut down initiated by smoke detectors. g. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection thermostat. 2. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications. Signature and Date Contractor's Chief Quality Control Representative Owner's Representative Architect/Engineer's Representative 23 05 05- 9 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 For Condensing Unit: 1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of refrigeration system as per specifications including the following: Start building air handler to provide load for condensing unit. Activate controls system start sequence as follows. a. Start air handling unit. Verify control system energizes condensing unit start sequence. b. Verify and record data in 2 and 3 below. c. Shut off air handling equipment to verify condensing unit de-energizes. d. Restart air handling equipment one minute after condensing unit shut down. Verify condensing unit restart sequence. 2. Verify condensing unit amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase to ground. Motor Full-Load Amps Amperage Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Voltage Ph1-Ph2 Ph1-Ph3 Ph2-Ph3 Voltage Ph1-gnd Ph2-gnd Ph3-gnd 1 Record the following information: Ambient dry bulb temperature degrees F, Suction pressure psig, Discharge pressure psig 2 Unusual vibration, noise, etc. 3 Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications. Signature and Date Contractor's Commissioning Specialist Contractor's Mechanical Representative Contractor's Electrical Representative Contractor's TAB Representative Contractor's Controls Representative Owner's Representative Arch itect/Engineer's Representative 23 05 05 - 10 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Functional Performance Test Checklist- HVAC Controls For HVAC System: The Architect/Engineer shall select HVAC control systems to undergo functional performance testing. The number of systems shall not exceed 2. 1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of HVAC controls by performing the following tests: a. Verify that controller is maintaining the set point by manually measuring the controlled variable with a thermometer, sling psychrometer, inclined manometer, etc. C. Verify sensor/controller combination by manually measuring the controlled medium c. Verify system stability by changing the controller set point as follows: (1) Air temperature - 10 degrees F The control system shall be observed for 10 minutes after the change in set point. Instability or excessive hunting will be unacceptable. d. Verify interlock with other HVAC controls. e. Verify interlock with fire alarm control panel. f. Verify interlock with EMCS. g. Change controller set point 10 percent with EMCS and verify correct response. 2. Verify that operation of control system conforms to that specified in the sequence of operation. 3. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications. Signature and Date Contractor's Chief Quality Control Representative Owner's Representative Architect/Engineer's Representative END OF SECTION 23 05 05 - 11 of 20 Starting of HVAC Systems DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 10 MINOR HVAC DEMOLITION PART1GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section. B. The General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the following: 1. Remove mechanical services, and associated items as indicated on drawings. 2. Provide protection for adjacent existing areas before, during, and following removal operations. 3. Leave interior clean, ready for further construction. B. Owner removed items: 1. The Owner will remove all movable items plus certain fixed items identified by the drawings as Owner removed. C. Owner Salvaged Items: 1. The drawings identify items removed by Contractor and Owner Salvaged. 2. Owner has salvage rights to Contractor Removed/Owner Salvaged items. 3. Take care not to damage Owner Salvaged items removed by Contractor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative with documentation that they comply with the EPA requirements for handling and disposing of hazardous materials, such as refrigerants. PART 2MATERIALS 2.1 REMOVED ITEMS A. Remove from site all items,walls, structural, mechanical, electrical, and finish materials other than Owner salvage or retained items within the remodeled areas as indicated. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL WORK A. Disconnect all service piping necessary to the completion of removal operations. 1. Cap abandoned service lines not extended or reused with materials compatible with existing piping. 2. Re-route existing services required to remain. 3. Remove from site mechanical equipment from remodeled areas not specifically noted on drawings to be Owner salvaged. B. Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of his demolition schedule. END OF SECTION DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS and SUPPORTS for HVAC PIPING PART1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports B. Equipment bases and supports C. Sleeves and seals D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping B. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping C. ASME B31.5- Refrigeration Piping D. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers E. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design and Manufacture F. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports- Selection and Application G. MSS SP89- Pipe Hangers and Supports- Fabrication and Installation Practices H. IMC - International Mechanical Code 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. E. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing and hydronic piping. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, and MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 1'h": Use galvanized steel adjustable swivel split ring. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Use steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 1'h": Use cast iron hook. 5. Vertical Support: Use steel riser clamp. 6. Floor Support: Use galvanized adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, concrete pier, or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Use hot dipped, galvanized carbon steel ring, adjustable. a. Provide dielectric connection support material for hangers. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 23 05 29- 1 of 3 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.3 INSERTS A. Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms, size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.4 FLASHING A. Metal flashing: 26-gage galvanized steel. B. Metal Counter-flashing: 22-gage galvanized steel. C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5-Ib/sq ft sheet lead 2. Soundproofing: 1-Ib/sq ft sheet lead D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick butyl sheet; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel 22-gage minimum, 16-gage at fire resistant elements 2.5 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Factory prefabricated welded aluminum or stainless roof curbs, shell, and base, mitered 3" cant, variable step to match roof profile: 1. Openings less than 50"x 50" use 0.065 aluminum sheets, or 18 gauge stainless steel. 2. Openings 50"x 50" or greater use 0.080 aluminum sheets, or 16 gauge stainless steel. B. Curb shall be secured to roof joists and decking with watertight flashing and completely sealed with roof membrane. 2.6 SLEEVES A. For materials, refer to Section 23 05 00, Item 3.7. Steel sleeves shall be galvanized. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4". D. Where concrete slabs form-finished ceiling, locate inserts to be flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below, and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. 3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal and vertical piping in accordance with IPC. B. Install hangers to provide minimum 2"space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place pipe hanger within 12" of each turn or elbow. D. Use hangers with 1'/2" minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support vertical piping at every floor. 1. Support vertical copper pipe at each floor at hub. 23 05 29- 2 of 3 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. G. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. H. Provide vinyl coated carbon steel hangers and supports. 1. Do not use copper plated or copper clad hangers. 2. Avoid contact of dissimilar metals. I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. 3.4 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4"thick and extending 6" beyond supported equipment. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members. 1. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after installing vibration isolation components. 3.5 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter-flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors and roofs. B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control. C. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14" minimum high above roof surface. 1. Flash and counter flash with sheet metal, seal watertight. 2. Attach counter flashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. 3. Flatten and solderjoints. 3.6 SLEEVES A. For construction and execution, refer to Section 23 05 00, item 3.7. END OF SECTION 23 05 29- 3 of 3 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 48 HVAC VIBRATION CONTROL PART1GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section. B. The General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide vibration isolation supports for all rotating and reciprocating mechanical equipment, piping, and duct work as required to prevent transmission of vibration to building structure. B. Various parts of the building shall generally conform to Design Guidelines for HVAC-Related Background Sound in Rooms. C. Mid-point of range of NC criteria curves applies. D. Contractor shall be responsible for selecting and installing vibration isolators as specified, or indicated or otherwise required to prevent transmission of vibration, which would cause noise levels in excess of those specified in above referenced Design Guidelines. E. Provide concrete bases as required for equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A single source manufacturer or supplier shall design and furnish all vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and placing forms with steel reinforcing. 1. The manufacturer or supplier is responsible for adequate coordination of all phases of work. 2. Equipment base types, vibration isolator types, and minimum deflections shall conform to Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation in ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. B. Air handling units with factory installed spring isolators acceptable, provided such isolators meet all requirements of this Section, including submittal requirements for vibration isolators, minimum deflections, and requirement for technical supervision and certification letter. 1. Where internal isolators are used coordinate housekeeping pad height as required to ensure adequate condensate trap depth and positive drainage. C. Vibrator isolation manufacturer responsible for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of isolators. 1. Upon completion of installation and after system is put into operation, manufacturers shall make final inspection and submit his report to the Architect in writing certifying correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data. D. Mason Industries used a basis of design. 1. Similar and equal equipment and installation complying with this Section by: a. Amber Booth b. Vibration Eliminator Co c. Vibration Mountings and Controls d. Kinetics Noise Control acceptable as equal 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In submittal data show type, size dimensions, rated capacity, rated deflection, compressed spring height, solid spring height, identity color coding and labeling details, and location diagrams for each color coding and labeling details, and location diagrams for each isolator proposed and any other information required for Architect to check isolator selections for compliance with these Specifications. B. All steel bases and concrete inertia bases completely detailed. 230548- 1 of 3 HVAC Vibration Control DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Submittal documentation, include a clearly outlined procedure for installing and adjusting isolators. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Unless otherwise noted, mount all mechanical equipment on vibration isolators to prevent transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to building structure. 1. Select the vibration isolators to provide uniform weight distribution and to produce reasonable uniform deflection. 2. Deflections shall be as indicated or specified. B. All isolators exposed to outdoor weather with galvanized finish of all ferrous parts and bolts and nuts cadmium-plated, or electro-zinc plated. C. Selection of Vibration Isolators and Mountings shall conform to Notes for Vibration Isolator Selection Guide in ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook. 2.2 PIPING AND DUCTWORK CONNECTED TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT A. For piping connected to vibrating equipment (pumps, air compressors, etc) provide flexible hose connectors, to be stainless steel, woven wire braid —S.E. Hose#SECF or approved equal. 1. Provide flexible insulation where required; refer to section 23 07 19. B. For ductwork connected to vibrating equipment (fans, air handler units, etc) provide flexible duct connections— Duro-Dyne, "Metal-Fab" heavy duty Excelon or approved equal. 1. Provide flexible duct wrap insulation where required; refer to section 23 07 13. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform the installation and adjustment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Vibration isolators shall provide required deflection under imposed loads and shall produce uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed. 1. Do not use leveling bolts as jacking devices. C. Provide vibration isolation types and deflections as specified, indicated, or scheduled. D. Contractor and vibration isolation manufacturer or factory-authorized representative shall perform following tasks in addition to supply and installation of isolation equipment. 1. Obtain from Architect approved manufacturers name, model number and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical equipment to be resiliently mounted. a. Coordinate resilient mounting systems with exact equipment furnished concerning physical size, isolator locations, weight, rotating speed, etc. b. Direct contact and cooperation between vibration-isolation device fabricator and equipment manufacturer required. 2. Select piping systems isolators for proper coordination with physical arrangement of pipelines and with physical characteristics of building. 3. To assure that vibration isolator installation is in strict accordance with normally accepted practices for critical environments, provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently mounted equipment and piping. 4. Replace at no extra cost to Owner, isolators that do not produce required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height or which do not produce required isolation. 5. Cooperation with other Contractors engaged in project so that installation of vibration isolation devices will proceed in manner that is in best interests of Owner. 6. Notify Architect of project conditions affecting vibration-isolation system installation or performance and are found to be different from conditions indicated or specified. 23 05 48-2 of 3 HVAC Vibration Control DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Should vibration-isolation system installation proceed without such notification, remedial Contractor shall accomplish work required to achieve proper isolator performance at no additional cost to Owner. 7. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping supports, electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines, and building construction, etc., and notify involved contractor as to these problems or potential problems. a. Where such situations cannot be easily resolved, notify Architect so that preventive or remedial action can take place on timely basis. b. Responsible Contractor at no additional cost to Owner shall undertake remedial measures required. E. Air handling units to be internally isolated under other specification sections. F. All other equipment shall have vibration isolators in conformance with Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation in ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook and associated notes. END OF SECTION 23 05 48-3 of 3 HVAC Vibration Control DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION for HVAC PIPING and EQUIPMENT PART1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Nameplates B. Tags C. Stencils D. Pipe Markers E. Pipe Color Coding 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color-coding for mechanical identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required. E. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and installation. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of section 01 77 00. B. Record the actual locations of the tagged valves. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. Label Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color, tag size minimum 11/2"diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1'/2' diameter with smooth edges. C. Chart: Provide a typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.3 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF LENGTH OF SIZE OF INSULATION OR PIPE COLOR FIELD LETTERS 3/n _ 1 1/n 8" 1/2n 11/2" -2" 8" 3/n 21/2"-6" 12" 1-1/4" 8"- 10" 24" 21/2" 23 05 53- 1 of 3 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Over 10" 32" 3'/2" Ductwork and Equipment --- 2'/2" B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 91 13 or 09 91 23, semi-gloss enamel, with colors conforming to ASME A13.1. 2.4 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. 2. Minimum information indicating direction of flow arrow and identification of fluid conveyed. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6"wide by 4-mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.5 COLOR STICK-ONS ON CEILING GRID A. Install self-adhesive color 3/" squares on ceiling grid or on access panels to designate locations of concealed mechanical and HVAC equipment. Color code as follows: 1. Green - Plumbing water valves 2. Blue— HVAC equipment 3. Red— HVAC piping specialties, valves, gauges, etc. B. Self-adhesive color 3/"diameter dots shall be installed on ceiling grid or on access panels to designate locations of concealed equipment color coded as follows: 1. Purple— HVAC energy management systems and HVAC control systems. 2. Colors for other trades- see Section 26 05 53. 2.6 PIPE COLOR CODING A. Paint all exposed HVAC piping the appropriate color in accordance with specification sections 09 91 13 or 09 91-23 Painting, 23 05 00 Mechanical, 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping, 21 00 00 Fire Suppression. B. The piping colors code is as follows: 1. Chilled Water Supply Pipe— Light Blue with Flow Arrows 2. Chilled Water Return Pipe— Dark Blue with Flow Arrows 3. Condenser Water Supply Pipe— Light Green with Flow Arrows 4. Condenser Water Return Pipe— Dark Green with Flow Arrows 5. Fire Sprinkler Piping — Red 6. Gas Piping—Yellow 7. Compressed Air- Orange PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 91 13 or 09 91 23 for stencil painting. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 1. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 91 13 or 09 91 23. D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 23 05 53- 2 of 3 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install underground-metalized plastic pipe markers 6 to 8" below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. 1. May identify small devices such as in-line pumps with tags. H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. I. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with stick-on laminated paper labels to be located on the inside cover. 1. Specify AHU number, terminal box number, and EMCS controller address keyed to control schematic. J. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. K. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. L. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays, similar to thermostats in item I. 1. Key to control schematic M. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with stenciled painting. 1. Use tags on piping 3/"diameter and smaller. 2. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. 3. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. 4. Locate identification not to exceed 20' on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. 5. Paint gas-piping yellow for the entire length of the piping above ground. N. Provide color-coded ceiling stick-on type to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. 1. Locate stick-on, on ceiling grid T-bars closest to equipment. O. Paint all exposed mechanical piping with appropriate color. END OF SECTION 23 05 53- 3 of 3 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 05 93 HVAC TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF SERVICES: A. The Contractor shall provide an independent TAB Contractor to perform TAB work for HVAC systems. 1. The TAB Contractor shall be the controlling authority for all TAB activities for the General Contractor and all subsequent contractors whose work is affected by TAB activities. The Owner, Owner's Representatives, and local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall be the final controlling authority for acceptance of TAB efforts. B. The TAB Contractor shall be a firm registered by the Authority of Jurisdiction to perform Mechanical Engineering, or a firm certified by either the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). C. The TAB Contractor shall provide all technically qualified personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and materials on a continuous basis in order to complete TAB services in a timely manner. D. The scope of services shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Review of project documents to verify the HVAC systems design accommodates the completion of the TAB. 2. Provide pre-TAB inspections of the HVAC systems during construction assuring the systems installation is in conformance with project documents and approved shop drawings. 3. Perform TAB of the HVAC systems in accordance with industry standard (Paragraph 1.2 References) to assure correct and efficient operation. 4. Provide certified TAB report of the HVAC systems in accordance with industry standards (Paragraph 1.2 References). 5. The TAB Contractor shall provide coordination of TAB activities between the Design Mechanical Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, and Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) Contractor. a. Initiate conference calls and/or schedule meetings to resolve TAB issues and document solutions to TAB issues. b. If resolution is not possible or is timely, schedule a meeting with the appropriate parties and determine appropriate resolution. Include Project Manager, Architect, Mechanical Engineer, and Responsible Representatives as required. 6. Unacceptable performance by the TAB Contractor shall result in 'No Confidence'with further reports deemed unacceptable. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) - National Standard for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, latest edition B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) - Procedural Standard for Testing, Balancing, and Adjusting of Environmental Systems, latest edition C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc., (ASHRAE) - HVAC Systems and Applications Handbook, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, latest edition D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing latest edition 1.3 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. 23 05 93- 1 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Authority. C. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. D. Refer to Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout, for substantial completion details. E. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for detailed commissioning requirements. PART 2 PROJECT DOCUMENT REVIEW 2.1 The Owner's Representative will provide the TAB Contractor one copy of the 'released for bidding' design documents for review and analysis. Addendums, amendments, Architect's Supplemental Instructions, and the like shall also be provided as 'deemed necessary' by the Owner's Representative to avoid redundant, and irrelevant production. 2.2 Within 15-calendar days, provide written design review report of deficiencies (errors, omissions, conflicts, etc.)that would preclude TAB in accordance with industry standards and Section 23 05 93, and schedule a meeting with the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Equipment Suppliers, and the Design Mechanical Engineer to resolve these deficiencies. Design Mechanical Engineer shall determine if additional attendance is necessary. A. The report shall address each item in Paragraphs 2.3 through 2.7 by itemizing each area reviewed and the results. B. The format for the design review report shall in accordance with Article 1.3. 2.3 Verify that the air distribution systems are completely defined. A. Turning vanes are located in all mitered elbows greater than 45° B. Splitter vanes are located in all smooth radius elbows greater than 45° with r/D ratios less than 1.5. C. Volume dampers are properly located for correct air distribution and for low system noise. 1. Volume dampers shall be located a minimum of five duct diameters from grilles and diffusers. 2. Do not use opposed blade dampers in grilles and diffusers for balancing. D. Volume dampers are factory manufactured rather than shop fabricated. 1. For externally insulated ducts, provide 2" high standoffs for the locking quadrants. E. Air outlets are properly defined: PATTERN CFM SIZE Supply Air Grilles X X X Ceiling Diffusers X X X Return Air Grilles (plenum) NAP X* X Return Air Grilles (ducted) NAP X** X Exhaust Air Grilles NAP X X Transfer Air Grilles NAP X* X Door Undercuts NAP X* 3/4" Door Grilles NAP X* X Outdoor Air Intakes NAP X X * CFMs are shown to indicate proper air balance but are not balanced. ** CFMs are not balanced for VAV systems. NAP Not Applicable F. For relief air systems and outdoor air systems, the traverse locations have adequate lengths of straight duct for accurate traverses. 1. Less accurate methods to determine CFMs are not acceptable. G. The room-by-room air balance analysis results in a properly balanced and positively pressurized building. H. For VAV systems, the scheduled maximum CFM for each VAV box is equal to the sum of the supply air CFMs for the VAV box. 23 05 93- 2 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.4 Verify that the hydronic systems are completely designed. A. For each cooling coil, the Venturis are properly located. 1. Circuit setter valves, pitot tube flow meters and automatic flow control valves are not acceptable, and condenser water pumps, the gage cocks and pressure gages are properly located using the pump flange taps. B. For each chiller evaporator and condenser, the Venturis are properly located. 1. Circuit setter valves, pitot tube flow meters and automatic flow control valves are not acceptable. C. For chilled water D. For each chiller, the chilled water and condenser water gage cocks are properly located using the chiller manifold taps. E. For each cooling coil, the thermometers are properly located. F. For each chiller evaporator and condenser, the thermometers are properly located. G. The scheduled GPMs for the cooling coils are consistent with the equipment schedules for the chilled water pumps and chiller evaporators. H. The scheduled GPMs for the cooling towers are consistent with the equipment schedules for the condenser water pumps and chiller condensers. I. The scheduled GPMs for the heating coils are consistent with the equipment schedules for the hot water pumps and boilers. 2.5 Verify that the isolation components for sound and vibration attenuation are properly located. 2.6 Verify that the EMCS and the sequence of operations are compatible with the HVAC system and TAB requirements. 2.7 Verify that other components- not specifically listed above, but necessary for TAB - are properly located. 2.8 Distribute the design review report per the Distribution List in Article 7.1. 2.9 The TAB Contractor is responsible for scheduling the meeting in Article 2.2. PART 3 PRE-TAB INSPECTIONS 3.1 Coordinate inspection schedule with the Mechanical Contractor and provide written inspection schedule. A. Note Substantial Completion and Final Completion milestones on the TAB schedule. 3.2 For each inspection, the TAB Contractor shall notify General Contractor and Mechanical Contractor of presence on site. 3.3 Provide periodic inspections during construction and written pre-TAB punch lists within seven calendar days after each inspection. A. The frequency of inspections shall be determined by the TAB Contractor to provide adequate inspection coverage but shall not be less than monthly during HVAC system installation. B. Inspection reports shall define area inspected and shall itemize TAB punch items. 3.4 Inspections shall include, but not be limited to, the following areas: A. Ductwork Systems (Outdoor, Supply, Return, Exhaust, Relief, etc.): Verify the proper installation of duct fittings, balancing devices, access doors, turning vanes, transitions, flexible connections, etc. 23 05 93- 3 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Piping Systems (Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Make-up Water, etc.): Verify the proper installation of pipefittings, balancing valves, Venturis, flexible connections, gage cocks, pressure gages, thermometers, etc. C. HVAC Equipment: 1. Verify that the manufacturer, model number, power supply, motor horsepower, accessories, etc. are per approved shop drawings. 2. When shop drawings of a different manufacturer than scheduled in the project documents are approved, the data per the shop drawings shall be listed in the TAB report as design data. 3. Verify that the motor starter's overload protectors are correct for the motor's rated load amperes. D. Installation of HVAC Equipment: Verify that the installation is per the project documents and/or approved shop drawings. E. Hydronic System Commissioning: 1. Monitor the cleaning, flushing, filling, and chemical treatment. 2. Observe water samples being drawn and labeled. 3. Advise the Project Manager, Department of Program Management if the system commissioning is acceptable. 4. Obtain copy of the chemical treatment test report and provide it in the TAB report. 3.5 Distribute the inspection schedule per the Distribution List in Article 7.2. 3.6 Distribute the pre-TAB punch lists per the Distribution List in Article 7.3. 3.7 Obtain a complete set of approved HVAC shop drawings, addenda, architect supplement instructions, change orders, etc. from the Mechanical Contractor. 3.8 The TAB Contractor is responsible for scheduling meetings with the Mechanical Contractor to obtain construction schedules for pre-TAB inspections and to resolve TAB punch items. PART 4 TAB WORK 4.1 Coordinate TAB work schedule with the Mechanical Contractor and provide written TAB work schedule. Note Substantial Completion and Final Completion milestones on the TAB schedule. 4.2 The TAB Contractor shall sign notify the General Contractor and Mechanical Contractor of presence on site. 4.3 Provide written punch lists summarizing non-complying items as soon as they discovered but at least weekly. A. Punch lists shall clearly delineate the responsible party (Mechanical Contractor or Design Mechanical Engineer) for each punch item. 4.4 Document punch items, relative to system performance, by providing TAB test reports and plotting measured data on equipment performance curves. A. These punch items are the responsibility of the Design Mechanical Engineer if the HVAC systems have been installed per the project documents and approved shop drawings. 4.5 The TAB Contractor shall coordinate with the responsible party (Mechanical Contractor or Design Mechanical Engineer)to resolve punch items. A. Any resolution that modify the HVAC system design, operational modes or performance levels shall be approved, in writing, by the Mechanical Engineer, Building Department. 23 05 93- 4 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4.6 After written notification of punch list repairs by the Mechanical Contractor, the TAB Contractor shall provide one re-TAB per item within this contract. A. Additional TAB fees due to repeat TAB punch items and retesting are the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. B. The TAB Contractor is responsible for clearly documenting any additional fees and providing the documentation to the Project Manager, Department of Program Management. C. Documentation that is unclear, inaccurate, or untimely is not acceptable. 4.7 Provide personnel on a continuous basis in order to complete the TAB work in a timely manner. A. Make every effort to complete the TAB work before Owner occupancy and/or Substantial Completion. B. After Owner occupancy, access to occupied areas may be restricted. 4.8 Work schedules shall be modified accordingly, and coordinate any work after normal business hours with the Project Manager, Department of Program Management and/or the school's administrative staff. 4.9 On a regular basis, inform the Project Manager, Department of Program Management of the work progress, work schedules, and potential problem areas, which may delay the timely completion of TAB work. 4.10 Distribute the TAB work schedule per the Distribution List in Article 7.2. 4.11 Distribute the TAB punch lists per the Distribution List in Article 7.3. 4.12 The TAB Contractor is responsible for scheduling meetings with appropriate parties to obtain construction schedules for TAB work and to resolve TAB punch items. PART 5 TAB REPORT 5.1 Publish the TAB report within 15 calendar days after Substantial Completion; do not delay the report for unresolved punch items. 5.2 Provide data for non-complying systems so that all parties are working with the same information to solve these outstanding punch items. 5.3 Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor and Design Mechanical Engineer in order to resolve TAB punch items and provide written monthly status report. A. Provide revised TAB test reports for incorporation into the TAB report within 15-calendar days after outstanding punch items have been resolved. B. Resolve all punch items and complete the TAB report prior to Final Completion. 5.4 Distribute the TAB report, monthly status reports, and revised TAB test reports per the Distribution List in Article 7.4. PART 6 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS 6.1 The Owner has the option of requesting verification of measurements in the TAB report. A. Measurement verification shall involve 10% or less of the measurements in the TAB report. B. The Owner or Owner's Representative shall select the measurements the TAB Contractor shall retest and verify in the presence of the Owner's Representative. 23 05 93- 5 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6.2 To pass the measurement verification, at least 90% of those measurements shall be within the acceptable tolerance of the DESIGN value. A. Re-balance any measurements out-of-tolerance to within acceptable tolerances. 6.3 If the measurement verification fails, the TAB Contractor shall rebalance all systems at no cost to the Owner. A. Repeat the measurement verification with another set of measurements selected by the Owner's Representative. 6.4 The TAB Contractor shall provide revised TAB test reports for the re-balanced systems within 15- calendar days of measurement verification. A. Distribute revised TAB test reports according to the Distribution List in Article 7.4. PART 7 DISTRIBUTION LIST 7.1 Design Review Report: A. Provide copy of report to the Architect. B. Provide copy of report to the Design Mechanical Engineer. C. Provide copy of report to the Commissioning Authority. 7.2 Pre-TAB Inspection Schedule and TAB Work Schedule: A. Direct the schedules to the Project Manager. B. Provide copy of schedules to the Architect. C. Provide copy of schedules to the Design Mechanical Engineer. D. Provide copy of schedules to the General Contractor. E. Provide copy of schedules to the Mechanical Contractor. F. Provide copy of schedules to the Commissioning Authority. 7.3 Pre-TAB Inspection Punch Lists and TAB Work Punch Lists: A. Direct punch lists to the Mechanical Contractor. B. Provide copy of punch lists to the Project Manager. C. Provide copy of punch lists to the Architect. D. Provide copy of punch lists to the Design Mechanical Engineer. E. Provide copy of punch lists to the General Contractor. F. Provide copy of punch lists to the Commissioning Authority. 7.4 TAB Report, Monthly Status Reports and Revised TAB Test Reports: A. Direct the reports to the Project Manager. B. Provide copy of reports to the Architect. C. Provide copy of reports to the Design Mechanical Engineer. D. Provide copy of reports to the General Contractor. E. Provide copy of reports to the Mechanical Contractor. F. Provide copy of punch lists to the Commissioning Authority. PART 8 TAB REPORT REQUIREMENTS 8.1 Provide reports in hard cover, letter size, 3-ring binders with identification on front, and binder. A. Include set of reduced HVAC floor plans with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond 23 05 93- 6 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 with test reports. Number all pages, i.e., Page X of XX. B. Provide report per the following format: 1. Title Page 2. Certification Page 3. Table of Contents 4. Summary of Non-complying Systems (ALL ITEMS) a. Itemize all outstanding TAB punch items. b. Itemize all out-of-tolerance parameters from each test report. (NO EXCEPTIONS) C. Instrument Calibration Report D. Test reports for each building E. Test reports for the central cooling/heating plant F. Test reports for the chemical treatment of the hydronic systems G. Reduced set of HVAC floor plans (NO EXCEPTIONS) 8.2 Central Station Air Handler Units (AHU) A. General 1. Air handler unit CFM may be determined either by totaling individual CFMs from supply air grilles or by supply air duct traverse. a. If the design CFM (within -5%) cannot be achieved, verify the air handler unit's CFM by supply air duct traverse; do not use return air duct traverse. b. When a duct traverse is utilized, provide a Duct Traverse Report in TAB report and note traverse locations on reduced set of HVAC floor plans. 2. Adjust fan RPM until either design CFM (-5%/+10%) is obtained or motor is at rated FLA, do not use motor service factor. 3. Plot the TAB data on manufacturer's fan performance curve. a. Include fan performance curve in TAB report. b. The following information shall be provided: i) Plot design point and label data point DESIGN POINT. ii) Plot measured CFM and RPM, and then label data point OPERATING POINT. iii) Plot system resistance curve 4. If design CFM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide specific recommendations in order to obtain design CFM. 5. Provide measured static pressure data at the following locations: a. Filter inlet pressure b. Filter delta pressure c. Coil (cooling/heating/reheat) delta pressure d. Fan suction pressure e. Fan discharge pressure: Determine value from fan performance curve based on CFM and RPM; measured values are not reliable. 6. Provide Air Handler Unit Test Report 7. Provide Coil Test Report a. Plot actual data on psychrometric chart and include psychrometric chart in TAB report. b. The following data shall be provided: i) Plot outdoor air DB/WB temperature and label data point (OA). ii) Plot return air DB/WB temperature and label data point (RA). iii) Plot coil-entering air DB/WB temperature and label data point (CEA). iv) Plot coil-leaving air DB/WB temperature and label data point (CLA). a) For draw-thru AHUs, the location of coil leaving air temperatures is after the coil but before the fan. v) Measured data, when plotted on a psychrometric chart, shall represent consistent HVAC system processes. a) Redo any inconsistent measured data. 8. Provide Air Outlet Test Report a. Note any outlet not within ± 10% of design CFM and any outlet with an objectionable noise level. 23 05 93- 7 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. Define area served using both drawing room number and actual room number. 9. For variable air volume systems, provide Variable Air Volume Box Test Report (8.10.P). B. Provide test reports and data in the following order: 1. Air Handler Unit Test Report 2. Fan Performance Curve 3. Coil Test Report 4. Psychrometric Chart 5. Air Outlet Test Report 6. Variable Air Volume Box Test Report 7. Duct Traverse Reports 8.3 Fans (Outdoor, Supply, Exhaust, Relief, Etc) A. Provide test reports in the following order: 1. Fan Test Report 2. Air Outlet Test Report: Provide for fans with multiple supply and/or exhaust grilles. 3. Note any outlet with an objectionable noise level. B. Adjust fan RPM until either design CFM (-5%/+10%) is obtained or motor is at rated FLA. 1. Do not use motor service factor. C. If design CFM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide fan suction and discharge static pressures to determine external static pressure. D. If design CFM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide specific recommendations in order to obtain design CFM. 8.4 Pumps (Primary Chilled Water, Secondary Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Hot Water, etc) A. General 1. Determine pump head using pump flange gage taps in order for TAB data to correlate with the pump performance curve. 2. Determine GPM using venturi. a. Provide venturi diameter and differential head. 3. Adjust system-balancing valves (coils and pump discharge) until either design GPM (- 5%/+10%) is obtained or motor is at rated FLA. a. Do not use motor service factor. 4. Plot the TAB data on manufacturer's pump performance curve. a. Include performance curve in TAB report. b. The following information shall be provided: i) Plot valve shut head ii) Plot valve open head and GPM and verify motor will not overload. iii) Plot impeller curve iv) Plot final operating head and GPM and label data point OPERATING POINT. v) Plot design head and GPM and label data point DESIGN POINT. vi) Plot system-operating curve 5. If design GPM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide specific recommendations in order to obtain design GPM. B. Provide test reports and data in the following order: 1. Pump Test Report 2. Pump Performance Curve 8.5 Water Coils: A. Adjust individual coils to within ± 10% of design GPM, as long as total system water flow is within -5%/+10% of design GPM. 8.6 Noise: Provide Acoustical Test Report for those areas that, during TAB work, appear to have an objectionable noise level. 23 05 93- 8 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Plot octave band acoustical data on NC curves in order to identify problem frequencies and to quantify the level of attenuation required. B. For student occupied areas, NC levels shall be NC35 or less. 8.7 Venturis: Provide calibration charts (GPM versus differential head loss) in TAB report. 8.8 Balancing Valves and Combination Balancing/Shutoff Valves: A. All valves used to set GPM shall have adjustable memory stops. B. Permanently mark the final position of each memory stop. 8.9 Volume Dampers: A. All dampers used to set CFM shall have locking quadrants. B. Permanently mark the final position of each locking quadrant. C. For externally insulated ducts, all volume dampers shall have 2" high standoffs for the locking quadrants. 8.10 Report Forms A. Each test report shall bear the name of the person recording the data, the date of the recording, and the seal of the supervisor. 1. Test reports shall be computer generated and shall provide all data listed, as well as any required data not listed. B. Title Page 1. Date 2. Project's name and address 3. Project number 4. Architect's name and address 5. Design Mechanical Engineer's name and address 6. General Contractor's name and address 7. Mechanical Contractor's name and address 8. TAB Contractor's name, address and phone number C. Certification Page 1. Project's name and address 2. Certification statement 3. TAB Contractor's name 4. TAB Supervisor's name 5. Certification number 6. Date 7. Seal and signature of TAB Supervisor D. Instrument Calibration Report 1. Instrument 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Range 6. Calibration date E. Central Station Air Handler Unit Test Report 1. Air Handler Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial Number c. Wheel type, forward curve (FC), airfoil (AF), and backward incline (BI). d. Wheel diameter(IN) e. Fan arrangement: Draw thru (DT), blow thru (BT) 23 05 93- 9 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 f. Fan discharge: Up blast front (UBF), up blast rear(UBR), top horizontal (TH), bottom horizontal (BH) g. Number of fan belts, manufacturer and size h. Number of filters, type and size i. Note if the filter pull strip and spacers are installed. i) If there are obvious leak paths around the filters, the AHU is not acceptable until the leaks are repaired. 2. Motor Data a. Manufacturer b. Frame size c. Nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps 3. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Supply air CFM b. Outside air CFM c. Fan RPM d. Motor-volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 e. Motor FLA T1, T1, T3 f. Fan total static pressure, IN WC g. Fan suction static pressure, IN WC (Actual) h. Fan discharge static pressure, IN WC (Actual). Refer to Article 8.2, A.5.e. i. Filter static pressure loss, IN WC j. Cooling coil static pressure loss, IN WC k. Heating coil static pressure loss, IN WC I. Reheat coil static pressure loss, IN WC m. AHU casing static pressure loss, IN WC n. External static pressure loss, IN WC o. Inlet guide vane position at design CFM (Actual) p. Variable speed drive output at design CFM (Actual) q. Note any abnormal vibration. F. Coil Test Report 1. Coil Data a. AHU Mark b. Number of rows and fins per foot c. Coil CFM d. Face area, SF e. Face velocity, FPM 2. Air-side Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Outside air CFM b. Outside air DB and WB temperatures, °F c. Return air CFM d. Return air DB and WB temperatures, °F e. Coil CFM f. Coil entering air DB and WB temperatures, °F g. Coil leaving air DB and WB temperatures, °F h. Calculate coil capacity, BTUH (=4.5*CFM*DH) 3. Water-side Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Coil GPM b. Coil entering water temperature, °F c. Coil leaving water temperature, °F d. Coil head loss, FT (=2.31*PSID) e. Venturi diameter, IN (Actual) f. Venturi differential head, IN WC (Actual) g. Calculate coil capacity, BTUH (=500*GPM*DT) G. Fan (Outdoor, Supply, Exhaust, Relief, etc.) Test Report 1. Fan Data 23 05 93- 10 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Type: Ceiling, inline, roof, wall d. Wheel type: Forward curve (FC), airfoil (AF), backward incline (BI) e. Wheel diameter, IN f. Number of belts, manufacturer and size 2. Motor Data a. Manufacturer b. Frame size c. Nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps 3. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. CFM b. Fan RPM c. Fan suction static pressure, IN WC (Actual) d. Fan discharge static pressure, IN WC (Actual) e. Fan total static pressure, IN WC f. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 g. Motor FLA T1, T2, T3 h. Note any abnormal vibration. H. Air Outlet Test Report 1. Outlet Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer c. Drawing and actual room numbers (both room numbers) d. Type: Ceiling diffuser(CD), sidewall grille (SWG), exhaust grille (EG), return grille (RG), transfer grille (TG), etc e. Size, IN 2. Performance Data a. Design CFM b. Actual CFM c. Note all outlets that are not balanced within ±10% of design. i) (Actual CFM-Design CFM)/Design CFM)*100 d. Note all outlets with an objectionable noise level. See Article 8.6. I. Duct Heater Test Report 1. Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Design KW, volts, amps, phase and number of steps 2. Performance Data (Actual) a. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 b. Amps T1, T2, T3 J. Unit Ventilator/Fan Coil Unit Test Report 1. Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Control valve: 2-way or 3-way, 2-position or modulating d. Fan motor nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor e. Electric heater KW, volts, amps, phase and number of steps 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Outside air CFM b. Fan motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 c. Fan motor FLA T1, T2, T3 d. Coil GPM e. Coil entering water temperature, °F f. Coil leaving water temperature, °F 23 05 93- 11 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 g. Venturi size, IN (Actual) h. Venturi differential head, IN WC (Actual) i. Heater volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 j. Heater amps T1, T2, T3 K. Pump Test Report 1. Pump Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Design GPM, head, RPM and impeller diameter d. Required NPSH e. Seal type 2. Motor Data a. Manufacturer b. Frame size c. Nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps 3. Performance Data a. Valve shut differential head, FT b. Actual impeller diameter, IN c. Valve open differential head FT verify motor will not overload. d. Valve open GPM e. Final suction pressure, PSIG f. Final discharge pressure, PSIG g. Final pump head, FT (=2.31*PSIG) h. Final pump GPM i. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 j. Motor amps T1, T2, T3 k. Note any abnormal vibration. L. Duct Traverse Test Report 1. Duct Data a. System/Branch b. Size, IN c. Area, SF d. Design airflow, CFM e. Design velocity, FPM 2. Traverse Data a. Duct static pressure, IN WC b. Air temperature, °F c. Traverse position, IN d. Traverse velocity pressure, IN WC e. Traverse velocity, FPM f. Average duct velocity, FPM g. Measured airflow, CFM M. Chiller Test Report 1. Chiller Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Chiller volts, amps and phase d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps 2. Evaporator Data (Design and Actual) a. CHW temperature set point, °F b. Entering/leaving CHW temperature, °F c. Entering/leaving CHW pressure, PSIG d. Differential CHW head, FT (=2.31*PSID) e. GPM f. Capacity, TONS (=GPM*DT/24) 23 05 93- 12 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 g. Note: Test each chiller at full load. 3. Compressor Data (Design and Actual) a. Manufacturer, model number and serial number b. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 c. Amps T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 4. Air Cooled Condenser Data (Design and Actual) a. Number of fans b. Fan motor HP, volts, amps and phase c. Ambient temperature, °F 5. Water Cooled Condenser Data (Design and Actual) a. Entering/leaving CW temperature, °F b. Entering/leaving CW pressure, PSIG c. Differential CW head, FT (=2.31*PSID) d. GPM N. Cooling Tower Test Report 1. Cooling Tower Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Fan motor HP, volts, amps, RPM, phase and service factor d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps e. Number of fan belts, manufacturer and size 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Entering/leaving CW temperature, °F b. Design WB temperature, °F c. Ambient DB/WB temperatures, °F d. GPM e. Fan motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 f. Fan motor amps T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 g. Note any abnormal vibration. 3. Temperature Control System Data (Actual) a. Single speed fan: Aquastat set point (°F) for fan on/off b. Two speed fan: Aquastat set points (°F) for fan high/low/off O. Heat Exchanger Test Report 1. Heat Exchanger Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Design capacity, BTUH d. Primary/secondary fluids 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Primary entering/leaving temperatures, °F b. Primary entering/leaving pressures, PSIG c. Primary differential head, FT (=2.31*PSI D) d. Primary GPM e. Calculate primary capacity, BTUH (=500*GPM*DT) f. Secondary entering/leaving temperatures, °F g. Secondary entering/leaving pressures, PSIG h. Secondary differential head, FT (=2.31*PSID) i. Secondary GPM j. Calculate secondary capacity, BTUH (=500*GPM *DT) P. Variable Air Volume Box Test Report 1. Box Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Fan HP, volts, amps and phase d. Heater KW, volts, amps, phase and number of steps 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual) 23 05 93- 13 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Cooling CFM: Primary maximum/minimum b. Heating CFM: Primary minimum/secondary/total c. Heater volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 d. Heater amps T1, T2, T3 e. Fan volts T1-T2 f. Fan amps T1 Q. Boiler(Space Heating) Test Report 1. Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Type d. Fuel e. Number of passes f. Ignition type g. Burner control h. Power supply volts, amps and phase i. Input/output, MBH 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Entering/leaving HW temperatures, °F b. Entering/leaving HW pressures, PSIG c. Differential water head, FT (=2.31*PSID) d. GPM e. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 f. Amps T1, T2, T3 R. Make-up Water System Test Report 1. Backflow Preventer a. Manufacturer and model number b. Type: Backflow preventer shall be reduced pressure type. c. Size, IN d. Install a discharge funnel/air gap. e. Pipe the discharge to a floor drain (interior location) or to 12"AFG (exterior location). 2. Pressure Regulating Valve a. Manufacturer and model number b. Set point, PSI, refer to Article 8.10, S.1.c. c. Size, IN 3. Pressure Relief Valve a. Manufacturer and model number b. Set point, PSI c. Size, IN d. Pipe the discharge to a floor drain (interior location) or to 12"AFG (exterior location). S. Expansion Tank Test Report 1. Full Acceptance Bladder Expansion Tank: a. Manufacturer and model number b. Acceptance tank volume, GAL c. Pre-charged pressure, PSIG d. Set point of the pressure-regulating valve shall be equal to the tank pre-charge pressure. 2. Diaphragm expansion tanks are not acceptable. 3. Closed compression tanks are not acceptable. T. Surface Heater Test Report 1. Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Design KW, volts, amps and phase 2. Performance Data (Actual) a. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 23 05 93- 14 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. Amps T1, T2, T3 U. Rooftop Unit Test Report 1. Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Number of filters, type and size 2. Evaporator Fan and Motor Data a. Motor nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor b. Number of fan belts, manufacturer and size 3. Evaporator Fan Data (Design and Actual) a. Supply air CFM b. Outside air CFM c. Fan RPM d. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 e. Motor amps T1, T2, T3 f. Fan total static pressure, IN WC g. Fan suction static pressure, IN WC (actual) h. Fan discharge static pressure, IN WC (actual). i) Determine value from fan curve based on CFM and RPM. ii) Refer to Article 8.2, A.5.e. i. External static pressure, IN WC j. Note any abnormal vibration. 4. Evaporator Coil Data (Design and Actual) a. Coil CFM b. Coil entering air DB/WB temperatures, °F c. Coil leaving air DB/WB temperatures, °F d. Coil capacity, BTUH (=4.5*CFM*DH) e. Coil circuiting: row split (intertwined) or face split 5. Condensing Unit Data (Design and Actual) a. Number of compressors/circuits b. Ambient temperature, °F c. Compressor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 d. Compressor amps T1, T2, T3 e. Number of condenser fans (Actual) f. Condenser fan HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM (Actual) 6. Heater Data (Design and Actual) a. KW(Design) b. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 c. Amps T1, T2, T3 d. Number of steps V. Condensing Unit Test Report 1. Unit Data a. Mark b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number c. Number of compressors/circuits 2. Compressor Data a. Ambient temperature, °F b. Compressor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1 c. Compressor amps T1, T2, T3 3. Condenser Fan Data a. Number of fans b. Fan HP, volts, amps, phase and RPM W. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Test Report 1. Mark 2. Manufacturer, model number and serial number 3. Nameplate volts, amps and phase 23 05 93- 15 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 4. Outside air CFM 5. Nameplate cooling capacity, BTUH 6. Cooling mode volts and amps 7. Nameplate heating capacity, KW 8. Heating mode volts and amps X. Acoustical Test Report 1. Drawing and actual room numbers (both room numbers) 2. Noise level (dB re 10-12W) by octave band (63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz, 4000 Hz, 8000 Hz) 3. dBA 4. NC. Plot noise levels on NC curve. 5. Note, which systems are not within acceptable tolerance (NC35 or less in student occupied areas) PART 9 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 9.1 Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. A. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. B. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. C. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements 9.2 Demonstration and training shall include an overview of the TAB procedures and results. END OF SECTION 23 05 93- 16 of 16 HVAC Testing Adjusting and Balancing DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 07 13 HVAC INSULATION PART1GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209: Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate B. ASTM C552: Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation C. ASTM C553: Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation D. ASTM C612: Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation E. ASTM C921: Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation F. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: For each product used in this project, provide catalog data for insulation,jackets and accessories, and installation instructions. C. Samples: Not required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Applicator: A company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3-years experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including density and thickness. B. Store insulation in original wrapping, and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE Insulation for exterior of sheet metal ducts. A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Model Microlite. 2. Knauf Model Ductwrap. B. Insulation: ASTM C553 Glass Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Type II. 1. "K"Value: ASTM 518, 0.29 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: ASTM C411, 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM C1104, 0.2 percent by volume. 4. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, 0.02 perm. 5. Density: 1.0 pounds per cubic foot. 6. Minimum Thickness: 2 inches. 7. Minimum Installed R-Value: 6.0. 23 07 13- 1 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film ASTM C1136, Type II. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with outward clinching staples and pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Installation: Maximum allowable compression is 25 percent. 2.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID Insulation for exterior of sheet metal ducts. A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Model 800 Series Spin-Glas. 2. Knauf Model Insulation Board. B. Insulation: ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation, Type IA 1. "K"Value: ASTM 518, 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: ASTM C411, 450 degrees F unfaced side. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM C1104, 5 percent by weight. 4. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, 0.02 perm. 5. Density: 3.0 pounds per cubic foot. 6. Minimum Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 7. Minimum Installed R-Value: 6.0. C. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film ASTM C1136. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with speed washers. Seal all joints, breaks, punctures or protuberances with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq y (305 g/sq m) weight, glass fabric. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. 2.3 POLYISOCYAN U RATE FOAM For Piping A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Trymer 2000. B. Insulation: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular plastic. 1. `K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM 518; Initial-0.14 at 75 degrees F; Aged 180 days at 75 degrees F-0.19. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F. 4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM D2842; 2 percent by volume. 5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 4 perm-inches. 23 07 13- 2 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. 7. Vapor seal seams with suitable mastic. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. ASTM C921, Factory applied all service jacket, white kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. 3. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips, then with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier finish. D. Fittings 1. Material and thickness to be same as adjacent pipe. Fittings to be mitered with a minimum of 3 miters per fitting. Secure with glass fabric and mastic and cover with PVC fitting covers. Vapor seal seams with suitable mastic. 2. All joint and fitting fabrication work to be out in accordance with ASTM C-585 and C-450. E. Tie Wire: 16 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers. In mechanical rooms, cover wire with ASJ tape. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive 1. Self sealing by manufacturer. 2. Compatible with insulation. 3. Provide additional vapor seal by coating lap with Foster 30-35. G. Fibrous Glass Fabric 1. Manufacturers: a) Childers#10 CHILL-GLAS. b) Fosters MAST-A-FAB. 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish 1. Manufacturers: a) Childers cp-30. b) Fosters 30-35. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Finish 1. Manufacturers: a) Childers CP-21. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. J. Insulating Cement 1. Manufacturers: a) Newell PRO-TEC KOTES Model 1 MWP. 2. ASTM C449. K. Inserts 1. Provide inserts at hangers on pipe sizes 8" and larger. 2.4 GLASS FIBER WICKING INSULATION For Piping A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Permawick. 23 07 13- 3 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. `K' value: Minimum K= 0.23. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: 35 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 350 degrees F. 4. Maximum Vapor Sorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Wicking Cloth 1. Hydrophilic cloth lining core and extending to the surface of the pipe facing for removal of condensation from pipe surface. D. Valves, Fittings and Hangers: 1. Wrap valve and fittings with hydrophilic cloth, extending at least 2" onto adjacent straight pipe. Insulate to same thickness as adjoining insulation. Cover with PVC fitting covers. For valves greater than 6" pipe size, refer to manufacturer's instructions. At hangers wrap pipe with hydrophilic cloth and install hard insert to avoid compression of the insulation. E. Jacket 1. ASTM C1136, mylar film with engineered rows of evaporation holes. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 0.04 perms. 3. In exposed locations such as central plants, pump rooms, AHU rooms and other mechanical rooms, provide PVC jacket with evaporation holes designed for wicking application as manufactured by Proto Corporation. F. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers. 2.5 GLASS FIBER, RIGID For Piping A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Model Microlok. 2. Knauf Model 850 ASJ-SSL. 3. Owens Corning Model ASJ- SSL-II. B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible. 1. ` ' (ksi') factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0°035 at 2 degrees C). 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C). 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.1 percent by volume. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket 1. ASTM C921, Factory applied all service jacket, white kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. 3. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips, then with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier finish. D. Fittings 1. Material and thickness to be same as adjacent pipe. Fittings to be mitered with a minimum of 3 miters per fitting. Secure with glass fabric and mastic and cover with PVC fitting covers. Vapor seal seams with suitable mastic. E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive 1. Self sealing by manufacturer. 2. Compatible with insulation. 23 07 13- 4 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3. Provide additional vapor seal by coating lap with Foster 30-35. F. Fibrous Glass Fabric 1. Manufacturers: a) Childers#10 CHILL-GLAS. b) Fosters MAST-A-FAB. 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight. G. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish 1. Manufacturers: a) Childers cp-30. b) Fosters 30-35. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. H. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Finish 1. Manufacturers: a) Childers CP-21. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color. I. Insulating Cement 1. Manufacturers: a) Newell PRO-TEC KOTES Model 1 MWP. 2. ASTM C449. J. Inserts 1. Provide inserts at all hangers for all pipe sizes. 2.6 CELLULAR GLASS- FOR USE AS INSERT A. Manufacturers: 1. Pittsburg Corning Model Foam Glas. B. Insulation: ASTM C552, Type II - pipe and tubing insulation, Class 2 -Jacketed. 1. `K' ('ksi') factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.33 at 75 degrees F. 2. Density: 8.0 pounds per cubic foot. 2.7 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE For Steam Piping Or Use As Inserts A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Model Thermo Gold 12. B. Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I Asbestos-free -for use on surfaces up to 1200 F. 1. `K' Factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.42 at 300 degrees F (0.061 at 149 degrees C). 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F (619 degrees C). 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84, Flame Spread -0, Smoke Developed -0. C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers. D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: 1. ASTM C449/C449M. 23 07 13- 5 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.8 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM For Piping Or Equipment A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Model AP Armaflex. B. Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular form: ASTM C534; Type I, Tubular form. CFC, HCFC, HFC free. 1. `K' Factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -70 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: +220 degrees F. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics- Pipe Insulation: ASTM E84. a) - inch thickness and less: Flame Spread -25, Smoke Developed-50. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics-Sheet Insulation: ASTM E84. a) 3/-inch thickness and less: Flame Spread -25, Smoke Developed-50. b) 1-inch thickness: Flame Spread -25, Smoke Developed- 100. 6. Water Vapor Permability: ASTM E-96-90, 0.10 perm-in. C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a) Armstrong Model 520. b) Substitutions: Section 15000. 2. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. D. Insulation Tape: Elastomeric foam tape of same material as insulation. 2.9 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, FLEXIBLE Insulation for Interior of sheet metal ducts. A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Model Permacoat Linacoustic HP. 2. Knauf. 3. Owens Corning. B. Insulation: ASTM C1071 Type I flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. `K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.25 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Density: Minimum 1.35 Ib/cu ft. 4. Noise Reduction Criteria: 0.90. 5. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 6,000 ft/min. C. Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a) Foster Model 81-90. b) Minnesota Mining Model EC104. C) Substitutions: Section 15000. 2. Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type. D. Biocide: Coat liner with EPA-registered anti-microbial agent that will not support the growth of fungus or bacteria. E. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with press-on head. 2.10 GLASS FIBER ROUND DUCT LINER A. Manufacturers: 23 07 13- 6 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Johns Manville Model Spiracoustic Plus. B. Insulation: Round, preformed in cylindrical sections with acrylic polymer meeting ASTM G21 impregnated surface coat. 1. ` ' (aksia) factor: ASTM C1071, 0.23 at 75 degrees F (0°033 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 6000 fpm. C. Biocide: Coat liner with EPA-registered anti-microbial agent that will not support the growth of fungus or bacteria. 2.11 FIREBLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. Partak Insulation, Inc. Paroc Fireboard. 2. Thermal Ceramics Firemaster. 3. 3M Firemaster. B. Fireblanket Insulation: Non-asbestos, ceramic fiber blanket, 3-inch thick, 2 hour fire resistive rating suitable for use on grease hood systems. UL Classified R 14229, CAJ7009, CAJ7013, CAJ7015, CAJ7020, CAJ7022. 2.12 PLENUM WRAP A. Manufacturers: 1. 3M 5A B. Wrap non-metallic piping located in return air plenums with thickness as required by code. 2.13 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic— Fittings and piping inside Central Plant and Mechanical Rooms (Chiller, Pump, Boiler,AHU Rooms): 1. Manufacturers: a) Proto Corporation Model Lo Smoke. b) Schuller Model Zeston. C) Schuller Model Ceel-Co. 2. Jacket: ASTM C921, One-piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white color, factory applied coloring to identify individual services. a) Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. b) Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. C) Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches. d) Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25. e) Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50. f) Thickness: 20 mil. g) Connections: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Covering Adhesive Mastic a) Manufacturers: 1) Great Lakes Textile, Inc Model Polyco. b) Compatible with insulation. 23 07 13- 7 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Aluminum Jacket— Hydronic and Refrigerant Pipe and Fittings Outdoors: ASTM B209. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 2. Finish: Smooth. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 4. Fittings: 0.24 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 5. Metal Jacket Bands: 'h inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 2.14 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards and Manufacturers instructions. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system. 1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips, then with outward clinch expanding staples. Seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulate piping components such as nipples, valve stems or other cold surfaces where condensation forms with elastomeric cellular foam tape. D. Equipment Connections: Seal duct and piping at point of connection to equipment. E. Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation — Piping: 1. Apply adhesive at butt ends of joints and fittings. 2. Fittings shall be mitered or template-cut in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not slide tubing over 90 degree elbows. 3. Inserts: Provide rigid elastomeric insulation at pipe hangers for pipe sizes 1 1/2 inch and larger to prevent compression of insulation. F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and unions at equipment. G. Insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: Insulate entire piping system: 1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 23 07 13- 8 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 H. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches ( 0 mm) diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. Length shall be 4 inches shorter than insert to allow for vapor retarding butt joints. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: 12 inches long for pipe sizes 1 1/2 to 6 inches, 16 inches for pipe sizes 8 and 10 inches and 22 inches for pipe sizes 12 inch and larger. Thickness and contour to match adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service, Cellular Glass or Hydrous Calcium Silicate material. I. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Architectural for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour. J. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retarderjacket. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o'clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal equipment. K. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. L. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate, except when indicated on drawings. M. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. N. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. O. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. P. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system. Q. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets. R. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. S. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. T. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. U. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage. V. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 23 07 13- 9 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings,joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. 5. Seal insulation airtight where duct hanger straps penetrate insulation vapor barrier. W. Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. X. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor retarderjacket. Cover with two coats of ultraviolet resistant paint. Y. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage. 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. SMACNA Standards for spacing. 3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for airflow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. Z. Install according to manufacturer's recommended stretch out chart and to manufacturer's installation instructions where more stringent than herein. 2.15 SCHEDULES Provide minimum thickness as follows. Increase as necessary for compliance with local code. A. Heating Systems: 1. Heating Water Supply and Return: a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 1/2 to 1 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 inch. 2) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 2 inches and larger a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 3) Pipe Size Range Outdoors or Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: 1/2 to 1 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 4) Pipe Size Range Outdoors or Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: 2 inches and larger. a) Thickness: 2 inches. b. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range Indoors: All sizes. a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 2) Pipe Size Range Outdoors or Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: All sizes. a) Thickness: 2 inches. B. Cooling Systems: 1. Chilled Water: a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 1/2 to 1 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 inch. 2) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 2 inches and larger. 23 07 13- 10 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 3) Pipe Size Range Outdoors or Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: 1/2 to 1 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 4) Pipe Size Range Outdoors or Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: 2 inches and larger. a) Thickness: 2 inches. b. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 1/2 to 1 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inches. 2) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 2 inches and larger. a) Thickness: 2 inches. 3) Pipe Size Range Outdoors or Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: 1/2 to 8 inches. a) Thickness: 2 inches. 4) Pipe Size Range Outdoors and Ventilated Mechanical Rooms: 10 inches and larger. a) Thickness: 2 1/2 inches. 2. Low Temperature Chilled Water(less than 35 degrees F) and Glycol: a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 to 8 inches. a) Thickness: 2 1/2 inches. 2) Pipe Size Range: 10 inch and larger. a) Thickness: 2 1/2 inches. b. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 to 8 inches. a) Thickness: 3 inches. 2) Pipe Size Range Indoors: 10 inches and larger. a) Thickness: 4 inches. 3. Condensate Drain Lines (50 degrees F and above): a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. a) Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. a) Thickness: 1/2 inch. C. Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. a) Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Refrigerant Suction: a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 to 2 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 inch. b. Rigid Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 to 2 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch. C. Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2 to 2 1/2 inches. a) Thickness: 3/4 inch. C. Other Systems: 1. Engine Exhaust Piping: 2. Piping Exposed to Freezing with Heat Tracing: 23 07 13- 11 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Equipment and Systems: 1. Heating Systems: a. Pump Bodies: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. b. Heat Exchangers/Converters: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. C. Air Separators: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. d. Expansion Tanks: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. e. Hot Thermal Storage Tanks: f. Boiler Feed Water Storage Tanks: g. Hot Water Pump Suction and Discharge Piping from pump body to cutoff valves: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. 2. Cooling Systems: a. Pump Bodies: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. b. Air Separators: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. C. Expansion Tanks: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. d. Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated): 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. e. Chilled Water Pump Suction and Discharge Piping from pump body to cutoff valves: 1" Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation. f. Cold Thermal Storage Tanks: g. Equipment Exposed to Freezing with Heat Tracing: E. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Rectangular Sheet Metal Ductwork: 1"Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation. 2. Round Sheet Metal Ductwork: 1" Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation, Exterior. F. Outside Air Intake Ducts: 2"Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation, Exterior. G. Plenums: H. Supply Ducts: 2" Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation, Exterior. Ductwork shown as crosshatched on plans shall also be lined with 1/2" Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner. I. Supply ducts After Terminal Boxes: 1 1/2" Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner. Exterior insulation is not required in addition to liner. J. Return Ducts: 2"Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation, Exterior. Ductwork shown as cross hatched on plans shall also be lined with 1/2"Thick Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner. K. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors: 2 1/2"Thick, minimum R=8.0, Elastomeric Cellular Foam Sheet Insulation on exterior of ductwork with two coats of UV resistant paint. END OF SECTION 23 07 13- 12 of 12 Ductwork Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART1GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. ASTM B209: Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate B. ASTM C534: Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form C. ASTM C547: Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation D. ASTM C552: Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation E. ASTM C553: Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation F. ASTM C921: Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation G. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: For each product used in this project, provide catalog data for insulation,jackets and accessories, and installation instructions. C. Samples: Not required 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Applicator: A company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3-years experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Store insulation in original wrapping, and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID FIBER GLASS INSULATION A. Provide molded, heavy density, noncombustible, one-piece pipe insulation made from inorganic glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin and K-value of 0.24 at 75°F per ASTM C547. B. Provide factory installed all service jacket of white kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil and reinforced with glass fibers and provide self-sealing lap for longitudinal seam and butt strips for circumferential joints per ASTM C921. C. Provide 18-ga, Type 304 stainless steel tie wire with twisted ends on 24" centers but not less than two tie wires per insulation section. D. For fittings and valves, provide one-piece, molded, 20-mil thick, PVC covers with fiberglass inserts. 1. Use pressure sensitive, color matching vinyl tape to seal PVC fitting covers to jacket of insulation per ASTM C921 2.2 FLEXIBLE FIBER GLASS INSULATION 23 07 19- 1 of 4 HVAC Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Provide flexible, noncombustible, blanket insulation made from highly resilient, inorganic glass fibers bonded by a thermosetting resin. 1. Density shall be 1.0 Ib/cu ft K-value shall be 0.28 at 75°F per ASTM C553 B. Provide factory applied, foil-scrim-kraft vapor barrier with 2"wide stapling flange. 1. Secure seams with outward clinching staples on 6" centers. 2. Seal seams with two coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with 4"wide, open weave glass fabric per ASTM C921 2.3 CELLULAR GLASS INSULATION A. Provide molded, impermeable, noncombustible, cellular glass pipe insulation, with K-value of 0.35 at 75°F per ASTM C552. B. Interior Applications in Concealed Locations 1. Pipe: All service jacket with self-sealing lap. 2. Pipe: 5 ply self-adhesive vapor barrier mold inhibiting jacket (0.0000 perms) 3. Fittings: Vapor barrier mastic and reinforcing membrane. C. Interior Applications in Exposed Locations 1. Pipe: Vapor barrier mastic and reinforcing membrane. 2. Pipe: 5 ply self-adhesive vapor barrier mold inhibiting jacket (0.0000 perms) fittings either pre-formed aluminum or PVC. 3. Fittings: Same as pipe D. Exterior Applications 1. Pipe: Vapor barrier mastic, reinforcing membrane and aluminum jacket. 2. Pipe: 5 ply self-adhesive vapor barrier mold inhibiting jacket (0.0000 perms), UV stable; fittings either pre-formed aluminum or PVC. 3. Fittings: Same as pipe E. Buried Applications 1. Pipe: Prefabricated material, 120 mil thick, consisting of bituminous resin reinforced with a woven glass fiber, an integral aluminum foil layer and a protective plastic film coating. 2. 5ply or 13ply high performance protective jacket- back fill around the pipe 12" in diameter. 3. Fittings: Same as pipe F. Provide open mesh, synthetic membrane to reinforce mastic finishes, with thread count shall be 6 by 6 strands per square inch 27 mils thick. G. Provide 18-ga, Type 304 stainless steel tie wire with twisted ends on maximum 12" centers but not less than two tie wires per insulation section. H. Provide flexible, acrylic latex coating for use with cellular glass insulation to provide a vapor barrier finish. 2.4 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION A. Provide flexible, closed-cell, slit tubing form, elastomeric pipe insulation. 1. For large diameter pipe, provide sheet form. 2. K-value of 0.27 at 75°F 3. Use contact adhesive to seal longitudinal seams and circumferential joints per ASTM C534. B. For fittings and valves, fabricate insulation from mitered-cut tubular form using contact adhesive to seal joints. C. If necessary, provide two layers of insulation to obtain specified thickness, staggering the longitudinal and circumferential joints. 2.5 ALUMINUM JACKET A. For pipes, provide 16- mil thick stucco embossed pattern finish, Type 1100 aluminum jacket, ASTM B209. For horizontal pipe, locate longitudinal lap on bottom. 23 07 19- 2 of 4 HVAC Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. For fittings, provide 24-mil thick, die shaped, smooth finish, Type 1100 aluminum jacket, ASTM B209. C. Provide 0.5"wide, 20-mil thick, Type 3003 aluminum bands on maximum 24" centers but not less than 2-bands perjacket section. 2.6 5 PLY SELF-ADHESIVE VAPOR BARRIER AND WEATHER BARRIER JACKET. A. Pipes; provide Self-Adhesive high performance Vapor Barrier and Weather Barrier Jacket 6-mil thick with a perm rating of 0.0000 and UV stable—finishes include, stucco embossed, white, white, embossed, black, and smooth silver, 10-year warranty. B. Fitting; provide 24-mil thick die shaped smooth finish silver, may use PVC fitting if matching white. C. High performance acrylic adhesive capable of installation with no further mechanical attachments 2.7 SHIELDS AND INSERTS A. At all pipe hangers or pipe supports, provide 12" long 1800-arc galvanized sheet metal shields matching the insulation outside dimension. B. For pipes larger than 2" diameter, provide 12" long 1800-arc cellular glass insulation inserts. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before applying insulation, verify that piping is inspected, tested, and approved. B. Before applying insulation, verify that surfaces are clean (foreign material removed) and dry. C. Before applying insulation, verify the installation of the brass thermo wells with 2.5" lagging extensions. D. Before applying insulation, verify the installation of the 4" long brass nipples for gage cocks. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On exposed insulation provide jacket or finish, and locate longitudinal seams in least visible locations. 1. Where insulated piping extends to weather exposed areas, provide specified aluminum sheet metal jacket. C. Piping, ductwork and equipment insulation or covering shall not penetrate fire-rated assembly unless the specific material has been tested and approved as part of the fire-rated assembly. D. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. E. For above grade applications, maintain 0.5" air space on all sides of the insulation. F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. G. Chilled Water Black Steel Pipe, Schedule 40 ASTM A-53 Grade B 1. Provide cellular glass insulation with vapor barrierjacket for pipe, fittings, valves, strainers, unions, flanges, etc. No Armaflex permitted. 2. Apply insulation with all joints tightly fitted and buttered with joint sealer. a. Eliminate voids by refitting or replacing insulation. b. Do NOT fill voids with joint sealer. 3. Interior Applications: a. Pipes 3" diameter and smaller, provide 1.5"thick insulation. b. Pipes larger than 3"diameter provide 2"thick insulation. 4. Exterior and Buried Applications: All pipe sizes provide 2"thick insulation. 5. Expansion joints: 23 07 19- 3 of 4 HVAC Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Flexible connections and mechanical couplings for grooved pipe provide two layers of 1"thick cellular foam insulation. b. The longitudinal seam for each layer shall be staggered 1800. c. The cellular foam insulation shall overlap the cellular glass insulation a minimum of 3". 6. Provide 1'/2" cellular glass insulation with vapor barrier jacket for pipe to the expansion tank. 7. Provide 1'h"cellular glass insulation with vapor barrierjacket for the pipe to the chilled water make-up system and chilled water chemical treatment system for a minimum length of 6'from the chilled water pipe. H. Chilled water pre-insulated steel pipe, schedule 40. 1. Carrier pipe shall be black steel schedule 40 ASTM A-53 Grade B, surrounded with polyurethane closed cell insulation enclosed in PVC outerjacket. 2. Insulate all joints per manufacturer's requirements, after completing the welding and passing the hydrostatic testing. 3. Use coupling insulation kits of field mixed urethane components poured into a PVC mold sealed to form a watertight seal. 4. Use fitting insulation kits of field mixed urethane components poured into a PVC molded fitting cover, then tape to form a watertight seal. I. Refrigerant Pipe (Interior and Above Grade Applications) 1. For suction lines, provide 1"thick, cellular foam insulation. 2. For liquid lines, insulation is not required. 3. For hot gas lines, provide 3/"thick, cellular foam insulation. 4. Jacket is not required. J. Refrigerant Pipe (Exterior Applications) 1. For suction lines, provide 1"thick, cellular foam insulation. 2. For liquid lines, insulation is not required. 3. For hot gas lines, provide 3/"thick, cellular foam insulation. 4. For pipe and fittings insulation, provide 2-coats of UV protection paint or 5ply Self Adhesive laminate UV stable offers 10-year warranty. K. Refrigerant Pipe (Buried Applications) 1. For suction lines, provide 1"thick, cellular foam insulation. 2. For liquid lines, insulation is not required. 3. For hot gas lines, provide 3/"thick, cellular foam insulation. 4. Route pipe within schedule 40 PVC sleeve with ends sealed watertight. END OF SECTION 23 07 19- 4 of 4 HVAC Piping Insulation DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 09 13 BASIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 2. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500- Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 62 -Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A126- Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. ASTM A536- Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 3. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. . ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 5. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). 6. ASTM B280- Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 7. ASTM D2737 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing. E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls- Electrical Wall Mounted Room Thermostats. 2. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). G. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. 2. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1820 - Fire Test of Pneumatic Tubing for Flame and Smoke Characteristics. 230913 - 1 Basic Controls for HVAC DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written detailed operational description of sequences. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 23 09 93. C. Product Data: Submit description and engineering data for each control system component. Include sizing as required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation requirements for each control component. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting. B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for damage. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. 230913 -2 Basic Controls for HVAC DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty for HVAC instrumentation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Honeywell Controls. B. Johnson Controls. C. South Texas Controls. 2.2 CONTROL PANEL: A. Provide NEMA 1 rated steel control panel with locking hinged access door. Control panel shall house digital electronic programmable timer, electronic temperature controllers, low voltage control transformers, switches, relays and any other components required to perform functions detailed in sequence of operations. B. Main control panel power switch shall be located within control panel cover. 2.3 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: A. Provide low voltage (24-volt) control transformers with circuit breaker or fuse over-current protection. Size transformers for 1.3 times the maximum operating power load. 2.4 DIGITAL PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT: A. Provide Honeywell Commercial Vision PRO Model No. T8220U programmable thermostat or approved equal. Thermostat shall have 7 day individual program with minimum of four(4) adjustable occupied and unoccupied periods, auto or manual changeover, two stage heat and cooling operation, white color, and touch screen user interface. Provide lockable clear cover over thermostat. Provide Honeywell Model No. C7189U remote temperature sensor. Refer to plans for location. Coordinate with Architect for exact final location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify pneumatic tubing is clear of water, oil or other contaminants and compressed air supply has filter and dryer operating before installing control devices or actuators. C. Verify air handling units and ductwork installation is complete and air filters are in place before installing sensors in airstreams. 230913 - 3 Basic Controls for HVAC DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Field verify location of control interfaces and other exposed control sensors before installation. E. Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install controls and other exposed control sensors after locations are coordinated with other Work. B. Install HVAC Controls 48 inches (1 200 mm). Align with light switches and other components of similar nature. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training. B. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of operation prior to Date of Substantial Completion. C. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner. D. Record training sessions and deliver the recording to the Owner. Refer to Section 01 70 00. PART 4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 4.1 AIR HANDLING UNIT/AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT: A. HVAC Systems shall consist of components as noted on project documents. Coordinate refrigerant liquid pipe solenoid valve requirements with air handling unit equipment manufacturer. B. Occupied Mode: Supply fan shall cycle with load through automatic fan function on wall programmable thermostat at location indicated on Drawings. Programmable thermostat shall stage cooling and stage electric heating as required to maintain space temperature set points. Coordinate space temperature set points and occupied control periods for each day of the week with Owner and Engineer at time of system start up. 230913 -4 Basic Controls for HVAC DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Unoccupied Mode: Supply fan shall cycle with load. Programmable thermostat shall stage cooling and stage electric heating as required to maintain space temperature cooling set point of 80 degrees (adj.) and heating set point of 60 degrees (adj.). 4.2 FANS: A. Exhaust Fan — Fans shall be controlled by lights. END OF SECTION 230913 - 5 Basic Controls for HVAC DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERATION PIPING PART1GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping B. Refrigerant C. Moisture and liquid indicators D. Valves E. Filter-dryers F. Brazing Materials 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration C. ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants D. ANSI/ASME B16.22- Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings E. ANSI/ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes F. ANSI/ASME B31.5- Refrigeration Piping G. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping H. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal I. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal J. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel K. ANSI/UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves L. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants M. ASTM B280- Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service N. MIL-V-23450C- Valves, Expansion, Thermostatic, Refrigerant 12 and Refrigerant 22 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes. C. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. D. Submit product data indicating general assembly of specialties, including manufacturer's catalogue information. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. F. Submit design data as a submittal under provisions of Division 1. G. Submit data indicating pipe sizing. H. Submit test reports under provisions of Division 1. I. Submit Test reports indicating results of leak test, acid test. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record the exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 23 23 00- 1 of 3 Refrigeration Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place. C. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. D. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation. PART2PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Copper Tubing: 1. Per ASTM B280 type ACR hard drawn copper for exposed/accessible lines. 2. Type ACR soft drawn (annealed) for inaccessible piping and for piping below slabs, and grade installed without joints. 3. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 4. Joints: ANSI/AWS A5.8 B Cup silver braze. B. Brazing Compound shall be a minimum of 15% silver with melting point greater than 1000° F. C. See section 23 05 00 part 2.1 F on additional material requirements. 2.2 REFRIGERANT A. Refrigerant: R-410a 2.3 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator and plastic cap; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 200°F. 2.4 VALVES A. Packed Angle Valves: Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with back seating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275°F. B. Packed Ball Valves: Two piece forged brass Body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 300°F. 2.5 FILTER-DRIERS A. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type: ANSI/ARI 710, UL listed, brass shell and bronze cap, perforated brass shell and molded desiccant filter core; for maximum working pressure of 350 psi. PART 3EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends removing burrs. B. Remove any scale and dirt from the inside and outside of the pipe before assembly before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. 23 23 00- 2 of 3 Refrigeration Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations, and slope piping one percent in direction of oil return. E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. 1. Nitrogen purge lines during brazing. G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Sections 09 91 13 & 09 91 26. K. Insulate piping; refer to Section 23 07 19. L. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. M. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. N. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after evacuation and testing. 1. Take precautions so as not to discharge refrigerant into atmosphere. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Provide line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. 1. Install moisture indicator so it is viewable from service area. B. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with three-valve bypass assembly, one for each refrigeration circuit. C. Provide refrigerant charging valve connections in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field-testing under provisions of Division 1. B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.5. C. Pressure test the system with small amount of refrigerant and dry nitrogen at 200-psi. 1. Using a halide torch or an electronic leak detector, check for leaks in the system. 2. Perform final test at 30" vacuum for a 24-hour period with no deviation. 3. Provide notification a minimum of 48-hours prior to test and submit written report to A/E verifying test results. END OF SECTION 23 23 00- 3 of 3 Refrigeration Piping DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 31 00 DUCTWORK PART GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE: Fundamentals Handbook, Duct Design B. ASHRAE: Equipment Handbook, Duct Construction C. ASTM A90: Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles D. ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip E. ASTM A527: Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality F. ASTM B209: Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate G. NFPA 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems H. NFPA 90B: Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems I. NFPA 96: Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooling Equipment J. SMACNA: Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards K. SMACNA: High Pressure Duct Construction Standards L. UL 181: Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Provide catalog cuts of materials and fittings, and indicate ductwork construction features such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration. C. Mechanical Equipment Rooms (AHU): Provide%"scale drawings for supply air, return air, outdoor air, relief air, etc. 1. Provide copy to piping contractor in order for him to prepare his piping drawings. D. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall provide ductwork shop-fabrication drawings to the Engineer for approval. E. Samples: Not required 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The sheet metal company fabricating the ducts shall specialize in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. B. Single wall duct with Pittsburgh lockseam construction shall be factory made or shop fabricated by the sheet metal company specialized in Pittsburgh lockseam duct fabrication. 1. No field fabrication allowed. C. Double wall duct shall be factory made or shop fabricated by the sheet metal company specialized in double wall duct fabrication with minimum three years experience. 1. No field fabrication allowed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store ducts and fittings inside weather-tight trailers or weather-tight buildings. B. Protect ductwork shall from water, dirt, chemical, and mechanical damage. C. Deliver all ductwork and fittings to the site clean of any foreign materials and provide protective covers on all openings in the duct and fittings. 1. Remove the protective cover during installation but recover all openings at the completion of the phase of work on the system and the end of the day. 2. If ductwork is delivered to the site unassembled, once assembled on the site cover the ends if duct is not scheduled for installation with in 24 hours of assembly. 23 31 00 - 1 of 6 Ductwork DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. B. Low pressure/low velocity: Is 2"-WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. C. Medium Pressure/High Velocity: Is 6"-WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,500 fpm. D. High pressure/high velocity: Is 10"-WG positive static pressure and velocities greater than 2,000 fpm. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials or UL 181. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, zinc coating of 1.25-oz per sq.ft, for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. 1. When the contract documents require ductwork be painted, provide paintable galvanized steel. C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by seamless aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrierjacket; maximum 0.23 K-value at 75° F and vinyl interior liner supported by helically wound spring steel wire. D. Stainless Steel Ducts: Per ASTM A167, Type 304. E. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Ducts. F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used with tape, or heavy mastic with membrane. H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. I. Fiberglass Ductwork is NOT acceptable. J. Steel Duct with Interior Duct Liner: Not acceptable, if the duct liner is exposed to the air stream. K. Flexible metallic(aluminum) duct (for clothe dryer venting) is not acceptable for any HVAC ductwork application. 2.2 LOW PRESSURE/LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. 1. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, sealing, etc. for 2" WG positive or negative static pressure. B. Single wall and double wall, round and flat oval ducts shall be spiral lockseam, spiral lockseam with standing rib, or longitudinal seam with solid welded construction. 1. Fittings shall be standing seam or solid welded construction by the same manufacturer as the ductwork. C. Single wall, rectangular ducts, with inside clear dimension in any direction of 13" or lager, shall be Pittsburgh lockseam construction. 1. Punch-button snap lock longitudinal seam construction is allowed only for low pressure/low velocity ducts with inside clear dimension in any direction of 12" or smaller. 2. Replace all ductwork not complying with these requirements at no cost to the Owner and/or Owner's Representatives and no time extension for the contractor. D. Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, snap-lock ducts and duct wall penetrations. E. May install round ducts in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE's table of equivalent duct sizes. 2331 00 - 2 of 6 Ductwork DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. F. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1.5 times the width of duct on centerline. 1. If not possible or if square throat radius or mitered elbows are used, provide turning vanes. G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15° divergence wherever possible. 1. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30°; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45°. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive and draw bands. I. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct crimp in direction of airflow. J. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.3 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE/HIGH VELOCITY DUCTS A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. 1. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, sealing, etc. for 6" WG positive pressure, except as indicated. B. Single wall and double wall, round and flat oval ducts shall be spiral Iockseam construction. 1. Fittings shall be solid welded construction. 2. Fittings shall be by the same manufacturer as the ductwork. C. Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1.5 times the width of duct on centerline, if not possible or if square throat radius or mitered elbows are used, provide airfoil- turning vanes. D. Transform duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15° divergence and 30° convergence. E. Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. F. Provide standard 45° lateral wye takeoffs unless 90° conical tees are indicated. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 2.4 DOUBLE WALL, ROUND, FLAT OVAL AND RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK A. Provide double wall ducts and fittings with inner sheet metal liner, 1"thick fiberglass insulation, and outer sheet metal pressure shell. 1. Fittings shall be by the same manufacturer as the ductwork. B. Provide 1"thick, fiberglass insulation with a K-value of 0.27 at 75°F. C. Provide solid or perforated inner sheet metal liner as indicated by the drawings. D. Use perforated inner liner for sound attenuating ductwork. 1. In ducts with perforated inner liner, provide 0.002"thick Mylar plastic sleeve between the inner liner and the insulation to separate the porous insulation from the air stream. E. At electric duct heaters, provide solid inner liners that start 6" upstream and end 6"downstream of electric duct heaters. F. Where double wall duct connects to single wall duct, provide double wall to single wall insulated end fitting. 2.5 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and NFPA 96. B. Fabricate any exposed and concealed ductwork of stainless steel with continuous externally welded joints and seams. 2.6 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCTWORK A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. B. Fabricate exposed and concealed ductwork of stainless steel with continuous externally welded joints and seams. 2331 00 - 3 of 6 Ductwork DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Pitch horizontal ducts to drain condensed vapor back to the equipment. 2.7 CLOTHES DRYER VENT DUCTS (EXHAUST) A. Dryer vent ducts shall be either galvanized steel or aluminum of minimum thickness: 1. Round or enclosed rectangular 14"or less, shall be galvanized steel 30-gauge, aluminum 26-gauge. 2. Round or enclosed rectangular more than14", shall be galvanized steel 28-gauge, aluminum 24-gauge. 3. Exposed rectangular 14"or less, shall be galvanized steel 28-gauge, aluminum 24-gauge. 4. Exposed rectangular more than 14", shall be galvanized steel 26-gauge, aluminum 22- gauge. B. Nonmetallic duct not allowed. C. Terminate the duct outside of the building, with back draft damper. 1. Do not terminate into pedestrian walkway. D. Secure all joints and seams with metal tape, do not use screws, and mount in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate EMCS controllers. C. Connect VAV boxes to medium or high pressure/high velocity ducts directly, do not use flexible duct. D. Connect ceiling diffusers to low pressure/low velocity ducts with 5' minimum to 10' maximum laying length of flexible duct. E. Connect return air grilles to low pressure/low velocity ducts with 5' minimum to 10' maximum laying length of flexible duct. F. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers and provide access doors for cleaning. 1. Provide access doors at each 900 horizontal elbow. G. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent dust from entering the ductwork system. H. Metal round duct shall be mechanically fastened (screws) a minimum of 3 points at each joint of duct run. Not applicable if continuously welded. I. Where indicated, provide double wall ductwork. At the discharge and inlet of central station AHUs, provide the following minimum lengths of double wall ductwork: 1. Multizone: 0'supply air, 20' return air 2. Single Zone: 20' supply air, 20' return air 3. Variable Air Volume: 30'supply air, 20' return air 4. If branch ducts are necessary in the double wall main duct, provide double wall branch ducts to obtain the minimum lengths of double wall ductwork. J. Do not install ductwork within the building until the building is weather-tight. All ductwork damaged by weather shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner and/or Owner's Representatives and no time extension for the contractor. 3.2 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply, Return, General Exhaust, Galvanized Steel 2331 00 - 4 of 6 Ductwork DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Supply, Return, General Exhaust, Fibrous Glass Outside Air Kitchen Hood Exhaust Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel Dishwasher Exhaust Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steel, Fume Hood Exhaust Stainless Steel Outside Air Intake Steel DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Supply, Return, General Exhaust, 2 inch wg Outside Air VAV Secondary Supply 2 inch wg Supply, Return, General Exhaust, 2 inch wg Outside Air Dishwasher Exhaust 1 inch wg Fume Hood Exhaust 2 inch wg MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAUGES GAUGE MAXIMUM DUCT DIMENSION 26 1"to 12" 24 13"to 30" 22 31"to 54"' 20 55"to 60" 18 61" and above Above Fire-rated ceilings use minimum 22 gauge 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. B. Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. C. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. B. Protect equipment that may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. C. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. 2331 00 - 5 of 6 Ductwork DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 END OF SECTION 2331 00 - 6 of 6 Ductwork DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A: Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems B. SMACNA: Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards C. UL 33: Heat Responsive Links for Fire Protection Service D. UL 555: Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers E. UL 555S: Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00 B. Product Data: For each product used in this project, provide catalog data and installation instructions. C. Samples: Not required PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BALANCING DAMPERS A. Provide factory manufactured balancing dampers that meets or exceeds SMACNA standards, and as indicated. 1. Shop fabricated balancing dampers are NOT acceptable. B. For rectangular duct heights 10" or less, provide single blade balancing damper with the following features: 1. Frame: 22-gage galvanized steel, 3"wide. 2. Blade: 22-gage galvanized steel, maximum %8"gap between the blade and frame. 3. Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: W square axle shaft, secured tight to the blade; molded synthetic end bearings; locking hand quadrant. 4. Standoff Bracket, for externally insulated ducts, uses a 2" high with hand locking quadrant. 5. Performance specifications are based on Ruskin MD25. a. Nailor or other products satisfying the specifications are acceptable. C. For rectangular duct heights over 10", provide opposed blade balancing damper with the following features: 1. Frame shall be 16-gage galvanized steel channel with corner braces. 2. Blade shall be 8" maximum width, 16-gage galvanized steel. 3. Axles shall be W hex axle shaft, secured tight to the blade; molded synthetic bearings. 4. Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant, provide a W square control shaft with locking hand quadrant. 5. Standoff Bracket, for externally insulated ducts uses a 2" high, with hand locking quadrant. 6. Performance specifications are based on Ruskin MD35. a. Other products satisfying the specifications are acceptable. D. For round ducts, provide single blade balancing damper with the following features: 1. Frame: 20-gage galvanized steel, 7" long. 2. Blade: 20-gage galvanized steel, maximum %8"gap between the blade and frame. 3. Control Shaft/Hand Quadrant: W square axle shaft, secured tight to the blade; molded synthetic end bearings; locking hand quadrant. 4. Standoff Bracket, for externally insulated ducts, uses a 2" high, with hand locking quadrant. 5. Performance specifications are based on Ruskin MDRS25. a. Other products satisfying the specifications are acceptable. 23 33 00- 1 of 3 Air Duct Accessories DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Gravity backdraft dampers furnished with fans may be fan manufacturer's standard construction. B. For gravity relief air systems, provide counterbalanced, multi-blade, parallel action, gravity backdraft dampers with the following features: 1. Frame shall be 6063T5 extruded aluminum, 0.090"thick wall, mitered corners. 2. Blades shall be 0.025"thick aluminum blade, vinyl edge seals. 3. Bearings shall be Non-stick, non-corrosive, synthetic. 4. Counterbalance shall be adjustable and factory set to open at 0.05"WG differential pressure. a. Mechanical contractor shall verified factory setting during installation. 5. Performance specifications are based on Ruskin CBD2. a. Other products satisfying the specifications are acceptable. 2.3 AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Multi-blade device with airfoil blades aligned in the short dimension; steel construction with fixed blades. B. Where not possible to construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1.5 times the width of the duct on centerline, and where square throat radius or mitered elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. 1. Do not provide turning vanes in the kitchen hood exhaust system. C. Install the turning vanes in accordance with SMACNA construction standards. 2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. NFPA 90A, UL listed, fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric, minimum density 36 oz per sq. yd., approximately 3"wide, crimped into metal edging strip. C. Vinyl sheet a minimum 0.55"thick, 0.87 lbs per sq, ft 10-dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000-Hz range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings, and hinges. C. Demonstrate resetting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. D. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. 1. Air handler units with fan modules that are internally isolated do not require flexible connections. 2. Cover connections to medium and high-pressure fans with vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps. 23 33 00- 2 of 3 Air Duct Accessories DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 F. Provide duct access doors for inspection, cleaning and maintenance service at control dampers, backdraft dampers, fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, smoke dampers, smoke detectors, electric heaters, EMCS sensors and devices, and as indicated. 1. Access door size shall be at least 3/ the width of the duct. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 1. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. 2. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. 3. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements B. Demonstration and training shall be provided for the following equipment covered by this section: 1. Backdraft Dampers END OF SECTION 23 33 00- 3 of 3 Air Duct Accessories DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet exhaust fans B. Ceiling exhaust fans C. In-line exhaust or supply fans 1.2 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes C. AMCA 300 -Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices E. SMACNA- Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal B. Sound Ratings: tested to AMCA 300 and 301, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Provide product data on wall and roof exhausters, and ceiling and cabinet fans. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01 33 00. 1.5 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. B. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Authority. C. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout, for substantial completion details. D. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HAVC Commissioning, for detailed commissioning requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck B. Penn Ventilators C. Jenn Aire D. Broan E. Loren Cook F. ACME 23 34 23- 1 of 3 HVAC Power Ventilators DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 G. Twin City Fans 2.2 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with galvanized steel housing lined with '/2'-inch acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. C. Grille shall be molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enamel finish. D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts, and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected to achieve the required rpm with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. 2.5 IN-LINE EXHAUST OR SUPPLY FANS A. Fan shall be complete factory assembled unit and shall include housing, centrifugal fan wheel, adjustable V-belt drive, motor, disconnect switch and vibration isolation. B. Housing shall be heavy gauge, galvanized steel, with square duct mounting collars; 90° intake to discharge configuration is allowed. C. Wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined constructed of aluminum, with matched wheel and inlet cones. D. Motors shall be high efficiency, heavy-duty ball bearing type, mounted out of the air stream. E. Mount the fan shaft in permanently sealed and lubricated pillow block ball bearings. F. Each unit shall be equipped with the following accessories: 1. Self-acting adjustable back-draft damper 2. Hanging neoprene vibration isolators 3. Insulated housing and motor cover(only for outdoor ventilation air fans) 4. Motor cover/belt drive OSHA guard 5. Disconnect device 6. Fans shall be AMCA Certified and for both sound and air performance. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure roof exhausters with lag screws to roof curb. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Provide equipment schedule on drawings to include the following data: Manufacturer Model Fan Type Hood/Housing Capacity SP inch WG Drive Motor hp Sound (Sones) Sound Power 1 st Octave 2nd Octave 3rd Octave 4th Octave 5th Octave 6th Octave 23 34 23- 2 of 3 HVAC Power Ventilators DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 7th Octave 8th Octave Accessories 3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. System Functional Performance Testing is part of the Commissioning Process. 1. The Contractor shall perform the Functional Performance Testing and the Commissioning Authority shall witness and document the test. 2. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for functional performance tests and commissioning requirements. B. Systems Readiness Checklists shall be completed and submitted for each piece of equipment included in this section. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 1. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. 2. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. 3. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements. B. Provide demonstration and training for the following equipment covered by this section: 1. Cabinet and Ceiling Exhaust Fans 2. In-Line Exhaust or Supply Fans END OF SECTION 23 34 23- 3 of 3 HVAC Power Ventilators DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 40 00 HVAC AIR FILTERS PART GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES A. ANSI/UL 900: Test Performance of Air Filter Units B. ASHRAE 52: Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: For each filter used in this project, provide catalog data for filter media, support grid, enclosing frame, and performance data. C. Samples: Not required 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Filter media shall be ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class 2. B. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver filters to site in original factory boxes, labeled with manufacturer's identification. B. Store filters in original factory boxes, and protect from weather and construction traffic. C. Protect filters against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Air filters shall be min 2"thick, medium efficiency, pleated, disposable type. B. Each filter shall consist of non-woven cotton and synthetic fabric media, media support grid, and enclosing-frame. C. UL shall classify the filter for flammability as Class 2. D. Performance specification is based on Cam-Farr UL Class 2 30/30 filters. E. Filter media shall have an average efficiency of 25-30% and an average arrestance of 90-92% in accordance with ASHRAE 52, equivalent minimum MERV rating of 13. 1. The effective filter media shall be not less than 4.6 sq ft per 1.0 sq ft of filter face area. 2. The initial resistance shall not exceed 0.08"WG at 250 FPM (0.28"WG at 500 FPM). 3. The final resistance shall be capable of 0.9"WG. F. Media Support Grid shall be welded wire grid with an effective open area not less than 96% to support media. 1. Bond the grid to the filter media to eliminate the possibility of media oscillation and media pull away. 2. The grid shall allow total use of the filter media. G. Provide an enclosing frame of rigid, heavy-duty, high wet-strength beverage board, with diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and leaving sides of each pleat, to ensure pleat stability. 1. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack, thus, eliminating the possibility of air bypass. H. Provide new clean filter sets and use as follows: 23 40 00- 1 of 3 HVAC Air Filters DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Provide as many filter sets as required during construction. a. Do not use low efficiency filters during construction, filters to have minimum MERV rating of 8, check filters on a bi-weekly bases, and replace if dirt is blocking airflow. b. The mechanical contractor shall clean the coils prior to Substantial Completion if Architect, Owner or Owner's representative determine the coils require cleaning. 2. Provide one filter set for test and balance work. a. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate the installation of new filters prior to test and balance work with the test and balance contractor. 3. Provide second filter set as the spare set. a. Store filter set in closed original factory filter boxes within AHU room and mark the AHU number on the filter boxes. b. The mechanical contractor shall NOT use this filter set during construction. 4. On the date of Certificate of Occupancy, all HVAC equipment shall have fresh clean air filters. I. Provide filter pressure gage for each filter bank. 1. Refer to Section 23 05 19, Flow Meters, Gages, and Thermometers. 2.2 RETURN AIR GRILLES A. During construction, before system start-up remove any protective cover from opening and apply temporary filters over the return air grilles to minimize dust from entering the return air system. 1. Filter shall have a MERV rating of at least 8, check filters on bi-weekly bases, and replace if dirt is blocking airflow. 2. Provide as many filter sets as required during construction. 3. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate the removal of the temporary filters prior to test and balance work with the test and balance contractor. 2.3 EXHAUST AIR GRILLES A. During construction, before system start-up remove any protective cover from opening and apply temporary filters over the exhaust air grilles to minimize dust from clogging up the blades on the fan wheels. 1. Filter shall have a MERV rating of at least 8, check filters on bi-weekly bases, and replace if dirt is blocking air flow. 2. Provide as many sets of filters as required during construction. 3. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate the removal of the temporary filters prior to test and balance work with the test and balance contractor. 2.4 SUPPLY AIR GRILLES A. During construction, before system start-up remove any protective cover from opening and apply temporary filters over the supply air grilles to minimize dust from entering the supply duct system. 1. Filter shall have a MERV rating of at least 8 and check filters on bi-weekly bases and replace if dirt is blocking airflow. 2. Provide as many sets of filters as required during construction. 3. The mechanical contractor shall coordinate the removal of the temporary filters prior to test and balance work with the test and balance contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Air Handling Units: Install air-cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 23 40 00- 2 of 3 HVAC Air Filters DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Air Handling Units: Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets. C. Do not operate air-handling units or exhaust fans until filters are in place. END OF SECTION 23 40 00- 3 of 3 HVAC Air Filters DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 63 13 AIR COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. The General Requirements apply to the work to this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide material, equipment, labor, and supervision necessary to install air-cooled condensing units. B. Unit ratings, capacities, and characteristics shall be as scheduled on Mechanical Drawings. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Performance shall be in accordance with the applicable ARI Standards. B. Compressor motors, starters, wiring, and control wiring shall all conform to NEMA, UL, NEC, and local utility requirements. 1.4 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Condensing unit package B. Charge of refrigerant and oil C. Controls and control connections D. Refrigerant piping connections E. Motor starters F. Electrical power connections 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. B. Include schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and accessories required for complete system. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01 77 00. B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls, and accessories. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide 5-year extended replacement warranty (parts only) on compressor and factory pre- charged and sealed refrigerant system including condenser coils. B. First Year Warranty: Include material coverage for refrigerant compressors; condenser coils, fans, controls electrical devices and related system components. 1.8 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units. 23 63 13- 1 of 5 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils. 1.9 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. B. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Authority. C. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. D. Refer to Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout, for substantial completion details. E. Refer to Section 23 05 05 - HVAC Commissioning, for detailed commissioning requirements PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by one of the following: 1. Trane 2. Carrier 1. York 2. Lennox 3. Substitutions: 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units suitable for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, and screens. B. Construction and Ratings in accordance with ARI 210/240 1. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14 C. Provide energy Efficiency Rating (S)EER as prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE 90A and the "Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction", whichever is highest. D. See Schedule on Drawings for unit capacities, electrical characteristics, and performance criteria. E. Provide unit with a holding charge of refrigerant and oil. 2.3 CASING A. House components in welded frame with steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish. B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. C. Provide removable access doors or panels with piano hinges and quick fasteners. 2.4 CONDENSER COILS A. Coils: 1. Aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. 2. Provide sub-cooling circuits. 3. Air test underwater to 425 psig, and vacuum dehydrate. Seal with holding charge of refrigerant 4. Provide Coil Guard: Expanded metal or PVC coated steel wire. B. All condenser coils shall have corrosion protective coating. 1. Provide condenser coil coating. 23 63 13- 2 of 5 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Condensing coil manufacturer shall approve of coil coating materials to avoid warranty issues. C. All coating materials and methods must pass a minimum of 3000 hours of salt spray exposure in a testing performed by an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM B117.85. 1. The company providing coating process shall also provide a five-year coil limited warranty. 2.5 FANS AND MOTORS A. Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge. 1. Equip with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of casing. B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or 3- phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built in thermal overload protection. C. High efficiency motors as indicated. 2.6 COMPRESSORS A. Construction: Hermetic, scroll, or reciprocating type as scheduled with heat-treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage, suction and discharge valves, and sealing surface immersed in oil. B. Mounting: 1. Statically and dynamically, balance rotating parts and mount on spring rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. 2. Internally isolate hermetic units on springs. C. Lubrication System: Reversible, positive displacement oil pumps with oil charging valve, oil level sight glass, oil filter, and magnetic plug or strainer. D. Motor: Constant speed suction gas cooled with electronic sensor and winding over temperature protection, designed for across-the-line starting, furnish with starter. E. Crankcase Heater: 1. System evaporates refrigerant returning to crankcase during shut down. 2. Energize heater continuously even when compressor is not operating. F. Capacity Reduction Equipment: Provide suction valve unloaders, with lifting mechanism operated by electrically actuated solenoid valve, with unloaded compressor start; controlled from suction pressure when available as an option or when indicated in equipment schedule. 2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT A. Provide each unit with number of independent refrigerant circuits as indicated on plans, factory supplied and piped. Refer to Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping. B. For each refrigerant circuit, provide: 1. Filter dryer replaceable core type. 2. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 3. Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating pressure. 4. Insulated suction line. 5. Suction and liquid line service valves and gage ports. 6. Liquid line solenoid valve. 7. Charging valve. 8. Discharge line check valve. 9. Compressor discharge service valve. 10. Condenser pressure relief valve. 11. Accumulator as required by piping arrangement. C. If dual refrigerant circuits are used, circuit the AHU evaporator coil to provide individual circuits and expansion valves for each compressor, and individual piping runs installed. 23 63 13- 3 of 5 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.8 CONTROLS A. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250, containing power and control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection. B. For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter with dual pole contactor, minimum 3- minute (or manufacturer standard) anti-cycling time delay compressor overload relay, and control power transformer or terminal for controls power. 1. Provide manual reset current overload protection. 2. For each condenser fan, provide across-the-line starter with starter relay. C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating any one will shut down machine and require manual reset: 1. High discharge pressure switch (manual reset) for each compressor. 2. Low suction pressure switch (manual reset) for each compressor. 3. Oil Pressure switch (manual reset). D. The installing contractor shall perform any control field wiring required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. (Refer to Division 26) C. Install units on concrete base as indicated. D. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators. 1. The Contractor shall provide and install the following for each refrigerant circuit: a. Suction and liquid line filter dryer replaceable core type. b. A liquid line sight-glass and moisture indicator. c. Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating pressure. d. Insulated suction line e. Suction and liquid line service valves and gage ports. f. Charging valves g. Refrigerant and oil E. Refer to Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15 3.2 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD SERVICES A. Test refrigerant system for leaks including lines connecting the condensing unit with air handling unit. B. Prepare and start systems. C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. 1. Replace losses of refrigerant and oil. D. Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks quarterly during first year of operation. 1. Repair all leaks and replace losses of refrigerant and oil to meet manufacturer's specifications. 3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. System Functional Performance Testing is part of the Commissioning Process. 1. The Contractor shall perform the Functional Performance Testing and the Commissioning Authority shall witness and document the test. 2. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for functional performance tests and commissioning requirements. B. Systems Readiness Checklists shall be completed and submitted for each piece of equipment included in this section. C. Include the functional performance testing of Condensing Units as part of the Air-Cooled Split System Functional Performance testing. 23 63 13- 4 of 5 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. B. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. C. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. D. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements E. Provide demonstrations and training for all types of Air-Cooled Split Systems installed in this project. Record demonstrations and training; Provide recording to Owner with O&M delivery unless directed otherwise. END OF SECTION 23 63 13- 5 of 5 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 70 00 AIR HANDLING UNITS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. B. The General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide material, equipment, labor, and supervision necessary to install Air Handling Units. 1.3 STANDARDS A. Units shall have certified ratings complying with ARI Standard 430. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal data shall consist of drawings showing coil dimensions, construction materials, fan performance curves, coil capacity, horsepower, electrical characteristics, and installation instructions. B. Fan manufacturers shall furnish for approval for each fan certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis and the volume-pressure-horsepower characteristic curves from shutoff to free air delivery. 1.5 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. B. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Authority. C. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. D. Refer to Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout, for substantial completion details. E. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for detailed commissioning requirements 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Provide 5-year warranty for 10 horsepower or more motors, see section 23 05 13. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Air handling units shall be as manufactured by one of the following. 1. Trane 2. Carrier 3. York 4. McQuay 23 70 00- 1 of 4 Air Handling Units DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.2 GENERAL A. Unit shall be factory built and assembled with arrangements as indicated. B. Units shall have capacities, ratings and performance as scheduled. 2.3 CASING A. Construct the casing of the best quality galvanized steel reinforced for maximum rigidity with galvanized steel angle framework as required. 1. Each shall consist of a fan section, coil section, coil access sections, drain-pan, and a filter section. 2. Casings for coil section and all sections downstream from coil section shall be of the dual wall internally insulated type with a solid internal galvanized liner. B. Design the casing for the design pressure equal to the negative of the maximum static pressure differential between the highest peak on the selected fan characteristic curve and ambient pressure. 1. Furnish the casing with lifting lugs or other attachments to facilitate handling. C. Casing shall have removable panels to provide access to internal components. 1. Coils shall be removable without disassembly of unit. D. Condensate drain pans shall be stainless steel double wall construction and provided under the complete fan and coil section for horizontal units and under the complete coil section for vertical units, with drain connection on lower end. 1. If coil moisture carry-over is present drain pan shall extend to the section downstream from the coil. 2. Drain pans shall be insulated with 1" insulation between the two walls and the inner pan shall be coated with an EPR approved antibaterialogical agent, intercept or equal. 3. Drain pan shall be internally sloped to provide positive drainage of accumulated condensate. 2.4 FANS A. The unit manufacturer shall manufacture all fans and shafts. 1. Construct the fan wheels of galvanized steel. B. All units shall have externally mounted bearings and motors. 1. Internal bearings, with extended grease lines are permitted. C. Fan housing shall be die-formed with streamlined inlets and side sheets. 1. Bearings shall be grease lubricated ball bearings selected for an L-10 rating life of not less than 130,000 hours for direct connected service and not less than 42,500 for belt- connected service. D. Statically and dynamically, balance and factory test the fan unit. E. Fans shall be internally isolated for vibrations. F. Fan noise levels shall not exceed the specified performance. 2.5 COILS A. Furnish coils for cooling media as scheduled. B. Coils shall be aluminum fin copper tube type. 1. Fins shall have drawn, belled, collars bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. 2. Coils casings shall be galvanized steel. C. Use refrigerant cooling coils as listed in schedule, and shall be split with two individual circuits. 1. If using independent compressors in lieu of two speed compressors, use a four-circuited coil. D. Provide water detection shut off switch in the auxiliary drain pan to shut down unit on detection of water in pan. 23 70 00- 2 of 4 Air Handling Units DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.6 MOTORS AND DRIVES A. Motors shall be NEMA Standard, normal torque, 40°C rise, splash proof, of horsepower rating and electrical characteristics as scheduled on drawings. 1. Motors shall be of the high efficiency type. 2. For draw-thru Air Handling Units provide totally enclosed, weatherproof, factory epoxy- sealed type motors. Fan cooled feature in totally enclosed motors is not required. 3. For blow-thru Air Handling Units (motors upstream of cooling coils) provide splash proof motors. B. Provide drives rated at 1.25 x the motor horsepower rating. 1. Drives shall be adjustable speed for adjustment within plus or minus 10% of specified RPM. C. Mount the motor on an adjustable, spring isolated mount, suitable for adjusting belt tension and drive alignment. D. Furnish and install belt guards in accordance with OSHA requirements for all sheaves, exposed shafts, and belts. E. Motors used with a variable frequency drive shall be high efficiency and inverter duty rated. 2.7 INSULATION A. Double wall unit casings for coil section and all sections down stream from coil section shall have 2"thick insulation between the shells. B. Double wall sections shall be factory insulated to prevent sweating at all operating conditions. 2.8 FILTERS A. Provide manufacturers medium capacity filter section. B. Filter section shall incorporate full size hinged and gasketed access doors with a minimum of two lever type handles. C. Filters shall be as specified in Section 23 40 00 and installed prior to use of the unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall lay out exact unit location based upon coordinated ductwork shop drawings. 1. Fabricate unit supports as detailed on the drawings. B. The Contractor shall install units, make piping, and duct connections. C. Install chilled water or refrigerant piping, thermal expansion valves, sight glasses and similar refrigeration specialties on the same side as the motor access. D. Extend condensate drain line from the drain pan, through a trap, to a hub drain with a lip 1" above the finished floor. 1. The condensate drain shall terminate with a 1" air gap above the rim of the open hub drain. 2. Route the hub drain to a French drain or a storm water system, if connected to a roof storm water system a backwater valve is required. 3. Contractor shall provide sufficient height between drain pan and condensate drain trap to allow drainage against negative fan pressure. E. Install fire resistant flexible connectors in ducts at connections to units. 1. Flexible connectors shall be in accordance with NFPA 90A. F. Provide flexible pipe connectors at inlet and outlet piping to each air-handling unit. G. Provide chilled water thermometers and gauges at inlet and outlet piping for each air handler installed. H. Maintain access to all unit components that require maintenance. 1. Do not block coil or filter access doors, doors shall open at least 120°. 2. Provide adequate space for coil and filter pull space. 23 70 00- 3 of 4 Air Handling Units DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 I. Install all air handlers on housekeeping pad extending minimum 6" beyond the footprint of the unit. J. Provide vibration isolator pads between the AHU supports and housekeeping pad. 1. Air handlers without internal spring mounted blowers shall have external spring mounts. K. When adjustable pulley is set for the required airflow performance, replace it with fixed pulley. L. Install Division 26 wiring for motors contained inside the Air Handler Units with watertight conduit between motor and unit casing and seal both ends of conduit to prevent moisture intrusion. 1. Motors with multiple wires, make the electrical connections with mechanical fasteners (multi-cable connector blocks)that have external insulation. M. If installed, wire the AHU to immediately shut down upon activation of the fire alarm system. N. Water detection switch in auxiliary drain pan shall shut down the unit on detection of water in pan. 3.2 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. System Functional Performance Testing is part of the Commissioning Process. 1. The Contractor shall perform the Functional Performance Testing and the Commissioning Authority shall witness and document the test. 2. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for functional performance tests and commissioning requirements. B. Systems Readiness Checklists shall be completed and submitted for each piece of equipment included in this section. C. Include the functional performance testing of HVAC pumps as part of the Chilled Water System Functional Performance testing. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. 1. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel for instructing of operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. 2. Schedule the instruction in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. 3. Refer to Section 23 05 05, HVAC Commissioning, for further contractor training requirements. B. Provide demonstration and training for all equipment covered by this section and installed in this project. END OF SECTION 23 70 00- 4 of 4 Air Handling Units DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 23 73 13 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. B. The General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide materials,devices, labor, and supervision necessary for the installation of grilles, registers, and diffusers. B. Provide grilles, registers, and diffusers as per schedule. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062-Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. AMCA 500-Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ARI 650-Air Outlets and Inlets. D. ASHRAE 70- Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. SMACNA- HVAC Duct Construction Standard- Metal and Flexible. F. NFPA 90A- Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS 23 73 13 - 1 of 6 Grilles, Registers,Diffusers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART1 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLAQUE CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model OMNI or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Square and rectangular, square plaque diffuser to discharge air in four-way pattern except as indicated on plans. C. Frame:As indicated on plans. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. 2.2 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model TMS or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Round, stamped or spun, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectorizing baffles where indicated. Diffuser collar shall project not more than one inch (25 mm) above ceiling. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster ring and ceiling plaque. In suspended lay-in ceilings, provide 24"x 24" lay-in panel. C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish except as indicated on plans. 2.3 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model TDC or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Square and rectangular, multi-Iouverd diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern except as indicated on plans. C. Frame: Surface mount, Inverted T-bar or as indicated on plans. D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. 2.4 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 2373 13 -2 of 6 Grilles, Registers,Diffusers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Titus Model 350RS or RL or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum depth, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum spacing,with blades set at 45 degrees to horizontal face. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting. D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frames and 22 gage (0.80 mm) minimum blades with factory off-white enamel finish. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. 2.5 CEILING RETURN GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model PAR or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Perforated face, 3/16 inch diameter holes on 1/4 inch staggered centers and no less than 51%free area. C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish except as indicated on plans. 2.6 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model 300 RS or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum depth, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, double deflection. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting and gasket. D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frames and 22 gage (0.80 mm) minimum blades with factory off-white enamel. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.7 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 2373 13 - 3 of 6 Grilles, Registers,Diffusers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Titus Model 350 RS or RL or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch (19 mm) inimum depth, 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum spacing,with spring or other device to set blades. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with concealed mounting. D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frames and 22 gage (0.80 mm) minimum blades with factory off-white enamel finish or as shown on plans. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. 2.8 LOUVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Model EME6625D or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) Louvers and Dampers. b) Arrow. C) Empco. B. Type: 6 inch deep with vertically mounted blades, heavy channel frame, birdscreen with 1/2 inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch for intake. Incorporate structural support to withstand 100 MPH wind. C. Fabrication: 12 gage (2.50 mm)thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly,with Kynar 500 fluropolymer finish. Color to be selected by Architect. D. Mounting: Furnish with exterior flat flange for installation. 2.9 DRUM LOUVERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Titus Model DL or as shown on plans. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Duct mounted, long throw, adjustable blade and rotating drum supply louver. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with gasket and countersunk screw holes. D. Fabrication: Heavy extruded aluminum blades and drum. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key or screwdriver operator, operable from face. 2.10 ROOF HOODS A. Manufacturers: 2373 13 -4 of 6 Grilles, Registers,Diffusers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. Greenheck Model GRS. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) Cook. b) Acme, C) ILG. B. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible. C. Fabricate of aluminum, minimum 16 gage (1.50 mm) base and 18 gage (1.20 mm) hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood; birdscreen with 1/2 inch (13 mm) square mesh for exhaust and 3/4 inch (19 mm)for intake, and factory finish. D. Mount unit on minimum 12 inch (300 mm) high curb base with insulation. Pitch of curb to match pitch of roof. E. Make hood outlet area minimum of twice throat area. 2.11 PENTHOUSE ROOF HOODS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck WIH. 2. Other manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) Cook. b) Acme. C) ILG. B. Type: Low silhouette louvered penthouse roof hood for intake application. All aluminum construction with stormproof louvers with mitered corners, removable cover with fiberglass insulation liner to prevent condensation, low pressure drop, birdscreen, and roof mounting cu rb. C. Mount unit on minimum 12 inch high curb base with insulation. Pitch of curb to match pitch of roof. 2.12 SECURITY GRILLE A. Manufacturers: 1. Cook Model SG-SD. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. C) Krueger. B. Type: Suicide-deterrent security grilles designed for maximum security applications. Grille shall comply with the National Institute of Corrections guidelines for suicide prevention C. Frame: Angle steel frame shipped loose for welding. An accompanying sleeve shall be 3/16" thick and shall be stitch-welded to the face and along the entire length of all sleeve seams. Anchor bars positioned three inches from back of face plate on top and bottom of sleeve. D. Fabrication: Welded steel construction. E. Damper: Opposed blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel Slot 2373 13 - 5 of 6 Grilles, Registers,Diffusers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 operated from rear operated 2.13 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cook Model TBDI-30 (Supply),TBR-30 (Return). 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a) J&J. b) Metalaire. c) Krueger. B. Type: Modulinear duffuser with ice tong pattern controller designed for supply or return. Direction and volume of the discharge air can be adjustable. C. Frame: Heavy gauge extruded aluminum. Provide alignment pins where multiple sections are used to give a continuous slot appearance. D. Fabrication: Extruded aluminum with steel pattern controllers. E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, remote operable PART 2 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work of this section with other affected work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. F. Outside air intakes shall be permanently marked "Intake" in accordance with the 1999 Standard Building Code, Section 2810. END OF SECTION 2373 13 - 6 of 6 Grilles, Registers,Diffusers DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 00 10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services in connection with, or properly incidental to the furnishing of equipment, installing equipment and the construction of electrical systems as described in this Division of the Specifications and/or shown on the accompanying Drawings, or reasonably implied there from, except as hereinafter specifically excluded. B. Furnish all additional details or special construction as required for work indicated or specified in the division or work specified in other divisions. Furnish and install all material and equipment usually furnished with systems or required to complete and make operative the installation, whether specifically mentioned or not. C. Owner-furnished equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with manufacturer requirements. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Electrical Drawings are a combination of scale and symbolic representation of the electrical systems required to be installed. The drawings and specifications are based on qualified skilled craftsmen procuring and installing the work. The drawings include symbolic indication of branch circuit conductors, connections to devices, hook-up of electric powered equipment, etc. B. Division 26 Work includes proper routing of raceways, grouping of conductors, wiring to and hook-up of devices and equipment in accord with the total provisions of the specifications. Refer to the symbol schedule for the basis of the drawing representation. Symbols other than those in the schedule are explained elsewhere or are those commonly used in the industry. Listing of a symbol in the schedule does not imply that the symbol is used on the final contract documents. The electrical drawings indicate general locations of devices and equipment, but final locations shall be determined in reference to the Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. C. The Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications including all Supplements issued thereto, are a part of these Specifications and the accompanying Electrical Drawings, and shall be complied with in every respect. 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 2. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 REGULATIONS, PERMITS AND APPROVALS: A. The installation including all materials and equipment shall conform to the most recent NFPA 70 adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction; the applicable requirements of the utility companies supplying energy, communications and other services to the project; the laws of the City pertaining to electrical installation; and with all national, state and local codes and laws relating to construction, building and public safety. B. Each of the above regulations are minimum standards. Where the requirements of these minimum standards are less than or do not conflict with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall be followed. C. Obtain all permits and arrange for all inspections and approvals for the work including 2600 10 - 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 construction document review and site observations by the authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain certificates of inspection and acceptance and transmit these to the Architect as a condition of acceptance. Assume and pay all fees and other costs involved in obtaining the permits, inspection certificates and approvals as a part of Division 26 Work. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER SUBMITTAL: A. Submit Shop Drawings or fully descriptive catalog data for all items of materials and equipment proposed to be furnished and/or installed. Submit sufficient copies to provide reviewed copies as need to be returned plus three (3) copies for retention by the Architect per Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures. B. Submit on all Electrical Distribution Equipment, wiring materials, lighting fixtures and all components of communication, signal, protection and alarm systems. The submittal of free standing electrical equipment shall include scale drawings indicating the proposed layout of this equipment within the space allocated and the proximity of existing work, other electrical work, and work installed under other divisions of work. C. Submit sufficiently early to allow ample time for checking without delaying delivery of the materials to job site. A review of any submittal which results in a requirement to resubmit shall not be justified basis of work delay or extra cost. D. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not negate the Contractor's responsibility for deviations from the Drawings and Specifications unless, in writing, attention is specifically noted for such deviations at the time of submission and acceptance of the Architect is noted thereon. When attention is called to deviations from the Drawings and Specifications, state in letter of transmittal whether or not such deviations involve any change in contract time and cost. Errors of any kind associated with submittal shall be the responsibility of the installer of Division 26 Work. 1.5 STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL MATERIALS: A. Materials shall be new and free from defects and shall conform with the standards of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., in every case where such standards have been established. Evidence of such conformance shall be the UL label or "listing" by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. under Re-examination Service. B. The Specifications indicate a standard of quality for materials. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are used to designate materials or equipment to establish grade and quality. Where several manufacturers are named, the bid shall be based on those named manufacturer's products. Where only one manufacturer is named, unless stated otherwise, manufacturers of equal quality products will, however, be considered as substitutions only if submitted at least 5 days before the bid date. 1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. In the event substitutions are to be submitted for Owner review, furnish descriptive catalog material, test data, samples, etc., of both the specified material and the proposed substitute, as well as any other pertinent data necessary to demonstrate that the proposed substitutions are acceptable equals to the specified products. Substitutions: 01 60 00 - Product Requirements B. Substitutions shall not be made without written acceptance and the lack of acceptance shall not be basis of change in the work. 2600 10 -2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINTS AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS: A. For exposed hangers and supports: not provided with factory protected finish: Sherwin-Williams Kromik primer and Metalatex semi-gloss enamel. B. Materials and Equipment: Sherwin-Williams Kromik primer and Metalatex semi-gloss enamel. 2.2 NAMEPLATES: A. Nameplates shall be laminate plastic name plates with one-fourth inch (1/4") high letters engraved thereon which give contract identification, electric service characteristics and source of power on each of the items of equipment. Nameplates for items of equipment, on Life Safety System including transfer switches shall be red with white letters and all others shall be black with white letters unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Nameplates shall be fastened on with cadmium or plated screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION OF SITE: A. Visit the site of the proposed work and carefully examine the existing conditions and limitations thereof, and include in the bid all costs of any kind whatsoever which are incurred through limitations of the existing conditions. 3.2 SERVICE, CONNECTIONS AND PERMITS: A. Obtain all permits, inspections and approvals for the work including construction document review and site observations by the authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain certificates of inspection and acceptance and transmit these to the Architect as a condition of acceptance. All fees and other costs involved in obtaining these permits, inspections and approvals shall be assumed and paid under the Division of the Work. B. Arrange for all services and pay all costs whatsoever to completely install and place in operation these electrical systems. 3.3 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate work with that of other trades and adjacent projects to make proper connections at appropriate locations and times. Review the construction of other trades and adjacent projects to determine the physical needs and time requirements imposed in providing connections to them as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the project schedule. B. Coordinate work with that of the other trades so work may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping the other trades. Give precedence to lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, the electric conduit shall, in general, yield to all other trades. C. When any electrical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the project, the equipment may be operated providing that prior approval of the Owner is received and proper supervision of the equipment operation performed. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner. Regardless of whether the equipment has or has not been operated, properly maintain the equipment; and at the completion of the work, properly clean, adjust, and complete all items before final acceptance is requested. 2600 10 -3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. The Architect or others may, during the execution of the work, desire to make connections to or modifications of work installed in this Division of Work. Permission for the Architect or others to make these connections or modifications shall be granted without relieving responsibility for work installed under this Division of Work. 3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS AND BROCHURES: A. During the execution of work, maintain a complete set of reproducible drawings upon which all dimensional locations of equipment, deviations and changes in the work shall be recorded. These Record Drawings shall be in good condition and shall be marked "Record Drawings", signed, dated and transmitted with two sets of prints under a transmittal letter to the Architect upon completion and acceptance of the work and before final payment is made. Refer to Section 01 78 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. B. Unless otherwise noted, provide at a minimum the following data as applicable to the work shall be included in items furnished for use by the Owner: 1. Record Drawings as specified above and elsewhere. 2. Four (4) brochures of lighting fixtures with copies of data of each installed luminaire. Index each brochure indicating fixture type, manufacturer and catalog number, voltage, and lamping. 3. Four (4) brochures of Electrical Distribution Equipment with final drawings, operating instructions and maintenance instructions. 4. Four (4) brochures each for communication, signal protection and alarm systems installed with final installation and connection diagrams; and equipment operating, test and maintenance instructions. 3.5 CARE AND CLEAN UP OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: A. Protect each item and component of electrical equipment from moisture, concrete, mortar, paint, dust and other foreign materials from the time it arrives on the job site until installed, placed in service and accepted by Owner, using signs, barriers and other means where by others are made fully aware of the importance of protecting equipment from damage. B. Keep all electrical construction materials clean of all foreign materials from the time of arrival on the site until their installation. Time the installation of each item to avoid unnecessary exposure of the materials to destructive elements or destructive environment. Clean all installed materials of all foreign materials including concrete, mortar, spilled paint, and dust prior to final inspection. All unused electrical construction materials shall be removed from the site. C. After the installation is complete and before equipment is energized, thoroughly clean the interior and exterior of all equipment and materials. After the building is completed and cleaned, arrange for a power outage on each item of equipment and repeat the cleaning. This cleaning shall be performed just before final inspection. Each component shall be cleaned with air pressure, vacuumed and wiped clean of all dust and other foreign material. Components shall be cleaned of all oxidation. Any portion needing touch-up finishing and/or protective coating shall be so finished to equal the specified finish on the product. D. Provide for the removal of all unused, scrap, material containers and other rubbish or trash resulting from Division 26 Work from within and around all work and work areas on a basis that it will not interfere with other trades, other work or the completion of any work. 3.6 PAINTING AND PROTECTION: A. Electrical equipment such as primary switches, switchboards, panelboard fronts, motor control centers and transformers shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Finishes marred in transit or during installation shall be refinished under this Division of Work to present a neat, workmanlike appearance equal to the factory finish. 2600 10 -4 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Except as elsewhere required, painting of equipment, boxes, conduit, etc., furnished under this Contract will be performed under another division of work. Clean electrical work of all trash, dirt, marks, and other foreign materials under this Division of Work prior to the application of finishes. C. Electric work in areas of the construction to remain unpainted shall be protective finished under this Division of Work as follows unless indicated otherwise: 1. Paint all exposed and non-rust inhibited hangers and supports not provided with a factory finish with primer and two (2) coats of enamel. 2. Material and equipment with suitable factory-applied finishes may be left unpainted provided the Architects' approval to do so is obtained. Prime and paint material and equipment that does not obtain such approval with two (2)coats of semi-gloss enamel. D. Painting in finished areas of the construction where finished coatings are applied under other divisions of work shall be performed under other Division of Work and shall include: 1. All exposed hangers and supports and all exposed conduits and boxes with a coat of primer, and two (2) coats of semi-gloss enamel and all panel boards and other cabinets with two (2)coats of semi-gloss enamel. 2. Concrete foundations with one (1) coat of masonry paint and one (1) coat of enamel. 3. Equipment with suitable factory-applied finishes left unpainted provided Architect approval is obtained prior to beginning of painting in the area.Material and equipment that does not obtain such approval shall be primed and painted two (2) coats of enamel. E. Painting done shall be in colors designated by the Architect. Successive coats of paint shall be of different shades. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Do all cutting necessary for the installation of Division 26 Work. Cutting shall be carefully and neatly done so as not to damage or cut away more than necessary. B. Where Division 26 workmen damage or cut away work excessively, patching will be performed as a part of Division 26 Work. Patching will be by craftsman experienced in performing this type of work. 3.8 NAMEPLATES: A. Install nameplates which give contract drawing identification and electric service characteristics on equipment unless specifically indicated otherwise including switch gear, switch boards, transformers, panel boards, and main control cabinets for alarm systems. Typed directories shall be provided for branch panel boards. B. In each case where compartments, equipment, etc., are required to be "labeled" or "identified", it shall be construed that nameplates are to be installed. C. Locate nameplates on the exterior face of the equipment so as to be clearly visible when the equipment is in place. D. Fasten nameplates on with screws except contact-type permanent adhesive shall be used where screws cannot or should not penetrate enclosure or substrate. 3.9 TESTS: A. On completion of the work, make voltage, resistance and ground tests of all wiring installed under this Contract. B. Such tests shall show results in accordance with the requirements of the Code. See specific items for other specific test requirements. C. Any defect found shall be repaired under this Contract to the satisfaction of the Architect. 2600 10 -5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.10 GUARANTEE: A. Warranty all work done and all materials and equipment furnished to be free from defects. B. Promptly repair or replace defective work, material and equipment without charge to the Owner at a schedule suitable to the Owner. C. The warranty shall be for a period of one year after acceptance for beneficial use by the Owner unless otherwise indicated elsewhere. END OF SECTION 2600 10 -6 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 00 ACCESS DOORS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide access doors in wall or ceiling locations as required or shown for access to motors,junction boxes, fire alarm equipment, telecom equipment and all other electrical equipment requiring maintenance, adjustment or operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS: A. Furnish Inryco/Milcor, Acudor, Elmdor, or equal 24"x24"galvanized steel doors with 16 gauge frames, 14-gauge panels and 22-gauge casing head. Provide continuous concealed hinges and flush vandal proof lock. Use Style K access doors for plastered surfaces, Style M for masonry or gypboard surfaces. Use Style AP for acoustical plaster ceiling, with 18-guage panel. 2.2 FIRE RATED ACCESS DOORS: A. Furnish Inryco/Milcor, Acudor, Elmdor, or equal, UL listed, 1-1/2 hour Label "B", 24"x24" galvanized steel access doors with 16-gauge steel frames, and 20-gauge insulated sandwich-type door panel. Provide door with continuous concealed hinge and vandal proof and latching mechanism. 2.3 FINISHED AREAS: A. Paint access doors where located in finished areas per Architectural. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION: A. Coordinate with Architectural divisions prior to purchase and installation and install all doors required. Coordinate with other divisions to locate access doors for ease of operation and maintenance of concealed equipment. B. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 2601 00 - 1 ACCESS DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 10 RACEWAYS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install complete systems of raceways for the installation of electrical conductors and other materials as specifically indicated. B. Provide complete raceway systems for each conductor of electric power, to be installed in this division of the work and for other work where so indicated except as specifically indicated otherwise. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made apart of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. See Section 26 01 90 for Supporting Devices. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete information including manufacturer, material, and finish on each type of raceway and supports to be installed. See Section 01 30 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Each raceway shall bear the UL Label where UL Standards have been established for the type of raceway being provided. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Each raceway shall be suitably protective coated for the installation and each portion of the protective coating that is damaged during receiving, handling and installation shall be refinished equal to factory protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Raceways include conduits, ducts, wireways, gutters, boxes, fittings, and similar items as indicated in other sections of the work. B. Raceways fabricated for special pull boxes, junction boxes, gutters, and similar connections shall be code-gauge steel fully rust inhibited and finish painted to match adjacent switch-gear. Interiors shall be accessible through screw covers. Supports and interior protection shall be provided for conductors. 2.2 SLEEVES: A. Sleeves shall be galvanized steel, formed to meet the size and shape of the raceway to pass through the sleeve. B. Sleeves for conduits through exterior walls shall be galvanized steel, Schedule 40 pipe or conduit. C. Sleeves for conduits through interior walls that are not subject to moisture may be 2601 10 - 1 RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 non-metallic conduit. D. Sleeves through waterproof walls, floors and roofs shall be provided with water-stop flanges at the point of waterproofing membrane. E. Sleeves through waterproof floors shall be as specified for exterior walls below grade except that the collar shall be located at the level of the waterproofing membrane. F. Sleeves through the roof shall be as specified for waterproof floors plus a galvanized iron pitch pan around the sleeve. G. Sleeves through fire-rated construction shall be non-combustible. 2.3 PITCH PANS: A. Pitch pans shall be galvanized steel pans of the shape of the raceway passing through the waterproofing membranes, of the size to provide 1" to 2" space between the outside of the raceway and the vertical side of the pan and of a depth to be set on the waterproofing membrane and extend 1" above the finished roof. 2.4 SMOKE AND FIRE STOP SEALANT: A. Smoke and fire stop sealant caulk shall be 3M Company Type or pre-approved equal. Larger openings shall be stuffed with 3M Company fire barrier composite in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Silicone foam penetration sealant shall be as approved for the installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Each raceway shall be suitably supported from, installed and aligned with the main structural components of the building. B. Raceways shall be installed to avoid interference with work of other trades. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING: A. Raceways will be cleaned both internally and externally of all dirt, debris, and other foreign materials. Raceways in areas to be finish-painted shall be cleaned properly prior to the painting. Raceways not indicated to be finish painted on the job shall be protected from foreign objects and materials during construction and cleaned and touch-up coated before completion of the work. 3.3 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS: A. Furnish and install sleeves in forms of walls, floor slabs, partitions and beams for the passage of raceways. Sleeves shall be securely fastened in position and trimmed to be flush with construction. B. Conduits in above grade outside walls shall be installed in the center of sleeves and the annular space filled with Oakum and sealed with asphalt. Sleeves through interior walls shall be filled with wall sealing material. Raceways passing through sleeves shall be fitted on each side of each interior wall with a round galvanized steel flange. Raceways that pass through waterproofed walls shall be sealed to forbid water passing through the conduit. C. Route wireways, and/or groups of conduits which pass through floors or interior walls through blocked out openings. After installation of raceways, fill the entire blocked-out area with material compatible with the floor or wall penetrated before finishing treatment is applied. Where fire and/or smoke rated construction is penetrated, penetrations shall 2601 10 -2 RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 be sealed in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. The completed installation shall maintain the fire-rating integrity of the construction. D. Furnish and install and coordinate with the Installer of the roof to provide pitch pans for all small raceways and curbed openings with flashing and counter flashing for large Division 26 Work passing through the roof. END OF SECTION 2601 10 -3 RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 11 CONDUIT& FITTINGS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnishing and installing of complete systems of electrical conduits as a part of the raceway systems for installation of conductors for electrical systems. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for electrical work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. See Section 26 01 90 for Supporting Devices. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturers' specifications data on each type and manufacture of conduit and fitting proposed to be furnished and/or installed on the project. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Conduits shall be in accord with ANSI Standard C 80. B. Each length of conduit shall bear the UL Label. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS: A. Rigid metallic conduit shall be standard hot-dipped galvanized mild rigid steel. Conduit shall have galvanized threads. Each length shall be provided with a coupling and ends without couplings shall be furnished protected with a suitable covering. All bends in conduit one and one-quarter inch (1-1/4") in size and larger shall be made with factory manufactured elbows. Rigid metallic conduit shall be equal to Republic Galvite Rigid Steel Conduit. B. Locknuts and bushing shall be galvanized steel or approved equal molded canvas bakelite bushings may be used for 2"trade size. Bakelite insulated, lined steel bushings may be used for conduits two and one-half inches (2-1/2") and larger. 2.2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Electrical metallic tubing shall be standard galvanized. B. Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be steel compression type with steel gland nuts. Connectors shall be insulated throat type. Cast metal, set screw or indentor fittings are prohibited. 2601 11 - 1 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS: A. Flexible metal conduit shall be spirally wound galvanized steel. B. Terminators of flexible steel conduit shall be T& B or equal "Tite-Bite" insulated connectors and T& B or equal, "Tite-Bite" combination couplings. 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS: A. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be light grey color. B. Terminators shall be insulated throat screw-in ground cone connectors. 2.5 SPECIAL FITTINGS: A. Split couplings shall be O.Z. or equal, Manufacturing Company Type SP. B. Expansion joints shall be O.Z. or equal, Manufacturing Company Type AX expansion joints with Type AJ bonding jumpers. C. Pull rope shall be 3/16" polyester stranded JET LINE rope. 2.6 RIGID PVC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS: A. Codes and standards shall conform with U.L.-651 and NEMA TC-2 and shall be listed and labeled by the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. B. PVC conduit and fittings shall be Schedule 40 unless marked Schedule 80, equal to Carlon systems. They shall be designed for use under ground, shall be non-conductive and shall assure a safe system. Conduits and fittings shall be non-corrosive, impervious to most chemicals, provide lower expansion and contraction features, and shall be suitable for direct earth burial or encasement in concrete. C. PVC conduit and fittings shall be rated for 90 degree centigrade conductors or cable, and for use in direct sunlight. 2.7 RIGID PVC FITTINGS: A. Codes applicable to PVC conduit shall also apply to PVC Fittings. 1. Expansion couplings equal to Carlon E945 or E955 as required. 2. Bell ends equal to Plus 80 or 40 plain bell for use with non-metallic solvent welds. 3. Standard couplings socket type for solvent cement attachment. 4. PVC rigid adaptors E942 or E943 threaded to metallic systems and socket attachment by solvent cement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL SELECTION: A. Raceways shall be standard galvanized steel rigid metal conduit unless otherwise indicated. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used for raceways above furred ceilings, within dry wall partitions, exposed in rooms with exposed construction and in mechanical and electrical rooms for sizes of four inch (4") and smaller. C. Wiring connections to motors, transformers, or other devices which are subject to vibration or require adjustment shall be flexible metallic conduit. The flexible conduit shall be more than 12 diameters but less than 18 diameters in length. Where these connections are outdoors, or in damp locations, or are connections to any kitchen or laundry type equipment, liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used. D. Wiring to each recessed lighting fixture shall be run in an independent length of flexible conduit extended from an accessible junction box located above the ceiling. The flexible conduit shall be of sufficient length to allow the connection point to the fixture to drop at 2601 11 -2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 least 12" below the finished ceiling, and shall be at least 48"long but not more than 72" long. E. Recessed lighting fixtures which have UL approved prewired circuit junction boxes and fixture wire extensions may be used and wired directly to the branch circuit runs without the added flexible conduit connections. F. PVC Schedule 40 conduit shall be provided underground and under building supported by approved hangers. Conduit shall not be laid on top of the ground with no supports. G. Elbows shall be of the same materials as the conduit. Elbows in EMT and small rigid conduits may be job-fabricated with a bender made specifically for the purpose. H. Conduits shall be sized as indicated on the drawings and as required to accommodate the wires to be pulled into the conduit. Conduit shall not be less than three-quarters inch (3/4") in size except EMT for branch circuit runs may be one-half inch (1/2") and three-eighths inch (3/8")flexible metallic conduit may be used for individual connections to recessed lighting fixtures. 3.2 CONDUIT: A. Run conduits concealed from view in all areas except in electrical and mechanical equipment rooms. Run at levels and locations to avoid interference with the structure, finished ceilings, walls and all lines of other trades requiring grading of runs. Coordinate with other trades to allow available spaces to be used in the most efficient and workman like manner. In general, space and routing requirements of all other trades shall take precedence over the conduit installation. B. Route exposed conduits parallel with or at right angles to building walls and neatly rack. Carefully lay out conduit proposed to be run within the structure such as floors, beams, roof, or walls to avoid building up the density of conduits too excessive for the construction. Relocate conduits when excessive build-up occurs. C. Install conduits out of close proximity to any potentially hot device, any steam pipe, hot water pipe or other heating duct or appliance. Conduit shall not be run within three inches (3")of the exterior insulation of such device, pipe or duct, except in crossing, and such crossing shall be at least one inch (1")from the cover of the device, pipe or duct crossed. D. Place conduits through the roof or exterior walls in time to allow the trade to seal around the raceways as work is installed. Conduits through roof shall run through galvanized pitch pans. E. Cover each end of each conduit with an approved capped bushing as soon as the conduit is installed to prevent entry of foreign material. Conduits shall be dry and clean before wires are pulled. F. Locate junction boxes and raceways above accessible ceilings such as lay-in ceiling to provide adequate space for recessed fluorescent fixtures of the type specified elsewhere to be installed, in any place in the ceiling without relocating the installed raceways, boxes or supports now or in the future. G. Arrange conduit runs within building interiors to be no longer than 80 feet between pull or junction boxes, cabinets, or circuit interrupting device enclosures unless there is no direction change and only a straight-in-line pull of wire is involved. In such straight-in-line runs between boxes, cabinets or devices, runs not exceeding 100 feet in length may be made. H. Non-Metallic conduit installed outdoors under concrete slabs or walkways shall have 24 inches cover and may be in contact with the earth. Conduit service laterals installed under driveways, or roadways shall be encased in reinforced concrete. Support runs on PVC spacers 5'-0" center-to-center and encase in reinforced concrete duct banks. Reinforcing shall be#4 deformed longitudinal bars, one each corner, with#3 stirrups tied at 1'-0" reinforcing concrete shall cover bar minimum 2 inches around each corner face. Non-metallic conduit installed indoors under slabs shall have 12 inches cover. Non- Metallic conduit installed in crawl spaces shall be supported by approved hangers. 2601 11 -3 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.3 FITTINGS: A. Install double locknuts and a bushing at each rigid conduit termination except for terminations into threaded hubs. B. Wherever standard threaded couplings cannot be used, split couplings may be used. C. Provide expansion joints in conduits at all building expansion joints and wherever else the length of run requires. D. Provide expansion joints on all underground conduit where it rises above grade. Expansion joint shall be same material as underground conduit. E. Coat all threaded connections subject to moisture or under ground with cold galvanizing before making connection up. 3.4 PULL ROPE: A. Install a pull rope with each end properly marked for use and termination of the other end in each conduit installed and in which no conductors are installed under this Division of Work. END OF SECTION 2601 11 -4 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 13 CABLE TRAYS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install complete system of electrical cable tray as a part of the raceway systems for support of conductors for power, telcom, fire alarm, and other electrical cables. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for electrical work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on tray sections, fittings, offsets, elbows, tees, etc. to be furnished. See Section 01 30 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Submit manufacturers layout drawing plan incorporating the tray within the project including spacing of supports and loading data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Cable Trays shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards Publication VE-1 and shall bear the label of the Underwriters Laboratories', Inc. Cable Trays shall be UL classified as equipment grounding conductors. See Section Substitutions: 01 60 00 - Product Requirements B. Each tray length, fitting, offset, etc., shall be UL classified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CABLE TRAY AND FITTINGS: A. Straight sections and fittings, side rails and bottom members shall be extruded from Aluminum. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, tray shall be ladder type consisting of two (2) longitudinal members (side rails)with bottom members (rungs)welded to the side rails. Radius fittings shall be measured at the center of the tray's width. B. Bottom shall be 6 inch continuous rung spacing, unless specified otherwise on drawings, and shall have a minimum cable bearing surface of 1 inch (1")with radius edges. No portion of the Rung shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails. C. Trays shall have an overall nominal depth of four 4 inches, unless specified otherwise on the drawings, with a minimum usable loading depth of three (3) inches. D. Straight Sections side rails shall be 1-beam, supplied in lengths of twelve (12)and twenty-four(24)feet. Width shall be twenty-four(24) inches, unless specified otherwise on drawings. E. Fitting radius shall be twenty-four(24) inches. Side rails of straight sections and fittings shall be compatible so that standard splice plates can be used to join straight sections 2601 13- 1 CABLE TRAYS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 and fittings. Fittings shall have minimum three (3) inch tangents beyond the curved section to accommodate the standard splice plates. F. Splice plates shall be of the bolted type using either square neck or ribbed neck carriage bolts and serrated flange lock nuts. The resistance of fixed splice connections between an adjacent section of tray shall not exceed 0.00033 OHMS. G. The cable tray shall be designed so that a splice plate located anywhere along the span shall not decrease the strength of the cable tray system. H. Splice plates shall be furnished with straight sections and fittings, and shall be included in unit prices. 2.2 LOADING CAPACITIES: A. Cable tray shall be capable of carrying a uniform distributed load of 125 lbs. per lineal foot with a safety of 1.5, when supported as simple span and tested per NEMA VE1-4.01. B. In addition to the uniformly distributed load, the cable tray shall support 200 lbs. concentrated load at midpoint of span without permanent distortion to the cable tray. Load and safety factors shall be applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. Cable tray deflection shall be limited to 0.48 inches. 2.3 MATERIALS: A. Specified tray and accessories are as manufactured by Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. Equal tray as manufactured by Chalfonte, Cope or Square D Company are acceptable substitutes. B. Cooper B-Line catalog numbers for the 24"x4" tray are as follow: 1. Straight Sections 24A06-24-144 or 24A06-24-240 2. Tees 24A06-24-HT24 3. Horizontal Bends 24A06-24-90HB24 4. Support Fitting 24A06-24-CSF24 5. Splice Plates 24A06-1004 6. Conduit Straps Series 9SS4 7. Conduit-To-Tray Adaptor Series 92N-1158 8. Trapeze Hanger B22-32 Channel 9. Hold-Down Clamps 92N-1202 10. Threaded Rod ATR-1/2 as Req'd. Provide part numbers as required if the drawings specify a tray of other size. PART 3 EXECUTION A. Tray shall be supported with bottom of tray 8" above ceiling unless shown otherwise. B. Where tray is shown to be exposed within the using spaces, install tray at levels and locations to avoid interference with the structure, finished ceilings, walls, and existing lines or ducts. Coordinate tray installation with the owner's representative and the architect to allow available spaces to be used in the most efficient and workmanlike manner. C. Route tray parallel with or at right angles to building walls. Install tray out of close proximity to any potentially hot device, steam pipe, hot water pipe, or other heating device. Tray shall not be run within three (3) inches of the exterior insulation of such pipe, device, or duct. D. Where tray crosses building expansion joints furnish and install Cooper Industries 24A06- 1014 expansion plates and 9A-1600 laminated bonding jumper. END OF SECTION 2601 13-2 CABLE TRAYS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 20 WIRE AND CABLE -600 VOLTS AND UNDER PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install electrical wires and cables for the distribution of electric power, controls, grounding and signals for the electrical systems. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturers' specification data on each type of conductor to be supplied to the job. B. Include proposed colors, color markings and other identification as a part of the submittal. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electrical conductors shall be UL listed and bear the UL label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS: A. Wires and cables shall have conductors of soft-drawn annealed copper having a conductivity of not less than 98%of that of pure copper. B. Where not specifically indicated otherwise, wire and cable insulation type shall be as follows: 1. For general use-Type THHN or THWN, 600 volt. 2. For branch circuits of No. 12 and No. 10 AWG -Type THHN, 600 volt. 3. For control wiring -Type THHN 600 volts, No. 14 AWG minimum size. 4. Wiring run underground -Type THHN/THWN, or XHHW 600 Volt. 5. For fixture wiring -Type AF, 300 volts, No. 14 AWG minimum size. 6. For branch circuit wiring run in fluorescent fixture channels - Type THHN, 600 volts, No. 12 AWG minimum size. 7. See other sections of work for alarm communications and other low-energy systems wiring. 8. All communication, and low voltage control wire run in plenum above ceilings and not protected by conduit shall be teflon coated plenum cable as required by code. 9. Service and/or feeder wiring to panelboards may be XHHW at the Contractors option. C. Wire shall be solid for No. 10 and smaller and stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. D. All wire and cable shall be factory-color coded. Colors for each phase and neutral shall be used consistently throughout each system. The following color codes shall be used and maintained throughout the system: 260120 - 1 WIRE AND CABLE—600 VOLTS AND UNDER DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 120/208V, 277/480V, OR 120/240V SYSTEMS Phase A Black Orange Phase B Red Brown Phase C Blue Purple Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green Isolated Ground Green w/Tracer Green with Tracer Switch Legs Yellow On wires No. 6 and larger and where factory color is not available, wires and cables shall be color-coded by a one inch (1") wide band of colored Scotch tape on ends of each conductor, or by coating a 3" band at the end of the cable and in each pull box with brilliant waterproof lacquer. 2.2 TERMINATIONS, SPLICES AND TAPS: A. Cable terminations, splices and taps for copper conductors shall be: 1. For Terminations-O. Z. Manufacturing Company or equal, Type XLH. 2. Splices and Taps - O. Z. Manufacturing Company or equal, clamp-type solderless connectors except splices and taps for No. 8 AWG and smaller conductors may be Scotchlock Spring Connectors, Buchanan "B" cap, Ideal Wing Nuts or T& B "Piggy" connectors. 2.3 SUPPORTS: A. Supports for wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes, wireway and junction boxes shall be cable clamps and cable ties. B. Supports in vertical feeders shall be two-piece conduit type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR SELECTION: A. The minimum size of wire shall be No. 12 AWG except as noted otherwise on the Drawings or specified herein. All branch circuit home runs over 100 feet from panel, measured along the length of the raceway, shall be wired with No. 10 AWG minimum. B. The Drawings and Schedules generally indicate the number of wires in a conduit. Provide the proper number of wires in each conduit to complete the entire electrical system. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Route each conductor through an approved Electrical Raceway. Pull conductors into conduit only after all conduits and outlet boxes are permanently in place. Pull wires or strings shall be inserted only after the raceway installation is complete. B. Run feeders and mains continuously without splice from line to load terminals and identify phases in each pull box and in the qutters of each switchboard and panelboard in which they connect. Splices in feeders may be made only where designated on the Drawings or where specific prior approval is given. C. Neatly train, control and circuit wiring in cabinets, panels, pull boxes, wireways, and junction boxes and tie with T & B Ty-Rap nylon cable ties. Clamp or fasten control or circuit cabling in cabinets or other equipment with non-metallic nylon T & T Ty-Rap cable clamps and mounting brackets. 26 01 20 -2 WIRE AND CABLE—600 VOLTS AND UNDER DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 D. Install cable supports per N.E.C. in all vertical feeders and in boxes provided for the feeders where not terminated in electrical panels or equipment within code distances. Supports shall be of the two-piece conduit type, which clamp each individual conductor firmly and tightens due to weight of cable. 3.3 TERMINATIONS, SPLICES AND TAPS: A. Connections of conductors to terminals shall be made by pressure connections. Solder joints will be permitted only for low voltage controls. Joints and splices shall be made with clamp type solderless connectors and insulated with rubber and friction tape or Scotch No. 33 plastic tape. Spring connectors may by used for splicing No. 8 AWG or smaller conductors. 3.4 SUPPORTS: A. Install supports to hold conductors in place in each panelboard, cabinet, pull box,junction box and wire-way. B. Install cable supports in vertical runs of conductors in cabinets and pull boxes. END OF SECTION 26 01 20 -3 WIRE AND CABLE—600 VOLTS AND UNDER DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 31 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install junction and pull boxes where indicated or where necessary for installation of the wiring systems. B. Secure prior approval of the Architects for locations of all boxes not specifically located on the drawings. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the Work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. See Section 26 01 90 for Supporting Devices. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on each specifically fabricated junction or pull box. Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Junction and pull boxes shall be flush or surface type as indicated on the drawings or as required to fit into the building construction. Junction and pull boxes shall have screw covers. Small junction boxes,100 cubic inches and smaller, for control or branch circuit wiring, shall be as specified for outlet boxes and with blank covers. B. Junction and pull boxes installed in walls and ceiling spaces shall be code-gauge galvanized steel with galvanized steel covers. C. Junction and pull boxes installed in floors shall be galvanized malleable cast iron with gasketed covers. D. Junction and pull boxes installed outdoors shall be weatherproof with watertight gasketed covers fastened with corrosion resistant screws. E. Except as otherwise indicated, boxes shall be not less than code requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install junction and pull boxes in a neat workmanlike manner and support in accord with the provisions set forth elsewhere for panelboards and for hangers and supports. B. Arrange for raceways to enter boxes only in places specifically planned for raceways in the sizing and construction of the cabinets. C. Provide auxiliary conductor supports in large boxes per N.E.C. 370-18 where conductors must be supported. 2601 31 - 1 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.2 LABELING: A. Conductors passing through the boxes shall be marked as to phase. END OF SECTION 2601 31 -2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 34 OUTLET BOXES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install suitable outlet boxes for lighting fixtures, devices, empty raceway devices, small junction boxes, and other locations as required by the installation. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit Manufacturers' specification data on each type of box and trim to be furnished to the job. Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Outlet boxes except where otherwise specifically indicated or required, shall be of one-piece or welded assembly construction. Outlet boxes shall be with covers of the same manufacture as the box and selected to meet the conditions of the installation. B. Outlet boxes shall be equal to the following Appleton types, unless noted otherwise. Where more conduits enter the boxes, structural conditions interfere, or wiring requires more space, larger boxes of similar construction shall be used. Multi-gang boxes for switches of different voltages shall be provided with interior barriers. 1. In dry walls for single and two-gang outlets, Type 4S and 4SD with No. 846 and 847 covers not more than 1" high and boxes specified for masonry for 3 or more gangs. Where boxes serve one wiring device a single gang handy box may be used. 2. In concrete block or similar masonry walls, No. M1-250, M2-250 or M3-250 for 1, 2 and 3 gang outlets in 4" thick walls, No. M1-350 for 1, 2 and 3 gang outlets in thicker walls and the same series for more gangs in common boxes in similar walls. 3. In poured concrete, plaster and similar masonry walls, No. 4S and 4SD boxes with No. 846 covers for single gang outlets, No. 2G-5075 boxes with No. 2GC-75 covers for 2 gang outlets and corresponding G-5075 boxes and G C-75 covers for 3, 4, 5 and 6 gang outlets. Covers shall be maximum of 1" high. 4. In concrete ceilings, Type O C R boxes and O C P covers. 5. In other ceilings, Type 4/0 and 4/OD boxes. Outlet boxes for surface or pendant lighting fixtures shall have 3/8"fixture studs. 6. In poured concrete floors, individual floor boxes shall be watertight, fully adjustable with threaded conduit openings, Wiremold 880CS series, cast iron box with brass 828R plate for receptacle and 829STC plate for Telcom outlets, brass carpet or tile flange as required by Architectural. Provide multiple gang boxes with multiple 1" conduit openings as required by drawings. 2601 34 - 1 OUTLET BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 7. Combination floor boxes shall be cast iron floor box with two NEMA 5-20R normal ground ivory receptacle and 1" PVC conduit, two communication brackets with four RJ opening knockouts and 1 1/4" PVC conduits each, and access plate with flooring insert areas. Provide flanged plate with carpet inserts for carpeted floor areas and flangeless plates with ceramic tile inserts for ceramic tile areas. Wiremold RFB4-CI-1/CIHT-D/CIHT-D/CILT-4TKO/CILT- 4TKO/S36CCTCAL (Aluminum Flanged Plate For Carpet) Wiremold RFB4-CI-1/CIHT-D/CIHT-D/CILT-4TKO/CILT- 4TKO/S37CCTCAL (Aluminum Flangeless Plate for Ceramic Tile) Refer to Architectural for exact location. 8. Combination boxes with Isolated Ground receptacle shall be cast iron floor box with one NEMA 5-20R normal ground ivory receptacle and 1" PVC conduit, one NEMA 5-20RIG isolated ground orange receptacle and 1" PVC conduit, two communication brackets with four RJ opening knockouts and 1 '/4" PVC conduits each, and access plate with flooring insert areas. Provide flanged plate with carpet inserts for carpeted floor areas and flangeless plates with ceramic tile inserts for ceramic tile areas. Wiremold RFB4-CI-1/CIHT-D/CIHT-D/CILT-4TKO/CILT- 4TKO/S36CCTCAL (Aluminum Flanged Plate for Carpet) Wiremold RFB4-CI-1/CIHT-D/CIHT-D/CILT-4TKO/CILT- 4TKO/S37CCTCAL (Aluminum Flangeless Plate for Ceramic Tile) Refer to Architectural for exact location. C. Exposed outlet boxes mounted in protected areas shall be solid gang switch boxes with flat covers. Boxes shall be of size and number or gang for device requirements except no box shall be smaller than 4" square. D. Outlet boxes exposed on exteriors of buildings, flush in non-waterproofed walls below grade or in wet locations shall be Type FS or FD threaded outlet cast boxes with suitable gasketed cast covers. E. Small junction boxes shall be the same as device boxes except shall be provided with blank plates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MATERIAL SELECTION: A. Outlet boxes shall be of the standard stamped galvanized steel type except for exterior use where they shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast iron with gaskets. Boxes shall be of the proper size to accommodate the wiring and device for which they are provided. B. Ceiling outlet boxes shall generally be four inches (4") octagon, and wall outlet boxes shall switch boxes or be 4" square with covers to suit device to be mounted thereon, except that in masonry walls without applied finish, boxes shall be rectangular masonry boxes. C. Through-the-wall type boxes shall not be used. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Install and leave boxes in a neat, clean and workman like manner. Set plaster covers to within 1/8"of the finished surface. B. Determine exact locations of all outlets from the Architectural Scale Drawings or at the site by the Owner. Modify outlet locations from those shown on the Drawings to accommodate door swings or to fit other construction details without cost to the Owner. Set wall boxes in advance of wall construction and move where required for any outlets which are displaced during the operation of other trades without expense to the Owner. Boxes on opposite sides of a wall shall be spaced 12", except that light switch wall boxes on opposite sides of a wall shall be spaced 3". 2601 34 -2 OUTLET BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, indicated on Architect's Drawings, or directed by the Architect at time of installation, place outlet boxes at the locations scaled from the floor plans and at the following heights to the center of box above the finished floor level: 1. Wall Switches: 48" and immediately adjacent to strike side of door. 2. Convenience Receptacles: 18" vertically oriented. Horizontally oriented and 6" above backsplash or trim when indicated above counters. 3. Telephone and Data Outlets: Unless indicated otherwise 18" vertically oriented on walls and 42" vertically oriented for wall phones. Horizontally oriented and 6" above backsplash or trim when indicated above counters. 4. Wall Bracket Light Fixture Outlets: Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. 5. Wall light fixtures in corridors: Located so that light fixture projection is above TAS/ADA 80" limit. D. Each recessed lighting fixture shall be independently connected from an above ceiling junction box which is readily accessible. END OF SECTION 2601 34 -3 OUTLET BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 40 WIRING DEVICES PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install wiring devices and cover plates of the type and kind as hereinafter indicated on the drawings. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on each wiring device proposed to be furnished to the job. Section 01 30 00- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Each wiring device shall be of design, type and configuration established by NEMA Standards for the application used. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Devices shall be Specification grade, UL and CSA certified, listed NEMA Standard, and suitable for the service required in the intended use of the device in this installation. B. Where devices manufactured by Arrow Hart, Bryant, Hubbell, P & S, Leviton, or Sierra are named, only equivalent devices by the other of these manufacturers will be acceptable. Unless otherwise indicated, devices shall be as follows: 1. Wall Switches: 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC. 2. Occupancy Sensor Switches: Dual Ultrasonic/PIR with On/Off switch. 3. Pilot Lighted Switches: 20 Ampere, 120/277 Volt AC, with red handle (glow when "on"). 4. Convenience Outlets: Duplex receptacles 20 Ampere, 125 Volts side and back wired with a pair of NEMA 5-20R Standard 3 contact grounded parallel slot contacts. 5. Convenience outlets designated as suspended from ceiling outlet boxes on flexible rubber cord: wire mesh holding grips sized to the cable with NEMA 1-5- 20-C Locking connectors. 6. Isolated Ground receptacles "Orange" Duplex NEMA 5-20R. 3 contact Grounded parallel slot contacts. Provide matching "Orange" cover plate labeled "Isolated Ground". 7. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Convenience Outlets: side wired 120 Volt with appropriate wall plate. 8. Weather proof convenience outlets: WP cover, stainless steel hinge pins, springs and screws with code compliant cast aluminum gasketed cover. 2601 40 - 1 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 9. Special equipment outlets shall be furnished and installed to match the connecting plugs as provided by the Owner for Owner-furnished equipment. 10. Special 20 Ampere, 250 Volt outlets: NEMA 6-20R. 11. Manual Motor Starters Square D Class 2510 with overload heater sized to the motor nameplate rating. 12. Photocopy Machine: NEMA 5-20R, 3 contact grounded parallel slot contact, with appropriate cover plate. 13. Other receptacles: Other receptacles shall be of type and characteristics and NEMA configuration to provide service as indicated on the drawings. 14. Receptacles and switches shall be Ivory unless designated by Architect. 15. Receptacles and switches designated as"Emergency" or fed by circuits from an "Emergency" panel shall be red with red plates and circuit label. C. Cover plates 1. General: Opening in Plates shall properly fit the wiring Devices associated with the outlets. Plates shall overlap outlet box edges for installation over finished room surfaces and shall be the non-over hanging type to fit conduit boxes used with exposed conduit runs. All plates in finished rooms shall be as indicated below with matching screws, unless designated by architect. 2. Telephone outlet: Smooth ivory nylon cover plate with telephone and data jacks. 3. Future or abandoned outlet: Smooth ivory nylon cover plates with matching screws. 4. Offices and Finished spaces: Smooth ivory nylon cover plates with matching screws. 5. Surface outlets in mechanical spaces: Standard steel device covers. 6. Outlets Installed in backsplashes and/or counter height: Smooth ivory nylon. 7. Outlets installed in wet areas and all food preparation areas and food service counters: 302 Stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Each device shall be suitable for the type of service for which it is installed. Device shall be of NEMA configuration and of Specification Grade and/or Hospital Grade for those services to which the device is installed where those standards are established. Devices indicated adjacent to each other shall be in the same box and set under a common plate. Suitable barriers shall be provided in the box for separation of each device from adjacent devices where required by code. B. Install suitable cover plates on all wiring devices. C. Device colors shall be Ivory unless selected and installed to match the decor of the occupancy and other standard colors as set forth elsewhere in these contract documents or as selected by the Architect. Other colors shall be provided when so directed by the Architect. D. Wire all devices with proper polarity and suitably grounded. Provide green head grounds screw and 6 inch pigtail in every box. END OF SECTION 2601 40 -2 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 50 MOTORS, CONTROLLERS AND ELECTRIC POWERED EQUIPMENT PART GENERAL 1.1. WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide all required controllers and wiring necessary to completely connect all motors, electric powered equipment and electric controlled equipment that is furnished by the Owner, other Contractors, or other Divisions of Work. This includes HVAC equipment, plumbing equipment, fire protection, and similar items that are provided by others. B. The Owner, other Contractors, or other Divisions of the Work will furnish locations of equipment and all instructions and wiring diagrams necessary to select the materials required to install this equipment properly. Furnish and install all conduit, wire, boxes, and common wiring materials to make the installation complete and operative. 1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the Work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Refer to other Divisions of the Drawings and Specifications for information as to the scope of this work. All notations for electrical work to be "By Electrical" or"See Electrical" shall be deemed instructions for work in Division 26. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. The Owner or other Contractors will furnish and deliver to the job site the motors, internal controllers, internal switches or circuit breakers and other controls for the equipment which they furnish except as indicated otherwise. B. Motor controllers shall be in accordance with NEMA standards for the application; a product of a NEMA member; NEMA rated for voltage, frequency and power of the motor; housed in a NEMA standard enclosure suitable for the environment of controller location; and equipped with necessary auxiliary contacts required for control and/or interlock to operate in the systems indicated. Each controller shall be equipped with an overload in each ungrounded leg selected on the nameplate full load current of the actual motor installed on the job that the device serves. C. Except as indicated otherwise, controllers for three phase and large single phase motors shall be magnetic, non-reversing, full voltage, across-the-line type. Combination units shall have fused switch disconnects. Manual starters shall be used for small single phase motors and shall be flush mounted toggle switch type, trip free and trip indicating with neon pilot lights and Type 304 stainless steel cover plates. D. Each magnetic starter unit shall be provided with a fused 120 volt control transformer sized to handle the holding coil, pilots, etc., plus the requirements for relays, EP switches, interlocks, remote pilots and other devices as set forth for the temperature controls and operation control. Each magnetic starter unit shall be equipped as required with a hand-off-automatic switch and pilot light or a push button and pilot light, and all necessary interlocks as required to operate the equipment served by the unit and the auxiliaries and control and indication devices associated with this equipment. Pilot lights may be omitted 2601 50 - 1 MOTORS, CONTROLLERS,AND ELECTRIC POWERED EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 on intermittent operating equipment such as sump pumps and sewage ejectors, but hand-off-automatic switches on these types of devices on all equipment which could be damaged by being left in the "hand" position shall be spring return from the "hand" to the "off" position. E. Motor controllers for reduced voltage or increment winding starting shall be as specified for the particular piece of equipment controlled. Each such controller shall match the motor and shall be equipped with proper overload protection for the device and the motor windings, a proper timer for the first step, and shall be closed transition between steps. F. Equipment as manufactured by Square D, G.E.,Cutler Hammer/Westinghouse or Siemens are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Set in place all controllers, switches, and control devices. Furnish and install all supports, conduit, wire, boxes and common wiring materials, etc., as required. Furnish and install all interlocks and interconnecting wiring for equipment controls and safeties and make all other electrical connections for proper operation. B. Furnish and install a suitable disconnect switch for each motor and electric powered equipment which does not have such a disconnect as an integral part of the equipment or which is not within sight of a feeder branch circuit protective device which meets the requirements of a disconnect. END OF SECTION 2601 50 -2 MOTORS, CONTROLLERS,AND ELECTRIC POWERED EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 70 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.1. WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install a suitable disconnect switch where indicated on the Drawings, or where required by the Specifications or the Code. 1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section,and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification on each disconnect proposed to be furnished to the job. See Section 01 30 00- Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. Disconnect switches serving motor loads shall be properly NEMA rated for these motors. Disconnects shall be environmentally rated for the area where located with NEMA rain-tight construction for units located outdoors. B. Disconnects shall be Square D Company NEMA Type HD, quick-make, quick-break. Disconnects shall be fused type where so indicated. C. Where shown on the Plans, Furnish and Install Class"R" rejection type Fuse clips within the Designated Device. D. Disconnect switches shall conform to U.L. 98-1981 and shall be so labeled. E. Equipment as manufactured by GE, Eaton or Siemens are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Install disconnects for motors, controllers, transformers, electric heaters and all other devices where so indicated, specified or required by code where manual operating branch circuit protection devices are not within sight and within 50 feet of the device. B. Mount disconnects with the top at 80 inches maximum on walls, columns or free standing rigid steel frames unless otherwise indicated to be mounted on the equipment. C. Where equipment is furnished to the job with a suitable disconnect as a part of the equipment an additional disconnect will not be required to be added at the equipment. D. Provide proper selection and sized fuses where disconnects are indicated to be fused. END OF SECTION 2601 70 - 1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 01 90 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1GENERAL 1.1. WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install all necessary hangers, supports, bases and connections for properly installing all electrical equipment and materials. 1.2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3. SUBSTITUTIONS: A. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements 1.4. SUBMITTALS: A. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures PART PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS: A. Provide hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron one-hole pipe straps, beam clamps, or hang-on-steel rod hangers for single runs of conduit to be fastened to the structure. Rod hangers shall be selected for weight supported but shall not be smaller than No. 8. B. Rod hangers and adjustable "J" pipe hangers shall be equal to Kindorf Type C-149 for conduits. Conduits two inches (2") and smaller may be fastened with pipe hangers equal to Kindorf Type 6H. C. Caddy spring steel clamps and hangers and steel one-hole snap straps may be used in lieu of above to fasten single runs of conduit up to one inch (1") size to steel structures and support rods where this conduit is run within the ceiling space. D. Continuous channel inserts or trapeze hangers made of galvanized steel strut channel and fastened with bolt channel pipe straps shall be provided to support multiple runs of conduit and other raceways. E. Galvanized U-bolts or Kindorf C-210 riser pipe clamps on channel iron bearing plates at intervals of at least one clamp per joint shall be provided for support of vertical runs of conduits of more than twelve feet (12'). F. Suitable galvanized angle iron or framing channel supports shall be used to support all panelboards, cabinets, junction and pull boxes where indicated as not mounted to the building structure. G. Exterior equipment racks shall be constructed of double unistrut frame bolted to 4" galvanized steel pipe columns with welded cap, set in 12"x36" concrete footings. Footing shall be 12"AFG, with beveled corner and trowel finish. 2601 90 - 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART PRODUCTS 3.1. INSTALLATION: A. Securely fasten and support conduits and raceways of all types and all electrical boxes, devices, and equipment from the main building structure except as specifically indicated otherwise. Support conduits within three feet (3') of each end of each bend, of each termination and at intervals along the run that will maintain true raceway alignment, without sag or deformation either during pull-in of conductors or after conductors are in place. On exposed raceways, provide supports at per NEC and on each side of each bend. Vertical conduits shall be supported at not more than 10' on center in addition to the above. B. Maintain horizontal and vertical alignment of raceways so as not to adversely effect the building structure in strength or appearance. Cable, strap, or wire hangers or fasteners shall not be used. C. Place conduits running exposed on and adjacent to walls after wall surface is installed and on spacers to allow wall to be painted after conduit is installed. D. Support cabinets and boxes to the floor and to the structure above independent of all raceways entering the boxes. Structural walls or columns may be used to support these cabinets or boxes only after specific approval is given. E. Fasten cabinets, boxes, panelboards, disconnects, motor controls and similar devices indicated other than at walls on channel iron racks mounted to floor and structure above. Three-fourths inch (3/4")thick plywood backboards painted to match the equipment finish may be used as a part of the rack. F. Support outlet boxes and junction boxes 100 cubic inches and smaller as specified for raceways. Locate outlet and junction boxes above accessible ceilings so they will not interfere with the installation of a lay-in type lighting fixture in any space in the ceiling. G. Rust inhibit all supports by galvanizing or other approved means. Supports shall be job rust inhibited at all cuts, breaks, welds, or other points where rust inhibitor coating is broken. END OF SECTION 2601 90 -2 SUPPORTING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 04 50 GROUNDING PART GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install proper grounding systems for the entire electrical installation. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES: A. Special attention is directed to Article 250 and Article 517 National Electrical Code (NFPA-70)for sizing and connecting of the grounding systems; and to the requirements of the local inspection authority. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Grounding conductors shall be green colored insulated annealed copper sized, unless specifically indicated otherwise, with an ampacity of at least 50 percent of the feeder supplying the equipment to be grounded and no ground wire shall be smaller than No. 6 except, where the feeder supplying the equipment is smaller than No.6, the grounding conductor in that case shall be the same size as the feeder conductor. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with white or yellow tracer. B. System Ground connections shall be Burndy Type GAR or equal. C. Cable connections shall be solderless, bolted pressure connectors. D. A grounding conductor shall be installed in every conduit. All conduit, boxes, fixtures, etc. shall be bonded to the common grounding bus. At boxes provide Appleton or equal,green head, grounding screws. All fluorescent fixture ballast housings shall be securely bonded to the ground system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. The common Ground Bus is defined as the main Ground Bus located within the Building Service Entrance Main. This shall be the common Ground point for all ground connections. Stray grounds to the Building frame and/or structural members will not be permitted. A separate color coded insulated grounding conductor shall be run in each and every Raceway as noted on the accompanying drawings and shown in the panel Schedules. The Grounding conductor shall be of the same insulation as the circuit conductors sized in accordance with Article 250 NEC and as illustrated on the drawings. 260450 - 1 GROUNDING DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. In the Lighting System, BX pigtails or Aluminum grounds will not be permitted. All such six foot fixture pigtails shall be installed in flexible Steel conduit "Greenfield" utilizing green coded copper grounding conductors. Fluorescent fixture ballasts shall be grounded by bonding jumper from the fixture frame to the ballast retaining bolt. C. Testing 1. At the completion of the Grounding System, Meggar test all grounding to the satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer. The Ground System shall Meggar 5 OHMS or less. END OF SECTION 260450 -2 GROUNDING DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 04 60 INDOOR DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL: 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install indoor dry type transformers as indicated on the Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for electrical work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 01 00. B. See Section 26 19 00 for Supporting Devices. C. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on each transformer proposed for installation. D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. E. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on each type of transformer, including temperature rise, sound level and taps. B. Submit a complete description and listing of support devices proposed for each installation. C. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Transformers shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., for the service to be performed and shall bear the UL label. Insulating materials shall be in accordance with NEMA ST20-1972 standard for a 220 Deg. C UL component recognized insulation system. Transformers shall meet NEMA and National Electrical Code enclosure standards and comply with AIEE and ANSI. B. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.1 TRANSFORMERS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW: A. Three phase transformers shall be with delta primary and wye secondary unless otherwise shown. B. Transformers 25 KVA and larger shall have a minimum of 6-2 1/2 %full capacity primary taps 2+4-. They shall be 150 Degree C temperature rise above 40 Degree C ambient. C. Sound ratings: 25 to 50 KVA-45 db; 51 to 150 KVA-50 db; and 151 to 300 KVA- 260460 - 1 INDOOR DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 55 db. D. Interior transformers shall be fully enclosed and ventilated. Exterior transformers shall be fully enclosed, ventilated and NEMA 3R rated. E. Transformers shall be Square D with capacities as shown on the drawings. F. Equipment as manufactured by G.E., Eaton/Cutler Hammer or Siemens are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION: 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Floor mount or suspend transformers as indicated on the plans. 3.2 FLOOR MOUNTING: A. Transformers shall be finally set and leveled on vibration isolators-Vibration Eliminator Company Inc. Figure No. 33 or equal, multiple layer neoprene and cork with load transfer plate and adjusting bolt assembly for leveling. B. Transformer primaries and secondaries shall be connected using flexible conduit or sealtight as hereinbefore specified. 3.3 SUSPENDED MOUNTING: A. Transformers shall be suspended where indicated from rods mounted to steel channel members firmly anchored to the building structure through Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. Style 47 or equal, spring and combination spring and R-I-S Hanger. KVA APPROX WT., LBS. HANGER ROD SIZE 30 450 3/8" DIA. 45 550 3/8" 75 700 3/8" 112.5 1060 3/8" 150 1300 '/2" 225 1900 '/2" 300 2200 '/2" 3.4 GENERAL: A. Measure the load on the primary and secondary after the transformer is installed and connected to the load. Notify the engineer if the load exceeds 75% of the rated load. B. Ground transformers in accordance with Article 250 National Electrical Code and in compliance with the local inspecting authority. C. Train conductors to their point of connection, label, and mount to suitable compression lugs designed to the transformer bus connection. D. Label transformers with an engraved phenolic nameplate on the exterior of the enclosure. END OF SECTION 260460 -2 INDOOR DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 04 71 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL: 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install panelboards and circuit breakers as indicated. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for electrical work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. See Section 26 01 90 for Supporting Devices. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on each type of panelboard and circuit breaker, including Manufacturer, trip and type, proposed to be furnished. B. Submit a complete description and listing of devices proposed for each existing panelboard. C. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Circuit breakers shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., UL-50-1974 UL-67- 1979, for the service to be performed and shall bear the UL label. B. Panelboards shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable NEMA PB1-1977 Standards for panelboard construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DEVICES: A. Branch panelboards on 208/120V systems shall be Square D NQOB equipped with Square D Type QOB bolt-on circuit breakers with a minimum interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical on 120VAC, 60 Hertz. Where indicated on panelboard schedules higher interrupting capacities shall be furnished. Panelboards shall be service equipment rated as shown on the drawings. B. Circuit breakers shall have overload tripping in each pole. Multi-pole breakers shall open all poles simultaneously on manual operation and overload of any pole. Circuit breakers shall have magnetic arc blowout coils and shall be trip free and trip indicating with quick- make, quick-break mechanism. GFCI and AFCI breakers shall be provided as required by NEC. C. Circuit breakers shall be provided with high pressure type solderless lugs of the proper size and type to accept the wire. D. Panelboard busses shall be silver-plated copper. E. Panels as manufactured by G.E.,Eaton, or Siemens are acceptable. 260471- 1 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install panelboards and circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Arrange for raceways and conductors to enter panelboards only in factory recommended locations and to avoid excessive build-up of conductors in any area of the cabinets. C. Conductors shall be trained to their points of connection, labeled with their circuit numbers, and bound securely with ties between the lug connections and the raceway entries to the panelboard. D. Install spare conduits from each panelboard. Where ceiling above is furred down, stub three 3/4" conduits from each panel to an accessible space above the ceiling. Where ceiling is exposed, stub three 3/4" conduits up and turn out at the ceiling. Where there is crawl space below, stub three 3/4" conduits to below in a similar manner. Provide cap for all spare conduits. 3.2 LABELING: A. Provide a white with black letters phenolic label on all panels except panels with isolated ground system shall be orange with white letters. Emergency panels as marked by the plans shall contain a red with white letters label. Provide a typewritten directory for each existing panel which is affected by the new work and on all new panels as indicated on the plans. END OF SECTION 260471-2 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 05 01 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install interior and exterior lighting systems, including lighting fixtures, lamps, controls, and accessories for lighting outlets in accordance with the drawings for complete and operational systems. Furnish and install a lighting fixture of the same type as indicated for areas of similar usage wherever the type designation is omitted on the drawings. B. Furnish and install a plaster frame for each recessed fixture as required by the type of building construction. Furnish and install hangers, bolts, or other devices required to properly and adequately support each lighting fixture from the structure. Fixtures may be supported from the suspended ceiling where specifically permitted by the construction specified in other Divisions of Work. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the Work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Each lighting fixture shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code as suitable for the location where they are indicated to be installed. C. Each lighting fixture shall bear the Underwriters' Label indicating the fixture is suitable for the application and installation location. D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. E. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTAL: A. Submit adequately descriptive data including published catalog data or shop drawings for each type listing of lighting fixture for review prior to purchases or installation. B. If a substitute for a fixture specified is proposed, submit, when so requested, photographs, laboratory test data and samples of both the specified and the proposed fixture to demonstrate that the proposed substitute is an acceptable equal to the specified fixture. Rejection of an offered substitute shall not be basis for work delay or extra compensation. C. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures 1.4 WARRANTY A. Light fixtures shall be warrantied for one year subsequent to the final acceptance of the project. Integrated lighting controls shall be warrantied for three year warranty subsequent to the final acceptance of the project. B. See Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. 26 09 21 16- 1 LIGHTING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. Lighting fixtures shall be of the type, manufacturer, and construction as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. B. Each fixture shall be complete with all proper components, connections, and accessories. C. Recessed fixtures for ceilings that have insulation shall be Type IC. D. Surface mounted fixtures shall have spacers and/or hangers to achieve required separation from low density ceilings construction. 2.2 LED LAMPS: A. All LED products must be UL and/or CSA listed. B. Exterior and Wet Location fixtures must clearly state IP rating on fixture. C. LED products must have LM-79 and LM-80 testing noted on specification sheet by an independent test lab. Products should be identified as L70 and/or L90 ratings based on result from lab testing D. Exterior pole mounted lighting shall have surge suppression within each fixture. 2.3 OTHER LAMPS: A. Lamps shall be energy saving and suitable for the lighting fixture installed and in accordance with the schedules and shall be manufactured by General Electric, Sylvania, or North American Phillips Corporation. B. Incandescent lamps shall be general service inside frosted type except as listed for specific application. C. Fluorescent lamps shall be with 4100 Kelvin color and minimum CRI of 70, except as scheduled on drawings. D. Other lamps shall be as specifically listed on drawings and be for the duty, lighting quality and application selected. 2.4 BALLASTS: A. Each lighting fixture shall be equipped with a proper energy saving ballast in accordance with the operating requirements of the lighting fixture and the Fixture Schedule. Each ballast shall be UL listed and carry a UL label for the lighting fixture and installation specified. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, GE, Jefferson, or Universal. B. Electronic fluorescent ballasts shall be physically interchangeable with a standard core/coil electromagnetic ballast or shall be specifically designed and constructed to operate T8 fluorescent lamps or compact fluorescent lamps as scheduled on the plans. 1. Electronic ballast leads shall be color coded to ANSI Standard C82.11 (latest version). 2. Electronic ballasts shall operate at a high power factor. 3. Electronic ballasts shall be designed to support a sustained short to ground or open circuit of any output leads without damage to the ballast. 4. Case temperatures shall not exceed ANSI C82.11. 5. Ballasts shall operate at both 50 Hz and 60 Hz frequencies and when operated in conjunction with dimming shall dim continuously between 100% and 20% light output and shall maintain full filament heat throughout the dimming range. Ballast dimming shall meet UL class 2. 6. Electronic ballasts shall meet: a. Requirements of Federal Communication Commission Regulations 26 09 21 16-2 LIGHTING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 b. ANSI C82.11 C. ANSI C62.41 CRT A for harmonic distortion d. UL listed Class P and CSA certified. e. Shall contain no PCBs. C. Fluorescent ballasts shall be CBM certified, high power factor type and sound rated for the lowest rating available for the application. Ballasts for lamps rated 430 ma and below shall be sound rating "A". Each ballast shall have the sound rating listed thereon. Ballasts shall be Premium Class P for those types where the requirements have been established. Other ballasts, where indicated, shall be energy saving type and shall be equal to Advance Mark III. Ballasts in fixtures which are installed in fire-rated assemblies shall be fire-rated. D. Other gaseous discharge lamp ballasts shall be high power factor constant wattage type. These ballasts for fixtures on building interior mounting shall be full enclosed in a metal housing which is filled with thermosetting sound absorbing and encapsulating material. The interior ballast shall, on recessed fixtures, be mounted separate from the reflector and socket but shall be removable without tools through the fixture ceiling opening. Each ballast shall be provided with a line disconnecting device and thermal protection. 2.5 CONTROLS: A. Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall be Dual Ultrasonic/PIR type with power pack rated for the full load of the lighting circuit in each location. Operating range of sensor shall be selected based on the arrangement of the room. Leviton or equal. B. Wall mounted occupancy sensors shall be Dual Ultrasonic/PIR type with On/Off switch, rated for the full load of the lighting circuit in each location. Leviton or equal. C. Lighting Time Clock shall be Intermatic ET-70415 CR, four channel, astronomic time clock with Square D 8903 mechanically held lighting contactors with 30 amp contacts and quantity of contacts as required by drawings, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. D. Integrated lighting controls shall be as shown on the drawing and shall be manufactured by Sensor Switch. 2.6 ACCESSORIES: A. Recessed lighting fixtures for mounting in lay-in type ceilings shall be provided with tee clamp lock-in supports when it is acceptable to support the fixtures from the tees. Recessed fixtures will have all required plaster frames, concrete inserts, gaskets, sight shields and similar accessory components required for the particular installations in this project. B. Lighting fixtures indicated to have integral battery, charger and inverter from emergency light shall have equipment specially designed for and installed in the fixture. Units shall be with test and 90-minute illumination capability. Units for fluorescent fixtures shall be Siltron Unit-Pak. C. Fixtures mounted in fire-rated assemblies shall be enclosed in fire-rated enclosures constructed of fire-rated material matching the rating of the ceiling. 2.7 POLES: A. Poles shall be manufactured by a manufacturer associated with the light fixture manufacturer. The pole shall be configured with all accessories required for a complete system. 26 09 21 16-3 LIGHTING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Poles shall be powder coated aluminum or steel, or fiberglass as shown on the drawing fixture schedule. C. Mounting anchor bolts shall be as specified by the manufacturer. D. The poles shall be rated for the wind load rating required by the local site conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIXTURES: A. Each lighting fixture shall be carefully installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and to fit the general construction of the walls, ceilings or other areas where the fixture is indicated. Refer to reflected ceiling plans, elevations and other details for the exact locations of fixtures. Where those details or other instructions do not indicate lighting fixture locations, position the fixtures proportionally in spaces using the arrangement indicated on the electrical drawings plus center, parallel and space the lighting fixtures and rows of fixtures on and with general construction lines. B. Install recessed lighting fixtures in accordance with the lighting fixture manufacturer's instructions for the application. Install above ceiling junction boxes to provide ready access through the ceiling opening. Install hangers to support fixtures independent of suspended ceilings unless the ceiling is specifically designed to support the fixture. In this case, provide clips in accordance with NEC. Above-ceiling insulation materials are prohibited to be within 3" of recessed lighting fixtures. C. Mount surface lighting fixtures to the ceiling in accordance with the lighting fixture manufacturer's instructions. Provide through ceiling to structure supports for each lighting fixture mounted on suspended ceiling unless the ceiling is specifically designed to support the lighting fixture. Narrow channel or box-mounted lighting fixtures on tee-bar type ceilings shall be connected through outlet boxes centered above the fixture and supported squarely on the tees. Provide auxiliary above-ceiling supports for the ceiling where tees must be cut. D. Securely anchor bracket mounted fixtures to maintain vertical and horizontal alignment. Provide that all mounting devices are concealed. E. Refer to the Architectural plans for locations of fire-rated assemblies. Fabricate and install the required fire-rated enclosures with the fixtures. F. In remodeled spaces where fixtures shall remain or be relocated, provide new lenses for all fixtures which are damaged prior to construction. Verify such condition prior to bid. 3.2 LAMPS: A. Each fixture shall be equipped with a set of new lamps of the size and type specified and left in a condition such that there is a new lamp in each receptacle in each fixture upon completion and acceptance of the work. Low-energy or energy-saving type lamps shall be furnished and installed where indicated and shall specifically match the fixture, socket and ballast selection. B. Use permanent fixtures with final lamps to allow final touch-up painting to be performed under completed building light. Permanent fixtures used for other temporary lighting shall have the lamps removed and not be reused for final lamping of the job. Specific approval by the Owner shall be obtained for time of installation of the final complement of lamps. C. Replace all lamps that fail or have blackened ends during the period of touch-up. Replace all lamps that have been used more that 1/4 of their rated life. This use time will be determined by the Owner's records. D. In remodeled spaces where existing fixtures shall remain or be relocated, provide new lamps in all such fixtures, unless noted otherwise on drawings. 26 09 21 16-4 LIGHTING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.3 TESTING, CLEANING,AIMING AND ADJUSTING: A. Each fixture shall be placed in proper operating condition, equipped with the proper lamp and properly fitted and adjusted to aim, focus, and physically work in the spaces and construction where installed. Fixtures shall be left clean of all dust, dirt, grease and other foreign materials. Reflectors and lenses shall be clean and undamaged. Trims, finishes, and housings shall fit together and to the building construction and show no evidence of damage, handling, misalignment. END OF SECTION 26 09 21 16-5 LIGHTING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 06 03 EMPTY RACEWAY SYSTEMS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Furnish and install complete systems of raceways, outlets, junction boxes, terminal boards, cabinets, interconnections, grounding and pull ropes in inaccessible construction for future installation of wires and cables under other sections of work, other divisions of work, other Contractors or Vendors, or by the Owner. See the drawings or other sections of work for and descriptions of the systems. B. This work includes provisions for systems such as closed circuit television and telephones where the installation of the system is outside the scope of this Contract. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this Section of the Work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. The raceway systems shall be in accordance with materials and methods described in Sections 26 01 10 and 26 01 11. C. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. D. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit complete manufacturer's specification data on each type of material to be used. B. Submit complete information on raceway routing and tagging to enable others to utilize the raceways in the proper sequence of the work. C. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS: A. Raceways, including wireways, conduits, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, terminal boards and outlets shall be as set forth elsewhere in this specification. 2.2 PULL ROPE: A. Pull ropes shall be 3/16"Jet Line Poly rope or equal. 2.3 TAGS: A. Tags for identification of termination of raceway shall be 1" x 3" linen paper tages with eyelets and string ties or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAYS: A. Raceways including wireways, conduits, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets terminal boards and outlets shall be installed asset forth elsewhere in this specification. 260603- 1 EMPTY RACEWAY SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.2 PULL ROPE: A. Install a pull rope in each conduit installed in this Division of Work which does not have wire and cable installed under this Division of Work. Leave 18" of pull rope at each end of each termination. B. Coil the pull rope inside of each outlet box cabinet or pull box where raceways are terminated in this equipment. Tie the pull rope at each end terminated otherwise to avoid accidental removal of the pull rope. 3.3 TAGGING: A. Provide a line tag on each end of each pull rope installed in this section of work. Securely attach this tag to the pull rope. B. Label this tag with a description of the raceway system being provided and with a complete description of the other end of the pull rope. END OF SECTION 260603-2 EMPTY RACEWAY SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 16724 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control panel, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein. B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for protected premises signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors. C. The fire alarm manufacturer shall be of the highest caliber and insist on the highest quality. The system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of EN29001, BS5750: Part 1: ANSI/ASQC Q91-1987. D. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manufacturer (or division thereof). E. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing. 1.2 SCOPE: A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. B. Basic Performance: 1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall be encoded onto an NFPA Style 7 (Class A) signaling line circuit. 2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC)shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B). 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y). 4. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling. 5. A single ground or open on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. 6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a power failure (or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded. C. Basic System Functional Operation When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1. The System Alarm LED shall flash. 2. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. 3. A backlit 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises. 4. All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated System Outputs (alarm Notification appliances and/or relays)shall be activated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. General: 1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. 16724 -1 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met. 3. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications. 2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts. 3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations. C. Manuals: 1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manual listing the manufacturer's name(s) including technical data sheets. 2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnections between the items of equipment. 3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. D. Software Modifications: 1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. 2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made. E. Certifications: 1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification. 1.4 WARRANTY: A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1)year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. 1.5 POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE: A. Complete maintenance and repair service for the fire alarm system shall be available from a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of five (5)years after expiration of the guaranty. B. As part of the submittal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all maintenance, test, and repair described below. Include also a quote of unscheduled maintenance/repair, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and response travel costs. Submittals that do not identify all post contract maintenance costs 16724 -2 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty. C. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semiannual basis or as required by the local AHJ. A preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the Contractor that shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include: 1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, water flow switches and all accessories of the fire alarm system. 2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually. 3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72 Chapter 7. 1.6 POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS: A. The contractor shall provide parts and labor to expand the system specified, if so requested, for a period of five (5)years from the date of acceptance. B. As part of the submittal include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and test labor as needed to increase the number of intelligent or addressable devices by ten percent (10%). This quotation shall include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable monitor modules and addressable control modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required to meet this specification (list actual quantity of each type). C. Quotation shall include installation and test labor and labor to reprogram the system for this 10% expansion. If additional FACP hardware would be required, include the material and labor necessary to install this hardware. D. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire except for labor to make final connections at the FACP and at each intelligent addressable device. Do not include cost of conventional peripherals or the cost of initiating devices or Notification appliances connected to the addressable monitor/control modules. E. Submittals that do not include this estimate of post contract expansion cost will not be accepted. 1.7 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made apart of this section of the work. Refer to Section 16010. B. See Section 16111 for conduit. C. See Section 16120 for Power Wire and Cable. D. See Section 16190 for Supporting Devices. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)- USA: No. 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems. No. 12A& 12B Halon Extinguishing Systems. No. 15 Water Spray Systems. No. 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems. No. 72-1993 National Fire Alarm Code. No. 101 Life Safety Code. F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)- USA: No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. No. 346 WaterPlow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. No. 1076 Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances. 16724 -3 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 G. Local and State Building Codes H. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.8 APPROVALS: A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies: UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ULC Underwriters Laboratories Canada. FM Factory Mutual CSFM California State Fire Marshal Approved. B. The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864, (Control Units) and UL Standard 1076 (Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems). C. The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release applications. 1.9 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Silent Knight—No Substitutions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL: A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code. B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. C. All Equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE: A. Conduit: 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables or wires are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. 4. Wiring for 24 volt control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduits shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum. 16724 -4 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and14AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. In certain applications, the systems shall support up to a 1,000 ft. loop of untwisted, unshielded wire. The system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the communication loop. 6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 7. The Fire Alarm Control panel shall be capable of T-Tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC's). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of T-Taps, length of T-Taps etc., are not acceptable. C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: 1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, water flow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. E. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Power Distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire Alarm Control Panel Primary Power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. 2.3 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL: A. The FACP shall be a SILENT KNIGHT5820 XL and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. B. System Capacity and General Operation 1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 198 intelligent/addressable devices. 2. The system shall include Form-C alarm and trouble relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC. It shall also include four Class B (NFPA Style Y) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits. 3. The system shall support up to 99 programmable EIA-485 driven relay for an overall system capacity of 301 circuits. 4. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display, the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. 5. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 6. The FACP shall provide the following features: a. Drift Compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. b. Sensitivity Test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Chapter 5. 16724 -5 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Maintenance Alert to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation. d. System Status Reports to display or printer. e. Alarm Verification, with verification counters. f. PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 3-8.3 requirements. g. Rapid manual station reporting (under 2 seconds). h. Non-Alarm points for general (non-fire)control. i. Periodic Detector Test, conducted automatically by software. j. Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning. k. Cross Zoning with the capability of: counting two detectors in alarm, two software zones in alarm, or one smoke detector and one thermal detector. I. March time and temporal coding options. M. Walk Test, with check for two detectors set to same address. n. UL 1076 Security Monitor Points. o. Control-By-Time for non-fire operations, with holiday schedules. P. Day/Night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. q. Device Blink Control for sleeping areas. 7. The FACP shall be capable of coding Notification circuits in March Time (120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 A.2.2.2.2), and California Code. C. Central Microprocessor 1. The Microprocessor unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all external interfaces with the control panel. It shall include EPROM for system program storage; non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage; and a "watch dog"timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure. 2. The Microprocessor Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. 3. The Microprocessor Unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system displays. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real time clock may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, day-of-week, and day-of-year. D. Display 1. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. 2. The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, and software zones. 3. The Display shall provide an 80-character back-lit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide 5 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), that will indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, SYSTEM ALARM, SYSTEM TROUBLE, SIGNAL SILENCED, SUPERVISORY, and PRE-ALARM. 4. The Display shall provide a 21-key touch key-pad with control capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. 5. The Display shall include the following operator functions: SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, and ACKNOWLEDGE. E. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) 1. The SLC Interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 99 intelligent detectors (Ionization, Photoelectric, or Thermal) and 99 intelligent modules (monitor or control) for a system capacity of 198 devices. This shall be accomplished over a single SLC loop and shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 wiring. 16724 -6 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. The Loop Interface Board shall receive analog information from all intelligent detectors that shall be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements. 3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72, chapter 7 requirements and be certified by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument. 4. The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment. F. Serial Interfaces 1. An EIA-232 interface between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and UL Listed Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals shall be provided. 2. The EIA-232 interface shall allow the use of printers, CRT monitors, and PC compatible computers. 3. The EIA-232 interface shall include special protocol methods that allow off-site monitoring of the FACP over standard dial-up phone lines. This ancillary capability shall allow remote readout of all status information, including analog values, and shall not interfere with or degrade FACP operations when used. It shall allow remote FACP Acknowledge, Reset, or Signal Silence in this mode. It shall also allow adjustment of detector sensitivity and readout of the history file. 4. The EIA-485 port for the serial connection of the optional Annunciators and remote LCD displays shall be provided. 5. The EIA-485 interface may be used for network connection to a Proprietary Receiving Unit. G. Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT). 1. The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module position of the fire alarm control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6,000 feet from the fire alarm control panel. The wire connections between the UDACT and the control panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for multiplexed communication of overall system status. Systems that utilize relay contact closures are not acceptable. 2. The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage detect), per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel events up to three different telephone numbers. 3. The UDACT shall be completely field programmable from a built-in keypad and 4 character red, seven segment display. 4. The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in at least 15 different formats. This ensures compatibility with existing and future transmission formats. 5. Communication shall include vital system status such as: Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory) Independent Addressable Device Status AC (Mains) Power Loss Low Battery and Earth Fault System Off Normal 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements) EIA-485 Communications Failure Phone Line Failure 6. The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the Contact ID format. In this format the UDACT shall support transmission of up to 2,040 points. This enables the central station to have exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency. H. Enclosures: 1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. 16724 -7 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. I. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864. J. Optional plug-in modules shall be provided for NFPA 72, chapter 4 transmitters as well as a Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter. The control panel shall have the ability to meet the latest requirements of UL 864 for delayed AC fail reporting. K. An optional module shall provide 8 Form-C relays rated at 5.0. The relays shall track programmable software zones. L. Power Supply: 1. The Power Supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP. 2. It shall provide 5.0 amps of usable Notification appliance power, using a switching 24 VDC regulator. An 3.0 amp Notification expansion power supply shall be available for the demanding requirements of UL 1971 and ADA devices, for a total system capacity of 8 amps. 3. It shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-ratecharging techniques for fast battery recharge. 4. It shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of detecting earth faults on sensitive addressable modules. 5. It shall be power-limited using Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) resistors. 6. It shall provide optional meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current. M. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks For ease of service all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be a removable, plug-in type and have sufficient capacity for 18 to 12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks which are permanently fixed are not acceptable. N. Operators Controls 1. Acknowledge Switch: a. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and Trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition. b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders. 2. Signal Silence Switch: Activation of the Signal silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers. 3. System Reset Switch: Activation of the system reset switch shall cause all electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. Holding the system RESET switch shall perform a lamp test function. 4. Drill (Evacuate) Switch. The Drill switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset. O. Field Programming 1. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of electronic integrated circuits. 2. All programming may be accomplished through the standard FACP keypad. 3. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. 4. The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined specifically for the system when it is installed. Two levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level is used for status 16724 -8 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 level changes such as zone disable or manual on/off commands. A second (higher-level) is used for actual change of program information. 5. Program edit shall not interfere with normal operation and fire protection. If a fire condition is detected during programming operation, the system shall exit programming and perform fire protection functions as programmed. 6. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors. 7. An Auto-Program (self-learn) function shall be provided to quickly install initial functions and make the system operational. 8. For flexibility, an off-line programming function, with batch upload/download, shall also be available. P. Specific System Operations 1. Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the System keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window. 2. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The Alarm Verification delay shall be programmable from 5 to 30 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for verification. The FACP shall keep a count of the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands. 3. Point Disable: Any Device in the system may be Enabled or Disabled through the system keypad. 4. Point Read: The system shall be able to display or print the following pointstatus diagnostic functions: a. Device status. b. Device type. C. Custom device label. d. View analog detector values. e. Device zone assignments. f. All Program Parameters. 5. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report will be generated and printed, listing all system status: 6. System History Recording and Reporting: The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall contain a History Buffer that will be capable of storing up to 650 system alarms/troubles/operator actions. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The contents of the History Buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its entirety. Although the foreground history buffer may be cleared for user convenience, a background, non-erasable buffer shall be maintained which provides the last 650 system events. History Buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable. 7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent smoke detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent smoke detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above normal limits, then the system will enter the Trouble Mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display, and printed on the optional printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform. 8. Pre-alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to give advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level shall give an audible indication and may also activate control 16724 -9 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 relays. The system shall also have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm level, to assist in avoiding nuisance alarms. 9. Software Zones: The FACP shall provide 99 software zones. All addressable devices may be field programmed to be grouped into these zones for control activation and annunciation purposes. 2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. Programmable Electronic Sounders 1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic Sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device. 3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans. B. Strobe Lights: 1. Shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Shall meet the requirements of the ADA as defined in UL standard 1971 and shall meet the following criteria: a. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10ths of one second. b. The strobe shall be multi-candela (15,30,75,110 cd) and shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. C. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. d. The appliance shall be placed 80 in (2,030 mm) above the highest floor level within the space, or 6 in (152 mm) below the ceiling, which ever is the lower. C. Audible/Visual Combination Devices: 1. Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility. 2. Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility. D. Addressable Devices-General 1. Addressable Devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary decimal switches. 2. Addressable Devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade (numbered 1 to 10) type address switches. Devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a dip switch, are difficult to install and subject to installation error. This type of device is not an allowable substitute. 3. Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. 4. Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LEDs shall be optional through the system field program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 5. Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis. 6. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7. 7. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. An optional base shall be available with a built-in (local)sounder rated at 85 DBA minimum. 8. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be 16724 - 10 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 9. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). E. Addressable Pull Box (manual station) 1. Addressable Pull Boxes shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall be dual-action with a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. 3. Manual Stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1 inch or larger. The pull force shall conform to ADA requirements. 4. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semiflush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches above the finished floor. F. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. The unit shall also contain a built-in 135°F thermal (heat)detection device. G. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector 1. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. H. Intelligent Thermal Detectors 1. Thermal Detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees Fahrenheit (58 Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 5 degrees F. (9.4 C.) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit. Up to 99 intelligent heat detectors may connect to one SLC loop. 2. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements. 3. An optional intelligent heat detector shall be available for applications, which do not require a rate-or-rise element. I. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector 1. In-Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate intelligent photoelectric sensor that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. Provide remote test/indicator station for each unit. 2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. J. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module 1. Addressable Monitor Modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. 2. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8"deep electrical box. 3. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor Module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 4. For difficult to reach areas, the Monitor Module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/2". This version need not include Style D or an LED. 16724 - 11 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 K. Two Wire Detector Monitor Module 1. Addressable Monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional 2-Wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device). 2. The Two-Wire Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box or with an optional surface backbox. 3. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. L. Addressable Control Module 1. Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC)of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual Notification Appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. 2. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox. 3. The control module NAC circuit may be wired for Style Z or Style Y (Class A/B) with up to 1 Amp of inductive A/V signal, or 2 Amps of resistive A/V signal operation, or as a dry contact (Form C) relay. The relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or NACs may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. 4. Audio/visual power shall be provided by a separate supervised power loop from the main fire alarm control panel or from a supervised, UL listed remote power supply. 5. The control module shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the control module is operational and is in regular communication with the control panel. 6. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test the module without opening or shorting its NAC wiring. 7. The control module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of.6 amps at 30 VDC. M. Isolator Module 1. Isolator Modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The Isolator Module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building. 2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Isolator module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the Isolator Module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section. 3. The Isolator Module shall not require any address-setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Isolator Module after its normal operation. 4. The Isolator Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box or in a surface mounted backbox. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the Isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. N. Serially Connected Annunciator Requirements 16724 - 12 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 1. The Annunciator shall communicate with the fire alarm control panel via an EIA 485 communications loop and shall annunciate all zones in the system. Up to 10 annunciators may be connected to the EIA 485 communications loop. 2. The annunciator shall need only four wires to connect to the FACP. 3. The annunciator shall provide a red Alarm LED per zone, and a yellow Trouble LED per zone. The annunciator will also have an "ON-LINE" LED, local piezo sounder, local acknowledge/lamp test switch, and custom zone/function identification labels. 4. The annunciator switches may be used for System control such as, Global Acknowledge, Global Signal Silence, and Global System Reset. O. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator: 1. The Alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. 3. The annunciator shall connect to a two-wire EIA-485 interface. The two-wire connection shall be capable of distances of 6,000 feet. The signal may be increased in 3,000 ft. increments with an optional repeater. An optional (UL 864 Listed) module shall be available which allows the EIA-485 signal to be transmitted over Fiber Optics. 4. The system shall allow a minimum of four LCD annunciators. Each LCD shall be capable of the following system functions: Acknowledge, Signal Silence and Reset. 2.5 BATTERIES: A. Shall be 12 volt, Gell-Cell type (two required). B. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. C. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. B. All wiring shall be installed in conduit except where installed above accessible ceilings, unless shown otherwise on plans. C. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and shall be exposed in unfinished areas. D. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. E. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. F. Manual pull stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semiflush mounting as shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm)above the finished floor. 3.2 TEST: A. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of 16724 - 13 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7. 1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 2. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. 3. Verify activation of all flow switches. 4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 5. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 6. Open and short Notification Appliance Circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 7. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 8. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. 9. Circuit installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the Walk Test. 10. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. 11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. 3.3 FINAL INSPECTION: A. At the final inspection a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect. 3.4 INSTRUCTION: A. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided. B. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the owner. END OF SECTION 16724 - 14 of 14 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 07 41 DATA CABLING SYSTEM PART 1GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE: A. Conditions of the contract (General and Supplemental)and Division 1, General Requirements, govern work of this section. B. This Section includes all labor, material, equipment and related services necessary to install the Data cabling system indicated on the drawings or specified herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Provide all data equipment included herein, except that which will be furnished and installed by the owner, as shown on the plans B. Provide all conduit as shown on the drawings. C. Contractor shall provide the following unless noted on the drawings: 1. Provide Telcom outlets per drawings. 2. Provide data cables from the Telcom outlet to the Owner furnished and installed patch panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with the General Conditions: 1. Manufacturer data sheets on cables and connectors. 2. Test procedures and test equipment. 3. Certification of installer. 4. See Section 01 30 00 -Submittal Procedures 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The contractor shall employ personnel with experience, training, and skill in the installation of Data cabling systems. The contractor shall be required to furnish acceptable evidence of installations in the local area. The contractor shall furnish certificates of manufacturer's training in specialized installations. B. During the installation of the cabling system, the Owner and/or their representative will conduct periodic inspections to verify that cable installation is proceeding according to the specifications. The Contractor shall promptly correct all deficiencies within two days at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS: A. The following codes, standards, and references shall apply to this project. Where any specified element is in conflict with a reference, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1. Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities Act 26 07 41 - 1 DATA CABLING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. TIA/EIA 568A 3. IEEE 802.3 4. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS: A. Conduit—Section 26 01 11 B. Outlet boxes—Section 26 01 40. C. Cable tray—Section 26 01 13. D. Coverplates 1. Coverplates shall be nylon multi-module type. E. Receptacles 1. Data receptacles shall be RJ-45 Cat. 6 jacks (8P8C), yellow color. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AMP b. Lucent C. Ortronics d. Leviton F. Cables. 1. Data cables shall be TIA/EIA 568A Cat. 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair, UL listed, and shall be yellow color, plenum rated. Comscope, or equal. G. Supporting Devices 1. Bridle rings orj-hooks shall be configured to support the cable within the ceiling space. The rings shall be fastened to the building structure, not to other equipment or supports within the ceiling. Caddy or approved equal. Cable tray shall be provided as shown. H. Termination Hardware 1. DataTermination Hardware (Patch Panels) Furnished and installed by the Owner. 2. Equipment Racks Furnished and installed by the Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CABLING: B A. Data cabling shall be installed in conduit within the walls or enclosed spaces and shall be supported in the ceiling space on j-hooks or bridle rings and cable tray as shown. No splices are allowed in any cables. B. Cables shall be labeled as directed by the Owner. 1. Attach permanent labels at both ends of each cable. 2. Obtain final room numbers from the owner before labeling the cables. Do not use the construction plans unless directed to do so by the architect. C. Cables shall be terminated on the patch panels, which shall be furnished and installed by the Owner in the Owner furnished and installed racks. 3.2 MODULAR OUTLETS: A. Modular jacks shall be configured as shown on the drawings. Data connectors shall be wired in accordance with Owner specified wiring sequence. Outlet jacks shall be yellow color and labeled as follows: 1. Label each jack as directed by the Owner. 26 07 41 -2 DATA CABLING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2. Obtain final room numbers from the owner before labeling the icons. Do not use the construction plans unless directed to do so by the architect. 3.3 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE: A. Contractor shall provide all tools and equipment required for installation and testing. Test equipment shall be maintained in an accurate calibration and will display dates of the last calibration and next scheduled calibration. B. Test equipment, methods, and criteria shall comply with the guidelines set forth in TIA/EIA TSB-67—Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling Systems. C. Test results shall be documented and delivered to the Owner upon completion of the testing. D. The owner shall reserve the right to observe or confirm by any means any or all of the testing being performed. END OF SECTION 26 07 41 - 3 DATA CABLING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 09 10 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. The furnishing of the temperature controls are, in general, not within the scope of Division 26. However, wiring and connecting of all equipment operator controls and indication equipment provided and set in place by others that is not performed under other Division of Work shall be a part of this Division of Work. B. Refer to Division 23 of these Drawings and Specifications for information as to the scope of this work. 1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: A. The Special Provisions for Electrical Work are hereby made a part of this section of the work. Refer to Section 26 00 10. B. Refer to Division 23 "Temperature Controls"for work and materials. C. Refer to Sections 26 01 10, 26 01 11, and 26 01 20 for materials to be furnished and installed. D. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. E. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Raceways as specified in Section 26 01 10 and Section 26 01 11, Conduit. B. Wire and cable as specified in Section 26 01 20. C. Pull boxes, Junction Boxes, Cabinets, and Outlet Boxes as specified in Sections 26 01 31, and 26 01 34. D. Hangers and Supports as specified in Section 26 01 90. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Furnish and install all conduit, wire, boxes and common wiring materials necessary for the work unless specifically excluded elsewhere in the Specifications or on the Drawings. B. The Owner or other Contractors or other Divisions of work will furnish the exact locations of equipment, and also all instructions and wiring diagrams necessary to select the materials required to install this equipment properly. END OF SECTION 260910 - 1 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 09 96 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP PART 1GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 26 responsibilities in the startup process as directed by the Engineer. B. Startup requires the participation of Division 23 and 26 to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. C. Division 26 shall be familiar with the plan and shall execute all responsibilities assigned in the Contract Documents. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Electrical Contractors. The responsibilities applicable to the electrical contractor(s) of Division 26 are as follow: Construction and Acceptance Phases 1. Include the cost of startup in the proposal. 2. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for submittal data, documentation, O&M data and training. 3. Attend a scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to facilitate the process. 4. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual submittals, to the Engineer for development of start-up and functional testing procedures. 5. Provide a copy of the O&M Manuals and submittals of electrical equipment, through normal channels, to the Engineer for review and approval. 6. Contractors or their Subs shall assist (along with the Design Engineers) in clarifying the operation and control of equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. B. The contractors and Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the tests. 1. Develop a Functional Performance Test (FPT) using manufacturer's start-up procedures. Submit manufacturer's detailed start-up procedures and the full start-up plan and procedures and other requested equipment documentation to Engineer for review. 2. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute and document the electrical-related portions of the pre-functional checklists provided by the Engineer for all equipment. 3. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, and provide a copy to the Engineer. 4. Address current A/E punchlist and deficiency list items, prior to start of the functional testing. 5. Provide skilled or factory-trained technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the FPT, as required by the Engineer. Ensure that skilled technicians are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem- solving. 6. Provide skilled technicians to perform or assist with FPT under the direction of the Engineer for specified equipment. Assist the Engineer in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary. 7. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as interpreted by the Engineer and retest the equipment. 260996- 1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 8. Prepare O&M Manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. 9. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and provide final as-built documentation to the Owner per the Contract Closeout Section in the Contract Documents. 10. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. 11. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain the validity of the warranty. C. Warranty Period 1. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M Manuals and as- built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT: A. Division 26 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTALS: A. Division 26 shall provide submittal documentation relative to startup as required in this Section. 3.2 STARTUP: A. Equipment startup shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturers' approved procedures. The electrical contractors shall follow the startup and initial checkout procedures listed in this Section. The procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift it partially to the Engineer or Owner. 3.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS: A. Functional testing is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Functional testing may proceed prior to the completion of systems, or sub-systems at the discretion of the Engineer. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system, including all pre-functional checklists as soon as possible. B. The Engineer shall develop the test procedures and direct the execution of the functional testing procedures with assistance from the contractors. C. The functional testing procedures shall be reviewed and approved by the design team, the contractors, and the Owner prior to execution. D. The functional testing procedures shall not alleviate the contractors' responsibility to verify system operation and functionality. 3.4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS: A. The following O&M Manual requirements do not replace the O&M Manual documentation requirements elsewhere in these specifications. B. The Engineer shall receive a copy of the O&M Manuals for review. C. Review and Approvals. Review of the startup sections of the O&M Manuals shall be made by the Engineer. Refer to the Contract Documents for details. 260996-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.5 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. B. The Engineer shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for equipment. C. Electrical Contractor. The electrical contractor and his sub-contractors shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the Engineer with a training plan two weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of electrical equipment or system including, but not limited to lighting control, fire alarm, and switchgear. 3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M Manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. 6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the O&M Manual and illustrate, whenever possible, the use of the O&M Manuals for reference. 7. Training shall include: a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M Manuals. b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start- up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. C. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explanatory information included in the O&M Manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. h. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides, video and audio taped material as might be appropriate. 8. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. 9. The electrical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system. 10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 11. Duration of Training. The electrical contractor shall provide training on each piece of equipment according to the following schedule: 260996-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 System Hours Lighting Controls 4 Fire Alarm 2 Switchgear 2 3.6 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS: A. Written work products of contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan and the filled out startup, initial checkout and pre-functional checklists. 260996-4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 14 00—WIRING DEVICES 1. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. 2. Test GFCI operation with local fault simulations. LOCATION DEVICE STATUS REMARKS 260996-5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 17 00— DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1. Verify label. 2. Verify voltage and ampacity. 3. Verify enclosure rating. 4. Verify grounding. LOCATION LABEL VOLTAGE AMPACITY ENCLOSURE GROUNDS STATUS REMARKS 260996-6 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 46 00/26 76 10 —TRANSFORMERS 1. Verify label. 2. Verify voltage and kVA rating. 3. Verify grounding. 4. Verify mounting. LOCATION LABEL VOLTAGE kVA GROUNDS MOUNTING STATUS REMARKS 260996-7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 47 10— PANELBOARDS 1. Verify label. 2. Circuit Directory: Type directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. 3. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 4. Verify voltage and ampacity. 5. Verify TVSS LOCATION PANEL VOLTAGE MAIN LABELS STATUS REMARKS AMPACITY 260996-8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 50 10— INTERIOR LIGHTING 1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. 2. Verify operation of exit and emergency fixtures. 3. Verify operation of Lighting Control System LOCATION FIXTURES SWITCHES LIGHT LEVEL STATUS REMARKS 260996-9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 50 10— EXTERIOR LIGHTING 1. Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing fixtures and energizing circuits with normal power source. Include the following: a. Photometric Tests: Measure light intensities at night at locations where specific illumination performance is indicated. Use photometers with calibration referenced to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards. b. Check for intensity of illumination. C. Check for uniformity of illumination. 2. Verify operation of time clock/contactors. LOCATION FIXTURES TIMECLOCK STATUS REMARKS CHANNEL 260996- 10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 72 00— FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 1. Verify FACP operation. 2. Verify alarm horns/strobes. 3. Verify HVAC shutdown. LOCATION DEVICE OPERATIONAL STATUS REMARKS 260996- 11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 26 76 80—CENTRAL INTERCOM SYSTEM 1. Verify two-way operation. 2. Verify all-call operation. 3. Verify Master Clock operation. 4. Verify Bells operation. LOCATION DEVICE OPERATIONAL STATUS REMARKS The Contractor shall complete these forms as indicated above. Include a copy of these forms in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. END OF SECTION 260996- 12 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS STARTUP DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Prepare site construction areas for minor stripping as described in Contract Documents including: a. Strip and remove any vegetative/grass layer, etc. in foot print vicinity of new building structure and out to perimeter line 20' from foundation face on all sides and excavate and dispose of any roots and buried debris. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine site to determine type of problems to be encountered. Note: Some yard grassed area occurs in vicinity of the site. Grade of existing site is virtually flat with some slight slope areas. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection 1. Protect features which are to remain. Protect existing site structures and paving. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Clearances required for most of the site. B. Strip areas above described minimum 4". 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove from site surface debris and dispose of legally. B. Do not bury cuttings, roots and other vegetative matter or burn waste material or site. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 1 Site Clearing Phase 2 Section 31 10 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 3120 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation, filling, compacting and grading operations both inside and outside building limits as required for below-grade improvements and to achieve grades and elevations indicated. Provide trenching and backfill for mechanical and electrical work and utilities. B. Subbase materials, drainage fill, common fill, and structural fill materials for slabs, pavements, and improvements. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 31 16—Termite Control. B. Section 32 92 23-Sodding. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Test Reports: Submit for approval test reports, list of materials and gradations proposed for use. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 year experience installing similar products. 1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation. B. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation)within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. PART 2 PRODUCTS ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 Earthwork Phase 2 Section 31 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2.1 MATERIALS A. Earthwork: 1. Subbase Material: Graded gravel or crushed stone. 2. Bedding Course: Graded crushed gravel and sand. 3. Borrow Soil: Off-site soil for fill or backfill. 4. Drainage Fill: ashed gravel or crushed stone. 5. Common Fill: Mineral soil free from unsuitable materials. 6. Structural Fill: Graded gravel. 7. Impervious Fill: Gravel and sand mixture. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Repair surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade regardless of materials encountered. Repair excavations beyond elevations and dimensions indicated as follows: 1. At Structure: Concrete or compacted structural fill. 2. Elsewhere: Backfill and compact as directed. B. Maintain stability of excavations; coordinate shoring and bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Prevent surface and subsurface water from accumulating in excavations. Stockpile satisfactory materials for reuse, allow for proper drainage and do not stockpile materials within drip line of trees to remain. C. Compact materials at the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 1557 by aeration or wetting to the following percentages of maximum dry density: 1. Structure, Pavement, Walkways: Subgrade and each fill layer to 95 percent of maximum dry density to suitable depth. 2. Unpaved Areas: Top 6 inches of subgrade and each fill layer to 90 percent maximum dry density. D. Place acceptable materials in layers not more than 8 inches loose depth for materials compacted by heavy equipment and not more than 4 inches loose depth for materials compacted by hand equipment to subgrades indicated as follows: 1. Structural Fill: Use under foundations, slabs on grade in layers as indicated. 2. Drainage Fill: Use under designated building slabs, at foundation drainage and elsewhere as indicated. 3. Common Fill: Use under unpaved areas. 4. Subbase Material: Use under pavement, walks, steps, piping and conduit. E. Grading Tolerances Outside Building Lines: 1. Lawns, unpaved areas, and walks, plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Pavements, plus or minus 1/2 inch. F. Grading Tolerance for Fill Under Building Slabs: Plus or minus 1/2 inch measured with 10-foot straightedge. G. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Recompact and regrade settled, disturbed and damaged areas as necessary to restore quality, appearance, and condition of work. H. Control erosion to prevent runoff into sewers or damage to sloped or surfaced areas. I. Control dust to prevent hazards to adjacent properties and vehicles. Immediately repair or remedy damage caused by dust including air filters in equipment and vehicles. Clean soiled surfaces. J. Dispose of waste and unsuitable materials off-site in a legal manner. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 Earthwork Phase 2 Section 31 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 Earthwork Phase 2 Section 31 20 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 3122 00 SITE GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for backfill and grading of the site to complete the project. PART2 PRODUCTS NONE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS Prior to site grading,the site shall be cleared in accordance with Standard Specification Section 3110 00"Site Clearing and Stripping". Unless specified otherwise on drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 6 inches.The loosened material shall be re-compacted with fill. Fill shall be uniform as to material, density, and moisture content. Fill shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated into a layer in that position;all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade and in layers not in excess of 6 inches of uncompacted depth,unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of natural ground unless indicated otherwise on drawings. The Engineer may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction. All irregularities, depressions, and soft spots which develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. Excess material from excavation, which is not incorporated into the site as fill, shall be become property of the Contractor and disposed of away from the job site, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 1 Site Grading Phase 2 Section 31 22 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 3123 00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES AND SEWERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all excavation for waterlines,wastewater lines,and storm sewer lines sewer structures appurtenances and connections, utility pipe or conduits, and for backfilling to the level of the original ground, all in conformity with the locations, lines,and grades shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer. This specification also governs for the necessary pumping or bailing and drainage, and all sheathing and bracing of trench walls, the furnishing and placing of cement stabilized backfill, and hauling and disposition of surplus materials, and the bridging of trenches and other provisions for traffic or access as provided herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS NONE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Unless otherwise specified on the plans or permitted by the Engineer, all sewers, pipe, and conduit shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides. Trenches shall be sheathed and braced as necessary throughout the construction period. Sheathing and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor(Section 31 23 33.13"Trench Safety for Excavations"). Trenches shall have a maximum width of one foot beyond the horizontal projection of the outside surfaces of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified or as shown in the plans. The Contractor shall not have more the 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the plans and specification. No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours. For all utility conduit and sewer pipe to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one foot above the top of the pipe or conduit after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material, is encountered at the bottom of the excavation,the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the plans. If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, it shall be controlled by the Contractor, prior to additional excavation. After stable conditions have been achieved, unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of 2 feet below the bottom of pipe for pipes 2 feet or more in height;and to a depth equal to the height of pipe,6 inch minimum,for pipe less than 2 feet in height. Such excavation shall be carried at least 1 foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with select material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the structure. For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals,sheathing,and bracing,or where ground water is encountered ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 4 Excavation & Backfill for Utilities&Sewers Phase 2 Section 31 23 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 and additional excavation and backfill required the work shall be done at the contractor's expense. B. Shaping of Trench Bottom. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the bedding as indicated in the plans and specification. C. Dewatering Trench. Pipe or conduit shall not be constructed or laid in a trench in the presence of water. All water shall be removed from the trench sufficiently prior to the pipe or conduit operation to insure a relatively dry(no standing water),firm bed. The trench shall be maintained in such dewatered condition until the trench has been backfilled to a height at lease one foot above the top of pipe. Removal of water may be accomplished by bailing, pumping,or by a well-points installation as conditions warrant. Removal of well points shall be at the rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). D. Excavation in Streets. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified,and the restoration of the pavement riding surface shall be in accordance with plan details or as required by other applicable specification. E. Removing Old Structures. When old masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of 1-foot below the bottom of the trench.When old inlets or manholes are encountered and no plan provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new sewer, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth 1-foot below the bottom of the trench. In each instance, the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. Where the trench cuts through storm or wastewater pipes,which are known to be abandoned,these pipes shall be cut flush with sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. F. Protection of Utilities.The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. Particular care shall be exercised to avoid the cutting or breakage of water and gas line. Such lines, if broken,shall be restored promptly by the Contractor.When active wastewater lines are cut in the trenching operations,temporary flumes shall be provided across the trench,while open, and the lines shall be restored when the backfilling has progressed to the original bedding lines of the line so cut. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay and concerned in effecting any utility adjustments necessary and shall not hold the City liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of conflicts. G. Excess Excavated Material. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed, by the Contractor, from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved. H. Backfill 1. Backfill Procedure Around Pipe All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes or conduits are properly laid. In addition to the specified pipe bedding material, the backfill around the pipe as applicable, shall be select material as described by specification "Select Material", free of large hard lumps, rock fragments or other debris. The backfill shall be deposited in the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench, in layers not to exceed eight (8) ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 4 Excavation & Backfill for Utilities&Sewers Phase 2 Section 31 23 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 inches (loose measurement), wetted if required to obtain proper compaction, and thoroughly compacted by mechanical tampers. A thoroughly compacted material shall be in place between the external wall of the pipe and the undisturbed sides of the trench and to a level twelve (12) inches above the top of the pipe as indicated on the plans. 2. Backfill Over One Foot Above Pipe The backfill for that portion of trench over(1)foot above the pipe or conduit shall be selected excavated material free of hard lumps, rock fragments, or other debris, placed in layers not more than 8 inches in depth (loose measurement), wetted if required and thoroughly compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural bank density and not less than 95%Std. Proctor. Flooding of backfill is not allowed. Jetting of backfill will be allowed in sandy soils and in soils otherwise approved by the Engineer. Regardless of backfill method, no lift shall exceed one foot and density shall not be less than 95%Std. Proctor. The last four feet of backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 inches and compacted by use of mechanical tampers to the natural back density and not less than 95% Std. Proctor. A period of not less than twenty-four (24) hours shall lapse between the time of jetting and the placing of the top four(4)feet of backfill. When indicated on the plans or at utility line crossings that are under pavements, trenches shall be backfilled to the road base with Hasty BaGkfill cement stabilized sand containing a minimum of 12 sacks of standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand. 3. Trench Width Pipe trench width to be per details as shown on plans. 4. Bedding and Backfill Materials Bedding and backfill of pipe to be per details as shown on plans. a. Sand Backfill Sand Backfill shall meet the following gradation limits: Sieve Size %Passing 1/2" 100 3/8" 90-100 #4 80-100 200 < 20% Sand Backfill shall have a PI from non-plastic to maximum of 10 and a maximum liquid limit of 30. Place sand backfill at 2%, plus or minus,from optimum moisture in lifts not to exceed 8" (loose measurement). Compact with mechanical tamps to a minimum of 95%of Standard Proctor Density. b. Select Material (See Standard Specification 32 11 16.13 Select Material) Select Material not from the excavation shall be a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material. The material shall be free from ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 4 Excavation & Backfill for Utilities&Sewers Phase 2 Section 31 23 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 vegetation, debris and clay lumps. That portion of the select material passing a 40-mesh sieve shall have a liquid limit of 45 maximum, a plasticity index range from 6 to 13, and a calculated linear shrinkage of 8.5 maximum. Select material shall be mixed uniformly and placed in layers not to exceed 8" loose depth. The material shall be brought within 2% of optimum moisture content and compacted to 95% modified Proctor Density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. C. Select Excavated Material Select material from the excavation shall be free of vegetation,debris, and rocks with a diameter over 1.5 inches and clay lumps. This material shall not include soils with a Unified System Classification of OL, MH, OH, CH, and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A-7. Select excavated material shall be placed in layers not to exceed 8" loose depth. The material shall be brought to within 2% of optimum moisture content and compacted to 95% modified Proctor Density. Each layer shall be complete before the succeeding layer is placed. d. Cement Stabilized Sand Cement stabilized sand shall be a mixture of a minimum of 1.5 sacks of Standard Type I of Portland Cement per cubic yard of sand. e. Crushed Stone Crushed Stone shall be well graded angular crushed stone in the general size range of 3/4"to 1/16"which has good stability. Crushed stone shall be graded in accordance with Size#67 and #68 of AASHTO M 43, ASTM D 448. f. Gravel Gravel shall be gravel with less than 10% by weight fines. The sieve analysis of gravel shall be in accordance with Size#67 or#68 of AASHTO M43, ASTM D 448. g. Concrete Concrete shall be Class B concrete in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 03 90 00 for"Portland Cement Concrete". END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 4 Excavation & Backfill for Utilities&Sewers Phase 2 Section 31 23 00 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SECTION 3124 10 BACKFILLING & COMPACTING (BUILDING AREA) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To- 1. Performance of backfilling and compacting in immediate building area. 2. Procedure and quality for backfilling and compacting performed on Project unless specifically specified otherwise. B. Related Sections- 1. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section. 2. Section 31 22 20 - Structural Excavation &Backfill 3. Backfilling and compacting inside and outside of building required for electrical and mechanical work is responsibility of respective Section doing work unless arranged differently by Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM D 698-A "Tests for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils & Soil Aggregate Mixtures- Using Nuclear Method". 2. ASTM D 2922 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Backfill and Fill Materials 1. Provide satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill, free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 3" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable matter, and other deleterious matter. 2. Use excavated or borrow material that has been sampled, tested and approved as satisfactory material. 3. Backfill excavations as promptly as the work permits, but not until completion of all inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. a. Select Fill 1) Fill under all concrete deck/drive including slope to existing grade, and foundation pad areas (if shown required- see Structural `S' Drawings and Notes thereon which supercede this spec if in conflict) to consist of low plasticity index materials (7 to 18) as approved by the Engineer which is to be placed in 8" loose (max.) layers and compacted by use of sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic tired roller, tamp rollers, or other compaction equipment capable of obtaining the required density through the entire layer and final 6" compacted layer. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 1 of 5 Backfilling &Compacting Phase 2 Section 31 24 10 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 2) These materials shall be predominately sandy in nature, ideally with enough binder to facilitate trenching operations and with more than 50% retained on a #200 sieve. On site materials may be acceptable for use but must be laboratory tested for compliance. b. Dirt Fill 1) Fill dirt in immediate building area approved by the Engineer (if needed) shall be furnished, hauled, and spread on the site at all locations where other materials are not specified, and in accordance with the drawings. Dirt fill at back slope to existing grade at building perimeter may be material excavated for foundation. C. Trench Backfill (in immediate building area) 1) Site soil or material similar to select but P.I. of 20 or less. 2) Trench backfill under foundation shall be of same material as foundation select fill. d. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of the Section, shall be approved by Architect/Engineer. Fill materials for roads, drives, pads and other general park site areas are covered by separate section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Strip areas, not otherwise being excavated, but being filled over to minimum 3"depth. 1. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. Proof roll wetted subgrade prior to placement of fill materials under Testing Lab observation. Loose or soft areas detected shall be replaced with select fill and recompacted. B. When the existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for the particular area classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to the optimum moisture content and compact to the required depth and percentage of maximum density. C. Locate on record set drawings, utility and service lines to be covered. D. Test and have approved utility lines before backfilling. E. Take in account landscaping and finished grades. 3.02 BACKFILL AND FILL A. General 1. Place acceptable soil material in layers to required subgrade elevations, for each area classification list below. a. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. b. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 2 of 5 Backfilling &Compacting Phase 2 Section 31 24 10 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 C. Under building slabs, use select fill material. d. Under piping and conduit, use subbase material where subbase is indicated under piping or conduit; shape to fit bottom 90% of cylinder. 2. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: a. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. C. Removal of concrete formwork. d. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 1) Cut off temporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. e. Removal of trash and debris. f. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. 3. Ground Surface Preparation: When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth (6" minimum) and percentage of maximum density. 4. Placement and Compaction a. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. b. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy. C. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structure, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, piping. or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift. 5. Backfilling a. Slope grade away from building for positive drainage at slopes indicated. b. Hand backfill when close to building or where damage to building might result. C. Compact as specified above. Do not use puddling to consolidate fill areas. 6. If site material will not compact to specified density or it is suspected that it will not, remove and replace with material specified in PRODUCT section above. 7. Site Utilities (outside structures) a. Place backfill in 12" lift compacted per specification. Where trenching is through another type fill area, match fill material and compaction requirement of that material. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 3 of 5 Backfilling &Compacting Phase 2 Section 31 24 10 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3.03 COMPACTION A. General 1. Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. 2. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements a. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soil) determined in accordance with ASTM D698; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesion-less soils). 1) Structures, Building Foundation Slabs& Decks a. Compact subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% Standard Proctor Density at optimum moisture. 2) Lawn or Unpaved Areas b. Compacted top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 85% maximum density for cohesive soils and 90% relative density for cohesion-less soils. 3) Site Utility Trenches C. Moisture condition remaining backfill to plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture and compact to 90% minimum relative compaction to within 12"of finish grade. Trenches through areas with higher compaction requirement shall be compacted to the higher requirement. 4) See also Drawings, `S' Sheets Notes: Drawing compaction note requirements supercede specification. B. Moisture Control 1. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compacted, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. a. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allow to dry. b. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor will employ and pay for testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations, paid for by testing allowance. B. Test Reports 1. Will be submitted directly to Architect/Engineer from the testing services, with copy to Contractor. ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 4 of 5 Backfilling &Compacting Phase 2 Section 31 24 10 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 a. Field density test reports. b. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil employed. C. Contractor must coordinate with the selected lab at appropriate times commensurate with work progress and in compliance with number of tests, etc., required. D. Quality Control Testing During Construction 1. Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction is performed. Coordinate with and contact Lab as necessary to provide following: a. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Nuclear Method)as applicable. b. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab area, but in no case less than 3 tests per layer. E. If in the opinion of Architect/Engineer, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing. Costs of such repairs and retesting shall be responsibility of Contractor, and not charged against testing allowance. END OF SECTION ONSWTP Filter Building Rehabilitation Page 5 of 5 Backfilling &Compacting Phase 2 Section 31 24 10 Project No. 20094A DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thc$Pr for ity� Environmental Inspection Report .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. August 4, 2021 O.N. STEVENS WATER TREATMENT PLANT 13101 LEOPARD STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS Prepared for: ADU RRA GROUP, INC, Prepared by: ENVIROTEST, LLC 5233 IH 37 SUITE A-3 CORPUS CHRISTI,TEXAS 78408 (361) 887-9400 ENVIROTEST PROJECT NUMBER: 17470 HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jJiTE hien Quality is thy$Priority August 4, 2021 Mr. Craig Forsythe Regional Architectural Director Adurra Group, Inc. 801 Navigation Boulevard, Suite 300 Corpus Christi,TX 78408 RE: O.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant 13101 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,TX 78410 Envirotest Project Number: 17470 Dear Mr. Forsythe: Enclosed is the report for the environmental inspection performed at the O.N. Stevens Water Treatment Plant in Corpus Christi, TX. The inspection was performed on July 26, 2021 by Mr. Paul Kass of Envirotest, LLC. Mr. Kass is licensed as an Asbestos Inspector(#60-2824) by the Texas Department of State Health Services. SCOPE OF WORK The scope of this project was limited to suspect asbestos- and lead-containing materials associated with the Filter Plant the above reference property. Twenty-one (21) samples of suspect asbestos materials and four (4) samples of suspect lead-containing paint were collected. Asbestos Result Summary Suspect asbestos-containing materials (ACM) were collected according to protocol established by the Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAPHR) 295.34 (c) for building demolitions and renovations. During the inspection, sampled materials were assigned a sample number and a homogenous area number. Samples were collected of each area and the friability and condition of the suspect material was assessed. The State of Texas defines asbestos-containing materials as having > 1% asbestos content. Samples of the following materials were found to contain greater than one percent(>I%) asbestos: 1) Windowpane Sealant HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jJiTE hien Quality is thy$Priority Lead Result Summary Paint sampling was conducted in accordance with commonly accepted commercial and professional standard practices for similar assignments. The intent of the project was to identify painted surfaces that may contain elevated levels of lead. Visually discernable painted surface coatings associated with the above-referenced Filter Plant were sampled for lead content. The State of Texas defines lead-based paint as having>_ 1.0 mg/cm as measured by XRF or laboratory analysis, or >_ 5,000 parts per million (ppm) lead, >_ 0.5% lead by weight, or >_ 5000 mg/kg concentration, as measured by laboratory analysis. All samples collected where below the regulatory limit for being considered lead containing paint. Sampled Materials Data Tables 1 and 2 contain the homogenous area numbers, material types, material descriptions, material locations, condition assessments, and a summary of the analytical results for asbestos. A list of definitions can be found following the text of this report. Table 3 associates homogenous paint descriptions, locations, and a summary of the analytical results. The complete laboratory analytical results for asbestos and paint film samples are listed in separate laboratory documents following the text of this report. RECOMMENDATIONS—ASBESTOS Recommendations concerning the asbestos-containing materials (ACM) identified in this limited inspection are based on the following: 1. Condition 2. Friability 3. Potential for disturbance Condition and Friability The asbestos-containing wall texture and joint compound are in good condition and considered friable. The asbestos-containing floor tile and mastic are in good condition and considered non-friable. Response Actions for Renovation According to NESHAP 40 CFR 61 Subpart M, 61.145 and Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules, 295.60, friable or potentially friable ACM which will be disturbed during renovation, or has the potential to be disturbed, must be removed. A licensed asbestos consultant should be consulted prior to any renovation operations in a building or other structure containing ACM. The project must be designed by a DSHS (Department of State Health Services) licensed asbestos consultant and monitored by a DSHS licensed company. HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jJiTE hien Quality is thy$Priority Response Actions for Demolition According to NESHAP 40 CFR 61 Subpart M, 61.145 and Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules, 295.60, friable or potentially friable ACM which will be disturbed during demolition, or has the potential to be disturbed, must be removed. Thus Envirotest, LLC recommends that all asbestos-containing materials be removed from the building prior to demolition. A licensed asbestos consultant should be consulted prior to any demolition operations in a building or other structure containing ACM. The project must be designed by a DSHS licensed asbestos consultant and monitored by a DSHS licensed company. Use of Licensed Contractors According to the Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules, 295.34, the removal of asbestos in projects covered by the regulations require asbestos abatement specifications to be written by a DSHS (Department of State Health Services) licensed asbestos consultant and air monitoring be performed by a DSHS licensed air monitoring firm. In addition, a DSHS licensed asbestos abatement contractor must perform the removal. Upon request from the Client, Envirotest, LLC can develop asbestos abatement specifications and obtain removal bids from multiple licensed abatement contractors. Please contact Stacy Kraatz at 361-887-9400 or by email at skraatz@envirotestllc.com if this service is desired. ANALYTICAL METHODS Asbestos and lead analyses were performed at SanAir Technologies Laboratories Inc. laboratory in Powhatan, VA. SanAir is an American Industrial Hygiene Association participant laboratory (#162952), a National Institute of Standards and Technology NVLAP-accredited laboratory (#200870), and licensed by the Texas Department of State Health Services (#30-0440) for asbestos laboratory analysis. Polarized light microscopy (PLM) lab analyses of asbestos samples was performed using standard oil immersion and optical staining techniques. Lead-based paint film lab analyses were performed via the EPA Method SW-846 7420/30508, using inductively coupled plasma optical emission spectroscopy. LIMITATIONS This sampling report does not guarantee that additional asbestos-containing materials or lead-containing materials are not present. The scope of this project was limited to the materials sampled within this report. Areas such as, but not limited to, beneath existing flooring, inside walls, inside doors, interior of ductwork, interior of mechanical or other equipment, interior of piping flanges/valves, interior of electrical components, behind all non-movable finish materials, and all other portions of the building not designated in the Scope of Work, were specifically excluded and not sampled for the presence of lead in paint or asbestos. This sampling report does not guarantee that lead-containing paint is not present in the building. The scope of this project was limited to the materials sampled within this report. All other portions of the building not HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr iofi'ty� designated in the Scope of Work were specifically excluded. This report does not constitute a comprehensive lead-based paint survey. The following analytical results pertain to only the samples analyzed and may not reflect the actual composition of the entire homogeneous area. Envirotest, LLC assumes no responsibility for any subsequent use or interpretations of these analytical results. This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any other state or federal government agency. Please call us if you have any questions regarding this inspection report. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you. Sincerely, 4*1Stacy Kraatz M.P. Kass Asbestos Consultant (#10-5874) Asbestos Inspector(#60-2824) South Texas Regional Manager Envirotest, LLC Envirotest, LLC HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr iofi'ty� List of Asbestos Definitions Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM) - any material containing more than one percent asbestos (chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite,tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos). Demolition - the wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structure member and any related razing, removing, or stripping of asbestos products. Disturbance - contact which releases fibers from ACM or debris containing ACM including activities which that disrupts the matrix of ACM, render ACM friable, or generate visible debris. Encapsulation - a method of control of asbestos fibers in which the surface of ACM is penetrated by or covered with a liquid coating prepared for that purpose. Enclosure - the construction of an airtight, impermeable, semi-permanent barrier surrounding asbestos to prevent the release of asbestos fibers into the air. Fiber-a particulate form of asbestos, 5 micrometers or longer,with a length-to diameter ratio of at least 3 to 1. Friable Materials - any material that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Homogeneous Area -an area of surfacing material or thermal system that is uniform in color and texture. Intact- means that the ACM has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so that it is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix. Removal - all operations where ACM is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, and includes demolition operations. Renovation -the modifying of any existing structure, or portion thereof. Repair - overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsulation or other repair of ACM attached to structures or substrates. HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� Table I—Asbestos Sample Materials Summary Table II —Asbestos Sample Locations / Homogenous Area Association HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotestllc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 im EMYtR QTEST Wben Qualify is the Priority I-- — ........... TABLE I—ASBESTOS SAMPLE MATERIALS SUMMARY 13101 Leopard Street,Corpus Christi,TX 78410 MATERIAL MATERIAL ASBESTOS- FLA.* MATERIAL LOCATION CONDITION FRIABLE CONTAINING NAME DESCRIPTION MATERIAL 1 Drywall White Chalky Gypsum Board Walls at Level 2 at Entrance to Good Yes No Filter Plant 2 Joint Compound Dried White Gypsum Mud Walls at Level 2 at Entrance to Good Yes No Filter Plant 3 Window Sealant Black Caulk Windows in Brick Good No No 4 Window Sealant Gray Caulk Windowpanes Good No YES 5 Insulation White Fibrous Material Level 2 Ceiling Good No No 6 Expansion Joint Gray Rubber Material Level 2 Expansion Seam Good No No Sealant 7 Fire Hose White Hose with Woven Fire Hoses Good No No IExterior Cover Homogeneous Area HOUSTON a CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE 52331H 37 Suite A-3-Corpus Christi,Texas 78408-Voice 361 887 9400-Fax 361887 9401 www.envirotestlic com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� TABLE II: ASBESTOS SAMPLE NUMBER<--> HOMOGENEOUS AREA 13101 Leopard Street,Corpus Christi,TX 78410 SAMPLE# H.A.*' SAMPLE LOCATION 1 1 Level 2 Entrance Wall 2 1 Level 2 Entrance Wall 3 1 Level 2 Entrance Wall 4 2 Level 2 Entrance Wall 5 2 Level 2 Entrance Wall 6 2 Level 2 Entrance Wall 7 3 Level 2 North Window 8 3 Level 2 Center Window 9 3 Level 2 South Window 10 4 Level 2 North Window 11 4 Level 2 Center Window 12 4 Level 2 South Window 13 5 Level 2 North Area 14 5 Level 2 Center Area 15 5 Level 2 South Area 16 6 Level 2 Expansion Seam 17 6 Level 2 Expansion Seam 18 6 Level 2 Expansion Seam 19 7 Level 2 North Fire Hose 20 7 Level 2 North Fire Hose 21 7 Level 2 North Fire Hose * Homogeneous Area HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotesdlc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� Table III— Lead in Paint Sample Summary HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotesdlc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� TABLE III: LEAD PAINT SAMPLE SUMMARY 13101 Leopard Street,Corpus Christi,TX 78410 PAINT COLOR.LAYER LEAF} LEAD SAMPLE SAMPLE LOCATIONCONCENTRATION EASEL} # DESCRIPTION mg/kg(%o by weight) PAINT Level 2 Filter Plant Entrance Door L1 Beige <90.9 (<0.009) Yes Frame Level 2 Filter Plant Entrance L2 Drywall White <87 (<0.009) No EPA, HUD, and Texas Standards for paint being considered lead-containing are: 1.0 mg/cm2-X-ray fluorescence(XRF) >_5,000 parts per million (ppm) >_5000 mg/kg concentration >_0.5% by weight HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotesdlc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� Asbestos and Paint Sample Location Diagrams HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotesdlc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SAMPLE LOCATIONS DRAWING 3,6 2,5 L-1 1,4 L-2 7,10,13 19,20,21 F16 17 18 8,11,14 9,12,15 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� Asbestos Polarized Light Microscopy Laboratory Analytical Results HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotesdlc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Vi uVi 6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i illi uuumuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumuumiipiiiiiVm V! mnuuul�ll�ll�ll�lul� .,. SanA- ir 1111111 uum III III alum Vmm Vmm III mm II Is Technologies Laboratory Analysis Report prepared for Envirotest, LLC Report Date: 7/30/2021 Project Name: On Stevens Water Plant Project#: 1747 SanAir ID#: 21038016 INV A TESTI HVG NVLAP LAB CODE 200870-0 1551 Oakbridge Dr. Suite B II Powhatan, Virginia 23139-8061 888.895.11 77 11 804.897.1177 II fax:804.897.0070 I IAQ@SanAir.com II SanAir.com Page 1 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SanAir ID Number ... 21038016 SanAfr FINAL REPORT Technologies Laboratory 7/30/2021 4:10:35 PM Name: Envirotest, LLC Project Number: 1747 Address: 1525 S. Broadway P.O. Number: St. Louis, MO 63104 Project Name:On Stevens Water Plant Phone: 713-782-4411 Collected Date:7/26/2021 Received Date:7/27/2021 9:55:00 AM Dear M. P. Kass, We at SanAir would like to thank you for the work you recently submitted. The 21 sample(s)were received on Tuesday, July 27, 2021 via FedEx. The final report(s) is enclosed for the following sample(s): 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21. These results only pertain to this job and should not be used in the interpretation of any other job. This report is only complete in its entirety. Refer to the listing below of the pages included in a complete final report. Sincerely, 'M Sandra Sobrino Asbestos& Materials Laboratory Manager SanAir Technologies Laboratory Final Report Includes: -Cover Letter -Analysis Pages - Disclaimers and Additional Information Sample conditions: -21 samples in Good condition. 1551 Oakbridge Dr. Suite B, Powhatan, VA 23139 804.897.1177 Fax: 804.897.0070 www.SanAir.com IAQ@SanAir.com Page 2 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SanAir ID Number ... 21038016 SanAfr FINAL REPORT Technologies Laboratory 7/30/2021 4:10:35 PM Name: Envirotest, LLC Project Number: 1747 Address: 1525 S. Broadway P.O. Number: St. Louis, MO 63104 Project Name:On Stevens Water Plant Phone: 713-782-4411 Collected Date:7/26/2021 Received Date:7/27/2021 9:55:00 AM Analyst: Vaughan, Nathaniel Asbestos Bulk PLM EPA 600/R-93/116 � W 1 /21038016-001 White 10%Cellulose 90%Other None Detected Drywall 2nd Floor @ Entrance To Non-Fibrous Filter Plant Heterogeneous 2/21038016-002 White 10%Cellulose 90%Other None Detected Drywall 2nd Floor @ Entrance To Non-Fibrous Filter Plant Heterogeneous 3/21038016-003 White 10%Cellulose 90%Other None Detected Drywall 2nd Floor @ Entrance To Non-Fibrous Filter Plant Heterogeneous 4/21038016-004 White 100%Other None Detected Joint Compound 2nd Floor @ Non-Fibrous Entrance To Filter Plant Heterogeneous 5/21038016-005 White 100%Other None Detected Joint Compound 2nd Floor @ Non-Fibrous Entrance To Filter Plant Heterogeneous 6/21038016-006 White 100%Other None Detected Joint Compound 2nd Floor @ Non-Fibrous Entrance To Filter Plant Heterogeneous 7/21038016-007 Black 100%Other None Detected Window Sealant 1 st And 2nd Non-Fibrous Floor Windows To Brick Heterogeneous 8/21038016-008 Black 100%Other None Detected Window Sealant 1st And 2nd Non-Fibrous Floor Windows To Brick Heterogeneous 9/21038016-009 Black 100%Other None Detected Window Sealant 1 st And 2nd Non-Fibrous Floor Windows To Brick Heterogeneous 10/21038016-010 Grey 97%Other 3%Chrysotile Window Sealant 1st And 2nd Non-Fibrous Floor Windowpane Sealant Heterogeneous Analyst: f V^d 0, Approved Signatory: 141 Analysis Date: 7/30/2021 Date: 7/30/2021 Page 3 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SanAir ID Number ... 21038016 SanAfr FINAL REPORT Technologies Laboratory 7/30/2021 4:10:35 PM Name: Envirotest, LLC Project Number: 1747 Address: 1525 S. Broadway P.O. Number: St. Louis, MO 63104 Project Name:On Stevens Water Plant Phone: 713-782-4411 Collected Date:7/26/2021 Received Date:7/27/2021 9:55:00 AM Analyst: Vaughan, Nathaniel Asbestos Bulk PLM EPA 600/R-93/116 � W 11 /21038016-011 Grey 97%Other 3%Chrysotile Window Sealant 1 st And 2nd Non-Fibrous Floor Windowpane Sealant Heterogeneous 12/21038016-012 Grey 97%Other 3%Chrysotile Window Sealant 1st And 2nd Non-Fibrous Floor Windowpane Sealant Heterogeneous 13/21038016-013 White 95%Cellulose 5%Other None Detected Insulation 2nd Floor Ceiling Fibrous Heterogeneous 14/21038016-014 White 95%Cellulose 5%Other None Detected Insulation 2nd Floor Ceiling Fibrous Heterogeneous 15/21038016-015 White 95%Cellulose 5%Other None Detected Insulation 2nd Floor Ceiling Fibrous Heterogeneous 16/21038016-016 Grey 100%Other None Detected Expansion Joint Sealant 2nd Floor Non-Fibrous Expansion Joint Heterogeneous 17/21038016-017 Grey 100%Other None Detected Expansion Joint Sealant 2nd Floor Non-Fibrous Expansion Joint Heterogeneous 18/21038016-018 Grey 100%Other None Detected Expansion Joint Sealant 2nd Floor Non-Fibrous Expansion Joint Heterogeneous 19/21038016-019 White 95%Synthetic 5%Other None Detected Fire Hose Fire Hoses Fibrous Heterogeneous 20/21038016-020 White 95%Synthetic 5%Other None Detected Fire Hose Fire Hoses Fibrous Heterogeneous Analyst: f V^d 0, Approved Signatory: 4V-41— Analysis Date: 7/30/2021 Date: 7/30/2021 1551 Oakbridge Dr. Suite B, Powhatan, VA 23139 1804.897.1177 1 Fax: 804.897.0070 1 www.SanAir.com I IAQ@SanAir.com Page 4 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SanAir ID Number ... 21038016 SanAfr FINAL REPORT Technologies Laboratory 7/30/2021 4:10:35 PM Name: Envirotest, LLC Project Number: 1747 Address: 1525 S. Broadway P.O. Number: St. Louis, MO 63104 Project Name:On Stevens Water Plant Phone: 713-782-4411 Collected Date:7/26/2021 Received Date:7/27/2021 9:55:00 AM Analyst: Vaughan, Nathaniel Asbestos Bulk PLM EPA 600/R-93/116 � W 21 /21038016-021 White 95%Synthetic 5%Other None Detected Fire Hose Fire Hoses Fibrous Heterogeneous Analyst: fucodfuVLDOC Approved Signatory: 141 Analysis Date: 7/30/2021 Date: 7/30/2021 1551 Oakbridge Dr. Suite B, Powhatan, VA 23139 1804.897.1177 1 Fax: 804.897.0070 1 www.SanAir.com I IAQ@SanAir.com Page 5 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Disclaimer This report is the sole property of the client named on the SanAir Technologies Laboratory chain- of-custody (COC). Results in the report are confidential information intended only for the use by the customer listed on the COC. Neither results nor reports will be discussed with or released to any third party without our client's written permission. The final report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of the laboratory to assure that parts of the report are not taken out of context. The information provided in this report applies only to the samples submitted and is relevant only for the date, time, and location of sampling. The accuracy of the results is dependent upon the client's sampling procedure and information provided to the laboratory by the client. SanAir assumes no responsibility for the sampling procedure and will provide evaluation reports based solely on the sample(s) in the condition in which they arrived at the laboratory and information provided by the client on the COC, such as: project number, project name, collection dates, po number, special instructions, samples collected by, sample numbers, sample identifications, sample type, selected analysis type, flow rate, total volume or area, and start stop times that may affect the validity of the results in this report. Samples were received in good condition unless otherwise noted on the report. SanAir assumes no responsibility or liability for the manner in which the results are used or interpreted. This report does not constitute and shall not be used to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, or any other U.S. governmental agencies and may not be certified by every local, state, and federal regulatory agencies. Samples are held for a period of 60 days. Fibers smaller than 5 microns cannot be seen with this method due to scope limitations. For NY state samples, method EPA 600/M4-82-020 is performed. NYELAP Disclaimer: Polarized- light microscopy is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor covering and similar non-friable organically bound materials. Quantitative transmission electron microscopy is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non-asbestos containing. Asbestos Certifications NVLAP lab code 200870-0 City of Philadelphia: ALL-460 PA Department of Environmental Protection Number: 68-05397 California License Number: 2915 Colorado License Number: AL-23143 Connecticut License Number: PH-0105 Massachusetts License Number: AA000222 Maine License Number: LB-0075, LA-0084 New York ELAP lab ID: 11983 Rhode Island License Number: PCM00126, PLM00126, TEM00126 Texas Department of State Health Services License Number: 300440 Commonwealth of Virginia 3333000323 Washington State License Number: C989 West Virginia License Number: LT000616 Vermont License: AL166318 Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality: 212253, Cert 05088 Revision Date: 8/14/2020 PlRggE6b8fl m DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 jliTE hien Quality is thy$Pr for ity� Lead in Paint Laboratory Analytical Results HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A-3 • Corpus Christi,Texas 78408 • Voice 361.887.9400 • Fax 361 887.9401 • www.envirotesdlc.com DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Vi uVi 6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i6i illi uuumuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumuumiipiiiiiVm V! �uuul�ll�ll�ll�lul� .,. SanA- ir 1111111 uum III III alum Vmm Vmm III mm II Is Technologies Laboratory Analysis Report prepared for Envirotest, LLC Report Date: 8/3/2021 Project Name: On Stevens Water Plant Project#: 17470-L SanAir ID#: 21038017 ddb ID#162952 1551 Oakbridge Dr. Suite B II Powhatan, Virginia 23139-8061 888.895.11 77 11 804.897.1177 II fax:804.897.0070 I IAQ@SanAir.com II SanAir.com Page 1 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SanAir ID Number ... 21038017 SanAfr FINAL REPORT Technologies Laboratory 8/3/2021 10:02:55 AM Name: Envirotest, LLC Project Number: 17470-L Address: 1525 S. Broadway P.O. Number:5016 St. Louis, MO 63104 Project Name:On Stevens Water Plant Phone: 713-782-4411 Collected Date:7/26/2021 Received Date:7/27/2021 9:55:00 AM Dear M. P. Kass, We at SanAir would like to thank you for the work you recently submitted. The 2 sample(s)were received on Tuesday, July 27, 2021 via FedEx. The final report(s) is enclosed for the following sample(s): L-1, L-2. These results only pertain to this job and should not be used in the interpretation of any other job. This report is only complete in its entirety. Refer to the listing below of the pages included in a complete final report. Sincerely, Abisola Kasali Metals Laboratory Director SanAir Technologies Laboratory Final Report Includes: -Cover Letter -Analysis on Test Family AA - Disclaimers and Additional Information Sample conditions: -2 samples in Good condition. 1551 Oakbridge Dr. Suite B, Powhatan, VA 23139 804.897.1177 Fax: 804.897.0070 www.SanAir.com IAQ@SanAir.com Page 2 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SanAir ID Number ... 21038017 SanAfr FINAL REPORT Technologies Laboratory 8/3/2021 10:02:55 AM Name: Envirotest, LLC Project Number: 17470-L Address: 1525 S. Broadway P.O. Number:5016 St. Louis, MO 63104 Project Name:On Stevens Water Plant Phone: 713-782-4411 Collected Date:7/26/2021 Received Date:7/27/2021 9:55:00 AM Analyst: Baird, Marti Test Method: SW846/M3050B/7000B Lead Paint Analysis W N W I W W I I 21038017-1 L-1 <10 0.11 90.9 <90.9 <0.009% 2nd Floor Filter Plant Entrance Door Pg/g(ppm) By Weight Frame Beige 21038017-2 L-2 < 10 0.115 87 <87 <0.009% 2nd Floor Filter Plant Entrance Pg/g(ppm) By Weight Drywall White Method Reporting Limit<10 pg/0.1 g paint Sample L-2 contained substrate. Signature: l A Reviewed: 4414 --Q"Date: /7/`2"9_/2021Date: 7/29/2021 Page 3 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Disclaimer SanAir Technologies Laboratory, Inc. participates in the Environmental Lead Accreditation Program (ELAP) administered by AIHA-LAP, LLC (Lab ID162952). Refer to our accreditation certificate or www.aihaaccreditediabs.org for an up to date list of the Fields of Testing for which we are accredited. SanAir also participates in the State of New York's DOH-ELAP (Lab Id 11983), and has met the EPA's NLLAP program standards. This report does not constitute endorsement by AIHA-LAP, LLC and/or any other U.S. governmental agencies; and may not be accredited by every local, state or federal regulatory agency. This report is the sole property of the client named on the SanAir Technologies Laboratory chain-of-custody (COC). Neither results nor reports will be discussed with or released to any third party without our client's written permission. Final reports cannot be reproduced, except in full, without written authorization from SanAir Technologies Laboratory, Inc. The information provided in this report applies only to the samples submitted and is relevant only for the date, time, and location of sampling. SanAir is not responsible for sample collection or interpretation made by others. SanAir assumes no responsibility for information provided by the client on the COC such as project number,project name, collection dates,po number, special instructions, samples collected by, sample numbers, sample identifications, sample type, selected analysis type, flow rate, total volume or area, and start stop times that may affect the validity of the results in this report. SanAir Technologies Laboratory, Inc only assures the precision and accuracy of the data it generates and assumes no responsibility for errors or biasing that occur during collection prior to SanAir's receipt of the sample(s). SanAir's Method Detection Limits (MDL) and Reporting Limits (RL)have been derived using various materials meeting each accrediting agencies' standards. All quality control results are acceptable unless otherwise noted. Results are not corrected for blanks. For Lead Exposure Limits in Paint, refer to HUD Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead-Based Paint Hazards and State and Federal Regulations, where applicable. Revision Date 10/20/2020 Page 4 of 6 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DoouGignEnvelope ID:0A91F8A6'E9AJ4EE CONIcheck Software Version 4°1.5.1 Mechanical = 0 �� 0� Certificate�°� ���� ����0���� ��N���� ��������� �� 0 ���� 0l�0�~��NN��mmw���wN ����m � m N���m ����� ����0 �mN ���w���� Project Information Energy Code: 2015|ECC Project Title: O.N.S.VVIP. FILTER eU|LD|NGPHASE o Location: Corpus Christi, Texas Climate Zone: 2a Project Type: Alteration Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: CORPUS CHRISTI,Tx Mechanical Systems List Quantity System Type&Description 1 HVAC System 1 (Single Zona): Heating: 1 eooh-Other,Electric,Capacity=o4kBm/h muminimum efficiency requirement applies Cooling: 1each-Split System,Capacity=53kEnu/h.Air-Cooled Condenser,Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency=13.OoSEER,Required Efficiency: 13.00 SEER Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 1 —Compliance(Motor nameplate HPmethud):Passes Fans: FAN I Supply,Constant Volume, 1900 CFM,0.8 motor nameplate hp,0.8 fan efficiency grade 1 HVAC System 2(Single Znne): Heating: 1each-Other,Electric,Capacity=o4kBm/h wvminimum efficiency requirement applies Cooling: 1 each-Split System,Capacity=75 kBtu/h,Air-Cooled Condenser,Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency=11.2OEER,Required Efficiency: 11.20 EER + 12.8|EER Fan System: FAN SYSTEM o—Compliance(Motor nameplate HPmethod):Passes Fans: FAN 2Supply,Constant Volume,27OOCRN. 1.nmotor nameplate hp,1.sfan efficiency grade 1 Water Heater 1: Electric Storage Water Heater,Capacity:mngallons Proposed Efficiency:n,o1SL,mm(if>12xvv.Required Efficiency:1.2nSL,mm(if>1xkW) Mechanical Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical alteration project represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet the 2015 IECC requirements in CO,Mcheck Vers" . . .1 and to comply with any applicable mandatory uirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. Project Title: D.N.S.VVJ.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE Z Report date: lI/29/2l Data filename: z:\2021\21I]9_�DDC5\21I]9MECHCOMCMECK.cck Page 1nf 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 COMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.1 Inspection Checklist Energy Code: 2015 IECC Requirements: 0.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For each requirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exception is being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided. S .......................................................................................................................................... Plan Review Complies? Comments/Assumptions & C103.2 Plans, specifications, and/or ❑Complies [PR211 calculations provide all information ❑Does Not with which compliance can be determined for the mechanical ❑Not Observable systems and equipment and ❑Not Applicable document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Load calculations per acceptable engineering standards and handbooks. C103.2 Plans, specifications, and/or ❑Complies [PR311 calculations provide all information ❑Does Not with which compliance can be ❑Not Observable determined for the service water heating systems and equipment and ❑Not Applicable document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Hot water system sized per manufacturer's sizing guide. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 2 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 SectloI ........................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... #� Footing / Foundation Inspection Co plies? Comments/Assumptions �c Regal C403.2.4. :Snow/ice melting system sensors for ❑Complies 5, future connection to controls. Freeze ❑Does Not C403.2.4. protection systems have automatic 6 controls installed. ❑Not Observable [FO913 ❑Not Applicable Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 3 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Sectl� I ........................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... #� Plumbing Rough-In Inspection C� plles2 Comments/Assumptions �c Regelt3 C404.5, :Heated water supply piping conforms ❑Complies C404.5.1, 'to pipe length and volume ❑Does Not C404.5.2 :requirements. Refer to section details. ❑Not Observable [PL613 ❑Not Applicable C404.5, Heated water supply piping conforms ❑Complies C404.5.1, 'to pipe length and volume ❑Does Not C404.5.2 requirements. Refer to section details. ❑ [PL613 Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C404.5, Heated water supply piping conforms ❑Complies C404.5.1, 'to pipe length and volume ❑Does Not C404.5.2 requirements. Refer to section details. [PL613 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C404 6 3 Pumps that circulate water between a ❑Complies [PL713 heater and storage tank have controls ❑Does Not :that limit operation from startup to <= 5 minutes after end of heating ❑Not Observable cycle. ❑Not Applicable C404 6 3 Pumps that circulate water between a ❑Complies [PL713 heater and storage tank have controls ❑Does Not :that limit operation from startup to <= 5 minutes after end of heating ❑Not Observable cycle. ❑Not Applicable C404 6 3 Pumps that circulate water between a ❑Complies [PL713 heater and storage tank have controls ❑Does Not :that limit operation from startup to <= 5 minutes after end of heating ❑Not Observable cycle. ❑Not Applicable C404.7 :Water distribution system that pumps ❑Complies [PL813 water from a heated-water supply ❑Does Not pipe back to the heated-water source through a cold-water supply pipe is a ❑Not Observable demand recirculation water system. ❑Not Applicable Pumps within this system have controls that start the pump upon receiving a signal from the action of a user of a fixture or appliance and limits the temperature of the water entering the cold-water piping to 104°F. .... ... ...... C404.7 Water distribution system that pumps ❑Complies [PL813 water from a heated-water supply ❑Does Not pipe back to the heated-water source through a cold-water supply pipe is a ❑Not Observable demand recirculation water system. ❑Not Applicable Pumps within this system have controls that start the pump upon receiving a signal from the action of a user of a fixture or appliance and limits the temperature of the water entering the cold-water piping to 104°F. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 4 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Sectlo................................................................................................................................................................ ........... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... #� Plumbing Rough-In Inspectlon Co Piles? Comments/Assumptions & Rege113 C404.7 Water distribution system that pumps ❑Complies [PL813 water from a heated-water supply ❑Does Not pipe back to the heated-water source through a cold-water supply pipe is a ❑Not Observable demand recirculation water system. ❑Not Applicable Pumps within this system have controls that start the pump upon receiving a signal from the action of a user of a fixture or appliance and limits the temperature of the water entering the cold-water piping to 104°F. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 5 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Sectlo. ................................................................................................................................................ ..................pIles? ........................... #� Mechanical Rough-In Inspection Co Co ants/Asea ptlons & Regell3 C402.2.6 ::Thermally ineffective panel surfaces of.❑Complies [ME41]3 sensible heating panels have ❑Does Not i insulation >= R-3.5. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.13 Unenclosed spaces that are heated ❑Complies [ME71]2 use only radiant heat. ❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403 2 3 'HVAC equipment efficiency verified. ❑Complies ,See the Mechanical systems list for values. [ME55]2 ❑Does Not ❑Not Observable .............................................. ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. ,Fault detection and diagnostics ❑Complies 7 installed with air-cooled unitary DX ❑Does Not [ME113]2 ;units having economizers. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.6. Demand control ventilation provided ❑Complies 1 for spaces >500 ft2 and >25 ❑Does Not [ME59]1 people/1000 ft2 occupant density and ❑Not Observable served by systems with air side economizer, auto modulating outside ❑Not Applicable air damper control, or design airflow >3,000 cfm. C403.2.6. :Enclosed parking garage ventilation ❑Complies 2 has automatic contaminant detection ❑Does Not [ME115]3 and capacity to stage or modulate fans to 50%or less of design capacity. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.7 Exhaust air energy recovery on ❑Complies [ME57]1 systems meeting Table C403.2.7(1) ❑Does Not and C403.2.7(2). ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403 2 8 Kitchen exhaust systems comply with ❑Complies [ME116]3 replacement air and conditioned ❑Does Not :supply air limitations, and satisfy hood rating requirements and maximum ❑Not Observable exhaust rate criteria. ❑Not Applicable C403 2 9 HVAC ducts and plenums insulated. ❑Complies [ME60]2 Where ducts or plenums are installed ❑Does Not in or under a slab, verification may need to occur during Foundation ❑Not Observable Inspection. ❑Not Applicable C403 2 9 'Ducts and plenums sealed based on ❑Complies [ME10]2 static pressure and location. ❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.9. Ductwork operating >3 in. water ❑Complies 1.3 column requires air leakage testing. ❑Does Not [ME11]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.9. Ductwork operating >3 in. water ❑Complies 1.3 column requires air leakage testing. ❑Does Not [ME11]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 6 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 S ............. ...................................................................................................................................... Mechanical Rough-In Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions & C403.3 Air economizers provided where ❑Complies [ME62]1 required, meet the requirements for ❑Does Not design capacity, control signal, ❑Not Observable ventilation controls, high-limit shut-off, integrated economizer control, and ❑Not Applicable provide a means to relieve excess outside air during operation. C403.4.4. :Multiple zone VAV systems with DDC ❑Complies See the Mechanical systems list for values. 6 of individual zone boxes have static ❑Does Not [ME110]3 :pressure setpoint reset controls. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.4.4. :Multiple zone VAV systems with DDC ❑Complies See the Mechanical Systems list for values. 6 of individual zone boxes have static ❑Does Not [ME110]3 :pressure setpoint reset controls. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.2. :Air outlets and zone terminal devices ❑Complies 1 have means for air balancing. ❑Does Not [ME53]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.5, :Refrigerated display cases, walk-in ❑Complies C403.5.1, 'coolers or walk-in freezers served by ❑Does Not C403.5.2 :remote compressors and remote [ME123]3 lcondensers not located in a ❑Not Observable, condensing unit, have fan-powered ❑Not Applicable condensers that comply with Sections C403.5.1 and refrigeration compressor' systems that comply with C403.5.2.. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 7 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Sectl� I ........................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... #� Final Inspection C� plles2 Comments/Assumptions �c Regelt3 C303.3, :Furnished O&M manuals for HVAC ❑Complies C408.2.5. systems within 90 days of system ❑Does Not 3 acceptance. ❑ [FI8]3 Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403 2 2 ;HVAC systems and equipment ❑Complies [FI27]3 capacity does not exceed calculated ❑Does Not loads. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. :Heating and cooling to each zone is ❑Complies 1 controlled by a thermostat control. ❑Does Not [FI47]3 :Minimum one humidity control device ❑Not Observable per installed humidification/dehumidification ❑Not Applicable system. C403.2.4. :Heating and cooling to each zone is ❑Complies 1 controlled by a thermostat control. ❑Does Not [FI47]3 :Minimum one humidity control device per installed ❑Not Observable humidification/dehumidification ❑Not Applicable system. C403.2.4. :Thermostatic controls have a 5 °F ❑Complies 1.2 deadband. ❑Does Not [FI38]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. :Temperature controls have setpoint ❑Complies 1.3 overlap restrictions. ❑Does Not [FI20]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. :Each zone equipped with setback ❑Complies 2 controls using automatic time clock or ❑Does Not [FI39]3 programmable control system. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. :Automatic Controls: Setback to 55°F ❑Complies 2.1, (heat) and 85°F (cool); 7-day clock, 2- ❑Does Not C403.2.4. hour occupant override, 10-hour 2.2 backup ❑Not Observable [FI40]3 ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. :Systems include optimum start ❑Complies 2.3 controls. ❑Does Not [F141]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C403.2.4. :Systems include optimum start ❑Complies 2.3 controls. ❑Does Not [F141]3 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C404.3 :Heat traps installed on supply and ❑Complies [FI11]3 discharge piping of non-circulating ❑Does Not systems. ❑Not Observable .. ..... ❑Not Applicable ..... C404.4 All piping insulated in accordance with ❑Complies [F125]2 section details and Table C403.2.10. ❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 8 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Sectio ................................................................................................................ .......................................................... ............. #� Final Inspection Complies? Comments/Assumptions �c Regelt3 .... C408.2.1 Commissioning plan developed by ❑Complies [FI28]1 registered design professional or ❑Does Not approved agency. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.3. HVAC equipment has been tested to ❑Complies 1 ensure proper operation. ❑Does Not [FI31]1 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.3. HVAC control systems have been ❑Complies 2 tested to ensure proper operation, ❑Does Not [FI10]1 calibration and adjustment of controls. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.3. Economizers have been tested to ❑Complies 3 ensure proper operation. ❑Does Not [FI32]1 ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.4 Preliminary commissioning report ❑Complies [FI29]1 completed and certified by registered ❑Does Not design professional or approved ❑Not Observable agency. ❑Not Applicable C408.2.5. Furnished HVAC as-built drawings ❑Complies 1 submitted within 90 days of system ❑Does Not [F17]3 acceptance. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.5. An air and/or hydronic system ❑Complies 3 balancing report is provided for HVAC ❑Does Not [FI43]1 systems. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable C408.2.5. Final commissioning report due to ❑Complies 4 building owner within 90 days of ❑Does Not [FI30]1 receipt of certificate of occupancy. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 9 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 MECH COMCHECK.cck Page 10 of 10 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 nCOMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.3 V/ Interior Lighting Compliance Certificate Project Information Energy Code: 2015 IECC Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Project Type: Alteration Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: CORPUS CHRISTI,TX Allowed Interior Lighting Power A B C D Area Category Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts (ft2) Watts/ft2 (B X C) 1-OFFICES(Office) 5118 0.82 4197 Total Allowed Watts= 4197 Proposed Interior Lighting Power A B C D E Fixture ID : Description/Lamp/Wattage Per Lamp/Ballast Lamps/ #of Fixture (C X D) Fixture Fixtures Watt. OFFICES(Office 5118 sq.ft.) LED 1:A:2'X2'LED TROFFER: LED Panel 33W: 1 22 34 739 LED 2:AE:2'X2'LED EM TROFFER: LED Panel 33W: 1 16 34 538 LED 3: B:6" LED DOWNLIGHT: LED Panel 33W: 1 14 28 398 LED 4: BE:6"LED EM DOWNLIGHT: LED Panel 33W: 1 3 28 85 LED 5:C:4'LED STRIP: LED Linear 20W: 1 5 20 102 LED 6: D:8'LED LINEAR: LED Panel 44W: 1 17 48 816 LED 7: F:4'LED LINEAR: LED Linear 22W: 1 1 24 24 LED 8:G:8'LED LINEAR PENDANT: LED Panel 44W: 1 3 48 144 LED 9: H:4'LED LINEAR PENDANT: LED Linear 33W: 1 3 36 108 LED 10:J:4'LED WRAPAROUND: LED Linear 33W: 1 2 38 76 Total Proposed Watts= 3029 uu�uoi uiu uumi III III�III VIII III III III IIIIIIII III IIIIIIIIIII III uu®ui �� ui®ui Interior Lighting Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed interior lighting alteration project represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed interior lighting systems have been designed to meet the 2015 IECC requirements in COMcheck Version 4.1.5.3 and to comply with any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. Thomas Wieczkowski/Elect Design �� 11/29/2021 Name-Title Signature Date Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 LIGHTING COMCHECK.cck Page 1 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 nCOMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.3 Inspection Checklist V/ Energy Code: 2015 IECC Requirements: 0.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For each requirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exception is being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided. w c e re ww wwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwwww............wwwwwwwwwwwwwww Ian a le ® Iles. ® ants ssu ions e .I C103.2 Plans, specifications, and/or ❑Complies [PR411 calculations provide all information ❑Does Not with which compliance can be determined for the interior lighting ❑Not Observable and electrical systems and equipment ❑Not Applicable and document where exceptions to the standard are claimed. Information provided should include interior lighting power calculations, wattage of bulbs and ballasts, transformers and control devices. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact(Tier 1) 2 Medium Impact(Tier 2) 3 Low Impact(Tier 3) ............ �..............V ................................................................................................................................................ll...............................................................................................................................................................V...................ll.........................................................................................................................................11 Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 LIGHTING COMCHECK.cck Page 2 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 I ... ............. ...... ... REtatn olies? oants ssuions CmpCmm /Ampt............................................................................. ough-in lecricl Ins pecio . ........ ... ... . C405.2.1 Lighting controls installed to uniformly ElComplies [EL15]1 reduce the lighting load by at least E]Does Not 50%. ❑Not Observable E]Not Applicable .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. C405.2.1 Occupancy sensors installed in ElComplies [EL18]1 required spaces. E]Does Not ❑Not Observable E]Not Applicable ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. C405.2.1, Independent lighting controls installed ElComplies C405.2.2. :per approved lighting plans and all E]Does Not 3 2 manual controls readily accessible and F�Not Observable [EL23] :visible to occupants. E]Not Applicable ----------------------- C405.2.2. :Automatic controls to shut off all ElComplies 1 :building lighting installed in all E]Does Not [EL22]2 buildings. FlNot Observable E]Not Applicable C405.2.3 :Daylight zones provided with ElComplies [EL16]2 :individual controls that control the E]Does Not :lights independent of general area lighting. FlNot Observable E]Not Applicable .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C405.2.3, Primary sidelighted areas are ElComplies C405.2.3. equipped with required lighting E]Does Not 1, controls. C405.2.3. FlNot Observable 2 Ehot Applicable [EL20]1 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C405.2.3, Enclosed spaces with daylight area ElComplies C405.2.3. under skylights and rooftop monitors E]Does Not 1, are equipped with required lighting RNot Observable C405.2.3. controls. 3 E]Not Applicable [EL21]1 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C405.2.4 Separate lighting control devices for ElComplies [EL4]1 specific uses installed per approved E]Does Not lighting plans. RNot Observable Ehot Applicable .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C405.2.4 Additional interior lighting power ElComplies [EL8]1 allowed for special functions per the E]Does Not approved lighting plans and is RNot Observable automatically controlled and separated from general lighting. Ehot Applicable .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C405.3 Exit signs do not exceed 5 watts per ElComplies [EL6]1 face. E]Does Not RNot Observable Ehot Applicable .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Additional Comments/Assumptions: .:............. ............... i High impact(Tier i) iMedium Impact(Tier 2) Low impact(Tier 3) ......................................................................................................................................... J................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................. � --- -- Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139 \DOCS\21139 LIGHTING COMCHECK.cck Page 3 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 .. ....................................................................... ...... .................................... ................................................................................................................................... Finl Inspecio ... atn olies? oants ssuions CmpCmm /Ampt .............. I........................................................................................................................................................................................................................I........................................................................................ '. l_................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C303.3, :Furnished O&M instructions for ElComplies C408.2.5. systems and equipment to the E]Does Not 2 building owner or designated F�Not Observable [FI1713 representative. E]Not Applicable ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C405.4.1 Interior installed lamp and fixture ElComplies See the Interior Lighting fixture schedule for values. [FI1811 lighting power is consistent with what E]Does Not is shown on the approved lighting FlNot Observable plans, demonstrating proposed watts are less than or equal to allowed E]Not Applicable watts. ............................................................I....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... C408.2.5. :Furnished as-built drawings for ElComplies 1 electric power systems within 90 days E]Does Not [FI1613 :of system acceptance. RNot Observable E]Not Applicable C408.3 Lighting systems have been tested to ElComplies [F13311 ensure proper calibration, adjustment, E]Does Not programming, and operation. RNot Observable E]Not Applicable I............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Additional Comments/Assumptions: .:............. ............... i High impact(Tier i) iMedium Impact(Tier 2) Low impact(Tier 3) ......................................................................................................................................... J................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................. � --- -- Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139 \DOCS\21139 LIGHTING COMCHECK.cck Page 4 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Project Title: O.N.S.W.T.P. FILTER BUILDING PHASE 2 Report date: 11/29/21 Data filename: Z:\2021\21139_\DOCS\21139 LIGHTING COMCHECK.cck Page 5 of 5 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 N O U � C aj co > 4' E > c0 >_ v U Q +� v O v > '� Q- u rU � v a 3 _ > •- QJ 0 +J i C D N _ Q v CO U r� in 0J +J in I,�� a +J i _ � a U OU O 01 } O U O .n O U N 0J C c0 3 o 3 ri " v fU t 3 Q- .I.a p O +, Q +J a v 0A N 1 rt U 0 0- C x C _ U CO C C T C 0 Q •in 0J fq',°f O � >cl C;t;:,' � ` C 1 � C".7 � 01 U > O CO 0 Ocy- N4-1 Q 1 M41 N ra OU rr t C t O +� O n r _ >- 0 _ 4:3 O 0J r 0J ( '-- �_ C �_ O N � r 1 O r a O 01 � � � c�0 < �_ (O QJ it C J � p 01 41 rl,a +' N x'a 'n C _ NN Q - yl,i i t0 Ct°f 3 N ? C 5r„ U Q "rco � C. i"1 C 0J ,,..„ ,,; Q Q ? O .;""d — Y„,.„ "* N C N QJ r C,"„7 r- N Ln U .�--�, 0J x' _ N U U � U U O i U � +� U ir� _ ... C v ,,,!'� N CCT om"" C .0 r- 4J O .'""�' Q- Yr1a � �, O ,C,^�-11 0 JJ c0 c. QJ U C 4 J C .....,.. +J +J ..0 Ln QJ r'��,I�,'�,a� t'0 > Q a CJ '�'�,'�r'��I'��r'� q.p +' �' I,o N i t0 C..1 O +' O bA � Q U i LL � C i to Cr U v O C µ O O � r O O Cr _ C U I .. O Q O O O n .N ; O N rla Q i U W ! � •C to c0 N a U ._ _ — _ > C 0J > to C" ." " to 0J 4, 41 ; 0J 5 0J J C C �, r"J, 4 O r"" � •� ff. t r-- (O Q C r N QJ QJ M C O L U ... Cyl,;a CO m cu i C..1 U L ... r,",IL.. C fi, d Q r,":..1 fi, d .� ;�p� d C U (.,I d U (0 L..... .."��::1� U Q ;�p�� �j Q �r,"'. O 0- ¢...... Q Q G G G G G G G r- r I M r- O N M Ln l0 00 °--I N N N N N N c-I Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln N N N N N N N N N O N N N N N N N N N O O O O O O O O N 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) CN c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I am CL (0 (O (O (O (O (O (O r°r "' ':a m r' r... Uu "�µ"d CO r'"C U r'"C U r'"C U r'"C U r',�""1 U C,,1 U C,�l Or„I,a l — t t t t t t t Lam' co a zt z zt � CivCast Questions&Answers Page 1 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 aJ N U � � c c c > C 1 O C two O N +' O v n O Oa . cno + ico E U U t tE co o 4� 4, ` Ln E aJ c " >, � ° ° c v aJ aJ O Ln 4, QJ U C r QJ QJ > 4� Qj o QJ v Q o c° Q 3 > U -0 C v =O O = QJ p U Q>J ` ° r 3 4 J QJ N (0 l C QJ Qj O ..,' ..,.�t O O i N L CO0 4; N O N C SA3 U Qj U +J U N N �' W u i i Q v i to r— O ff,'a QJ o „a O t0 "' QJ . Ln �E t— ._ 1 QJ QJ 0 VI Qj Q c0 u co ^Urr,;I„QJ 41 l:ai �QJqA iC" t'N +J C QU (D O - QJ C - i aa C7 O r oi U OQJ QJ O C- vi +Q'J2 � � ra U Q 0 QJ � � �Qq`J C O +� Qj Ln a t0 O N — QJ Qi +J QJ 41 Qj r _ QJc Qj QN Ei +' O ^ QJ C U A ';a'-h Ja Q C Q > } n > > QJ + O O QJr1'a QJ Q1 Q —N .....r..... +Ui i � Gj 41 W Z5 Qj O �bU a vO e E � — - QJ QJ i > O+' O U QJ OL � Ln J J —_ O 1U — —to ra . C CO O O > U O 7 Q r.. i Qj IN OO rt � +' n vQ O CU O O X N QJ 0- < Q C in U Q U 0 -0 QJ C r U i .. a a a a a m Q N OM M M 00 O O O .. .. .. .. .. Ln Ln Ln Ln Ln c-I c-I 00 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N O O O O O O O O 01 01 01 01 01 O O O c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I C C C C C C C D co co co 7 ��p t E E E E E E E c } µa O e'. U �. C.1 �., C.1 r":, C.1 r..':. C.1 r..':. C.1 C.1 r"" :, to r I;a to to to to to co to to to to to to O r I N M Ln l0 r- CivCast Questions&Answers Page 2 of 3 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 r,1,;a c >. 4 aJ + t -0 t Qj� aJ aJ l (i0 C"rJJ � � i i 0) ~ O � r_ X O O 4, > O Qj E aJ O a1 i0 Ln QJ t:l,;a p in a1 in i " v Q QJQj O •+J t t O 0 i Q aJ E C .. i in in i QJ 4J Q" iJ i > Y:1 > p� QJ 4 i C Ln O Q aJ O ^ OaJ O c aJ (0 3 O = N c O 4, o °' 3 o 2 O — D E O c N W v� aJ D C X U QJi ., aJ �' in -0 t > in O 4' a1 x (0Ln Q N i aJ r1.;a ,} bA U aJ r1�7 i t Q" in •X .. 4��,a , t i c to x�"a N QJOaJ 4— C0N tcN0 U Q � 4 J QO In EnvO U O aJ > cc0 U r aJ MaCaJ C O � aJp � *' OO R , N C Dv Z L i a1 a1 O O O a1 vA to e i — aJ CO to v + = O > •n ao c0 r Q 05 a, 4� 0 W 0 Qj a, t � r""�"'�, aJ O O ', O �b.0 .4, N aJ aJ M, v J.7 aJ r""^ 0 UE z5 C a aJ _ Q_ 41 4� 41 QU QJ +J +' r.. x N 't,�� — C i aJ - ..LL — 17 � x,1.7 O M O n — 000 r1a t0 t0 bA rl.a U bA N O t0 aJ r1.a r"..1ro N �J C U O ;„,... N +, rIt C Q •� in '.- X N X aJ O r"r to N to °a } O r1 a — C a»,,, r'�l� aJ t U t '} (0 aJ x O U to 0',1.7 Co ;„'.� 5 r1 c:1 - Qj O O Q O O O Q Y LI O O r QJ in i CO QJ O t — aJ t — aJ t .. ..."".' rl':'��� O rl'- C rl��i t aJ +J C;,I��� 1.7 C, .,��. (0 Q � U aJ � 4J x. — A (0 O ¢...... Q U aJ i n — +0 +' — O x O C n M M K* K* K* Ln N N N N N N c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I N N N N N N N N N N N N O O O O O O O O O O O O c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I c-I C C C C C C E E E E E E 0 O O :a O cl U U U U U U t,a i i i t,a i (0 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0 00 0) O rl N M zt zt zt zt zt zt CivCast Questions&Answers Page 3 of 3 A...Sign Envelope U 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-732A87978640 PROJECT LOCATION CALL BEFORE YOU DIG! SHEET INDEX IRP a' CONSULTANT Sam Pof,e,,County o� cane SHEET NO. SHEET NO. DESCRIPTION aeno u 1 ,oR 811 esr.a n11DGENERAL asJ/ � w""C�Inn a 1 CI RILE SHEEP /ry4 THE LONE SOAR PR( 1 DATA 3 C] SIZE PIAN l I( NUECES NOTIFICATION COMPANY"UU AT 7-800-669-8344 g ARCHITECTURAL 4 1 SELECiNE DENOLIipN PIAN _ SECOND LEVEL ROOF PIAN ] 1.4 SECOND LEVEL DMfENSION BOOR PUN N 8 1.5 ENIARGEO PEWS AND ROOM FlNISH SCHEDDLE 3 � 9 1 6 SECOND LEVEL BOOR FlNISH PIAN .. j 10 1 a CORPUS CHRISTI BAY .1 REFLECTED CELLWG PIANS ff p s 11 1.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 2 m in pwy 'a A t +� 11 ].1 BDILD SECTIONS \ 3.2 SE WALL SELIIONS GRAPHIC MAP SCALE o-a / a 14 ].] WALL SEC s IS 4.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS_ soap o soon ' n H_ I65 DETAILS a9 17 6.1 DOOR&WINDOW SCHEDULES a qo �— 4r � STRUCTURAL r xis 1g S) GENERAL NOTES h DESIGN CRITERN S VI ry 8"pw S2 SECOND BOOR PLW �L 20 G R4' S] EAST h WEST ELEVAnONS = 21 54 IYPMAL ELEVA110N5(1 OF 2) '"' coq, saAyy 2] S6 FOUNDADON PLANS,SECTIONS k DETAILS e 24 S) STAW PLAN k SECTION O 25 58 STEEL SECTIONS G...S \Li�lTl O W w { J=Q f/ 2fi 59 IIEIAL SND DEf LS U o IS MECHANICAL o .Me 27 HVAC PLCN C- E �mrr 00 2H N1.1 HVAC PLW U �{ 29 2.1 HVAC SCHEDNLE5 �' � � b N3.1 HVAC DETAILS � / J) N].2 HVAC DETAILS G ELECTRICAL JZ E1.1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLIIpN PLANS JJ E1.2 POWEN PLANS J4 E1.3 LIGHiI C PECTIS n PANS FOR ]5 E1.4 FlRE PROTECTION PEWS 6 a UIIl1�7/�//7/ JB E2.1 ELECTRICCL ONE-LINE ONCRAN AND SCHEDULES e N% ONSWTP FIL TER BUILDING PLUMBING m a a eCrvs JJ P1 1 SCWiARY DRAW,W STE AND VENT PLAN : w Ll1 ILINT REHA BIL I TA TION PHA SE 2 P,1 DONESTMWATERPAN _� ]9 P).] —s— P2 SUPPRESSION 40 P2.1 PLDN6ING SCHEDULES PROJECT# 20094A r. P3.1 PWN9ING—S 42 P3.2 PLUMBING DETAILS ,P N G G F— TABS# 2022007973 ° WlxosTDRN o VICINITY MAP PREPARED BY - ARDURRA r .�.,.�e RELEASED FoR 03/17/22 CONSTRUCTION p CI1Y PRWECT p 20094A D...SUIT Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-732A87978640 T C.2 GO—SO 11EII2 PROJECT DATA BUILIN DING"ODES eavnTONcooe lVl—LLL of IN /p r oii cirri/off i BU DUSCTDESeuLoNccooe 2n1s NTEINeRNAT.NAL PwMe Nc cooe ' 2n1s NTeRNATONALENeecvcoms NLINNAL DE „ TNAONALe�.TR.AL.oDe i .xEe��e.�=xa��eE.e.Pee.Ee,Ee.a<eeeea.eEvu.x.ae�®, �' �/i� IL MxEeeee e1,e.���PPeeaL�eeee.ePe.a�eee. ....PAN .. 00000 �M�rtP� ,r ii/0"/�1G %/i GO FIF _IT PLL �nee� IPI I IN LBEc�.Eo,pogouP occuP,W oq,P,w.o...'�a �1VE ORALLSITE PLAN® awnnR /uwmr � occuw MeeE.�,ex or rxErinovavrxorrxEsovrix wxiw rxEvavE inurEo. L U So v P—H—UP-R001- ��N 10051 MEANS OF EGRESS SIZING MINIMUM REQUIRED EGRESS ,aoccuPax.s III}d s K SIT I, o x PLUMBING FIXTURE COUNT. TOTAL B OCCUPANT LOAD-55,2-27 MEN X23 MMEN U o meeiooessxou xwecuss e a..�.o M�.. o w excroseo eoomssxaueeauouvea cus a eanxoixacmewwcewrtx Pae�ema,. m i eaa„aiox eroccuPa+C1Exo mxcvE.Er,nov sae suueErivE € p Q o MATERIAL TESTING LL �ee�.e,-eeeeeee.e.ee��e.eP�eeee�.a�e�.��ee� .eP�eeee SCHEDULE w ARCHITECTURAL BARR ERS CONCRETE: yj x 8 �n,x.o-as accessew,vsaxo.wos.a 1. NEW CURB AT STOREFRONT ASSEMBLES. 2 2 d O lI a rze i 2 NEW EXTERIOR STAR: B 2.1.STAIR PANS IS UPPER LANDING wev w 2.P.GROUND LEVEL LENDINGzs.FOUNDI f ,n 1 I,,, EXISTING 11 'I":II",Lu ¢' - RENOVATED SECOND FLOOR IA I . a B EGRESS PLAN FIRST FLOOR(PIPE GALLERY) ® C EGRESS PLAN qR® " �P.�....��P... PBG 880 a.,..yin•-rb• S 3M D...Sig,Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A61-731»87978640 GENERAL NOTES: GENERAL CONTRACTOR NOTES: r AM%i �s / / l / / / o / a//, i»r, / �/✓/9//�//,,i,ii;�;,»,,,,, r /�%,l�'%r�v�%/////,l/(ll��il»11i ll/lll0y,r/o,//�e/ °aIµ°��° ,w «P « om�z°°I °,I, 1—11 I Po°°°°°�w°�M �� °`° ° T7- °°,°� , n. „ �d ,;- «°ro°° ,°��°n°°° 1-11°„.°a�L1— �,°,«LLII °,°°l.„_°lr— "47' , Al °., IL,� ���,��,,��re s�„,°w°,�,°,,�°,«<<,M„°°,w,n 1- vr.I,Ea,° .—,°w.°�, °ek,rzsx4o,x°sa,I,,°rwro u,xery ur,oxv�k�xa,n11„,r�0lf ” o GC 2I .... .. .... 1"­7 ccs����� ��i � 3 J7fffl!l�lll 1/%l �,hmro Fier,°° °°—1 Vfi°m.4,.� —IT ML01 --°a°P°°°°.°°°a°o°°--°P.°,.°�°° „w,R�,«�°°, «GaP�,,o =°��PLI,�°��w°1R,90°'���a',��� , �L�°w�I°I°°°l°°���°,,,° —IT 111 . 11 a iii ra, o rr rrrrrlrrr//f(, ail a w � °°�n°,�°. �°,u«��,aM�,��M,°ten°a,�,u��r°k,°°,�„ ��°,°,u��r��°,ro�°°��,°w,°,u, °� 0 ri a v ' ✓� � % />% /,p:.f �i.o m /, a ,rr1/Cr'G< .ono,11. ° �o�a°pax. j,rlr::. �.,o °„0°°4�,�<<s.°°��,°°oma°°a,,. a°�a�� o�«� aw.,a,sem, SITE PLAN LEGEND: SITE PLAN KEYED NOTES =o a n nau oesc°a,l°a�w>roo°e Al11 te � gre.aP�r , „ U rew SzG aa o W O 0-311 1111 11 HII-li 1011C11 'I. IE, Fe 4 MIA"I o�i L 6arrr / u , O ° B SITE PLAN �\ a° In'I"111 °ov me ,°w°��R � zoo9an D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 Ell— SAAR Cr 1.1 - o � -- ---- — — -- — ` � a ry M = o 0 0 0 0 p 0 0 o aU� xaPoms.rsaxID11 1-1 1.rr � SOND b LEVEL SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PLAN �® a. EC mnrve noes astiz samm "oRrH �I � n s re E0 'L�0 F-0 'j-0 Or > E 0 0 0 rv0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 z� U D_ n P Za owa 2 (p SECOND,�LEVELSELECTCVE DEMOLITION PLAN(CONTINUED) �,� DEMOLITION PLAN KEYED NOTESPIN MARK t_ a DESCRIPTIONzJ w0 O �mun is NORTH 0 _sxrervx cxom,msui r[w nrvrsx nusx O LL<S W IL—IE O U ssxu or r-sxwi ua�wi nnn or nus wo 0 1A7 j 0 -11aus awx.rptµ. 3 wa'a 0 - 1— 1-1 �" :rvxsrvx,a.,�rvx.o,�aa..m ow$ W 0 O J 0 in x OE111 LJ 0 — 0 �svrnsia� 0 ure[Aorv�va Davit warm is [m aoai[s o �' zr 4., r ,x rvx ae uI IH'11" a PBG-880 u D...Sig,Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A61-731/87978640 uuuuluu� I r - "� w I III VI II' I'�" X111"^Wl lldd'0�' 1rP� rwuwy d%" c,tz PP IMP 4 f J I I. 1 IXISTING PHOTO �e 3 IX.^"ISry�Nro P"ROTO � �i xo.ro a.", s p �IS�ING PHOTO Q w"" f iG 4 IS1 PHOTO PS EpXISX�N�PHOTO fi EIMSX�N�PHOTO P7 EXISTING PHOTO 8 E1ASXUN.PHOTO iz SLUE w.v 5fi1£ SWE e SII•... i. "/� � � N o RE d -- � o W" r "a `, �� �.. 9 IXISTING PHOTO 1 IXISTING PHOTO 1 IXISTING PHOTO Iw i o PBG 880 xorro PH TI ro PH TI rosPH I i cci g zoovan D...S,gn Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 IIA %I ci 1.3 an mm ILII 1,I�:iN `0 1^III,I - - - - - - O 0 o O o w oNForeobN Qo o owrere ore. 0 �' rereow o a —a-- A ——— —— —— RIre 0 0 O O aiw e 0 O CJ O \ 3 A FLOOR PLAN NOEEI ®® ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF SNq (/) s PiHING srwCTUNE UNLE moiram OTTHERWISRE.06 suos ar+E rs/e wm MAE, re--��-0 U .. SYMBOL LEGEND MN �re,��Rrewa� re�rs� �� FID o-E Rawao ,ro T E o �- -� o<< o o 0 o Fly ❑ 0OF- - SN-= 5 r oN �� —_— _— - _— o 0 0 0 0 0 0 --- �,aN�„ a «x„o,aaG o w 2 �o— o o reEAN�.G , w /1 KEYED WALL TYPE SCHEDULE bCN�7 3i� o b „bP b b ��re�rere rerere,.,re-OA w w 8 O ? z lARA KPIT reo�s. cNEwE B FLOOR PLAN CONTINUED ®® ❑ O¢ a.,..,n'-�'b' FLOOR PLAN LEGEND W FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES MARK DESCRIPTION ogre. 1 TS EARSO DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION a �A DA DA aNIR A.-1. � o,a, � I I F �a O O MN—,a,a R,.o,Gar L, 0 S-1 P� O OI RAR PBG 880 O �� �re,x,rere� H�,RHm�P,w�re„�a . ,,,5��-11 �a p D...S,gn Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 LEr 1.4 Lo o 0 0 o owl oa�. oE!Wom \ Cie 4s I � DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN = U TM C oWw � E U R - o� ® I'M z 1 4U Q \ of o o o o mno o o �6�i w oc - wo � �O- (rvEw) � _ Q W _ - - - - - - - - F— O O W Z d¢ " B DIMENSION FLOOR PLAN CONTINUED o. o PBG-880 a zo D...Sign Envelope IRS 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A61-731/87978640 1.5 SE FLOOR PLAN KEYED NOTES _ - - - - - O O EHIRP Escwv,ioN - - - - °oo R o IGUNI O „SMICTINIANT oa oR O 111 IN ANDIFIE EES a u oA oR.R Q o 0 _ , FUL �a �aAM°aMre R rvnAE xa �c 3 :^ 1IN � O O O O O Q a O µ,�°ry°1„,tea.�- b j3: ONEILE-IFSPILLHUME, SECOND FLOOR A ENLARGED PLAN 33 oIP 11I EF PHIMS. O O O NOTES CE r s,DD sxEA.xINx ore nreDC,DreE `oR _ '^ 0 _E1ry— UNLESS CROP IED ORE THERWISE, � I - � 2 KSPEEorvwrvxsP U O " R. ALL INTERIOR PARTITION BTPL STUDS ARE 3-5/B'.UNLESS NOTED Erimre u[,nE waE vwas wro vacuo[rv[w vrc q EE,UP,rcu All aun[°RAN111 naE wvm. N ARE, 0 E-FIR FINK 1`11SEA xE,woae�eE,re°Hre.xpISHID,ry°�uaa O D. xwE�000 aE��aEUEaIXsu oxxERwl E. _ _ ________ __ j roxoR fssi)eie-°�M°W O - 3. PROTECT EX191NG PIPES&EOUREENI FROM NEW PAMED FINISH AT a III})R Q s u,wE/sEniary NECESSAAI RY MEIL E'ANSS TO PROT'ONTECT[ESTINGHPIPING.RDUIPMENT ANp SURFACES `V zO°' \1..iII11 x w III PAP"NAFIN�111'1,Pl'�." THAI ARE NOT SCIEDULED TO IAL- o 0 h (� Li ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE - - - - - - - — `ED EARITH IN. NoaTH EVENT CCE.T ES cE--IUN[3 NOTES �'FlUl,l E HINARIi Q 0 wpw,wry - --- SECOND FLOOR ---- B ENLARGED PLANFl 11 SE 11 2® gTK Rl = __ D...S,gn Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 1.6 SII IE I IF 0 0 SECOND FLOOR _ A FgI,NISH PLAN 2®® _ xaAm - U pp q p gg pp q � JqL � �IIiS p W w o _ o-� -- --_ ----- __- --- d rrv� 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o v zw U O o V Is;I 11 , g ohI LL FF a� (MF,'4 @ SECOND FLOOR W m+w B FINISH PLAN CONTINUED =®® FLOORING TYPES LEGEND o ui i a 8 J crvc ,rortyEFEE,�mrvccc.c rvomry .: sarv.�ars OZ w<µ��wx cm rvwuc�ouum ary - rvrvusFEry U 8anmarvc utsuu c�reonc r,o<it.vo. 6 1 BASE DETAIL TILE WAINSCOT -.n•-rb• PBG-880 �,a10 D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 ary iom.mrwx e wry -wrm. 1.7 m — _ — 0 � A. Fl — :LSO LJ o 6-1 ✓;0¢n iOi iOz iO iOq iO ©0 iOa � 0 � 0 Ow A a.,.. .R SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - VIII -a - -_ - o O ��RF \ Ci e 0 0 0 0 0 0 Uol ll 0 0 o n ��� o��� A SECOND FLOOR REFLECTIED CEILING PLAN CONTINUED ® bo nox.ii REFLECTED CEILING SYMBOL LEGEND U e n a s v� o III}d s o w w o j F j U QZQ j ZWy J rx ows o c[u / N Jm6W Z ¢0 & / CA LLa� U NO// C FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 2 j $ U ®® j o W UL z: as 4 C FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN . e .a ro-•� e I PBG 880 g zo D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9Al2EEE-9A67-732287978640 qq a wiw x 2./ 7r re� � mrerew'npre o:,Iaren�Irekrerem OO IO I O IO O IO I OO 1O I— �rereare� rere�rerew �,areKrea �rere�re �� �=�remre� w", weP. c mL Pax A I� me EAS.AZS T�7En TIXTE b•R IOR ELEVATION owvs m m�auu rare caar cuww carmreunory a ree�renw uca a n jrvcw ,asc rvre ®a,re o o e� 0 reo 0 0 © 0 0 0 0 ©ww o 0 0 0 o nreresP[ rePreo[n / �, oa�rek,-1 ILI* I I I \ Cie� n��a F:T r---- ----- ---- ----i - - r-----i i- � i r------T------ ------i I �,,rea,reaaaare re�mare a�re�� m � v ,rem �`-===`z___________________________________________________________________________________ _ __J = x ww�—L EST IXTERIOR ELEVATION ILL ac.,e v�e_ �re nor a,s-revr. III}a Q�, iw<.srere�rerew rearea = lui p x �s�rea�rvrew���a7 �wre�rea rerecareu � _ _ —- � E gar ��Powa�o�rn�re�rvn�, re�ren.acre.s,� arerei��,a,�eu�re, ��are nix, re�a�wn�reare Pare rv�sl�a��:: a re s nrea aware Way re e � mmw usorvrer.ewry murmnoi _ o a — I - I e SOUTH EXTERIOR ELEVATION � srereeaaw � _'=s Q re l J 19 _ 0;:� w -�� E EXTERIOR STAIR ELEVATION ui z 8 iw - I�G - �rere�s�an�rea.re .DoH M w rz u�ry✓n=wore. nry m s rwiureu creno[ as 1 GUARDRAIUHANDRAIL SECTIO NSre In r,o .•,o. :., /?-.-a. :i^ II,II�I N @)EXTERIORSTAIR PLAN u•,../.r-r PB 88 oe 2 HANDRAIL DETAILS O D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 I I I I �rere�s°°Nrerere°w,�sre o= I I � BUILDIN-G-SECTION BUILDIN-G-SECTION BUILDING SECTION U acre xar:a� v1 �lui o W w LL ,rP °stere. �sP M v 0 1171 vre�n�� -.gym ..Pere.. r o WINDOi W HEAD DETAIL m a O _-a c — c _ p $ = NJ rerew s,�a 9„ i m -ns/re'P� reRwsorovars cl BUILDING SECTION - BUIL DING SECTION II1 �2,WINDOW SILLDETAIL sr+,E ve•-r-a• w.E s�'-�'b' -a a�a zr so In..lay I cs g zo D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9Al2EEE-9A67-732287978640 3.2 nuo�o�I ll-� mwn — _� P E— uaa IK IK o: �kA�wan� �nw��nw�nm��o as w,� n�R�aRPa�m IMEI Wn� nrw—, .. n�n� « ......o=w... pus 1w,usRnr�m WIND a aOW SILL DETAIL 2 BASE DETAIL sura � 2 U III} aar~nLL ssua. K s �lui Asu. W w 1 f 1 o El un<waL III nuo��ox P . Fn—K 1�14 ------ m 11nIL=Ill F—I ------ 8 e/e'naP���ury iuuo�.u�a. mmua mucreos nwu�ures i/ ���uveret wren cavum irvsuwiou a nuo rrewiuso iz IN� S�ZS O a wopRaa _ ®uon __ cn Pna LL a� sw/e'ne[wurs J iow[a uu-roan Ca.eo. J 1 mniw sxwxrvo wnx Q m�a of xc nmirv�ws muxn 3 a'a 11 i.z Esau � sH I=M�o���o d I I x«� � IaI�rI Li lI ,,I•,II n 8� nreunuu `�` I i� nreuauvs — wmrkwe muceos rauu�iar mvn nwim /ruuwoe am eo coon1— �s I D WALL SECTION C WALL SECTION B WALL SECTION A WALL SECTION P8�'-880 .."`:�/.-�- /.-r-a� a/.-�b' /.•-ra "s c/g zo D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 3.3 El—5EEI-14 ,oi- a n ,°ww�ore.,a ssmo�o <ooworeu wrere 5�. wremw re,sn.�oosm .,mrears«ss 1r re°warm re� s�r ,mwnusa`�'isw°s,msm 1m111 sy- sre rw smn Tres.res ssremo�m�wPcu Oreo „,.wren. << www sre 7 A'11 re sreoa - nnlo,a rere wre arm �s �re rereaasre ren«<s,on i wi i�re uou wui axrea ZE ,J ,reomrss ' - re�m�cre resmore� ' ' aaarerea "" re i ,1� ore<<w acre-�s,re re�� nmoarere. res. o.i re wmremuons wax,wreoressmµ� -�i resmsm ` 4 BMASE DETAIL 3 SgILUBASE DETAIL - �2,OHEA 1 BASE DETAIL i- b n'-r-o n-�b FM rean,.o�� a s El oorea�a „are. unumrm,axw,rere.�rPl� .rerewrere rem,re�c�rP�� win,remre.ro�re,. _/— su nmuiu�a na�nc I � � III}d�s oaamioux cure[aac mu mrc IX1N mrm / n remr osw ssm / e reaor mc. nn� T E _ _ Va mniwrem sawn U n wvsm irewwnry uvueo wsuwiore wvueo irevwzry 5 BASE DETAIL ie'nm— ww cpe rePwnuss s= rt'nmwcuss 'offMjV,,swm l - sewmuse rs�ms - [-Z,o1,1 s1 n11 mOrere m u� Im, oC 1111L �x8 8a ----- - areare.nm�n n _Y. I. . —— — �. m ` 6 BASE DETAIL rwre osa m EXISTING WINDOW IN-FILL'p ' _a. C rW.xfALLL SECTION B WG"ALL SECTION11 "�'I A WN"ALL SECTION PBG—H8O 1' 1 I, I ccs%zoovan D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 Cr 4.1 e e e e e ® FM MI MH T W- FAR FM FM F-0 FAR INTERIOR ELEVATION a OV �p-� KEYED NOTES MARK DESCRIPTION 11 I MAI'll—1 amore _ '�' TMP TMP A INTERIOR ELEVATION ICONTINlEa ° 0 iin--rb rn. 0 � m s 0 Cmi 0 0 vl nP ry ry B IN".:TERIOR ELEVATION " ire'-�•a (� U 0 oxo�nG a.wro n,���x�maa_ II 0 K AOM X w w<� � � Ilu}i O w U \ ISJ SJ ivP �B1INTERIOR ELEVATION(CONTINUED) 0 uPwl xwn xn oo E ^0 0 U o Q O Q J H INTERIOR ELEVATION G INTERIOR ELEVATION F INTERIOR ELEVATION E INTERIOR ELEVATION - W w u D RINTEIOR ELEVATION C INTERIOR ELEVATION 3 a'a e sx,sx auim. /.•-i•b rxc/.•-�•o ui x p i. i¢ W W " o�rr,Goo��. - fl— NNo«n�P.."8 - Ill ,IIn I. H T4" — I�,I i IOCA •,_ � PBG 880 M INTERR ELEVATION L TYPIL CASEWORK SECTION K ACCESSIBLE SINK SECTION J INTERIOR ELEVATION rci g zoovan D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 �weiry ari-no�uu wnirvnws vuwraw ewureww _ wv_ El 5.1 sis ere.e°.evx xunxee aamm a srcnnm. � au nrviwm unu mNSuteANrs SrIC sourv°mwumiw mn sores a"uou sxrwxiw rs mmnm nin°w wea.�eee wane e ru a a".. "�'an�nwv- vRaJCCI Na.r9aa62 ru ww romv. ° xuxo.e _ e1°Er rzerm vs muwm n��vN uovZ1, msunuwurvsx„s ttwmum.�wru ni .4 rsi e�� u as ncr n 11 smarm m *"'�nwEwnu°�` 000v�R�reea � 1 nun cvn.�o uuc rvvu rvoar��s scus.�o `� f/ e.,wnww a I u���ar sv�oa�� r✓✓✓"TTT///}✓✓✓"""�G u - DOOR HEAD MMI u csucwm u.ru. r. 11 ALUMINUM FRAME DETAIL nrnoiwnre 'w`re' -uu a epee core wwr mwnre «e on w�nrmaw - - e uew rm rnrww 1 EXTERIOR WINDOW HEAD DETAIL - a sRnrm. *lD mmrSTOREFRONTEXTRHEADDETAIL� PSN DETAILlAll 11 Eo sRnnm.nu7,\ Al LL yecn.mm n oro more.; eaKr \ DOORJAMB c.11 °noes wu wrnnee aanw eucnee wmecmeo nreo a e 12 ALUMINUM FRAME DETAIL o mmnm — . _r b wwnere ewece,s svernm Fl seunueu a i= :ere :wnnm. n"` _ ors.°w°.wwr rewco°zr suck.remw _ _ _ _ vi ® 2 or nou sow U STOREFRONT Mcnw��`;o`um m a sRnrm' 8 EXTERIOR JAMB DETAILw sauwus� uuww wore.eosuo swouew�eme,owswIII �Xw` L-11 Al mere Al wrens svmnm, nmo n nNwuo s vu-nrv.wr.tela wnmw nr,e o.c.wx. s/a[rr ca eowo.rcmen o E HOLLOW METAL sora. uue w, suo x„muwo.mmw U 13 4 INTERIOR HEAD DETAIL EXTERIOR WINDOW JAMB DETAIL 11 LOUVER HEAD DETAIL ^-a ssvmn�m, m� sons '” am ar cwwauwe'wu ruu II II / awmoc "'w ww sworn low ^n somas wusow n�o<,„,a,s sworn oruwuc.,mwmnsEnne exK.o er�,unu g,xcw m wenoxt,nwe i'wo.W°n` u STOREFRONT rnvm roto. - 9 EXTERIOR THRESHOLD DETAIL wuwuric,unm e°+recioti=cw- wrer� c -- ------- mr°me`inHOLLOW METAL mmnm. °mm�n, ems ws�e ruu ww,nwm 1— IA- INTER IOR JAMB DETAILcn e D mei� oraury''°�`wcnrXE� b mrvsen,weanss we onA o.nr os�nnnk.,ss ssrernnon`e°° '-°wiaRrOR THRESHOLD DETAIL oere s ora noe�rr.m6u.~o ® IN. wOR w o N�Ll n W ¢o Q e n see resn nRIOR WINDOW JAMB DETAIL e n° rxm nc mwesr r m v.su u � I are scut AB sse more¢ varve orae 5 '. - 11 ,I Illi` EXTERIOR HEAD DETAIL 16 EXTERIOR JAMB DETAIL IJ,12f;;N 6 LOUVER SILL DETAIL � � r �` �^b cue a-a a"° n%m D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 roON[CrANJs 5rlECr 6.1 ° "°°,° -- -----PA., DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE DDS ETA 1111 A SEE LOUVER IL �= NOTES HE "`m"°SPaoK° HARDWARE IPE MAIL �w MAT) LE 6 ETN 6" 11 HE°wNL".UNBI.11 HN AE�l°Au ms, Ls rDm ,� w;uo «" �° n �a:oLD�PL kwL GL,ro ,°",° °° �LAT=T"°°« �" Ta a� UEH —m UMSPU ANE—HEM ALS,°A, TFLaEaFlTEo n;cR aoLLA,oM aEaATE aLNTA \J av 1 TYPICAL DRYWALL DETAILS u� _ _ - =i o.rorxe - - - C a DOOR ELEVATIONS WINDOW SCHEDULE f in - o ��� E Et, DNw LEE) EFFERENT, AD S o. xw POEA B cALL EOTENOROR ASSEMBLIES STALL BE IMPACT ASIBEENT,UNLESS NOTED A-l"BE o FRAME ELEVATIONS LTE AUL EATEwoR WOR ASSEMBLIES SHALL RE IMPACI RESISTANT&INSULATE.UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. IS ALS, ANE11 1.11 IT), MAEIBIL 1. um umw Di IN IN IN IN ME L\,09 1� 1� �xm xc �in �PLN sw��.w/ m 6 TEL (Houaw METAL) BETMNUM)T"v"`°fL0°' (ETORETFONT) (PLDMNUM) (ALUMNUM) (ALUMINUM) (STORES ., —DAL Uft (SHARED ANT) ., (ALUMNUM) - ED 1 2 2A 3 4 5 6 7 8 o'-" o - Z WINDOW ELEVATIONS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWI E LL OWER M p�HREswS a- O. ALL E SHALL DE INS TE a Naa o UIUEL A. k " k 1 +2 a �an wa ALL �a : 8 AS"m LINE"1111 ADM mx ��L roL° Nn TAN°IUL o za o E ° e NMINAAA - s _s s e `^ s s i T.s BIUMINUM) (ALUMINUM) (ALUMINUM) (ALUMINUM LOUVER) (ALUMINUM) (ALUMINUM) BLUMINUM) SELUMNUM) i, IA A B c D E F1 F2 GI S Ii'I,T.0 rI D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 NOTATION WIND DESIGN CONCRETE NOTES LIGHT WEIGHT COLD-FORMED STEEL NOTES ci St DETAIL IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM oxo ss® ME. EE x,acaaxaE ww ME—1 ERRRM ar ME.1] Mi daE sm mssd i ana wu s 5_4 .carr.n.�anDww<E.nn�nm.a,awc w�mw daE ao�..„o eam or.oao Pu Ar>e Mrs mmmnxm sma xwa..�m w ws"s.. SECTION m Dom Rdmwa.xu x..h a xxwx ca„cRmE cam lct axxw non Asn rc v xs"'cunsx°on�K �m..x n m."-••.µ r= er w/!wEQsu.,rcmE.s mdoam sr EaaMron mm sx l� s„xs e m sa�dm mMx""�x _mn��_oc lNAND SUBMITTAL Eea sx=E. rosRmxdw —eE mnsw � ` aoem Dsra�Ixc. sn, RER RRD 0­ REE nwcs m.xc w1 swx wmnt".s ran w lmw dE u�uc a'r x-11 ...wenan anrs�erems„x.a xox.ee^! xdsus raR...n..aa I.Mw can-mdm ' RE 'wXOcrI°s��s'�woian'wXOnim as si ""n...na„wna RE MR rm me rmvna c „ .no souMe.momno.m ocaowi 5. a)aa.Ed ME RUN WmaP awxxcs w me E-Ew xun d sPR�aFlm.,tcss s„x.ff ePSRRm ro nE.m.mcr mR.e,mcm11 IF. ns. �w eo E ENn mtsleam„,o�nr mMm„x x...sPwms "en.,morose mPs,_.R.xax Pr�ssae aws,sro,RE—.xr c.ew.n �nn rME v ur smmsn ro smaeve. '"'"au�Rm x"n.assRw�s ca,x.,s - . EE DESIGN STD'S&CODES OF PRACTICE .cmwwa„n,.a sr<. o a."'.E osrnMn.nD ndamn x laaEmd. sxu�Er.wnatm ! / " smDcld,c msxdr.oR!„m rwwr ""Fl":„s: Re I € xo „�.mdw coos .n M,ssr "<n.'-�i AxD uxEss=ESE Iw=w ME darEat. ""ro•'"•c / Q f "fie:neEnaDI�R �P s nx.E x a-ro. ed,,,�swE a avxras ro wE AeaxME..0 earEat mn odd.wo \ o' ® aaca i:0.«.s:an�En s,naaams—E 1-1.cw max.mwm saa�roe saasa ca„dd. amwPw a e nx sme odsidcmn xxaa,rom EDnd.n,asssn sass o'EsoPo�o� R.x.ME Ears:" 'aa f`r M."�Pfl°"a"n""Esg"'*—1" STRUCTURAL STEEL NOTES Ere. E!alv.. sr. mxm mE JE a-deux dmn� Edo. Eamrxdr Ecaw s.s. smxMas smE. iw�asn eamnsn.aw„ 1e ME—MtX. s�ffs or—E Are ew.RE.s maws m d. Am dtcnEre.......... ...s.rA.nw.w„Aw awsm.and r..,ff x,ca»w„aE ww ME Acsm ssP. 1-1 mx. max .................' exam nr son mns.sand.Mms!dna„. ` m anon dw '"m. GENERAL NOTES �..coraRcls s,ws sxx.ss As Pa,c s. a n.smacroRm sisa dna.,a mnrsxnds stx.axPaw ro ME rsa rd a dxd e,<axcRmE........................... cox:a snwMxD PRmas mR smm Edeas.nD wasr. U ro a ax„xcs,d®om r. iclE Rrosn ro ss "w!.I�n dlw1..n ra.an: ,asa c �g.m... mn xc ea.„an sldc uwc aMxncs wn caa 31..x.."'•.a�.ie.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.�'.i '!o An a,ln sdw!'."'c"man".!O°o.;d's"a.srd r^ mmmr Ar.wwPnxm mMla„s cnm saaxxdan rR.cDm mR racxc",„mncxc sns RDwrs na„ ,""ixii.�co”,uis`'�c�°s�cM mfrs a.�'„olwf°sn„c src. III+o X W xm o nr a m wa. a a xaa mR,i..a dna„aRn �WS I. ., ouEna ...s _ ,",,,ER ro�.r]awERR un waan sexy mxEaw M V r .n n. ro ME .T- X-ss smn RE—11..sa caFORx M Asw nss.sPmnan ._xr.- rrPE x.ears� i.'awElm sxx.msdu ro.aru ax, n ., alae. o •.or! rx.O11.aan a!`sn">wms ari�c°.yd"e:H smrn"ran iEsnro.wSOE >r eaamn s l r mar m a us rm.mm, roan ro ran E MATERIALS """"'"'c^'m'"""$XO1F°' m„mMrd sws PemoE„easwn avow dexo:lei dmsan. E wrenru. mxcRErE asr.ssxsr.EmDsm ro EAnm.........]� % > CONCRETE: s.!.c axmalae s„x..asv.,s axdsae.mawlvts.nD sro conamw r.daxldm meam EAsrmERs!lM m F ro MRR A-wr,aunE A ears _ o .e.nE sdmw.ax mE smucronm dmrEEn E ..xmxmr a wnmm i„ '' .wD ems x!x.EnaD„.i„aas.uw„awo lxiram PASN„ds sw..es o s•nw.ar Nm aswsAxaEs. n xw Ad md,d................'.'.'.'.'. 'n' a:o arEr ran.amn dwmnaa ar gm„o.K,„.w�nD xe•ds ro �' Z8 OAY OOMPRES— mxcnEre w!Enamn ro dem an—ER an x cd!!nr nw awuro: eewwr wuems,rd roumxixr ennanc ro Eaul rz mexwx,xa mn � ...x..assaw cdmcrs anm�!„s wa.w Dmtdrs a•!„s n.r«inD sass, sws: .wc„avas r.c.nacis DR uAsornr.cdsmacnd. ITEM CMNOER SIREN.77RQ.PRKs adanrs Rn..Earcvww swu a awumrt ro ME.!land d ME ew enD swa[R ]�. sleanxtc dstmm.won swim wr emc®ume..saaion o and ar ME =EMs.anax„s ................ e.wnm mnsmand stx.amtraat ro Ans o-�.�.smacnx«_wtaw LL smucnax waxen. n .rts. Rn ......i iM• !amwwa nd Ans svxowD FlMnds Pwadnd. RE W M.i„ E IM 1 1 cdtlClE,u.n.a. Mp DP Ownwa. ro e¢FlMn.n9 fat inrawMKx ra!ro man er lrE9E w 1 xwuux roih` n o Mb Ps!c.nnaclE 5wu eE a..5. Svu OZP nE mu 511Flaln fF xdmi M1 ar ME nae.ME axemuc w sxui RE swP"mn<n ARD Flinn same u—Miro Z N RE sdm fwu'_sdmds d rcn�s d o w a Q STEEL: Mj, smrwm.Ems:nod Flm.mm sexE RE sE.0 vnnm Ix.mod ro m n ASTM DESIGNAPON mE Flxsrea smum,a m wr !re Dean naacnwx.xD vacwx a siaamrs c MINIMUM YIELD STRESS maaxm ” .mE smucluia dnxc xi meas a sx¢rd dd d DaxEdc siEn xo srvu O I1W REMARKS ary 5�EapMwmdns�=mkc9�xss�,=Q.o.wWR s” EL, BE]/.'uxwu MgwE55,uxA _0- Z L7 sa smao m,a 'r�m"".c"sP,"nE�roE�.Ddo ! • nmXONX..ni—E s ddfm dx,RE sass wma mnedsE eanaE w:`o"'�'"" rdx mm N a'a 2 W r.n.caP.wDas.sc ro eE x�nmax R/a!„adss,DnnA� 2;M8 O dy x mE atAxn.s Ei MW NE REINFORCING STEEL: eum.a Dwxnudr.mE m rows�rtEcdc.0 wesmunds mmud mE xsD rwrFss iew s`a Asw.nn atwE m ux D. -. Asw n m Moro nia net. GO 11 AIN rr�r z„D94A D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9Al2EEE-9A61-731287978640 2 3 s'-A- 4 s'-g3i§' 3 -°%" 0 o'-a55" J s-sYe" 8 r-a3/q" 9 a-s�" 10 -a'X e111012" r�� ,. �. ..... ......... J E I I I m FS m aQ a 4:5 V i— s J 15 es�q" 18 �DRa 2 x I 9 9_ 3• � � —�yII I 648 O 0. 11 12 13 14 15 O O 18 19 R 20 ' I 1 SECOND FLOOR PLAN +'s I I IIaM,I I. - PBG-880 r 10 442 D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A18EEE-9A61-731887978640 S3 A B D C C — ix a�xmc — reu�xc — u. rev.xc B,N„µ I IL � � ---J L-------- ---J L__----_1 L__------ „ I A EAST EXTERIOR ELEVATION scut sin-r-a• e rK € a E F F K G G arv�xc u. arenxc U I � u � r% II a Q a L_J o �II -- -- -- ------------ D D L o -- -- U � www - o v � E 177 i II U 11 EAST IXTERIOR ELEVATION �C1 SOUTH IXTERIOR ELEVATION �D1 WEST IXTERIOR ELEVATION KS vxr-�b 2 it O cma � ma� W n H J ° wzu�i W I f=� WI yr9 yap ��' ax8 i=8 o --- - - -------------------- -- - ----- - - ---------------- -- ---- -------------- --- - w �D1 WEST IXTERIOR ELEVATION s s :+nr_r-aI Ilei r HIM r- H PBG—�880 rr�r 2.7948 D...S,g,Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 IEI 11. S4 (nE�oEVEreiM IF�Ill vIreiM (nal lllreM IE W.1 i.-nu n I as �> — o P o P o P rhoE r � rtu7 suu xr"-i u7 �u7 U L1 �A1 ELEVATION _ ELEVATION _ �C1 EVATION EL �I� Q,W,� -"'I.00r � U l g i a c/1 (T�ao�u<re�m aao�u<re�m ��q O mx ...T IM...T wzu� W s aA amoo— W LLFu W O ins-suE' 4 4 1 Q eNaa v w0ILI W rho 7 4 'i� 4 I7I Iii, l„n, r \ ,., e �o�`""..`7 �.. sr +4"' s � stio � e � d .e x1, c Mm ry .11T1-1 IL -ao s; PBG- 880 �D,ELEVATION �E,ELEVATION �F�ELEVATION5. w^nn GlY PRCJECI g 20094A D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A18EEE-9A61-731887978640 S5 1.IEVEaiM [nEin�aiM vureE reooE vu*E reooE �'``� a a E E E 1 4 a E vn �9 as G ELEVATION H ELEVATION cue pro' pro'=r-a• In 2 U IE-1Erem� Pia.K FreFFI in m aQ a V 0 4 4 > E l�awae lsi°1uo iw� ls„°no i:"�°` U I I I � I E 4 i I Hill v I i e su. oNa Z m O a j N J ELEVATION K ELEVATION o :pro-�b �n-rb SON W "aRE W O ma'a x1. a d ,Hl r. tI �� irT02 oM.xIL.IT N Emv����.sµ�µ;�A�:... o PBG-880 rr�r 2.7948 D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 S6 yqa.. W A pv°we rxiOa�n�fOv"u e`_ II e�i•osc:s I Ii Ki v v i D �� -I�I'Ill wrpinm ix smi(rm.� �'�i i I � c swo ois� E SEC I? g a �11 STAIR LANDING PLAN STAIR FOUNDATION PLAN Ps so care 'm;Li, (w n wws mor. .ssmµo E-1,r-11 n �,nr iso tea*�mKx �lu ill a Q ff o x w ro xrnrus V w (rml �- 0 � E ca�rcrm n sN��� IIII- •u.� � �; U cuw ro sm c.c.w �EPe ADM F ryl M eon rea v/ wrwr m wrw.i m sn a�s(ne�ml smaa //maars(rw.l VwM fic[� ���•rcc� ry. B SSEEC,ION C SECTION D SEC,ION E SSEEC,ION� /r 7-�'b is (n J owa Z Q Q t- m6� aW p s 'o- Oyls wse a s¢e f aJ5' s� III "1 I. (6x$ ZU os rn.-I ca ss m� ^�x'•r� I tI 'u `.I,IIrl i¢ lW J2 ssn. v(x?ry�o�irvn[x 9 tsm kI ec Wort.exF.. 5` 3 TVP.BEAM CORNER DETAIL 4 BASE PLATE DETAIL 5 TVP.ANCHOR ROD DETAIL 6 TVP.EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL z PBG-88� ronan D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 S7 p-f STAIR FRAMING PLAN V 4:11 � E U ffsm ro xs^r b .°.i...vi�i x Boas c m _ s o� m6M LU �� b F— � �ar°'nm Rs�ii.ro oP. li s 8 i U) LL ® A STAIRSECTIGN ,•,i II iV.I I.,II',Nr iIV scut: rb' P8�i-88� v Vn I rc�%sron>A D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A18EEE-9A61-731887978640 S8 •Xe' L PE ami as BEAM TO BEAM SHEAR COLUMN TO BEAM �11 DETAIL CONNECTION DETAIL �31 CONNECTION DETAIL �41 DETAIL @ CAP PL In 2 U 4m aQ a WS o w w xwu V ti m• E > E �— U v. iim.�aa�.min 5 DETAIL 6 BRACE TO BEAM FLANGE DETAIL 7 BRACE TO COLUMN FLANGE DETAIL i a ti B mn� SYi mZu�i V) "a� O ti a_o W ma¢ x$ is d W cn �.1N Pa 1I s; I I, I ,I I i PBG—�880 rr�r 2.7948 D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 S9 a mwx°wx us�(�°srxv �>•�� �µ '� c " TYP NON-LOAD BEARING HEADER TYP NON-LOAD DEARING HEADER ncmm 3 FRAMING(>4'-0"OPENING) q FRAMINGs <4'-0"OPENING wv rrr..w�e <e � 1 (�°,i,•°v�,"wee°'°an,ium / � \ .cs. re.,.,,, .c. rm..n.., \" pg a msx.�eu, l u u mrt cuter m,r eeP U e eu (sl/i,zm'ns (sl/ix lacus 0 rn,rtxm,rxxnc cora,as�MP) ,°rrou mwr mvxs m aQ a lu o w w n. TYPICAL EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING DETAILrs ATWlNDOW TVP SILL FRAMING >4'-0"OPENING TVP SILL FRAMING 4 0 OPENING � rs rs rs U �°°sros�ir °m° xom. m°su°-m jroiaus./p) ro °v/OI ;I mrts)r rnmian°ur naani ar — Q . o 101— D sae�sara�n �rc mcw LL<� HORIZONTAL _ mrx (')�:° "c"s 10 BRACING(SCREWED) 12 PURLIN CONNECTION DETAIL =j '100.n s e°rrau .r.s. .r.s. �o�r�kumsacas ui t$ I� sro0 ,riu(mj V sru° cxisnro wnuro� i¢ W s� stu0 mOrxO, p1��1°sacs O � MXH ,iuo m*J ixmc max C � maw TYPICAL METAL STUD WALL TYPICAL METAL STUD WALL g& 7 CONNECTION L&CORNER g CONNECTION L&INTERSECTION g BOXED HEADER CONNECTION 11 DETAIL @SPLICE 13 PUCONNECTION DETAIL sRLIN PBC' 88P rs rs (su.a D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 k ORbt(QIIB SifFf MGRCf W.IfOOR HVAC KEYED NOTES: ° E Qw° � r.n, ®• �°Com" .o i® °i° mm , .z mnMOTZ TO _ km _ o a n HVAC FLOOR PLAN (SECTION 1) = u GENERAL NOTES: "scnF:i/e rl.m 01- n .v � Z _a G) r (Dd8c 2 .max U o oxo z¢o /z1 HVAC FLOOR PLAN (SECTION 2) d 141 a ,II;n I1•r.:al a sx� 27of 42 er7 P— PBG-880 N noR,H arc rwisrl�_ D...Sig,Envelope ID 6A9l F8AFE9AIAEEE-9A67-732A87978640 k ORbt(QIIB SifFf MGRCf W.IfOOR HVAC KEYED NOTES: O � �ae eayp ."� �= %°.a�, .oma°a<a°.°a.m.° �. Or a,,,.� w.r.�°.°�.a ° — °N�s E .v p,R— A = y °..�Pu� -..A�, O nu °� n HVAC FLOOR PLAN (SECTION 1) �..,. ,,.w °a ate , as p x 5 GENERAL°NOTES: U~' .° .21 T- .......u. . x 0 d U 3a'a 2 oxo n HVAC FLOOR PLAN (SECTION 2) ?a o r I I,rr = I^ I I: II I'it 1 ...E SHEQ 28 0l¢2 PBG-880 P- -T1 arc rwisrl�_ D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 comumn HVAC LEGEND AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE E a wxx O-m wxx MCRIpn<xxe 0., 1, ­ e ax. ux os�es °sern nu µX 0, vu� s oarrn, oamn .x�a/ xv 1r r ani i.°.i"a� ��:{"M57 ax, r.n xooa no ua oMO CM(0 a.) fun(sria[u[-.1zree zn °e im tt°/ x/e IMOA.A M/1 ras/eze ,r/1 9 " ® pp, Rm cw.-.x xaxr) ® r�,nn,a,�au"m.TO�.�"•.) 0 m(SIRI— ® IM/- 0 ­nx OR- }� x w%—.1.x s° nom. ,EE a soo�s�m'� r �nAIR"GOOLEDPGONDENSIN6 UNIT SCHEDULE ' a� a aaP ms)s WALL GAP SCHEDULE @¢ r�u° aaE,Px an)P"a:)ani` �"i.°ii.i uax�no. < mn°xDIR�noxs P°X x, e u.osr¢- -cro ou sA ,,A ,onA `\ oucr smnax- - n .. 1 $ ® oucr smnax- xxesr _ n•. smw"xmmcomn.rcn" o rw ixn inn.scar aan ixsnum oumoox,xuer a V~f T - oan w..eaen" 'm�.cr:o c ror oas.e uno. K y "i"wMonmP°i�uµsn�raEs xiv III Cu.wrtax "n unn'°�s is<wu un aer.na roxxroux ® Pµa aw a s on r. 0 nnrna s ..n sr .. °E WA� n".'r`n Ana r mux,gg �n°:"a o`r OR a On...`°'�o s " —M....E DEVICES SCHEDULE c � a, wm°x of . ams MINI-SPLIT CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE xxx o ©� .- BUB,0— arnxa P. w[ mn frt 0 _ _ —1 J. Puc " (mwwo)ex ms 0❑Q - ° oucr° y' - _ . or-scsnxe r° - Ct 6S` 1 70 HpH­ Fl-. �r/�mOR 0 r_"N n G 0 P.-mow.-➢°s`s -x u<Lr°a. " ® �'(ini a in vrc..c. a �IER smncm _ :Er."nen..n.v morn O - - R.,.."—1 e„nEson u z "TAT -uxn smncm uw u aawn envncm cane<onmo� "rµu,..way.r r nNaLru „, 0 _ I. _ n"".u.�.v n ..�nE J N a -uxx smncm ..n x w Wn<ooonn °xrx u Ho "".Pao —REM.F. 1. O ne". ® .".....z. M =e c w MINI-SPLIT FAN COIL UNIT SCHEDULE EXHAUST FAN SCHEDULE ® n"n•­Ie—1 �� v �» O TO TO d _ 0 _ aw ae uno. _ ,m/� OR-11. '^a• m¢s;.rn,um m NNOE aen°.mensnwrn"w"<°xe �".""1. ua�° " .e mo .n n ox o.r�= o� ro....—1 w smo TO e.o-« a sxFF 29 0(42 1...n—rKraa wm o as<omnc snrw.a c oa nam ao"nom a-_"CU. :`oE°" ""e a .o o.m a "a"o..n. Baa m uo r<COR " r aaxE M..nrn<.x°ux.s n eunnxom asr .o. ` r 6 R=HO ISumw. a Ctl1 rLOoo nor=oucr PECOPO DA.IYVG.N0. nn°aen �. ns n Has mac.r° MQ We IOIRT rzs'am�srl�_ D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 ue�u_muom: O —0 I °, � m fa°n. J a me xm,a n a WE�,e, s� .,—1 _ �J o onMETI==dae"" — _ ° n�ronaxenn�nm ;w"o /0 10E gm /1 CABLE ROUTING SCHEMATIC s Wim°*@ca, un n " SGIE:NONME E 0 ax°e rxo na 0 e'azaWi.!r°m wm""vaa Qpi xa aawalatormonnoxm ororear Nr arc ..�'e"o nonws.erxf —.1.m. fi Nnaazw°ueuemz'"a lian wanm m o a M. .ona os ze ne a' r�omw cn"m mweoanim. rooeacwwosoorwnie"wwc o" Nr oem os°oro amensmunowvmams xo m"n=azo a rmren ax .' < nr �a°.sl�aerok°0 cmnm oC ° REFRIGERANT PIPING REFRIGERANT PIPING <1 n EXTERIOR SUPPORT EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATION �/ aflFO_tl0II5:O .w U SCPff:NONE 5 SC E:NONE S Rg AHU CANVAS f �° tlP O�tl0�' n FLEX CONNECTION ' °11 ooxs:ns�cwZMWIZE -9 LJ SCPLE:NONE mvnx.�j'�sort-ort v ­gW11M Oi Su (1) Ort O ®o Cl m p:aon a"ron aaN� 0 ,a o MU,M Sr on,RR ° w n nn a � -0 ew, "° noo szx Onnl.no ns..rn 7 DUCT BRANCH TAKE-OFF V l / \ n evr;�snit 0 ny m SCAIE:NONE 333 rF `O PIPE HANGER rl INTERIOR SUPPORT O' s n E:N.E Opo ane ort o mno aro„. ' "°•-0 3 REFRIGERANT PIPING DIAGRAM eounm°mm Hover"m nm.rrnoha rare .xo>.°amnc 0 ca«"aanmwowz SCu.E:NONE n ry o Desaa�oocr naanon rm acts nsomnm a�m�n tom d� �� � A.��'a �ner'.s cw,"coa.n n. � 0«rx�am°aN�c'�c°""aalna"aK W'•= o siw a!n iacz vronn ,• s 2 Q RETURN AND EXHAUST x° c m"' s seu=oocr.a nwr.s rosea :<� w0 AIR DEVICE CONNECTION DETAIL ° r _ -- _ O°o� 999 5 ;O—NONE c r��w��mory ro un'n��ucr srvry cni.rv.P_ 0 mNmlan�ry ownvt nm�neiwa gaanxrt.o flux,me v N I O j 1 5 o"w arra O\ =C HI OE- - _ _ `!G MPnmm 16SFPrfN ! O Ex"�mfr O' O p o O 8 nano�a"n O u EXHAUST FAN DETAIL E SHEEP 30 0l 42 CONDENSATE DRAIN DETAIL 9 INTERIOR SUPPORT DIFFUSER TAIIL OFF g �� FLEXIBLE DUCT SUPPORT 0 scciE:NaNE scue:NONE I,� SCPLE.NONE PBG-880 8 SCUE:NONE Gpl ,1 — D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 ...w_,Nvu........... ...... ry axo3xax.an., ciwx„uoi+rxa rTuar„rxran.uc�� _ k4 AOFCf IfOOR Tr. nwPe urc rwr nea ` AIT x ry�.rvwn rve f<on a �Q a TPo_h or,arrE o � �L � a` r s��.r. urTuary 0 ay oX5 CONDENSATE ❑ V~ DRAIN LINE NOMENCLATURE } 7 V - /1 BOLLARD DETAIL noo rosmw.a NorNc..m%7 scan. L x .,x;.Nwo�..m a•..m P�.nx ass�e rn,T � �SGIf:NONE �R s E4 amn ro watt ^AHU INSTALLATION SCHEMATIC uuiu,.t. .. au.n�n r n oia,vuT.xw_E �/ SCN.E:NONE ° UgIl. u zw .. xvscsTm�°rEcm .�w�."w _ � �m a N. mIt w c ie<ouu[Nvmws xu onn�i/v Gruen s FMrwn rianM'am I. It u a JF� W x© 6 I III C:)LLF ,0 oxo 2 P. d qsMcAcaUfA:L DAMPER DETAIL N,�ErwEPn=aP.aM�.Tww,aNmxw..Ncosm��rynw°wan1�0re s` o S NONE a 9w 31 0l 42 PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL @ACCU PAD DETAIL a Wali,I�: atcneo uvnwxsra scu E:NONE sG�NI j I,LI P13G-880 O11'PIOBI/�_ D...Sign Envelope ID 6A9l F8A6-E9A]4EEE-9A6]-]31A8]9]8640 MrB.VN M NQf /RllCf IQ IfOOR � wq E urs c vmv 9P k �e 1 DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL PLAN SECTION 11 .rt a-b t is g N 'S _ H _ d. V © ® ® ® - ® do ©�mX�o g0�E� OV ro CD � o U 2 DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL PLAN SECTION 21 Z Ld �zN U W ,. 8 lyJj 3 DEMOLITION ELECTRICAL PLAN SECTION 31 - �,� I9eI I I i ac:nn4 2 B -880 /� D...Sign Envelope ID 6A9l F8AFE9A]4EEE-9A6]-]31A8]9]8640 �VAM NQf /RllCf IQ IfOOR ELECTRICAL LEGEND en oxscsrmr ecmm�:s.ms. �x —=° �xI P.°•�u°°"w .no v memax avr � I ������� �4zy�'°°���°� ars • ua.grin "' - d12 _ • mra,it rmvxurt axrrcnw � �' o..a smrm, �• ��° xx e „aaa•�.sa=a=mra� �e ®aar�+ m rew v mvmar a.recnox 1 POWER PLAN SECTION it nxzarrvsf s.a� ,p,cxcr�ox m..szm wn.� owr•::mxao� ® mawsmx amen eo. � � .rmzx moor N M, LJ a �. �2�POWER PLAN(SECTION 21 O Sma gda ....... A ........ S= II w6F r ct w sv 3aa p a 3 POWER PLAN SECTION 3 - '-ucllmd a stig 33 a 42 2 REzneo nx+�wc:nn . "�.. PBG-880 !llfff anx�rt� D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 � M�B.IAM$NQf I -� fl10.lCf IQ IfO01P GENERAL NOTE'. � � 1 LIGHTING PLAN SECTION 1 ,af as as .�E„,. _ _ - ,.� \ peeg f ^ O 41 sit e, .� -��. x,—... ..„... 2 LIGHTING PLAN SECTION 2 U +,,.s, ......_. , c cxr m4F S d 3 LIGHTING PLAN SECTION 3 �z� a= •tea 2 Axa UUMINAIREscrvuouLe zap 0 8 ra ISR i staT 34 a 42 2� xcmxo auYwcnn w ..... �mm PBG-880 D...S,g,Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 Y QMQlAMa$NQf - � MRlGf IQ IfW1[ Ua.,cUrvcEaru,.�rvrareMar Ury rnECUrvrPacrU".,nauaRUiUEmE.,r.,rE lE_N TUlETsTEinc,u ee - — ... _ all. 1 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN(SECTION 1) < e -1 pC N ❑ 00 V W FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SECTION 2 ..�., U O ® sxra ane - SYSTEM w ® .'bco;irniOl"n of mc. z s1 Z o mr ICM � - a��ce '•7'^ F- GENERAL NOTES. - mx u"u xwx me VU-N a anon rx=cDlxc rxK" _ x a 9 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SECTION 3 ° W �mc mm ,.C,s"w.ss.sxam e.Ms.sm�wn"..,"OrCxrsurnCl. - E."-� m cros vxm,"x=..r..�O waCCwC,a xv."m.s0 =M- FIRE ALARM (ROUGH-IN) FLOOR PLAN NOTES: THIS SHEET IS FOR CONTRACTOR BIDDING n 1 ME PURPOSES ONLY, NOT TO BE PERMITTED. n Csm. c OSsxn.xOr.E1m ear�nnn nnr�.,.sem axrwcrOx a� ,n s �mm S¢u 35 d 42 a -Yrnxc u.~eu Snrn.,••wn..n pis.m..mrw w....nu n< PERWD MHIN'G:MI. 11 2� ® Z PBG-880 II I rl II Ikl.;1'I'II '1 i F IaIY AQ@af� D...Sig,Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-732A87978640 3 [YIQIAI F/Qf IRIRT Nx IWO�[ ___-- EXISTING PANEL LEE., .. T raver as �am>s5®v re xI xYxIR�oxrurou�i/n (\ �38 GENERAL NOTES: cn.n n,�oxs Ew.uo Fncroa oMwmm.ui swnm Rws.vc lap ro rawx i $ GENERAL NOTES'. V7 't8 K H 11—ILL' NEW PANEL v �xs12 X 1 ONE LINE DIAGRAM U C7 ao ^a u c nrs oI ELECTRICAL LOAD ANALYSIS S%W W W LOAD DE.RPT- 277/480V 304W P J= — v 51 urvrrrz� ==� LLJ LL1 rra s r 3aa p 1 11 r Q .... ... -- „ — v _ — - -v,r -- TOTAL DEMAND LOAD: SPARE CAPA[iY o.a J urvi rvG E Pu in >si u6en11121 VI xumw vcicr n_xr.ru LLQ 1.11a11 ITOTgL SERVICE: sv r .oa SHEET 36 of 42 w I SEE riN I r�1 H PBG-880 Ah wolsE(-awk- D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 MGRCf W.IfOOR I t .14t�v I I � rr_LL i ,,rr, x�,x�I •. �$ R5 C) � wrt 9�i rE oar1x ,� ....,-,.„.,.v�....�. M..:m , �......:........ .. ....,,.,.. ...... .��...� ...:�, ..,..,. rr.. � rte..,..-«:.�..ro � �� .. € �a /1 SANITARY, DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT (SECTION 1) 1> � .47 y N �yT K 4 snx i, n•. sro r� U /1 SANITARY, DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT (SECTION 2) PLUMBING KEYED NOTES: �.�, �� �I �!dltm�l "� � •� ��VExr�.�x�xx�nw„xx�a rH..�xx =N z �_'ILJ 4I w ��` o Awa ., u, .... ror�„ r,2x xxa�rx x xr� .,.e SIX .Mo�r _gd� C ' r = � CY # p O` ar.� oxxnr or rx.xa.rFcr x�aa ro w -n i � p r nvu a vs�x�wur�m�o noa.rw..mwa wnrce or°ear vn�xsr nrx �+.4 � --' p rew9F x �. movµo-rn"M�x x.mr momrox el ar "a v _r d � GENERAL NOTES' t � `�` oxxxxxx�..TM xTMw,xrxes Flm.e.�,,.rwxa.x a Q @ SANITARY, DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT (SECTION 3) @ PLUMBING SILE DETAIL C0 E" °F"RK� NC ES rx��x E SHEEP 37 0l 42 aEcneo uvnWvrs w c u n1 Kira PBG-880 xox,x arc rwisrl�_ D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 MGRCf W.IfOOR g�aa 1011. PLUMBING KEYED NOTES: Ao IKQ mw�oE R,m�e"..m�u<o.r„�,.�.n""vw"wxwe ice ' 'vr• "/.'+ s GENERAL NOTES: H /1 DOMESTIC WATER PLAN (SECTION 1) _ .—,s"" �a°w`w�nnw�s s. i/. -i -a' V uxw.wcs warn." �1 €g oX5 V�o o ... .w ,../ 4 �I �ImC)/ ;. W• cr aN � j'¢ n DWATER PLAN (SECTION 2) z a v W sum:OMESTIC_' c O S I„II I� CI '.II IfI is^- a sx�r 38 01 42 2m /t\ � aEcneo uvnsv+cw oIN/) PBG-880 �.�,e D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 sw JIU /1 FIRESUPPRESSION PLAN (SECTION 1) r V €$a y. /1 FIRESUPPRESSION PLAN (SECTION 2) R IF 4 7 71 I ti o� O e ;d myt nFIRE SUPPRESSION PLAN (SECTION 3) cl J?m LLa� rn;ry J (n 11 LSI ',Ila I(";il!I G �/� •err �v_.Ex Itl I, -I% y'IIO /� 2¢V p 11I ( -L TEI.IIITEIIIIIITI.ILEEIE�.l�TIEITI rs xo vunnras air rt r rn a ��INII 11—IN—TE �\ a sxFF 39 0l 42 EXISTING TO REMAIN FIRE SPRINKLER RISER 2� /t\ afcneo uvnwr+cw .. scu.E:NOT TO scuE \t—!J) PBG-880 ""`°`" FOR REFERENCE ONLY u�rsmmsTHF IF o Hoar" cm'rwisrl�_ D...Sig,Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 PLUMBING SYMBOL LEGENDE NOTES AND DEFINITIONS PLUMBIN6 MATERIALS PLUMBIN6 FIXTURE SCHEDULE ��•� .m.. MOmow..a.:�E .a ..a ma.E,..rs.211 e ...... a.m ara..m 07 ra I...... ,.a.a. w�.a s.. �.ra.1 �..�sT.�amv.w�.s.m ca.a..ra E.�a. ...SEES, M.— 10.... .1 —M,.au.a.a..m..ma,�,�� __ w�,c..a ar...f..m c..a.,aa.� ......, °d -.w_�POP A`ru am" ` � `°R:. .%.., :�°.°: a°A."�n iµ.i..,°, s ..< SE OWE o carr TO me a.m. Mmilkm I= [II ». mzTOV cmm'W x°�''snu mHDaim' V= m.set mss•..,me sc.mau=a usm osuxa - - - ` ov. —SE ° aim. nam.oaea)...omen), w OP 1-1 ss.".s� _P. .... rmcrox S—rnra �:�,,,,a a.. .a. .m,..a.r°.,w.cxrmcm bvus�.sv..v'"". _.,..a . MSM K.TO mT.o mE �ttr �. a . "� \ ne �o ..a'.. ... .. . is emO.n.mFa ret "`r%w.°°a� r.`ur...nu� ° i .. .m,.amc..,...o or,.n ..r....nm ami n :,.•.um oww corn mO..00P rar MIT To.00rrlgNW 11 Elnm� s.a..r. r""'T.m.v... a EE—E _ •m ssr..sm...aLL.,.a nsvas.mpELECTRIC NL4TERpHEATER SGHEDULE .wrma a. a.mir...am...� um.ss *dP e s cwbnwo"'�o�irXOx°'or..Pwrerw y uiu3. n4 P.S.aax mC.twnax;..mnvrta.,xo.rvxve[ - _ _� ta" a smrxm V I. . . _. a . ®ok5 . �" ILIWEOPSPESR 'a"E a _EE.., a.�� gnwm a,m�� PP EXPANSION TANK PLUMBIN6 FIXTURE GONNEGTION SCHEDULE - M- 111T T— �•� PUMP SGHEDULE .nvret ,E ,n. 311 ,�,. S ry w ° ;d .. a SO i- MIn ,,M ,i.• ,i.• ,ir - n..,moo,me. i O mo — U z a � LLax PIPE r PLUMBING LOAD SUMMARY WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS u j .e s°.eme Cr M set m oras „w„ aa.smc.°r L- �:,, wnm.ev°,�nSm. .p U.rm —o ° Em _4 n ss. �s .. , m S TI sx�40 0l 42 Fa Fa aEcneo uuwxaw PBG-880 . arc rwisrl�_ D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9AI4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 omaxia"57fFf t.... - ._ c"r k4 MGRCf W.IfOOR I� 1111 11111 111= 1 IiI liI Ii� l �r n,.. sa, —III g. III sir—III VIII �� = I ISI I I a UTILITY SEPARATION SCHEMATIC 11111- 111 IF scu.E: NOT TO Stas III—III—j1 I- � 2—WAY YARD CLEANOUT 2 scu.c: rvor m sr•,� 4 RETRO—FIT FLOOR DRAIN SCHEMATIC `O scu.c: NOT TO scu.c PIPE TRENCH SCHEMATIC srs�: NOT TO scuF �N o...a.h.coc.uc.c coh�.cs. c er Ten = N WWI ..sE c.�s•.u.0 � i i � ®U�o Q' V " �yexi�ww m"rocrwt rE onax�rnox rmo nsr nuu a. V B THREADED ROD ATTACHMENTS FROM�CONRETE SLAB as scut: nor TO Stas \ — 1-12ED EEL EE-2— u_ SCJ w a OOR 8 YARD CLEANOUT DETAIL WATERCLOSET FLANGE s W 5 FLSLEEVE AT SLAB sca.E: NOT TO scu.c sca.E NOT To O Sem: NOT TOco <y Z TM mio Z Go ca° 2 �F �s a sxFFr 41 of 42 TYP. WALL PENETRATION DETAIL WALL CLEANOUT DETAIL / 1 WALL SLEEVE DETAIL B ROOF PENETRATION DETAIL 10 scu.E: rvor ro scu.c scu.E: rvor ro Stas ,I ;, cis. ry =nEe Sc rvor ro sum n I; — , II. D...Sign Envelope ID 6A91F8A6-E9A74EEE-9A67-731A87978640 k ORbt(QIIB SifFf F. OFF nrt smmr rcrxx xEvm xorts. 4 A[4FCf W.IfOOR Pw ncxxx runt mr�xo pp¢�¢ C9P Ay se � 9ox2aaxa: P�xxrr.Kwx� x W�x�su..w x b / D a o� 0-/ �o VENT THROUGH ROOF V 3 stns: NOT TO sCxs 01 PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL PIPE SIZE NOMENCLATURE SCN.E: x0i rzo SC<1E SCNF: rvor roFf SCN.E U �.o O 1-0 wnn nwum xeesron arxx mvm xorfs. ,. •:•-•..^-•• ��._� rcwxvrs O --co JON o Op � - T � � E �iT c FLOOR DRAIN SEALING TRAP PRIMER DETAIL WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR DETAIL ELECTRIC, WATER HEATER e 4 scut: NOT TO scut S Stas: NOT TO SC— 8Stas: rvor TO Stas � Suri: n<77D—LE 3 SWU 42 a 42 1 aEcneo uvnWv+cw I� r1N if,0,-i,N PBG-880 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 006113 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. 107584877 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Barcom Construction, Inc. Name: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 1146 Heinsohn Road One Tower Square Corpus Christi,Texas 78406 Hartford, CT 06183 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner One Tower Square Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Hartford,CT 06183 Mailing address (principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): Project No. 20094A 860-277-0111 O. N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filter Building Rehabilitation, Phase II Telephone(for notice of claim): 267-675-3000 Local Agent for Su rety Name: Southern American Insurance Agency, Inc. Award Date of the Contract: April 19,2022 Address: 13823 Schmidt Road Cypress,TX 77429 Contract Price: $2,093,770.00 Bond Telephone: 281-890-9294 Email Address: alm@southernamericanins.com Date of Bond: May 9, 2022 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll-free number.1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 006113-1 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filter Building Rehabilitation, Phase II Project No. 20094A 6/11/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Pr incipa Surety Signature: Signature: C4 . LAAA /t, Name: � � . f,: Name: C.A. McClure Title: ./pl��/1 v- Title: Attorney In Fact Email Address:,( %ate (11 rte+ Email Address: alm@southernamericanins.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 006113-2 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filter Building Rehabilitation, Phase II Project No. 20094A 6/11/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Travelers Casualty and Surety Company TRAVELERTRAVELERSJ St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the "Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make:constitute and appoint C.A.McClure of CYPRESS Texas , their true and lawful Attorney-in-Fact to sign, execute. seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed,and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed,this 17th day of January, 2019. d � x < Lol —'r 't State of Connecticut a City of Hartford ss. Robert L.Rane , enior Vice President Can this the 17th day of January, 2019, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,Iravelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of said Companies by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. y Ra�r's+`t My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2021 r a Anna P.Nowik,Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect.reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that eacri such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond, recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President: any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or(b)duly executed (under seal, if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,thatthe signature of each of the following officers;President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. 1, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul f=ire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 9th day of May, 2022, (10, y� Kevin E. Hughes,Assi tant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,please call as at 1-800-421-3880, Please refer to the above-named Attorney-in-Fact and the details of the bond to which this Power of Attorney is attached. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Travelers'j' IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: You may contact Travelers Casualty & Surety Company of America,Travelers Casualty & Surety Company, Travelers Indemnity Company, Standard Fire Insurance Company and/or Farmington Casualty Company for information or to make a complaint at: Travelers Bond Attn: Claims 1500 Market Street West Tower, Suite 2900 Philadelphia, PA 19102 (267) 675-3000 (267)675-3102 Fax You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain the information on companies,coverages, rights or complaints at: Texas Department of Insurance P.O. Box 1491.04 Austin,TX 75714-9104 (800) 252-3439 ATTACH TRIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND.This notice is [or information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253-021, Government Code, and Section 53.202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 107584877 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Barcom Construction, Inc. Name: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 1146 Heinsohn Road One Tower Square Corpus Christi,Texas 78406 Hartford, CT 06183 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner One Tower Square Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Hartford, CT 06183 Mailing address(principal place of business): Contracts and Procurement Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Connecticut Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone (main number): Proiect No.20094A 860-277-0111 0. N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filter Building Rehabilitation, Phase 11 Telephone (for notice of claim): 267-675-3000 Local Agent for Su rety Name: Southern American Insurance Agency, Inc. Award Date of the Contract: April 19,2022 Address: 13823 Schmidt Road Cypress,TX 77429 Contract Price: $2,093,770.00 Bond Telephone: 281-890-9294 Email Address: alm@southernamericanins.com Date of Bond: May 9, 2022 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filter Building Rehabilitation, Phase II Project No. 20094A 6/11/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Prin Surety ._ /o✓� Signatu �~'"' " Signature: Name: ,/ ir4;,� 5 Name: C.A. McClure Title: „legit ,M"t%'5 ek, Title: Attorney In Fact Email Address: /Y7) dJP�O c ttrbl 4 , c: Email Address: alm(cbsouthernamericanins.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 006116-2 0.N.Stevens Water Treatment Plant Filter Building Rehabilitation, Phase II Project No. 20094A 6/11/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 .... _.__..._......_._—_._.___.._.......-._._—-------...._...._,.__._........................_..__..._...._._._...,_._------._..................._._ -....__-—._._. ............._... �.___._._......... Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Travelers Casualty and Surety Company TRAVELERS � St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the "Companies').and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint C.A.McClure of CYPRESS Texas , their true and lawful Attorney-in-Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by taw. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed,and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed,this 17th day of January, 2419. �.y� S�ttj NA14`rrtk, '° 4Re State of Connecticut By: City of Hartford ss. Robert L.Rane , enior Vice President On this the 17th day of January, 2019, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney,who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, 'Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of said Companies by himself as a duly authorized officer. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 34th day of June.2421 t« �G/� Anna P.Nowik,Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows: RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President,the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any.Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seat bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and ether writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this =company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond, recognizance,contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond. recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President: any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or(b)duly executed (under seal, if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority;and it is FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seat shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached, I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 9th day of May, 2022, O KE"In�` Kevin E.Hughes,Assi tant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,please calf us at 1-800-421-3880. Please refer to the above-named Attorney-in-Fact and the details orthe bond to which this Power of Attorney is attached. DocuSign Envelope ID:6A91 F8A6-E9A7-4EEE-9A67-732A87978640 Travelers'j' IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE,A COMPLAINT: You may contact 'Travelers Casualty& Surety Company of America,Travelers Casualty & Surety Company, Travelers Indemnity Company, Standard Fire Insurance Company and/or Farmington Casualty Company for information or to make a complaint at: Travelers Bond Attn: Claims 1500 Market Street West Tower, Suite 2900 Philadelphia, PA 19102 (267) 675-3000 (267)675-3102 Fax You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain the information on companies,coverages, rights or complaints at: Texas Department of Insurance P.O. Box 1491.04 Austin,TX 7871.4-9104 (800) 252-3439 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND.This notice is for infonration only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253-021, Government Code, and Section 53,202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. DocuSign Certificate Of Completion Envelope Id:6A91F8A6E9A74EEE9A67732A87978640 Status: Completed Subject: Please Reapprove: Legistar 22-0490 Construction Project 20094A ONSWTP Filter Building Rehab Source Envelope: Document Pages:803 Signatures:4 Envelope Originator: Certificate Pages:6 Initials: 1 Lois Hinojosa AutoNav: Enabled 1201 Leopard St. Enveloped Stamping: Enabled Corpus Christi,TX 78401 Time Zone: (UTC-08:00)Pacific Time(US&Canada) loish@cctexas.com IP Address: 155.190.8.6 Record Tracking Status: Original Holder: Lois Hinojosa Location: DocuSign 5/31/2022 2:27:45 PM loish@cctexas.com Security Appliance Status:Connected Pool:StateLocal Storage Appliance Status: Connected Pool:City of Corpus Christi Location: DocuSign Signer Events Signature Timestamp Patrick Hoffmano s9 acy: Sent:5/31/2022 3:04:18 PM patrickh@barcomcc.com PAfh& R6(� Lt, Viewed:6/1/2022 4:42:25 AM Treasurer 1B7720DB6BA2A4EA... Signed:6/1/2022 4:42:51 AM Security Level: Email,Account Authentication (None) Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Signed by link sent to patrickh@barcomcc.com Using IP Address:97.105.4.218 Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted:6/1/2022 4:42:25 AM ID:a2afc91b-397c-4286-8e59-e279c2631a2c Holly Tyree Completed Sent:6/1/2022 4:43:22 AM HollyT@cctexas.com Viewed:6/1/2022 9:08:20 AM Security Level: Email,Account Authentication Signed:6/1/2022 9:08:31 AM (None) Signed by link sent to HollyT@cctexas.com Using IP Address: 155.190.8.4 Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted:6/1/2022 9:08:20 AM ID:83efcf65-c96d-4590-8dcd-5ba76a09dce9 Sherry Warren Completed Sent:6/1/2022 9:09:04 AM SherryW@cctexas.com Resent:6/6/2022 6:03:14 AM Security Level: Email,Account Authentication Resent:6/6/2022 7:01:06 AM (None) Signed by link sent to SherryW@cctexas.com Resent:6/7/2022 2:31:25 PM Using IP Address: 155.190.8.5 Resent:6/7/2022 3:49:21 PM Resent:6/8/2022 6:12:53 AM Viewed:6/8/2022 6:33:27 AM Signed:6/8/2022 6:33:33 AM Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted: 12/29/2020 10:50:20 AM ID:3255e2ca-b4c2-443b-a425-bfe78403e463 Signer Events Signature Timestamp Kent Mcllyar ° s9 aby: Sent:6/8/2022 6:34:04 AM KentMc@cctexas.com ke'``y MAI, Resent:6/8/2022 2:37:06 PM Y Securit Level: Email Account Authentication ESE9295FccoEB4Ec... Resent:6/8/2022 2:43:47 PM (None) Resent:6/9/2022 10:14:42 AM Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Viewed:6/9/2022 11:34:47 AM Signed by link sent to KentMc@cctexas.com Signed:6/9/2022 11:35:22 AM Using IP Address: 155.190.8.4 Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted:7/9/2020 2:34:38 PM ID:e91f7aea-d495-4259-8818-8bcd68aba4c2 Jeffrey Edmonds �BIFI'ICEY14M Sent:6/9/2022 11:35:55 AM jeffreye@cctexas.com Viewed:6/9/2022 11:37:36 AM Security Level: Email,Account Authentication ... Signed:6/9/2022 11:38:09 AM (None) Signature Adoption: Uploaded Signature Image Signed by link sent to jeffreye@cctexas.com Using IP Address: 155.190.8.5 Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Accepted:6/9/2022 11:37:36 AM ID:65e93987-79d2-4c61-a4fd-d32304316a6f RH/AB DS Sent:6/9/2022 11:38:41 AM citysecretary@cctexas.com Resent:6/9/2022 2:07:17 PM 06-24-2020 Resent:6/13/2022 8:19:49 AM City of Corpus Christi Viewed:6/13/2022 9:09:46 AM Signature Adoption: Pre-selected Style Security Level: Email,Account Authentication Signed:6/13/2022 9:10:41 AM (None) Signed by link sent to citysecretary@cctexas.com Using IP Address:64.201.138.246 Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure: Not Offered via DocuSign Rebecca Huerta by: Sent:6/13/2022 9:11:13 AM RebeccaH@cctexas.com E�D­Signed �e'L_4�? Notary Events Signature Timestamp Envelope Summary Events Status Timestamps Envelope Sent Hashed/Encrypted 5/31/2022 3:04:18 PM Certified Delivered Security Checked 6/13/2022 11:04:43 AM Signing Complete Security Checked 6/13/2022 11:05:01 AM Completed Security Checked 6/13/2022 11:05:01 AM Payment Events Status Timestamps Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure created on:3/25/2020 6:08:58 PM Parties agreed to: Patrick Hoffman, Holly Tyree, Sherry Warren, Kent Mcllyar,Jeffrey Edmonds ELECTRONIC RECORD AND SIGNATURE DISCLOSURE From time to time, Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi (we, us or Company) may be required by law to provide to you certain written notices or disclosures. Described below are the terms and conditions for providing to you such notices and disclosures electronically through the DocuSign system. Please read the information below carefully and thoroughly, and if you can access this information electronically to your satisfaction and agree to this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure (ERSD),please confirm your agreement by selecting the check-box next to `I agree to use electronic records and signatures' before clicking `CONTINUE' within the DocuSign system. Getting paper copies At any time, you may request from us a paper copy of any record provided or made available electronically to you by us. You will have the ability to download and print documents we send to you through the DocuSign system during and immediately after the signing session and, if you elect to create a DocuSign account, you may access the documents for a limited period of time (usually 30 days) after such documents are first sent to you. After such time, if you wish for us to send you paper copies of any such documents from our office to you, you will be charged a $0.00 per-page fee. You may request delivery of such paper copies from us by following the procedure described below. Withdrawing your consent If you decide to receive notices and disclosures from us electronically, you may at any time change your mind and tell us that thereafter you want to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format. How you must inform us of your decision to receive future notices and disclosure in paper format and withdraw your consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically is described below. Consequences of changing your mind If you elect to receive required notices and disclosures only in paper format, it will slow the speed at which we can complete certain steps in transactions with you and delivering services to you because we will need first to send the required notices or disclosures to you in paper format, and then wait until we receive back from you your acknowledgment of your receipt of such paper notices or disclosures. Further, you will no longer be able to use the DocuSign system to receive required notices and consents electronically from us or to sign electronically documents from us. All notices and disclosures will be sent to you electronically Unless you tell us otherwise in accordance with the procedures described herein, we will provide electronically to you through the DocuSign system all required notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you during the course of our relationship with you. To reduce the chance of you inadvertently not receiving any notice or disclosure, we prefer to provide all of the required notices and disclosures to you by the same method and to the same address that you have given us. Thus, you can receive all the disclosures and notices electronically or in paper format through the paper mail delivery system. If you do not agree with this process,please let us know as described below. Please also see the paragraph immediately above that describes the consequences of your electing not to receive delivery of the notices and disclosures electronically from us. How to contact Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi: You may contact us to let us know of your changes as to how we may contact you electronically, to request paper copies of certain information from us, and to withdraw your prior consent to receive notices and disclosures electronically as follows: To contact us by email send messages to: holly@cctexas.com To advise Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi of your new email address To let us know of a change in your email address where we should send notices and disclosures electronically to you, you must send an email message to us at holly@cctexas.com and in the body of such request you must state: your previous email address, your new email address. We do not require any other information from you to change your email address. If you created a DocuSign account, you may update it with your new email address through your account preferences. To request paper copies from Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi To request delivery from us of paper copies of the notices and disclosures previously provided by us to you electronically, you must send us an email to holly@cctexas.com and in the body of such request you must state your email address, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We will bill you for any fees at that time, if any. To withdraw your consent with Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi To inform us that you no longer wish to receive future notices and disclosures in electronic format you may: i. decline to sign a document from within your signing session, and on the subsequent page, select the check-box indicating you wish to withdraw your consent, or you may; ii. send us an email to holly@cctexas.com and in the body of such request you must state your email, full name, mailing address, and telephone number. We do not need any other information from you to withdraw consent.. The consequences of your withdrawing consent for online documents will be that transactions may take a longer time to process.. Required hardware and software The minimum system requirements for using the DocuSign system may change over time. The current system requirements are found here: hllps:Hsupport.docusign.com/guides/siglier-guide- si gnin g-system-requirements. Acknowledging your access and consent to receive and sign documents electronically To confirm to us that you can access this information electronically, which will be similar to other electronic notices and disclosures that we will provide to you,please confirm that you have read this ERSD, and(i)that you are able to print on paper or electronically save this ERSD for your future reference and access; or(ii)that you are able to email this ERSD to an email address where you will be able to print on paper or save it for your future reference and access. Further, if you consent to receiving notices and disclosures exclusively in electronic format as described herein, then select the check-box next to `I agree to use electronic records and signatures' before clicking `CONTINUE' within the DocuSign system. By selecting the check-box next to `I agree to use electronic records and signatures', you confirm that: • You can access and read this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure; and • You can print on paper this Electronic Record and Signature Disclosure, or save or send this Electronic Record and Disclosure to a location where you can print it, for future reference and access; and • Until or unless you notify Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi as described above, you consent to receive exclusively through electronic means all notices, disclosures, authorizations, acknowledgements, and other documents that are required to be provided or made available to you by Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi during the course of your relationship with Carahsoft OBO City of Corpus Christi.